VOL. 112,

PARTS 1 & 2

31 MAY, 1988

Contents

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Limpus, C. J., Gyuris, E. & Miller, J. D. Reassessment of the taxanomic status of the

sea turtle genus Natator McCulloch, 1908, with a redescription of the

genus and species- - - - - - - - - -

Wellman, P. & Greenhalgh, S, A. Flinders/Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia; their

uplift, erosion and relationship to crustal structure - - - -

Lee, D. C. & Pajak, G. A. Setobates (Acarida: Gevpipbiiemata: Se from

South Australian soils - - a % :

Shea, G. M. & Johnston, G. R. A new species of Notaden (Anura: eee from

the Kimberley Division of Western Australia - - - =

Womersley, H. B. & Johansen, H. W. The genus Arthrocardia (Corallinaceae: ee

in southern Australia - - - - - - -

Murray-Wallace, C. V., Kimber, R. W. L., Gostin, V. A. & Belperio, A. P. Amino acid

racemisation dating of the “Older Pleistocene marine beds”, Redcliff,

northern Spencer Gulf, South Australia -

Beveridge, I. & Spratt, D. M. A redescription of Filarinema dissimile (Wood, 1931), with

new records of other species of Filarinema Moennig, 1929 (Nematoda:

Trichostrongyloidea) from macropodid marsupials - - - -

Berry, R. F. & Flint, R. B. Magmatic banding within Proterozoic Granodiorite dykes near

Streaky Bay, South Australia - - - - - - - -

Bayliss, D. E. A new intertidal barnacle of the genus El/minius (Cirripedia: Thoracica)

from South Australia - - - - - - - - -

Gowlett-Holmes, K. L. & McHenry, B. J. A new species of Tertiary chiton (Mollusca:

Polyplacophora: Acanthochitonidae) from South Australia - -

MO as G. J. & Shepherd, S. A. The crab fauna of West Island, South Australia: their

abundance, diet and role as predators of abalone - 5 - -

Brief Communications:

Davies, M. & Martin, A. A. Redefinition of Uperoleia talpa Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

(Anura: Leptodactylidae: Myobatrachinae) - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. Neobatrachus pictus (Anura: Leptodactylidae) from the Miocene/Pliocene

boundary of South Australia - - - - - - - -

Shepherd, S. A., Mower, A. G. J. & Hill, K. Studies of southern Australian abalone

(genus Haliotis) 1X. Growth of H. scalaris - - - - -

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 112, PART 1

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INC

CONTENTS, VOL. 112, 1988

PARTS | & 2, 31 May

Limpus, C. J., Gyuris, E. & Miller, J. D. Reassessment of the taxanomic status of the

sea turtle genus Nataror McCulloch, 1908, with a redescription of the

genus and species- - - - - - - - - -

Wellman, P. & Greenhalgh, S. A. Flinders/Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia; their

uplift, erosion and relationship to crustal structure - - - -

Lee, D. C. & Pajak, G. A. Setobates (Acarida: Soy eESE Saiiclebatitre from

South Australian soils - - - - - -

Shea, G. M. & Johnston, G. R. A new species of Notaden (Anura: voi bli fl from

the Kimberley Division of Western Australia - - - -

Womersley, H. B. & Johansen, H. W, The genus Arthrocardia iL li Rp pdoe tht

in southern Australia - - - - -

Murray-Wallace, C. V., Kimber, R. W. L., Gostin, V. A. & Belperio, A. P. Amino acid

racemisation dating of the “Older Pleistocene marine beds”, Redcliff,

northern Spencer Gulf, South Australia -

Beveridge, I. & Spratt, D. M. A redescription of Filarinema dissimile (Wood, 1931), with

new records of other species of Filarinema Moennig, 1929 (Nematoda:

Trichostrongyloidea) from macropodid marsupials - - - -

Berry, R. F. & Flint, R. B. Magmati¢c banding within Proterozoic Granodiorite dykes near

Streaky Bay, South Australia - - . - - - - -

Bayliss, D. E. A new intertidal barnacle of the genus E/minius (Cirripedia: Thoracica)

from South Australia - - - - - - - ~ -

Gowlett-Holmes, K. L. & McHenry, B. J. A new species of Tertiary chiton (Mollusca:

Polyplacophora: Acanthochitonidae) from South Australia - -

Mower, A. G, J. & Shepherd, S. A. The crab fauna of West Island, South Australia: their

abundance, diet and role as predators of abalone - - - -

Brief Communications:

Davies, M. & Martin, A. A. Redefinition of Uperoleia talpa Tyler, Davies & Martin, 1981

(Anura: Leptodactylidae: Myobatrachinae) - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. Neobatrachus pictus (Anura: Leptodactylidae) from the Miocene/ Pliocene

boundary of South Australia - - - - - - - -

Shepherd, S. A., Mower, A. G. J. & Hill, K. Studies of southern Australian abalone

(genus Haliotis) 1X. Growth of H. scalaris - - - - -

PARTS 3 & 4, 30 November

Sergeev, V. N., Clarke, S. M. & Shepherd, 8. A. Motile macroepifauna of the seagrasses,

Amphibolis and Posidonia, and unvegetated sandy substrata in

Holdfast Bay, South Australia - - - = - - =

Rondonuwu, S. A. & Austin, A. D. A new species of Uracanthus (Coleoptera:

Cerambycidae); A pest on ornamental cypresses in the Adelaide

Region - - - - -

Koste, W., Shiel, R. J. & Tan, L. W. New Rotifers (Rotifera) score Fonda - . :

Barker, S. Contributions to the Taxonomy of Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera:

Buprestidae) - - - - - - - - - - =

Hutchinson, M. N, & Donnelan, S, C. A new species of scincid lizard related to Leiolopisma

entrecaSteauxii, from southeastern Australia - - - - -

Campbell, R. A. & Beveridge, I. Mustelicola antarcticus sp. nov. (Cestoda:

Trypanorhyncha) from Australian elasmobranchs, and a reassessment

of the Family Mustelicolidae Dollfus, 1969 - - - - >

Gardner, J. A. Chromosome numbers and karyotypes of some Australian Stigmoderini

(Coleoptera: Buprestidae) - - - - - - - -

Gowlett-Holmes, K. L. A new species of Nofoplax (Mollusca: Polyplacophora:

Acanthochitonidae), from New South Wales, Australia - - $

Brief Communications:

Neverauskas, V. P, Accumulation of periphyton on artificial substrata near sewage sludge

outfalls at Glenelg and Port Adelaide, South Australia- - - -

Stott, P. Use of growth rings to determine age in the freshwater tortoise Chelodina

longicollis: a cautionary note - - - - - - - -

Zeidler, W. The European Shore Crab, Carcinus maenas in the Coorong — A potential

threat to local fisheries - - - - - - - - -

Insert ta Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, Vol. 112, Parts 3 & 4, 30 November, 1988

109

119

133

143

153

163

169

175

179

REASSESSMENT OF THE TAXONOMIC STATUS OF THE SEA TURTLE

GENUS NATATOR MCCULLOCH, 1908, WITH A REDESCRIPTION OF

THE GENUS AND SPECIES

BY COLIN J. LIMPUS*, EMMA GYURIS} & JEFFERY D. MILLERt

Summary

The taxonomic status of the flatback turtle Chelonia depressa is reconsidered in terms of

electrophoretic and osteological data. While both kinds of data show greatest affinity with

Lepidochelys, the similarity, in each case, is comparable to that between Caretta and Eretmochelys.

C. depressa is dissimilar from Chelonia mydas. Because of its distinctiveness, the genus Natator is

resurrected to accommodate the species depressa.

KEY WORDS: Taxonomy, Natator, Chelonia depressa, osteology, electrophoresis.

REASSESSMENT OF 1HE SAXONOMIC STATUS OF THE SEA TURTLE GENUS

NATATOR McCULLOCH, 1908, WITH A REDESCRIPTION OF

THE GENUS AND SPECIES

By Coun J. Limpus*, EMMA Gyurist & JEFFREY D, MILLERT

Summary

Limpus, C.J, Gyuris, BH. & MILLER, J, 2, (1988) Reassessment of the taxanomic status of tho sea vurile

geuws Nefefor MeCulloch, 1908, with » redescription of the genus and species. Trans, A. Sac. A. Ale

11261), 1-5, 34 May 198s,

The taxonomic status of the Matback hutle CAe/onia depressa is reconsidered im verms of electrophoretic

and osteological data. While both kinds of data show greatest affily wih Lepidochelys, the similarity,

in-cach case, 16 comparable to that between Caretta and Ereimochelys. C. depressa is dissimilar fram Chelona

mydas. Beeause of its distinctiveness, the genus Natatur is resurrected to accommodate the species depress.

Kay Worbs: Laxonomy, Nelutor, Chelonia depressu, osteology, electrophoresis,

Introduction

The taxonomic relationship of sea turtles

(Cheloniidae and Dermochelyidae) hus been

examined using serological and serum

electrophoretic methods (Frair 1979, 1982), Zangerl

{{980) proposed a phylogeny for the Cheloniidac

based on fossil and extant skeletal material, The

Australian endemic sea turtle, Chelania depressa,

was not included in these studies. The earliest

account of the species was supplied by Stokes (1846)

wher visiting Delambre Island (what we now know

to be a large C depressa rookery in Western

Australia) on 27 August 1840: “A few turtles were

taken, of a different kind from any we had seen

belore and apparently a cross between the Hawk's

Bill and the Green Turtle . -” The species was

described by Garman in 1880 and its taxonomic

status has been reviewed ot several occasions.

Boulenger (1889) placed C, depresse in synonomy

with C. maydas while Baur (1890) considered

depressa warranted separale ygenenc ranking,

McCulloch (1908) erected a new genus and species

(Natator tesselarus) for an inimature specimen

which Fry (1913) showed was identical with

depressa, Fry retained depressa and mydas as

scparate species within Chelonia, Barbour (1914)

showed Garman'’s (880 type serics to be a composite

of mypdas and depressa. Loveridge (1934) thought

it “more probable that the type of dépressa is an

aberrent individual which should be referred to the

synonomy of mpdes", As noled by Cogger &

Lindner (1969), many workers outside Australia

listed depresse as conspecific with Chelonia mydas,

* Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service,

Pallarenda, Townsville, Qld 4810. -

{ Zoology Department, Monash Universiry, Clayton, Vie,

3168.

y Department of Zoology, University of New England.

Armidale, N.SW, 2351,

Within Australia, denressa was usually recognised

as not part of Chefanio mydas (Glaucrt, 1928),

although a correct identification was not always

made (e.g. Chelonia japonica, Worrell 1963, photo

of “young loggerhead turtles”, Ellis 1937). Williams

et al. (1967) suggested that Chelonia depressa was

morphologically so distinct from other Chelonia

populations that it may be regarded tentatively as

4 species. The same study, like those before it,

suffered from having a small series of preserved

muscum specimens available for examination.

Cogger & Lindner (1969) and Bustard & Limpus

(1969), reporting on sympatric nesting by C

depressa and C. mydas, established C. depressa as

distinct. Cogger ef af. (1983) clarified the

designation of a lectotype,

The present study examines the relationships of

Chelonia depressa to four pantropical species of

cheloniid turtles which oceur in Australia (Caretta

caretta, Chelonia mydas, Eretmoachelys imbricata

and Lepidechelys olivacea) using enzyme

electrophoresis .and skull osteology. The results of

these analyses, supplemented by examination uf

general morphological and behavioural characters.

lead to the re-establishment of the genus Nataror

and confirmation of the species depressa.

Materials und Methods

Electraphoresis: Muscle (issues for analysis were

collected from eastern Australian turtles as follows,

Hatchlings were frozen at —20°C in a domesti¢

freezer for return to the laboratory where samples

of the pectoral muscle were removed for analysis.

Muscle biopsies. from the triceps brachii and

brachialis inferior muscles of large Jurtles were

taken at their point of capture using “Tru-cut"

(Travenol Laboratories) biopsy needles (Ciyuris &

Limpus 1986). Hatchling Che/onia depressa (n=

10) were colleeied at Mon Repos {24"48'5,

2 C. J. LIMPUS, BE. GYURIS & J. D. MILLER

Tasce 1, Enzymes examined.

Protein Abbreviation Buffer Vohage Time Stain reference

(EC number] syslem* (min)

Creatine kinase CK ¥ 250 120 Richardson [9s

(EC 2.7.3.2)

Fumerase Fim \ 250 ag Richardson eta 1980

(EC 4,2,1.2)

Glucose phasphate GPI v 300 90 Richardson ef a/, 1980

isomerase (EC 5.3.1.9)

Glycetol-3-phosphate G-2-FDH ' 250 60 Richardson ef. ai. 1980

ilehydrogenase (EC 1,1.1.8)

Lactate dehydrogenase LDH vy) 250 40 Richardson ef af. 1980

(BC {.1.1.27)

Malate dehydrogenase MDH- ly 250 60 Richardson ef al. 1980

(BC 1,1.1.37)

Malate dehydrogenase MDH-2 iv 250 60 Richardson ¢/ af, 1980

Phosphoglucomuiase PGM i 250 60 Richardson ev al. 198)

{EC 2.7,5,1)

Phosphoglycerakinase PGK iii 250 120 Richardsan 1983

(EC. 2,7.2.3)

Pyruvate kinase PK ii 250 il) Richardson 1983

{EC 2,7,1,40)

* Buller systems: | 0.05 M Tris-citrate, pH 7.1; i 0.05 M Tris-maleate, pH 8.0) ili 0,05 M Tris-citrale, pH 4.8 (+ |

mM EDTA); iv 1.05 M Tris-citrate, pH 7.0; v 0.05 M Tris-maleate, pH 8,2; vi 0.1 M Tris-maleate, pH 6,5.

152°27'E), Adult and hatchling C. smydas(n = 206)

were collected at Heron Island (23°26'S, 151°55'E)

and adjacent reefs. Adult and hatchling Coretta

careltu(n = 506) were collected at Mon Repos and

adjacent mainland beaches and from Heron Island

and adjavent reefs and islands: Immature £&.

imbricata (n = 16) were captured on the coral reef's

adjacent to Heron Island, L. olivacea(n = 2) were

captured at inshore feeding grounds off Cairns

(16"55'S, 145°47'E) and Townsville (19°17'S,

146°20'E), All specimens were frozen immediately

following collection, transporied and stored at

—20°C. Approximately 10-30 mg.subsamples of the

muscle samples were placed in a perspex multi-well

tray and 75-100 microlitres of homogenising

solution (0.2 mM Cleland’s reagent in distilled

water) was added to each specimen, Tissucs were

macerated by grinding within each well.

Homogenates were centrifuged in capillary tubes

(microhacmatocrit tubes, Clay-Adams). Clear

supernatants were obtained after breaking away

those sections of the capillary tubes containing

fibrous material at one end and lipid layer at the

other. Individual supernatants were stored in wells

of microtiter trays maintained at 0-4°C. All

electrophoresis was completed within 48 hr of

thawing of the muscle tissues.

Zone electrophoresis was run using cellulose

acetate gel supporting medium (“cellogel”,

Chemat(ron). Constant voltage was delivered to

electrophoretic tanks (Shandon Southern) via

Pharmacia EPS 500/400 power supplies. Paper

wicks of 0.33 mm thickness (Whaiman (‘hroma-

tography paper) were used to ensure an even buffer

front. Gels were pretreated prior to sample

application according to manufacturer’s

recommendations. Samples were loaded onto the

gels using a draftsmgn’s ink pen. Enzymes studied

are listed together with their optimum running

conditions and staining methods in Table 1. Enzyme

nomenclature used throughout is that recom-

mended by the Commission on Biochemical

Nomenclature. (1972). Where several isozymes were

detected, they were numbered in order of decreasing

electraphoretic mobility. Initially a subsample of

approximately 60 specimens was screened for allo-

zyme variation in both Chelonia mydas and Caretta

caretia. Only loci that were found to be poly-

morphic were then screened in every specimen of

ihe species. All depressa, E. imbricata and L.

olivacea were examined for 19, 15 and 12 enzyme

systems respectively, Nei’s genetic distances (D) and

their corresponding standard errots were calculated

(Nej 1978), A dendrogram was constructed using the

SEA TURTLE GENUS NATATOR 3

TABLE 2. Comparison of selected osteological characters of the skulls of the members of the Cheloniidae.

Species Chelonia Natator Lepidochelys Eretmochelys Caretta

mydas depressa alivacea imbricata caretia

(sample size) (26) (8) (3) (10) (13)

external pterygaid process nil large large vertical vertical

horizontal horizontal

plerygoid muscle groove large slight slight nil nil

distinct

pterygoid extends posteriorly

beyond the opening of the

foramen posterius canalis

carotici interni yes no na na no

maxillary lingual ridge present present nil present nil

prefrontal and postorbital do not

meet (frontal forms part of the

orbit) yes no no yes no

fenestra ovalis divided by a

septum, or nearly so no yes no no yes

development of tuberculae . ‘

basioccipital low prominant low medium low

number of channels of posterior

of squamosal 2 1 2 2 1

shape of posterior margin of ;

basisphenoid shelf vertical vertical vertical vertical

wail wall wall wall

Vagus X enclosed or partly

enclosed by exoccipital no ves no no no

Vomer contacts. premaxillary yes yes yes yes no

descending process of the

prefrontal connects with the

palatine yes no no no no

pterygoid meets jugal yes yes no no no

unweighed pair-group arithmetic average cluster

analysis (UPGMA) method (Ferguson, 1980),

Skull Osteology: Skulls of each species of turtle

were examined for a suite of morphological

characters (Table 2), Terminology and definitions

follow Gaffney (1979). Skeletal material examined

included specimens gathered during field studies by

the Queensland National Parks and Wildlife Service

(QNPWS) and specimens held in the collections of

the Queensland Museum, Brisbané (QM),

Australian Muscum, Sydney (AM) and Museum of

Comparative Zoology, Harvard (MCZ) as follows:

AM R28486, female, Port Essington, 27 March

1967. QM J3848, Queensland, collected pre 1923;

J4058, Mackay, collected pre April 1924. ONPWS:

X28144, unsexed adult, Cape Hillsborough, 1982;

%33703, adult female, Facing Island, January 1970;

X33704, adult female, Peak Island, December 1981.

Two unnumbered hatchlings from Mon Repos,

January 1982. MCZ4473 (Lectotype), “Northern

Australia”. A detailed description of the osteology

of depressa is in preparation (J. Hendrickson pers.

comm,),

Supplementary Information: Photographs of the

specimens of Garman's (1880) type series in the

Muscum of Comparative Zoology (MCZ), Boston,

were examined, Information and data on the general!

biology, behaviour and external morphology of

adults and their eggs and hatchlings were extracted

c. J. LIMPUs, k. GYURIS & J. D MILLER

TABLE 3. Similarity wiatrix of Nei’s genetic identity values.

Natatar Lepidochelys Caretta Fretinachelys

depressa oltvacea caretty imbricata

Chefonie mydas 0.52 (0.38) 0.70 (0.40) tat (0.43) 6.70 (0.40)

Natator depressa 0.22 (0.35) 56 (0.58) H.36 (0,37)

Lepidochelyps olivaced 0.76 (0.40) 0.31 (0.38)

Caretla curetla 0.40 (0,36)

C. earetha

£. (hbrivata

N. depresse

L,alyaced

Cc. myidas

Cienetic identity

Fig, 1. Dendrograim of cheloniid turtle retationships based oat electrophoretic data (Table 3),

from the literature: Coburg Peninsula and other

areas of the Northern Territory (Fry 1913; Cogger

& Lindner 1969); Crab Istand (Limpus ef a/. 1983);

south east Queensland (Limpus 1971, Limpus et ai.

1981),

Results

Electrophoresis

A survey of 27 presumptive loci, coding for

protcin products ity Chelonia mydus and Caretta

cdrella revealed low levels af genetic variation

(Gyuris & Limpus 1988). Paucity of electrophoretic

variation also characterised depressa and E£,

imbricata, Ten loci could be used without ambiguity

from the five species of Sea turtles examined

(Table 1) and the results are summarised in Table

3 and Fig. 1. The greatest similarity was found

between depressa and L. olivacea. Similarity

between depressa and Chelonia nivdas was less than

that between Caret/a caretia and E. imbricata.

Skull osteology

Gaffney (1979) provides an annotated review of

the primary literature concerning the skulls of

marine turtles and presents illustrations of all

tecognised cheloniid species except depressa. Hay

(1908), Kesteven (1911), and Carr (1952) provide

additional illustrations. Fry (1913) described some

aspects Of rhe cranial osieology of dépressa based

on observations of 4 single immature skull and

provided .a comparison of specific features of the

skulls of depressa and mydas based on | and 7

specimens respectively, Those notes are re-presented

with new information in Table 4, The descripuon

and illustration of the pterygoid of depressa piven

by Fry (1913, Fig. 49F) are incorrect because the

external pterygoid processes were omitted. The

correct position and shape of the external pterygoid

process arc illustrated in Fig. 2A. The external

pterygoid process projects laterally from the

pterygoid and terminates with a slight twist with

an upward inflection and is characteristic of all

depressa skulls examined, The skull from which Fry

prepared his description (Fry 1913) (specimen No. 7)

cannot be located for te-examination (H. G. Cogger

pers. comm.). The reason for the omission cannot

be determined, The details of the descriptions of

the skulls given by Fry indicate that if the process

had been present he would have described it, The

type specimen for NV. tesseflatus (AM R4158) also

cannot be located for re-examination (H. G. Cogger

pers. comm.,).. Attempts to observe the pterygoid

bones of the lectotype of depressa (MCZ 4473)

using X-rays were unsuccessful. This was because

the head of this specimen hud been filled with

plaster of paris when originally mounted.

The skulls of depressa and Lepidochelys olivacea

and L, kempii have very similar pterygoid bones

which differ markedly from those of Chelonia

mydas (Fig, 2B) and the remaining cheloniid turtles.

A comparison of selécted osteological characters

of the skulls of members of the Cheloniidae

{Table 2) shows depressa differs from Chelonia

mydas in many characters. Of the [3 characters

considered, depressa and mtydas differed by ten

features; whereas, depressa and L. olivacea differed

by six, depressa differed from C, caretla and EF,

tmbricata by seven and eight features respectively.

SEA TURTLE GENUS NATATOR 3

TaBLe 4. Detailed comparison of selected osigalogical characters of the skulls of Chelonia mydas and Natator

depressa.

Chelonia mydas

Frontal forms part of orbit

Prefrontal and post orbital do not meet

Opening of foramen posterius canalis carotici interni

within pterygoid; not contiguous with other bones

Exoccipital not separating fenestra ovalis with a

septum

Processus pterygoideus externus wide and only bulges

into fossa temporalis inferior without distinct dorsal

inflection

Basioccipital with low rounded tuberculae;

basioceipital protruding on either side of wide trough

Foramen nervi hypoglossi situated in recess of

exoceipital

Posterior of squamosa! with two steep walled

channels

Interorbital space, at onter angle of frontal, one-third

of greatest width of skull

Parielo-squamosal suture always quite distinct, lo 3.8

em in length in adults

Fronto-parietal suture strongly arched

Length of fronto-parietal suturé two-thirds to three-

quarters greatest width of frontals

Prerygoids deeply constricted on each side by oblique

pterygo-mandibular sulcus

Basisphenoidal ridge angied posteriorly to form shelf

Natator depressa

Frontal not forming part of orbit

Prefrontal and post orbital meet

Opening of foramen posterius canalis carolici interni

not. within pterygoid; contiguous with exoccipital an

basioceipital

Exoccipital separates fenestra ovalis with septum to

form (or nearly form) tube

Processus pterygoideus externus narrow extending into

fossa temporalis inferior with distinct terminal dorsal

infleetion

Basioccipital with prominent tuberculae; basioccipital

forming vertical walls of narrow trough

Foramen nervi hypogiossi situated on flat area of

exoccipiral

Posterior of squamosal with single wide channel

Interorbital space, at outer angle of frontal, two-thirds

of greatest width of skull

Parieto-squamosal sulure extremely small

Fronto-parietal suture transverse

Leneth of fronto-parietal suture equals greatest width

of frontals

Prerygoids not constricted by deep pterygomandibular

sulcus on cach side

Basisphenoidal ridge presents vertical wall at posterior

face

Based on these characters, the skull of depressa is

least similar to mydas and most similar to £.

alivacea, Based on skull characteristics, depressa

and mydas should not be considered congeneric,

Supplementary. information

depressa is a carnivorous turtle that feeds

principally on benthic animals in soft bottomed

communities. It also eats jellyfish. Its carnivary

contrasts with the herbivory of the green turtle.

depressa Yeeds more on soft-bodied prey (soft-

corals, sea-pens) rather than on prey with thick

exoskeletons ag is eaten by Lepidochelys and

Caretta.

depressa at all sizes except hatchlings and early

post hatchlings has a smooth low domed carapace

which is distinctly reflexed dorsally at the lateral

margins (Bustard & Limpus 1969; Limpus 1971),

In. cross section the carapace is bow-shaped; in other

cheloniid species the carapace is much higher

domed and not reflexed on the lateral margit.

Hatchling and early post-hatchling depressa are not

as high domed as the hatchlings of other species

but do not have the dorsally reflexed marginal am.

Relative to this characteristic, within Lhe

Cheloniidae, Lepidochelys with its wide flat

marginal rim to the carapace shows the greatest

similarity to depressa.

The integument of the carapace of depressa with

a CCL, greater than approximately 16 cm is a soft,

thinly keralinised skin rather than a series of hard,

keratinised scutes. To the touch, it is very similar

to ihe carapacial skin of Dermochelys coriacea.

Following death and decomposition, there are no

large keratinised scutes which can be peeled from

ihe carapace, as occurs with the other cheloniids.

Because of the reduced epidermal keratinisation of

the carapace, the scutes which are so prominent on

Fig. 2, Ventral view of sea turtle skulls, epp = external

pleryeoid process, prone = plerygoid muscle groove. A.

Narator depressa, adult female (QNPWS 33704).

Note the prominent external pterygoid process and

poorly developed pterygoid muscle groave. B. Chelohia

mydas. Note the absence of the external plerygoid

process and the well developed pterygoid muscle groove,

the hatchlings are difficult to delineate in the adult.

The scutes of the hatchlings are usually strongly

pitted and form areolac-like structures as each scute

area increases during growth. The areolae are shed

to produce the smooth skin like surface of the

carapace (CCL between 10 and 16em), Withisi the

Cheloniidae, post hatchling Lepidochelys also have

limited keratinization of carapacial scutes,

Only hatchling depressa and C. mydas are white

ventrally, although the ventral surface of some

hatchlings of the other species af Cheloniidae can

be light coloured (yellowish instead of brown). In

conirast the adults of all species of the family are

light coloured (white, cream, ar yellow) ventrally.

Only in depressa and ©. mydas does a distinct white

band outline the tmargiu of the carapace and the

flippers. Dorsally depressa hatchlings are the most

distinctively coloured of al] the sea turtles (Limipus

197)).

The gait of hatchling depressa on the beach is

the typical alternating gait used by all hatchling

Cheloniidac, Adult depressa move by pushing with

C. J. LIMPUS, B, GYURIS & 1. D. MILLER

all four flippers together in a manner similar to that

of C. mydas and D. coriacea (Limpus 197)), The

short front flippers of depressa result in a track with

less of the front flipper print remaining outside the

hind Nipper pnnts than occurs with C nivdas.

During, egg laying, depressa leaves one hind

flipper within and pressed against the wall of the

ege chamber while the other hind flipper is placed

flat on the sand surface to partly cover the opening

of the ege chamber (Bustard ge? al, 1975). This

posture resembles that of C mydas and D. coriacea.

In contrast Caretta, Eretmochelvs and Lepidachelys

have both hind flippers. removed from the egg

chamber and flat on the sand behind the egy

chamber while laying.

The eggs of depressa are characteristic and

distinctive fromm those of other species of

Chelonidac. The mean ege diameter measures

greater than 4,65 cm and the mean clutch count is

approximately 50 (Coguer & Lindner 1969; Limpus,,

1971, Limpus ef al, 1983). The eggs of depressa are

large and of similar size to those of B. coriacea but

clutches can be distinguished from the latrer because

D. coriaced clutches always include large numbers

of small irregular shaped yoikless eggs (Limpus ef

al, 1984), while yolkless eggs rarely occur in depressa

clutches and then only in small numbers (Lampus

1971; Limpus ef a/. 1983). Hirth (1980) provides a

summary of clutch data from non-Australian

populations of other species.

The specimen illustrated by Deraniyagala (1971)

as a passible depressa from Ceylon in no way

resembles any dépressa we have ever seen and its

identification is nol supported. The Garman (1880)

specimen of depressa from East Indies has been

shown [6 be a hatchling Chelania mydas from

Penang, Malaysia (Barbour 1914). The only record

of depressa from beyond the Australian Continental

shelf ts based on photographs of a stuffed immature

specimen from off tbe north coast of Java

(photographs made in 1984 by G, Usher were

examined by CL), The species has been recorded

breeding only in Australia Where it has a wide

nesting disiribution, Major breeding aggregations

can be found at Peak Island, Wild Duck Island and

Avoid Island in central eastern Queensland;

Deliverace Island and adjacent islands or north

western Torres Strait; Crab Island and the Sir

Edward Pellew Islands in the Gulf of Carpentaria;

Wessel [slands, Greenhill Island and Field Island

in the Northern Territory and Delarmmbre Island on

the north west shelf of Western Australia, There are

numerous Other less important nesting locations,

Discussion

interpretation of the present electrophoretic study

is limited because of the small pumber of loci used

SEA TURTLE GENUS. NATATOR 7

(Neji 1978). However even with that constraint the

data still provide useful information. Friar (1982),

in reviewing all the available biochemical data based

on serum electrophoresis (band-counting method),

immuneoelectrophoresis and. serology, constructed

a tentative dendrogram suggesting possible sea

turtle relationships. The present study corroborates

Friar’s model and extends it by examming the

taxonomic status of depressa. On the basis of the

electrophoretic data it would appear inconsistent

{o continue viewing depressa and mydas as

congeneric,

Most taxonomic revisions of depressa have been

based on examination of a small number of

museum specimens, Several unusual characters of

the Species, especially the thinly keratinised scutes

and the upwardly reflexed lateral marginal rim of

the carapace, have in the past led to the idea that

the lectotype of depressa (Fig, 3) was possibly an

aberrent specimen (Loveridge 1934; Williams ef al.

1967). This specimen is not aberrent but is a good

representative of the adult depressa which can be

seen on any of its numerous rookeries in tropical

Australia. If there is anything unusual about the

lectolype, it is in terms of the way the flippers have

been prepared for display,

Baur (1890) commented that clarification of the

generic status of the flatback turtle had to wait

“until the skull of this species is known. . ." This

has been rectified. Both the electrophorene and

osteological characteristics of depressa provide a

clear separation of it from Chelona at the generic

level.

Past studies have noted similarities between

depressa'and Lepidachelys (Baur 1890; Wilhams et

al. 1967). The first depressa skulls registered in the

collection of the Queensjand Museum were assigned

to Caretta caretta after being identified as Caretta

remivaga (= Lepidochelys olivacea, QM 13848) and

Colpochelys kempu (= L. kempii. QM J4058)

respectively. The present study has identified many

common characters shared by depressa and

Lepidochelys, However this similarity is comparable

ta the degree Of similamty that exists between

Caretia and Eretmochelvs and between Curetia and

Lepidochelys. Given the common acceptance of the

generic discreteness of these latter genera, depressa

must alsa be recognised at the generic level.

These data warrant resurrecting the genus

Natalor to accommodate the species depressa,

Genus Naturer McCulloch

Natator McCulloch, 1908, pp, 126-8,

Type species: N. depressa (Garman, 1880).

Diagnosis: Because of the confused history af the

nomenclature, the genus Nararor is tedetined based

on the original descriptions by McCulloch (1908)

and Garman (1880), revisions by Fry (1913) and

Williams ef a/. (1967) and deseriptions of the

morphology from the N, depressoa nesting

populations at Coburg Peninsula (Cogger &

Lindner 1969), Mon Repos (Limpus 1971) and Crab

Island (Limpus ef u/, 1983) and our more recent

unpublished observations,

Body broad, depressed, subelliptical, broadest

near or behind the middle In larger specimens,

carapace flattened over the second to the fourth

vertebral scutes and with lateral marginal tim

reflexed upwards. Head and carapace covered wilh

non-imbricate keratinised scutes, cach with distinct

symmetrical areolae in the young. Areolae shed

before carapace length of approximately 16 cm, In

adults, carapace scutes thinly keratinised, indistinct

with waxy feel, Usual scute pattern as follows.

Carapace: nuchal shield undivided; five vertebrals;

four pairs of costals; twelve pairs of marginals.

Plastron: thirteen scutes, in two series of six each,

preceded by small but well developed triangular

intergular, Inframarginals; four on each bridge, no

tig. 3. Narator depressa lectotype (MCZ 4474), A. Head

showine distinct preocculat scute (po). B, Whole mounr

showing flattened’ carapace with reflexed lateral

marginal rim atid indistinct scures. Ruler = L m.

8 Cd, LIMPUS, EL GYURIS & J.D, MILLER

inframarginal pores. Head: one pair large

prefrontals; one pair preoculars lying between

prefrontals and upper jaw sheath; frontal in contact

with prefrontals and pair of large supraoculars;

parietal shield very large; post-parietal in odd

numbered series symmetrically arranged behind

post parietal {if even numbered array occurs, usually

assymmetrically arranged}; three post-oculars lying

posterior and postero-ventral to each eye, Jowest

large. Colour: Hatchlings, m life gray dorsally with

each scule outliried in black; ventrally white:

posterior margin of carapace and thppers outlined

in white; iris blue. Adults, in life dorsally olive-gray;

ventrally white; iris brown. Limbs: paddle-shaped

(= flippers), each with two claws in young (more

distal claw becoming less obvious in larger turtles);

distal half of forelimb with single rows of enlarged

scales extending along phalanges separated by areas

of smaller irregular scales or wrinkled skin. Head

larger and broader than that of © smvdas, broad

posteriorly, convex on. occiput, flattened between

and vampressed in front of eyes, Lipper jaw not

serrated, outline nearly straight, with notch at

symphysis almost obliterated, vertically grooved on

inner face, Lower jaw Serrated (not obvious in

hatchlings), bearing sharp recurved prominence on

the symphysis, Single choanal spine at each internal

naris.

The skull of Nawtor has the following

characteristics (Table 3, 4), Frontal not forming part

of orbit; prefrontal and post orbital meet, Processus

pterygcideus externus narrow extending into fossa

temporalis inferior with distinct terminal antlection.

Prerygoids oot constricted by deep pterygo-

mandibwar sulcus om each side. Plerygoid not

extending posteriorly beyond opening of foramen

posteriig cafalis ecarotic] intern. Fenestra ovalis

divided by septum (or nearly divided), Tuberculae

basioccipital prominant. Fenestra for vagus X

enclosed or partly enclosed by exoccipital,

Descending process of prefrontal not connecting

with palatine; pterygoid meets jugal,

Nafator depressa (Garman) New Comb.

Chelonia depressa; Garman, T880, Bull Mus. Comp.

Zool, 6, p. 124 (in part); Baur 1890, Amer. Nat. 24, p, 487;

Fry $913, Rec. Aust. Mus, 30, p, 159; Cogger & Lindner

1969, Aust. Zool, 15, p. 154; Busiard & Limpus 1969,

Herpetologicva, 25, po 29: Cageer ef af. 1983, Zoological

Catalogue of Australia. Vol. 1. Amphibia and Reptiles,

p. 69.

Chelonia japonica: Worrell, 1963, Reptiles af Australia,

p, 10,

Chelonia mydas: Boulenger, (889, Catalogue of the

Chelomians, Rhynchoephalians and Crocodiles in the

British Museum (Natural History), 9 122; Loveridge 1934,

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 77, p. 261.

Narator ressellatus: McCulloch, 1908, Rec. Aust. Mus. 7,

p. 126

Lectotype; MCZ 4473 From northern Australia

(possibly purchased in Torres Strait, Barbour 1914)

(Cogger ef a/, 1983). Adult sized, probably a fernale,

Diagnosis? As for the génus.

Geographical distribution: Feeding grounds oceur

within the warm temperate and tropical waters of

the Australian continental shelf, including southern

New Guinea waters and along the north coast of

Jaya. Only known to breed in Australia

Acknowledgments

This study was conducted within the Queensland

Turtle Research Project of the Queensland National

Parks and Wildlife Service, lt was funded in part

by a Marine Science and Technology Grant from

the Ausirahan Department of Science. Logistic

suppert was provided to EG. by the Alfred

Hospital, Melbourne. Dr Perran Ross provided

photographs of the Garnvan 1880 type series. J. P-

Rosado provided radiographs of the head of the

lectotype. Dr J, Stoddart aided the analysts of the

electrophoretic data. Dr E Gaffney, Dr P,

Baverstack and J, Covacevich gave constructive

criticism of early drafts of the manuseript.

KMeterouces

Banwour, T, (1914) On some Australasian repites, Broo,

Bilal, Soc. Washington 27, 201-6.

Baur, G. (1890) The genera of the Chelonjidae. Amex,

Not. 24, 486-7,

Bourencer, G (889) “Catalogue of che Chelonians,

Rhynchocephalians and Crocodiles in the Beilish

Museum (Natural History).” (British Museum, London.)

Bustarp, H, R., GREENHAM, P. & Cimpus, C, J, (1975)

Nesting behaviour of the loggerhead and Malback turtles

in Aumeran Proc. Ned. Akad. van Wet. Ser. C. 78,

(11-22.

—— & Limpeus, C. 1. (1969) Observations of the Matback

turtle Chelonia depressa Garman. Herpetologica 25,

29-34,

Cage, A, B. (1952) “Handbook of Turtles, The Turtles

of the United Staies and Baja Califariia.” (Cornell

University Press, Whaca |

Coacer, H. G, Cameron, EB. G. & Coocer, H, M.

(1983) “Zoological Catalogue of Ausiralia. Vol. 1.

Amphibians and Reptiles." (Australian Government

Publishing Service, Canberra.)

—— & Linpner, B.A, (1969) Marine turtles in northern

Australia. Aust. Zool. 15, 150-61.

COMMISSION OF BIOCHEMICAL N@MENCLAPURE (1972)

Enzyme nomenclature. (Elsevier, Netherlands,)

DERANTYAGALA, PE, P. (1971) Does the flat back sea

turtle visit Ceylon. Loris 12, 206-7.

SEA TURTLE GENUS NATATOR 9

Exuis, A. E. (1937) “Adventuring in Coral Seas.” (Angus

& Robertson, Sydney).

Fercuson, A. (1980) “Biochemical Syslematics and

Evolution.” (Blackie, Glasgow.)

Frair, W, (1979) Taxonomic relations among; sea turtles

elucidated by serological) tests. Herpetologicu 35, 239-44.

(1982) Serum electrophoresis and sea turtle

classification, Comp, Biochem. Physiol. 72B, 1-5.

Fry, D, B. (1913) On the status of Cheloria depressa

Garman, Ree, Aust; Mus. 10, 159-85.

GAFFNEY, B. 5. (1979) Comparative cranial morphology

of recent and fossil turtles. Ball. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist.

164, 65-363.

GARMAN, S, (1880) On eertain species of Chelonicidae.

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 6, 123-6,

Guaueet, B.A. (1928) The vertebrate fauna of Western

Australia, J. R. Suc. West. Aust, 14, 62.

Gyurts, B. & Limpus, C. J. (1986) A rapid method for

immobilisation and collection of sea turtle muscle

biopsies for electrophoresis. Aust. Wildl. Res. 13, 333-4.

—— & — (1988) The loggerhead turtle Caretta caretla

in Queensland: population breeding structure. [bid 15,

(in press).

Hay, ©. P. (1908) On three existing species of sea-turtles,

one of them (Caretta remivaga) new, Proc. U.S. Nat.

Mus, 34, 183-98.

Hirt, H. F. (1980) Nesting biology of sea turtles, Armer,

Zool. 20, 507-23.

KESTEVEN, H. L. (1911) The anatomy of the head of the

green turtle Chelone midas Latr. Part I. The skull. Proc.

R. Soc. N.S.W 44, 368-400.

Limpus, C. J. (1971) The flatback turtle, Chelonia

depressa Garman, in south east Queensland, Australia,

Herpetologica 27, 431-46.

—-—, McLacuian, N. & MILLER, J. D, (1984) Further

observations on breeding of Dermochelys coriacea in

Australia. 7bid. 11, 567-71.

—— Parmenter, C. J., Baker, V. & Fizay, A. (1983)

The Crab Island sea turtle rookéry in the north eastern

Gulf of Carpentaria. Aust, Wildl Res, 10, 173-84,

» PARKER, R, & Forp, N, (1981) The flatback

turtle Ch Cc *helonia depressq@ in Queensland: the Peak Island

Rookery, Herpefofauna 13(1), 14-18.

LOVERIDGE, A, (1934) Australian reptiles in the Museum

of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusctts.

Bull. Mus, Comp, Zool. T7, 243-383.

McCuttocn, A. R. (1908) A new genus and species of

sea turtle from north Australia. Rec, Aust, Mus. 7,

126-8.

Nei, M. (1978) Estimation of average heterozygosity and

genetic distance from a small number of individuals.

Genetics 89, 583-90.

RicHARDSON, B. J. (1983) Distribution of protein

variation in skipjyack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis) from

the central and north-west Pavific, Aust, J. Man. Freshw,

Res, 34, 231-51.

—,, Rovers, P.M. & Hewitt, G. M. (1980)

Kcological genetics of the wild rabbit in Australia. I,

Protein variation in British, French and Australian

rabbits aod the geographical distribution of the

variation in Australia. Aust. J Biol. Sei. 33, 371-83.

Srokes, J. L. (1846) “Discoveries in Australia; with an

Account of the Coasts and Rivers Explored and

Surveyed during the Voyage of HMS Beagle in the Years

1837-43." Vol. Il. (T. & W. Boone, London,)

WiIcuiAms, E. £., Granpison, A. G. C. & CARR, A. PF

Jr. (1967) Chelonia depressa Garman re-investigated.

Breviora 271, 1-15.

Worre tL, E. (1963) “Reptiles of Australia: Crocodiles,

Turtles, Tortoises, Lizards, Snakes.” (Angus &

Rabertson, Sydney.)

ZANGERL, R. (19%0) Patterns of phylogenetic

differentiation in the Toxochelyid and Cheloniid sea

tures. Amer. Zool, 20, 585-596.

FLINDERS/MOUNT LOFTY RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA THEIR

UPLIFT, EROSION, AND RELATIONSHIP TO CRUSTAL STRUCTURE

BY P. WELLMAN* & S. A. GREENHALGH}

Summary

The Flinders/Mount Lofty Ranges are low, elongate highlands. The amount of denudation, the

present earthquake activity, and the age of the sediments in the region, are consistent with uplift

starting in the Palaeocene or earlier, with uplift and erosion continuing to the present. Seismic,

gravity and heat flow observations are consistent with the crustal load of the ranges being supported

in regional isostatic compensation by a relatively strong lithosphere, the ranges not having a crustal

root, and denudation not being followed by a similar amount of isostatic rebound. The axis of the

ranges is coincident with an elongate gravity anomaly high, that may be due to high density in the

underlying basement. The ranges probably represent reactivation of the crustal structure causing

this gravity anomaly.

KEY WORDS: Flinders Ranges, Mt Lofty Ranges, geomorphology, gravity anomalies, magnetic

anomalies, seismic, Adelaide Orogen.

FLINDERS/MOUNT LOFTY RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

THEIR UPLIFT, EROSION, AND RELATIONSHIP TO CRUSTAL STRUCTURE

By P. WELEMAN* & S. A. GREENHALGH]

Summary

WetLMAN, P, & GREFNHALOH, S. A. (1988) Flinders/Maunt Lofty Ranges, South Australia; rhein upitfi,

crosion and relationship to crustal structure, Trans, R, Soc, S. Aust, 1021), 11-19, 31 May 1988.

The Flinders/Mount Lofty Ranges are tow, elongate highlands. ‘Fhe amount of denudation, the present

eqrtiquake activity, and thy age of the sediments in the region, are consistent with uplith sariing bn The

Palacocene or earlier, with uplift and erasiun continuing wo the present. Seismic, gravity and heal flow

observations are consistent with the crustal oad of the tanges being. supported in regicimal isostatic

compensarion ty a relarively sirane lithosphere, the ranges not having a crustal root, and denudation not

being followed by a similar amount of isostatic rebounu. The axis of the ranges is coincident With an elongate

gravity anomaly high, thar may be due to high deasity in the underlying basement. The minges probably

represent reactivation of the crustal structure causing (his gravity anomaly,

Key Worbs: Flinders Ranges, Mi Lofty Ranges, geomorphology, pravily anonialies, magnetic

anomalies, seismic, Adelaide Orogen.

Introduction

The Flinders/Mr Lofty Ranges (Fig, 1) have a

roughly north-south trend, are 40-100 kim wide, 600

kim long, and have a mean axis height uf 0,2 to 0.6

km, Both these ranges and the Eastern Highlands

are relatively elongate: They differ from the broad

arcas of high altitude in western Australia, central

Australia, and in. the Kimberley arca of northwest

Australia, These broad uplifts conform to the

pattern tor other continents (Wyatt 1986),

The Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges were uplifted to

their present altitude after the Palaeaznic ‘his

faper reviews the information on the timing and

amount of uplift, the rate of Cainozoic denudation,

their tsostalic support, and the underlying crustal

structure, An understanding of the histary and

structure of these ranges is useful in understanding

the associated earthquake activity, which has caused

considerable property damage.

Timing of the uplift

Geological constraints

Formation of the Mt Lofly-Flinders Ranges was

by uplift of.a land surface of low relief developect

on Adelaide Orogen racks of Late Proterozoic and

Cambrian age. There are differences of opinion on

the timing. of the uplift with some writers

advocating most uplift in the late Cainozoic, Webh

(1957) considered that the ML Lofty and Flinders

Ranges were uplifted by “broad regional upwarping

and doming, associated with strong faulting”, the

tectonic activity continuing through the Tertiary, but

* Bureauof Mineral Resources, PO Box 378, Canberra,

ACT 260,

+ School of Barth Sciences, Flinders \niversity, Dedfard

Park, S. Aust. 5042.

culminating in ithe Late Pliocene to Early

Pleistocene times. Firman (1969) thought that the

modern landscape of the Mi Lofty and Flinders

Ranges was late Cainozoic, The movemenrs were

hy block faulling and tiling commencing "in the

late Miocene, and continued through the Pliocene

into the Quaternary”, and he linked the later

movements with the Kosciusko Orogeny, Twidale

(1976) believed that the uplift of the Mt Lofty

Ranges was cilher Late Mesozoic of earliest Tertiary.

Williams & Gonde (1978) accepted that the Mt

Lofty Ranges were uplifted in the Late Cainozaiz,

and thought that the Murray River crossed these

ranges in the Eogene or Miocene (cf, Gostin &

Jenkins 1980; Harris et a/, 1980), Veevers (1984)

argued thal the inception of the highlands was in

the Cambnan, with high ground since the

Carboniferous. He reviewed the Cainozore

sedimentological evidence, and concluded that rhe

highlands were uplifred in the Palaeocene, the

Eocene, and later,

There ig very tittle firm evidence to constrain the

me of the uplift. At the northern end ef the

Flinders Ranges (A of Fig, l) remnants of Early

Cretaccous sediments occur on ridge ops, so uplift

in the north mist have been subsequent to this time.

At the northern end of the Mt Lofty Ranges, Alley

(1973) showed that uplift and dissection of the

ranges was prior to disposition of the Snowton

Sands of Miocenc age. In the southern Mt Lofty

Ranges (F of Tig. 1) there are two elongate valleys

containing uplifted carly Miocene (Batesfordian

Stage) limestones. The top of (he limestone in the

Hindmarsh Tiers Basin is 210 m, and in the

Myponga Basin it is 238 m (Furness ef al, 1981},

while the tops of {he surrounding hills are about

400 m altitude. A limestone of similar age in the

Murray River gorge 50 kim.to che east 1G of Fig.

| ~ ‘Se as ifn

Ry i ie . } T f

eh, brah Rea . yi /\

toy, es ee

Nit Ute flat?

Finders

)

_ Bi!

Rei

LpePee tsa eeenees

*- ’

te -

. Manges

~ = <79g

urs?

“a

Peeeee oe? .

coy

oe ea

<i Ci na

~~) \ ee oe

af aro es d : "ee

ee a 38

Fig, |, Relief, Contours at 200 m (continuous), 500 and

1000 sn (dashed). Letters ure referred to im the teat.

Rotied line is along the western margin of the higher

part of the Flinders/Mt Lotty Ranges, and along a

gravity ¢radient af Fig. 2.

1) has a top at about 40m allitude. Hoth limestones

are mainly worn, coarse shells deposited in very

shallow water, Hence the post-Harly Miocene uplift

relative to the Murray Basin was. about 200 m, and

this uplilt is approximately one half of the total

uplift, On some of the margins of the highlands (D,

H, | of Fig. 1) there is faultmg of inferred

Quaternary age, and thick fluviatile deposits, both

consistent with considerable Quaternary uplift. In

these ureas the margins of the highlands are fault

line scarps that are relatively continuous and steep),

so they are thought to have been reactivated in the

Late Cainozoic. In contrast some areas within the

2 P WELLMAN, & S. A, G@REENEIALGH

highlands (&, B of Fig, 1) have wide “U" shaped

valleys with narrow residual hills that must have

started eroding privr to the Jate Cainozaic,

Other evidence is more subjective, Callen (1983)

has shown thatat the northern end of the Flinders

Ranges two sileretes were developed, a mid

Cainozoic silcrete formed between Early Eocene

and Karly Miocene that is now largely eroded away,

and an extensively oulctupping silcrete af mid

Miocene to early Pleistocene age. These sileretes are

interpreted by Callen tu be warped and faulted. Thais

is consistent with some late Cainozoig uplift, In the

Mi Lofty Ranges, evidence for substantial relief on

the land surface in the early Cainozoie is of three

kinds. Firstly, lateritic and silerete surfices of

possible Eocene or Palaeocene age have developed

on a similar drainage system to the present In the

Broughton River area (C of Fig. L) (Gostin &

Jenkins 1980; c.f. Milnes ef af, 1985), Secondly,

pravelly fluviatile deposits, of middle Palaeacene

Of Older age, occur in the western Murray Basin,

and are thought to be derived from rejuvenation

of the highlands (Twidale er a/, 1978), Thirdly, in

the Willunga Embayiment (EB of Fig. 1), south of

Adelaicle, there is a considerable thickness of coarse

sands of Bocene age (Lindsay 1986), that may be

due to local erosion at that time.

In summary, at the northern end of the Flinders

Ranges the uplift was after the Early Cretaccous,

with some uplift continuing in the late Cainozoic.

In the middle and southern Mi Lofty Ranges, about

one halt the wplift was prior to the mid Cainozote,

and uplift continued. The initial uplift of the ranges

is likely to have been in che Palaeocene or carber.

Denudation

The Lare Cretaceous/Cainozoic denudation rate

has not been determined for the Flinders/Mt Lofty

Ranges. However a denudation rate can be

estimated from those found elsewhere in Australia.

Inthe Eastern Highlands in New South Wales and

Queensland (which has a similaraltitude and local

relief to the Flinders/Mt Lofty Rangcs) average

Calnozoie denudation rales have been determined!

by numerous authors using dated Cainozoic

volcanics for time control (Wellman 1987) ta lic

between 0,5 and §m,Ma |, with a mean of about

3m.Ma-! ( m.Ma-! = 1 mm/1000 years = 1

Bubnoff unit). For the shield of southwest Australia,

Van de Graaf (1981) infers a denudation rate of

1.5-2 m.Ma~! for the humid late Cretaceous and

Early Tertiary, and about 0.2 m.Ma ~ during the

dry period since the Miocene. A study by G. EB.

Wilford (pers, comm,) gives the mean Cainozoic

denudation rate in Australia for areas of relatively

low relief, For eight areas covering over one half

FLINBERS/MT LOFTY RANGES 3

of Australia, but not including (the Eastern

Highlunis, (he estimates range from 045 to 2.3

m.Ma ! with a mean of 1.3 m.Ma-!, AU these

estimates are vonsistent with the Flinders/Mr Lofty

Ranges having a mean Funes: denudation rate

in the range 1-4 m.Ma—', with a most probably

value neat 3 m.Ma },

With these low average erosion rates there would

be a long lag time between uplift and subsequent

erosion. Hence, in contrast ro models such as Jones

& Veevers (1982) where « pulse of uplift is followed

within 4 few million years by a pulse of erosion,

it seems likely that uplift is followed by slow erosion

over long periods — of the order of 50-100 Ma,

Anestimale of the minimum lotal denudation of

the Flinders and Mr Lofty Ranges can be

determined by assuming that before uplift there was

a surface of low relief, and that this surface is now

at or above the level ot the present summits. With

this assumption the minimum volume eroded is the

volume between an envelope over the summit levels

and the present land surface, On the

PARACHILNA 1:250 000 sheet aréa of the centyal

Flinders Ranges (A of Fig, |}, the local relief

averages about 500 m, with only narrow elongate

hills above nearly flar valley floors, so denudation

below the surnmits is about 500 m. In this area hard

rocks form hills, Quher rocks form the flat

bottomed valleys, giving an arca of “mature”

landscape In the ML Lofty Ranges the local relief

is 200 ro 500 m, with only 50% of the rock removed

between local stream base and summit level, so

denudation below the summits is about 200 m.

Using the inost likely denudation rate of

3m.Ma~‘. these total denudations give a

calculated time period for erosion of 170 Ma lor

the Flinders Ranges and 70 Ma for the Mr Lofty

Ranges. These periods of erosion would First start

when (here was some local relief, ancl would nor

be very dependent on the uplift history. They are

consistent with uplift and erosion starling priur to

the Cainozoic, with erosion continuing since then,

fsostatic cumpensatiun of topography

Gravity anomalies

In the Flinders/M1 Lofty Ranges area, Wellman

(1979) showed that the best Airy/Heiskanen

isostatic model (after correction for sediment) had

compensation near infinite depth, and for this

mode! the 0.5x0.5° area anomalies had a larger

scatter than those of the relatively weak crust of

the southeastern highlands of Australia. Both these

observations are here interpreted as indicating a

relatively strong crust, with regional rather than

loca] isostatic compensation of topography,

Fig. 2. Gravity anomaly map — Bouguer anomalies on

Jand, free air anomalies al sea. Contour interval 30

density used in the Bouguer anomaly

3 fafier BMR, 1976b).

pies. 2

reduction is 2.67 t.m

Bouguer gravicy anomalies within the

Klinders/Mt Lofty Ranges are generally more

positive than over the adjacent lowland, in

particutay the higher parts of the highlands (east

of the dotted line of Fig. [) corresponding with a

relative gravity high (east of the dotted line of

Fig. 2), This is consistent with the ranges not haying

a significant isostatically compensating crustal rool

(or other compensating body) directly underlying

them, bul being isostativally compensated by deep

bodies over a broader region, the load being spread

regionally by a relatively strong lithosphere,

The tegional compensation of topography has

implications for isostatic rebound subsequent to

\4 P, WELLMAN, & S. A. GREENHALGEL

denudation of the ranges, In areas elsewhere, of

weak crust and loval isostatic compensation of

topography, any denudation of, say, a 1x1" area

Tesults in isostatic rebound of this |x J° area, The

average altitude after denudation ts only slightly less

than before denudation, and erosion does not

theretore significantly reduce the average altitude

of i mountain range, However the effect is different

if reyiunal isostatic compensation is assumed, yuch

as is inferred for the Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges.

Denudition restricted to the range will cause uplift

of the whole area of compensation, and because

the total volume of uplift is slightly less than the

volume of denudation, any denudation will resuit

in only minimal rebound of the highlands. In a

model of constant rate of uplift and a constant

smaller rate of denudahon, there would be an

increase with time in both the average altitude of

the crest of the ranges and its local relief, With a

made! where most of the uplift occurs early, and

where the denudation rate is constant, then after

uplift there would be # significant decreuse in the

average altitude of the ranges, and an increase in

loval relief,

Seismic studies af the crust

The variation of the mean velocity of the upper

crust in the dred has been studied by Greenhalgh

& Tapley (1988) ysing local earthquakes and a

tomographic technique. The study shows variations

in the P-wave velocity are from 5.9 to 6.5 kms 7!

(Fig, 3). Much of the Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges are

underlain by relatively high velocity crust, and much

of the area immediately west of the ranges is

underlain by relatively low velocity crust.

Crustal thickness variations in South Australia

were derived by a time-term analysis of local

earthquake Pn travel time (Singh 1985)', The

mapped time-term values range from 1.4 to 5.1

seconds (Fig. 4). A low time-term corresponds to

a relative crustal velocity high and/or a relatively

thin crust. Conversely, a high time-term implies law

crustal velocity and/or thick crust. There is a clase

association between the tomographic velocity map

of Fig, 3, and the time-term map of Fig, 4, The

major part of the observed time-term variation is

accounted for by known lateral variation in crustal

velocity. The remaining time-ierm variation can be

explained by a crustal thickness variation of

= Skm-

‘Singh, R, 98S) Seismicity and crustal structure of

South Australia. M.Sc. Thesis, Flinders University,

Adelaide (utipubl).

The Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges are characterized

by a time term of 2.5 to 3. seconds. Using the

measured average velocity of 6.3 km.s~', this gives

a crustal thickness of 26 to 28 km. The area at the

head of Spencer Gulf, west of the highlands, has

# crustal velocity of 5,9 km.s~', and a time term

of 3-3,5 s, so it has a similar calculated crustal

thickness of 26 to 30 km.

Crustal thicknesses were also obtained by

Shackletord & Sutton (19K1), who recorded an east-

west refraction profile across the northern Mi Lofty

Ranges using quarry sources at Iren Baron on Eyre

J agua

oe!

Can oP tae

\ Whe

“Too im "asaya

Fig. 3. Lateral seismic P-wave velocily in ihe upper crust,

obtained from tomographic analysis of local carthquake

data, Contour interval 0.2 m.s"! (after Tapley 19844).

Line A-B is the position of the elongate electrical

conductor (fram Chamalaun 1986).

FLINDERS/MT LOFTY RANGES is

_ “TOD kn 57 5A74

eee

Fig. 4, Seismic travel-time delays, obtained trom timeterm

analysis of earthquake Pn data, Contour interval 0.5

s (after Singh 1985¢),

Peninsula. These profile data were reinterpreted by

Tapley (1984)? using an iterative ray tracing

technique. The inferred crustal thicknesses were

fairly uniform; the crust underneath the Adelaide

Orogen, in the region of the northern Mt Lafty

Ranges, not being appreciably thicker than that

beneath the Murray Basin and Eyre Peninsula.

These earthquakes and explosion results are

consistent with the ranges not having a significant

crustal root, their mass being supported by regional

isostatic compensation. In particular there is no

evidence for a thick root of velocity about 7.3

km.s~!, such as is found under the Eastern

*Tapley, BD. (1984) Seismic investigation af erustal

structure in South Ausiralia. BSc. (Hons) Thesis, Flinders

University, Adelaide (unpublished).

Highlands (Finlayson ef af. 1979). However the

ranges appear fo have higher crustal velocity than

the surrounding arca.

A strong lithosphere implies a relatively cool

lithosphere. Cull (1982) found a 3x 3° average heat

flow of 70-90 mW.m ~* for the area, which is only

slightly higher than the world average of about 60

mW.m =, and consistent with a lithosphere of near

average strength,

Another major geophysical anomaly is the

elongate conductor mapped using geomagnetic

deep sounding arrays (A-B ol Pig. 3) (Chamalaun

1986). The depth and cause of this conductor is not

clear. In pacticular it appears independent of the

Flinders/Mt Lofly Range structures.

Earthquake activity

Earthquake activity in S. Aust. is predominantly

in the topographically high area over 200 m altitude

(Fig. 5). Much occurs in the Adelaide Orogen

exiending from Leigh Creek in the north to

Kangaroo Island in the south (Greenhalgh er al.

1986). The greatest concentration of epicentres

occurs in the Flinders Ranges adjacent to the

horthern end of Spencers Gulf; other

concentrations occur in the Mi Lofty Ranges, in the

Telatively high land near Broken Hill, and along a

low topographic high that extends northwest from

the Flinders Ranges, Over 80% af the activity takes

place within the upper crust at depths of less than

20 km.

Using carthquake data from 1969 to 1985 we have

computed the average focal depth of 14° latitude

by 1/8° longitude arcas covering S. Aust. There is

no conspicuous concentration of deeper

carthquakes beneath the Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges.

The only striking feature is the shallow nature of

the seismicity in S. Aust.

Focal mechanisms have been oblained lor six

earthquakes occurring in the central Flinders

Ranges (Greenhalgh ef a/, 1986), The predominant

principal stress is northeast-southwest compression,

with the major movements being strike-slip in type.

The ‘simplest model explaining the general

correlation of carthquakes with relative topographic

highs, is for 4 component of thrust faulting to cause

a thickening of the crust, the fauliing and uplift ta

have continued: throughout the Cainozoic. As there

seems to be an absence of crustal root, the crust

has been thickened mainly by extension upward, not

downwards.

Correlation of topography with Adelaide Orogen

Structure

Geulogy

The basement rocks. jn the area are, in the west

the Gawler Block of Archean Barly Proterozoic age

If P. WELLMAN, & S. A. GREENHALGH

wi “es 1485

mm 4 > —— Mk

Bee * hy } 0

J) —— <

2 NS yes j

: 2 tae . j ys

ane fy

C late!

\ ee

7 a ee 2554/5

Fig. 5. Seismicily, Dots give epicentres of earthquakes of

magnitude ML, >=2. 200 m topographic contour

shown.

(Fig. 6), and in the east the Willyama Block of Early

Proterozoic age. Inlicrs of Early Proterozoic rock

crop out at the northern end of the Flinders Ranges

(B of Fig. 6), and the southern Mt Lofty Ranges

(A of Fig, 6). Sediments and minor volcanics of

Late Proterozoic-Cambrian age Adelaide Orogen

are relatively thick between the two cratons. They

are thin west of the Torrens Hinge Zone (Fig. 6)

forming the Stuart Shelf sediments, and thin cast

of about 139°20'E on the Willyama Block. The

thick sediments are thought to have been deposited

following the formation of a lithospheric rift (von

der Borch 1980). The inferred rift is complex with

two triple junctions. Subsequent folding of the thick

sediments of the Adelaide Orogen is, in the south

mainly on north to east striking fold axes that

parallel {he curved northwestern margin of the

Murray Basin, and in the north on eust to southeast

striking fold axes that parallel the margin of the

Eromanga Basin.

The axis of the Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges overlie

the north-south part of this rift, and the relatively

high land northwest of Leigh Creek (Fig. 1), and

northwest of C in Fig. 1, overlie other arms of the

Tift. Hence all the present-day relatively high land

directly overlies the inferred Late Proterozoic rifts,

and sa the high land is a reactivation of this older

structure, The Adelaide Orogen structures are not

| WwW NA,

Wes ae

\ a] aye 7a ealalia dc BASIN

"Sh

B et

Sear j

STUART shee

| iat eer

eee Oe eoeasheassraneeey FF

. =

MURRAY

BASIN

hb +h AL A

@ Mes gee

25 /SAs8

0 100 km

Fig. 6. Geological structure. Showing extent of cratons

with thin cover (thick lines), inliers (A & B), and

Cambrian-Ordovician granite (C) (aller Preiss 1983).

Dashed lines give depth to aeromagnetic basement

(coniour interval 2 km).

PLINDERS/MT LOFTY RANGES \7

all nerth-south. For example folds in the north and

central parts of the Range cross the Range at a large

angle, Hence a simple reactivation of the Adelaide

Orogeh structures does not explain the linearily, and

relalively high altitude, of the north-south trending

Flinders/Mt Lofty Ranges.

Sediment thickness

Tucker & Brown (1973 compiled depths to

acromagnetic basement north of 32°20'S, A

contour map of these depths (Fig. 6) Is roughly

consistent with geological constrainis — with the

shallow depths over (he cratonic areas to the west

and easl. It shows depths under the northern Mt

Lofty Ranges of 4 to. 6.km. Magnetic basement may

be volcanics in the Callanna Group near the base

of the Adclaidean sequence (eg. in area A of

Fig. 6}, dhe top of (he Garly Proterozoic basement,

or igneous bodies within the basement. Basenicnt

contours of Thompsun (1970; GSA, 1976) were said

to be “largely a compilation of aeromagnetic

bascment intetpretation”, bul |hey appear to be

mainly depths inferred from stratigraphic thickness

(Tucker & Brown 1973).

Geaphysical mode!

Using maps of gravily anomaly (Fig. 2) and

Magnetic anomaly (Fig. 7}, the Flinders/Mt Lofty

Ranges region can be divided into strips of similar

Magnetic and density properties (Fig. 8),

In the west is strip | (Fig. 8), which is a gravity

and magnetic high, corresponding roughly in

position with the Torrens Hinge Zone (Fig. 6). Strip

2is a gravity and magnetic low west of the Torrens

Hinge Zone, that on geophysical (Fig, 6) and

geological evidence has relatively thick sediments.

The lower gravity anomaly in strip 2 is likely to he

mainly due to the relatively-thick, low-density

sedimernts underlying strip 2. the elongate local

magnetic highs in strip t are (hought to be due tn

part to an edge anomaly at the eastern margin of

the Gawler Craton, East of this margin, thick

relatively non-magnetic Adelaidean sediments

overlie a Lower Proterozoic basement thal, during

the rifting, was chinned and possibly heated and

demugnetized, However within strip 1, west of

Adelaide and Leigh Creek, and sited mainly east

of the Torrens Hinge Zone, are elongate, isolated

magnetic highs that do not have the geometry of

an edge anontaly. There are coincident local gravity

highs, These anomalies are inferred to be due to

"Tucker. D, H. & Brown, F. W, (1973) Reconnaissance

helicopter gravity survey in the Flinders. Ranges, South

Australia, 1976, Bur, Min Resour Aust, Recor! 1973/12

«Unpubl.}

clongate, relatively dense and magnetic ignéous

rocks, forming narrow bands, They are inferred

from their location to be structurally related to the

Torrens Hinge Zone, but displaced from it.

Area 4 of Fig. 8 is a gravity low and magnetic

high due to the exposed and concealed Willyama

Block. Strip 7 is a gravity low, and tine of magnetic

highs, corresponding, to a line of Cambrian-

Ordovician granitoids (C of Fig. #), along the

eastern margin of the Murray Basin-

The majority of the area of thick Adelaidean

sediments is 4 relative magnetic low tstrips 2, 3 &

6). Within this area is an clongale high in the gravity

anomalies (slrip 3), This high corresponds in

position to the higher part of the Flinders/Mr Lofty

! a

CY wat

: a teiah iad A

ermyi , y

e !

oO:

25 )5a/)

100 hin

Fig. 7, Residuals of total magnetic intensity. Contour

intexral 250 nT, negative cunlaurs dashed (after RMR

i976al,

ia Pr WELLMAN, & 8. A. GREENHALGH

0 100 km 2s'DAVE

—__ I

Fig. 8. Geophysical mode) of crustal strips. Gravity,

magitetic and velocity residuals shown by gm, vw +.

— symbols. Narrow magnetic highs shown by hatched

pattern. Thick line is the Torrens Hinge Zone.

Ranges, but the mass above sea level of these raitges

does not cause the Bouguer gravity high. This is

because the calculation of Bouguer anomalies

removes the effects of nrasses above sea level, and

the effect of any componeni of local isastatic

compensation is £0 give a lower, nol higher Bouguer

anomaly. Tucker & Brown (1973) interpreted this

gravity high in the north as due to either an increase

in the density of the Adelaidean sediments, or an

increase in the density of the basement, Von der

Borch (980) thought that the gravity high “may be

due to axial dyke eniplacement™. Gann (198d)

thought that the gravity high “probably reflects the

presence of thin oceanictype crust”. There is no

good evidence that the high is duc to thin

Adelaidean sediments. The gravity high vould be

due to underlying sediments being relatively denser,

however the wesfern margin of the carbonate

sedimentation is claser to the Torrens Hinge Zone

(Fig, 3.11 of Preiss ef a/. 1981), and post depnsitional

structures cross the boundary of strip 3. It seems

most likely that the gravity high is due to an increase

in the density of the underlying basement, With any

interpretation, the similarity in geographic postion

ofthe relative gravity high and the ranges, suggest

that the ranges have been lormed geographically

coincident with tbe pre-Mesozaic structural features

forming the gravity high. The ranges are highly

\ikely to be @ reactivation of this structural feature,

Cunclusion

Geological information is consistent with

intermittent uplift staring m the Palaeocene or

earber, with some uplift in the Quaternary, The

likely Cainozoic denudation rates of about

3 m.Ma-', and the known denudation of over 0.5

km in the Flinders Ranges and over 0.2 km ijn the

Mt Lofty Ranges, are consistent with erosion

occurring at least through most of the Cainozoic,

The gravity anomalies are interpreted as showing

that the ranges have no significant crustal root; the

ranges being on a part of a@ relatively strong

lithosphere that supports them by regional isostatic

compensation, This model is consistent with

available seismic information showing no

significant increases in crustal thickness under the

ranges, and heat flow observations showing only

slighty higher heat flow than average.

The present day earthquake activity is mainly

restricted to the ranges, and it has compressive fault

plane solutions. This faulting is thought to reflect

continuing uplift, The associated crustal thickening

is apparently not causing a significant crustal root.

The axis of the highlands corresponds with 4

gravity high that may be due to underlying high

density basement. The highlands appear ip be a

reactivation of the struciural feature causing this

eravity high.

Acknowledyments

We wre grateful to C. C, yon der Borch and M,

Idnurm for comments on aspects of this work, and

to D. M. Boyd, Vo A. Gostin and W. Preiss for

referees’ cominents The figures were drafted by

John Conyiné of BMR, Published with the

permission of the Director, Bureau of Mineral

Resourmes,

FLINDERS/MT LOFTY RANGES WW

References

ALLeY, N. F. (1973) Landsurface development iy the mld

normh of South Australia. Tras 8, Soc. S Aust. 97, 17,

BMR (197#a) Magnetic map-of Australia, residuals of (otal

intensity, 1:2 500000 scale. (Bureau of Mineral

Resources, Australia),

—— (19766) Gravity:map of Australia, 1:5 000 000 scale

(Bureau of Mineral Resources, Australia),

CHAMALAUN, FH, (1986) Extension of tle: Flinders

Ranges anomaly. Faol, Geophy 17, 31.

CALLEN, R, A, (1983) Late Tertiary “grey billy" and the

age and origin of surficial silicatications (silerere) in

South Australis, 2 Geal, Soe, Aust. 30, 393-410.

Cut, 1 P. (1982) An appraisal of Australian heat-flow

data. BMR J. Aust. Geol. Geophy, 7, 11-21,

FINLAYSON, D, M., PRopgeHL, C., & Coins, C.D, N,

(1979) Explosion seismic profiles, and implications for

crustal evolution, in southeastern Australia, AWR

Aust, Geol, Geophy, 4, 243-252.

Firman, J. B. (1969) Quaternary period. pp. 204-233. fn

L_ W. Parkin (Ed) “Handbook of South Australian

Geology" (Geological Survey of South Australia,

Adelaide),

Furness, L. J, Wateknouse, J, D, & Epwarps, D, R,

(1981) The hydrogeology of the Hindmarsh Tiers and

Myponga Basitis, Geol, Surv. S. Aust. Rep. Invest. $3.

Gostin, V. A. & JENKINS, R. J. F. (1980) Possible western

outlet for an ancient Murray River in South Australia,

|. An alternative Wewpoint. Search 11, 225-226.

GREENHALGR, S& A. SINGH, R. & PARAM, R, T. (1985)

Earthquakes in Seuth Australia. Thoms. & Soc. S Awst.

109, 145-154.

— & Tap.er, D. (in press) Crustal heterogeneity in

South Australia; earthquake evidence Geophys JR.

astr Sac.

——, —— & SINGH, R. (1986) Crustal structure of South

Ausiralia from earthquake and explasian data. Geol,

Soc. Aust, Abstracts 15, 87-88.

GSA (1971) Tectonic map of Australia and New Guinea,

1:5 OO) O00 scale. (Geological Society of Australia,

_ Sydney).

Gunn, P. J, (1984) Recognition of ancient rift systems:

examples from the Proterozoic of South Australia.

Exploration Geophy, 15, 85-97.

Hanis, W, K., Linpsay, J.M. & Twipare, C, R. (1980)

Possible western outlet for an ancient Murray River in

Sourh Australia, 2. A discussion, Search 11, 226-227,

Jones, J. G. & Varvers, J, J. (b982) A Cainozoic history

of pusiraita’s Eastern Highlands, Geol, Sac, Aust. J.

, L-2,

Kemp, E. M. (1978) Tertiary climatic evolution and

vegetation history in the southeast Indian Oceatt region.

Palevoyeog. Paleoclim. Paleoecal, 14, 169-208,

Linpsay, J. M, (1986) Easter: St. Vincent Basin, pp,

55-64. In.A, J. Parker (compiler) “One day geological

excursions of (he Adelaide region, 81h Australian

Geological convention, February 1986." (Gevlvgical

Socicty of Australia Inc, Sauth Australian Division,

Adelaide).

MiCue, K.P & Surtow, DB, 4, (19795 South Austratian

saniboaiiakes during 1976 and 1977. + Geol. Soe, Auer

» 231-236.

Mites, A, R., BoUkman, R. P. & NortHooTe, K. H.

(1985) Field relationships of ferricectes and weathered

zones. in southern Sauth Australia: a contribution lo

‘laterite’ studies in Australia, Aust. J Soil Res. 23,

441-465,

Our, C, D, (1978) Tectonics ard geomorphology of

the Eastern Highlands. pp_ 5-47. ¢n Davies, JL. &

Williams, M. J. A., (Ed.) “Landform evolution in

Australasia", (Australian. National University Press,

Canberra).

Paeiss, W. V, (1983) Adelaide Geosyneline und Stuart

Sheil, Precambrian and Palaeozoic geology (with special

tefetence to the Adelaidian) 1:6 000 000. scale.

(Department of Mines and Energy, Adelaide).

——, Rurranp, R. W. R. & Murrecr, B. (1981) The

Stuart Shelf and Adelaide Geosyncline. pp, 327-360. Int

Hunter, D, R. (Ed.) “The Precambrian of the Southern

flemisphere, Developments in Precambrian Geology,

2", (Blseviet, Amsterdam),

SHACKLEFORD, P. R. J. & Sutton, D. J. (1981) A first

interpretation of crustal structure in the Adelaide

Geosyncline in South Australia using quarry blasts. J

Geol, Soc, Aust, 28, 491-500,

THOMPSON, B, P, (1970) A review of the Precambrian and

Lower Palaeozoic tectonics of South Australia, Trans,

R.. Soc. S. Aust, 94, 206-221.

Twipa.e, C, R, (1976) Geomorphological evolution. pp.

43-59, InC. R. Twidale, M. J, Tyler & B. P. Wobb (Eds)

“Nalural history of the Adelaide region" (R. Soc S

Aust,, Adelaide),

Twiware, C. R., Litpsay, J. M,& Bourne, J. A. (1978)

Age and origin of the Murray River and gorge in Sourh

Australia, Prove, &. Soc. Vict, 90, 27-42

VAN DE GrAatk, W. J, EB, (1981) Palaeogeagraphic

eyOlution of a rifted cratonic margin: SW, Australia —

aiecation: Patdeogeog. Pulaeoclim. Palaeaecol. 34,

3-172

Veevers, J, J., (Ed.) (1984) ‘Phanerozoic earth history of

Australis.” (Clarendon Press, Oxford).

VON DER Hokcw, C. C. (1980) Evolution of Late

Proterozoic to Early Paleozoic Adelaide Fold Relt,

Australia! Comparisons wilh post-Permian rifts and

passive margins. Teeranophysics 70, 115-134.

Ween, B. P. (1957) Summary of tecronies and

sedimentation. #n M. F, Glaessner & 1,. W, Parkin (Eds)

erie Cieolosy of South Australia". J. Geol. Soc; Aust.

. 136-148,

Weitman, P. (1979) On the isostatic compensation of

Australian topography, BMR. J. Austr. Geol. Geuphy.

4, 373-382.

—— (1987) Eastern Highlands of Australias its upli!l and

erosion, AMR. L Aust. Geol Geophy, 10(3), 277-286,

Wittisms, G. B. & Goong, A. BD. T. (1978) Possible

western outlet for the ancient Murray River in Sourh

Australia, Search 9, 443.447,

Wyatt, A. R. (1986) Post-Triassic continental hypscmeiry

and sea level, & Geol. Soc. London, 143, 907-910.

SETOBATES (ACARIDA: CRYPTOSTIGMATA: SCHELORIBATIDAE)

FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN SOILS

BY DAVID C. LEE & GEORGE A. PAJAK*

Summary

Setobates Balogh, 1962 is rediagnosed and compared with other genera in the Scheloribatidae.

Two species are described as new: S. ultraforaminosus, S. coronopubes. They are from soil and

litter from the arid, semi-arid and mallee-heath sites, but not the other six South Australian sites in

the Mediterranean type region. This is the first record of Setobates from Australia. Hysteronotal

chaetotaxy is discussed. Five species are newly combined with Setobates.

KEY WORDS: Setobates ultraforaminosus sp. nov., S. coronopubes sp. nov., Acarida, chaetotaxy,

soils, South Australia.

SETOBATES (ACARIDA: CRYPTOSTIGMATA; SCHELORIBATIDAE) FROM SOUTH

AUSTRALIAN SOILS

By Davin C. Lik & GrorGce A. PASAK*

Summary

Len, D ©, & Parak, CG. 4. (1988) Serobates (Acarida: Cryptostigmata: Schelarbatidag) From South

Australian soils. Trans, & Soc. S. Aust 112(1), 21-27, 31 May 1988,

Selobates Balugh, 1962 is rediagnosed and compared with uther genera in the Schelaribatidue Twa

species are described as new: S. u/traforaminusts, S coronopuhes, They are franvsorl and biter from the

arid, setni-arid and anallee-heath sites, but not the other six South Australian siles in the Medilerrancan-

type region, This is the first recoud of Serodeves from Australia. Hysteronoral chaetolaxy is disetissed Pive

species are newly combined with Serobates.

Key Wonus: Selobates ultraforaminosus sp, nav., & coronopubes sp. nos, Acarida, chaatoutxy, soils

South Australia,

Introductinn

This publication is part of an ongoing study of

sarcoptiform mites in South Australian soils,

sampled from nine florally diverse sites, and for

which there is an introduction to the relevant work

on the advanced oribate mites (Planofissurae) (Lee

1987). A paper on the family to which Sefohgtes

belongs, Scheloribatidag, and its nominotype,

includes relevant further comments on methods

(Lee & Pajak in press), Measurements aré in microns

(um),

No new hotational systems are introduced here,

bul the hysteronotal chaetotaxy is commented on

to indicate how 4a commitment to certain

homologies was reached, which in turn requires a

new signaiure for one seta. The srules studied have

been deposited in the South Australian Museum.

Hysteronotal Chuetotaxy

1) is assumed that the primitive complement of

hysteronotal setae amongst Cryptostigmata is 16

pairs (6/, 67, 45) (Lee 1987) and that the general

trend is towards loss of sctal pairs (regressive

synapomorphies) in the adults. On the other hand,

primitive members ol the Manofissuree, the

Pherenotac, have fewer pairs (with J4 absent except

amongst Hermaniellidae) than some members of

the advanced Poronotae (including Setobates with

J4 present), indicating that if the Pherenotae are

a paraphyletic group that is ancestral to the

remaining Planofissurae, then the relevant

synapomorphies are not always regressive ‘The

tritonymphs of the Poronotae and adults of the

included Constrictobates (see Lee 1987, Fig. 3) have

15 pairs of hysteronotal setae, lacking $2, and this

is assumed to be the primitive full complement for

* Div of Natural Senee, South Australian Museum,

North Terrace, Advfaide, 5. Aust. S000.

the Poranotae, although Neofrichozetes is

hypertrichous with 35 pairs of hysieronotal setae,

Amongst Oripadoidea most genera have ten pairs

of hystcronotal setae and some as few as seven pairs,

whilst Setobates has amongst the more extensive

chaelotaxies with up.to 14 pairs where the second

absent pair is considered to be Ji. After

lransformation, this is the only disagreement with

previous homologies. The closely allied Topohates

with 14 pairs, for example, being regarded as having

presene ‘el! and 'c2" and not 'c3" (Grandjean 1958,

Fig. 3A) or, transformed to the notation used here,

Si ois absent and J! is present. Deciding the

hysteranotal setae that are lost in some members

of Serobates, regarded here as including species with

as few as 1] pairs, as well as from other genera such

as the closely allied Schelorihates, is difficute. The

seta] chaetotaxy of tritonymphs is conservative and

too drastically changed in many adults to be useful

in establishing homologies, whilst tte relative

position of adult se(ae to other struetures such as

pores probably varies between taxa within the

Oripodoidea. Here, the option of trying to

maximise the similarity between taxa is taken so that

hosition variations are regarded as translocations

of setae. As a result, Sche/oributes is regarded as

having a hysteronotal chaetotaxy of 2/7, 6Z, 2S,

requiring a modification of the initial Interpretation

of the 10-pair system (Lée 1987, Fig. 2), seta ‘i’

being Z3 not J3, so thal it is homologous to ‘rr’

in. the 13-pair system (Lee 1987, Fig. 1). This is as

previously given by Balogh (1972, Fig. 5), and when

the common ten pairs of hysteronotal setae of

oripodeid species are treated as a reduced 1$-patr

system (/@ etc.) as for Crypfezeres (Norton &

Palacios-Vargas 1987, Fig, JA) rather than the

10-pair system (/a ete.) previously used (e.g, as for

Hemileins by Grandjean 1953, Fig, A). Also, in

this study, the chactotaxy of Anoplozetes (see Lee

& Pajak 1987, Fig. 1) shuwld be changed. so thar

what was represented as J/9 shuuld be regarded as

22 D.C. LEE & G. A. PAJAR

Z3, the formula becoming 2/, 6Z, 2S, seta 23 being

transposed into the J3 position relative to the slit-

like. pore Af3,

Setobates Balogh, 1962

Setobales Balogh, 1962, p. 122 (type-species by original

designation: “Sefobates magaus sp. n.”); Coetzer 1968,

p. 91; Luxton 1985,, p. 68,

Type-species: Setobaies magnus Balogh, 1962.

Diagnosis: Scheloribatidae. Hysteronotum with

M-14 pairs (2-S/, 6Z, 2-35) of setae und four or

five pairs of normal (not fissuriform) sacculate

foramina, Proteronotal sensory seta (72) usually

lanceolate, rarely capitate or fusiform, not setiform.

No translamella or complete interlamella line (setae

zl-zl), prelamella (setae z]-/1) sometimes present.

Pteromorph present, cither short-or long, anterior

margin merging with dorsosejugal furrow without

dorsally obscuring aperture to bothridium (base of

seta 22). Hysteronota! surface without tubercles,

granulations or conspicuous longitudinal striae.

Four pairs of genital setae (/Zg). Discidium present.

Tarsus | with three proximoventral setae (avi, pvl,

v2). Trochanter LV semisquare in vertical outline,

distodorsal surface right-angulate. Pretarsus with

three claws.

Morphology of Australian Species: Somali length

range: 328-586, Somal chaetotaxy; 2/, 2z, Is; SJ,

6Z, 2-35; 34, VW, IU, IK; 4/Zg, (Se, 2.JZa, 38a.

All setae of normal length, no micrusetue.

Bothridium base without posterior flange.

Proteronotal sete j2-/2 well separated (distance

greater than jl-zl), Two pairs of unnamed

hysteronotal circular pores (anterior pair between

scta Z2 and pore of /3; posterior pair just anterior

to seta /4), only posterior pair illustrated (Figs 1

and 4), anterior pair indistinct. Hysteronotum with

5 pairs of large slit-shaped pores, dorsally placed

Af} and Af6 larger, hfl, hf4, 4/5 apparent from

ventral aspect, Af2 not located. Multituberculate

cerotegument lying between leg bases and

qo0,Lm

Figs. 1-2. Sefohates ultraforaminasus sp. noy., female. 1, notum of soma; 2, sternum al soma,

SETOBSATES, SCHELORIBATID MITES 23

pitromerph base plus lamella, recminating level

with middle of legs | and 1V, Lateral coxite setae

(2,3, (2, 703, 143) longer (han those around

midline Adaxial end of apodeme base LIL level with

seta JZg2 and seta FHI, Discidium Iriangulate,

equilateral. Custodial ridge merging with

pedoteetuim Ll base and not discidial ridge. Some

lee segments always with porose areas and rugae.

Lees of medium-length (mean ferur-tarsus: 44%

uf soma) and stout or of medium-girth (mean

maximum tibial height: 3§-43% of mican length).

Femur I with seta v between 0.5-0,75 « flange

depth towards periphery, Tibia | dorsal surface

slaping upwards from base to solenidium, Tibia

willr proximoventral spur, Tarsi | and [L gradually

tapering distally for more than half their length

(subtriangulate), Preiarsi with lateral claws much

slimmer.

Distribytion: Probably cosmopolitan, but records

only from Argentina and Bolivia (NTe), Tanzania

(Ee), Europe (Pe, Pm); New Zealand (An) and now

known from Austraha (Aa), The South Australian

material is from three dry sites (with encompassing

mean annual rainfalls): Arid tussock grassland

(125-350 num} Semi-arid shrubland (150-200 num):

Mallee-heath, tall open shrubland (450-500 mm).

Records from other regions of the world are from

a wide range of habitats including mostly moist

sites.

Remarks: Setobates 18 used here to include most

species of Scheloribalidae that have more than ten

pairs of hysteronotal sctac, Orher genera in this

category are Topobates Grandjean, 1958 wilh 14

pairs of hysteronotal setae but a granulated

hysteronotum, Sanioabates Hammer, (973 with 14

pairs of hysteronotal setae but only one pretarsal

slaw and Siriatobates Hammer, 1973 with 11 pairs

of hysteronotal setaé and a striated tuberculale

hysteronotum. The following 13 species are grouped

in Setobates: 8, alvaradai (Pérez-[higo, 1968) comb.

nov. ex Scheloribates; S. campestris (Mihelti¢,

1966) comb. nov. cx Scheloribates; S. coronopybes

sp. nov., S. fabyrinthicus (Jeleva, 1962 in Csiszar

& Jeleva 1962) comb, nov, ex Scheforibares; &.

latipes (Koch, 1841; Shaldytina, 1975) comb. nav.

ex Schvloribates; S. dongior (Hammer, 1958); S.

magnus Balogh, 1962 (type-species); 5, mmedius

Hammer, (967 (syn. S. discors Hammer. 1967); &

pallidus (Micheléic, 1956) comb, nov ex

Scheloribates; S. parviatatus (Hamner, 1958); S

scheloribatoides (Ramsay, IAG) (syn. S. nner

Hammer, 1967); S. witraforaninosus sp, now, 8,

wmbraili (Schweizer, 1954). Sefobaies is very similar

to Selieloribates, For same species, the greater

number of hysteronotal sctae is the only substantial

difference from species of (he exse/osus-compler

(Scheloribates) and the delineation of the two

wenera as presented here is provisional, S.

Jabyrinthicus i particular, with only a spine-like

seta SI extra Lo the ten pairs of Sehelaribores, may

wel] have to be returned to that wens,

Setobates ultraforamingsus sp, nov.

FIGS t-3

Female: Idlosomal length, S41 ¢semi-arid shrubland,

6, SIS-S8A), 331 (arid tussock grassland, 2,

$27-535). Leg lengths (fensur-larsus fur 560, semi-

atid shrubland): 1-263, (1-239, 10-211, 1V-262,

Tibial maximuny heights (for 560, semi-arid

shrubland): 1-27, U-22, If[-18, 1V-19,

Protermnetum with complete prelamella (sera

Ji-31) accompanied by dark sclerotization in

integument, Sublamella distinct from lamella along

nearly entire length. Interlamella scta (/2) able ta

reach to about level of base of rostral seta (jl).

Sensory seta (72) tong, able to reach to beyond level

of seta j2, exposed stalk more than half length,

caput lanceulate with one dorsal and one ventral

cilia file, in dorsal aspect at Limes appearing parallel-

sided and nearly setose wilh cilia not evident. Seta

s2 length about «<3 diameter of bothridium-

Hysteronotum with 14 (54, 6Z, 35) pairs of medium-

sized setae present, seta St present on all specimens.

Five pairs of foramina (F3. Fae, Fab, 5, F6) with

narrow slit-shaped pore and duct leading to small

globular sac.

Narrow gap between apodemes |, slighily less

than distance between setac /l-/1. Circumpedat

ridge long and curved, merging with discidial ndee

Seta Sa2 substantially longer (abour <1-5) than $v3.

Egg subellipsoidal, exochorion mainly granulate, at

poles rugose, 213 = 125 {for 560, semiarid

shrubland) and 210 « 118 (for 527, arid ussack

grassland). Females examined (6) from semi-arid

shrubland with Four eges each. Females examined

(2) from arid tussock grassland had either no eges

or eight, eggs,

legs of medium-girth (mean maximum tibial

height: 38% of mean length), Small ventral flange

on femur |. Femur It with ventral flange ryinning

entire length of segment. Tibia | with posterior

proximoventral ridge obscuring outhne of

proximoventral spur, Tarsi longer (+ 2109 am) than

their tespective tibia,

Afole: Sunilar Lo female but shorter mean length.

Idigsomal length, 496 (semi-arid shrubland, 3,

481-511), 504 (arid tussock grassland, 5, 473-360).

Material examined: Holorype female (NI9877145),

five paratype females (NIYS7716-N1987720), three

24 D. C. LEE & G. A. PAJAK

Fig. 3. Sefobates ultraforaminosus sp. nov., female, posterior aspect of part (femur-pretarsus) of right legs, only one

seta (v femur II) illustrated.

paratype males (N1987721—N1987723), soil, litter,

moss and other low growth plants under bladder

saltbush (A/riplex vesicaria) amongst sparse false

sandlewood (Myoporum platycarpum), Koonamore

Vegetation Reserve (32°07'S, 139°21'E), 27.vi.1974,

D. C, Lee. Two undesignated females (N1987724,

N1987725), third female lost, five undesignated

males (N1987726 -N1987730), bases of love grass

(Eragrostis eriopoda) tussocks, near Emu (28°41'8,

132°08'E), 11.x.1974, D. C. Lee.

Distribution: Australia (Aa). South Australia. Lake

Frome Basin, semi-arid shrubland, six females and

three males in 4 of 8 x 25 cm* samples. Great

Victoria Desert, arid tussock grassland, three

females and five males in 4 of 8 x 25 cm? samples.

Remarks: §. ultraforaminosus is very similar to. 5.

alvaradoi from Spain, having 14 pairs of

hysteronotal setae and five pairs of foramina (F4

divided into F4@ and F4b). S, alvaradoi differs in

SETOBATES, SCHELORIBATID MITES 25

that sensory seta z2 is rounded distally, hysteronotal

seta Z] is less than half the length of Sl and that

on femur Il the ventral flange is not very big. It

is likely, on the basis of adult form, that 5,

ulfraforaminosus occurs at the two sites listed, but,

because the number of cggs per female in the small

series from near Emu is eight, rather than

umformly four as in the large series from

Koonamore, it has been excluded from the type

series,

Setobates coronopubes sp.. nov,

FIGS 4-6

Male (female not known): Idiosomal length, 331 (2,

328 and 334). Leg lengths (femur-tarsus for 328):

1-159; H-146; 111-127; I'V-150, Tibial maximum

heights (for 328): 1-20; 11-17; Ifl-15; 1V-13,

Proteronotum with prelamella restricted to short

ridge near seta zg]. Sublamella distinct from lamella

along nearly entire Jength. Interlamella seta (/2)

unable to réach level of base of rostral seta (/1).

400 am

Sensory seta (z2) long, able to reach beyond level

of seta /2, exposed stalk less than half length, caput

lanceolate, indistinctly delineated from stalk, with

three cilia Hles. Seta s2 length about x2 diameter

of bothridium, Hysteronotum with 13 pairs of

medium-sized setae, seta S1 absent. Four pairs of

foramina (F3, 4, FS, 6) with circular pore leading

to small globular ‘sac.

Moderate gap between apodemes T, more than

distance between seta JI-/1. Zone of integument

around lateral and posterior margin of genital

orifice denser with concentric subsurface striations,

forming “halo” with transmitted light for which

boundaries indicated by broken line in illustration

(Fig. 5), Circumpedal ridge short and straight, not

merging with discidial ridge. Seta Sa2 subequal in

length to Sa3.

Legs stout (mean maximum tibial height: 43%

of mean length). No ventral flange on femur I,

Femur II] with ventral flange restricted to distal

two-thirds of segment. Tibia J without

Figs. 4-5. Sétobates coronopubes sp, nov,, male. 4, notum of soma; 5, sternum of soma.

26 D.C. LEE & G. A. PAJAK

Fig. 6. Setobates coronopubes sp, noy., male, posterior aspect of part (femur-pretarsus) of right legs, only one seta

(y, femur IT) illustrated.

proximoventral spur, but girth increases

conspicuously from stalk to caput. Tarsi subequal

to length to their respective tibia (—2 to +2 ym).

Material examined; Holotype male (N1987731),

paratype male (N1987732), soil, litter under banksia

shrubs (Banksia ornata) amongst other

sclerophyllous shrubs and sparse brown stringybark

mallee (Eucalyptus baxteri), Tamboore Homestead

(35°57'S, 140°29'E), 4.vii.1974, D. C. Lee.

Distribution: Australia (Aa). South Australia.

Ninety Mile Desert (nutritional desert), mallee-

heath, tall open shrubland, two males in 2 of 8 x

25 cm? samples.

Remarks: S. coronopubes, known only by the male,

has a generically unique “halo” around the posterior

margin of the genital orilice. The hysteronotal

chaetotaxy is as for five other species of Sefobates,

including the type-species, but besides the

characteristic genital “halo” it is about 100 ym

shorter than any other species of Setobates,

Acknowledgments

We wish to thank the Australian Biclogical

Resources Study for a grant to D.C.L., funding the

salary of G.A.P., Ms Jenni Thurmer for the

notation and presentation of the figures and Mrs

Debbie Brunker for typing the manuscript.

References

BaLoon, J. (1962) Acari Oribates. Annis Mus. r. Afr.

cent, Sér. 8 110, 90-131.

—— (1972) “The Oribatid Genera of the World”.

(Akadomiae Kiado, Budapest.)

CoeTzer, A, (1968) New Oribatulidae Thor, 1929

(Oribatei, Acari) from South Africa, new combinations

and a key to the genera of the family. Mems Inst. Invest,

cient, Mogamb., série A 9, 15-126,

Csiszak, J. & JELEVa, M. (1962) Oribatid mites (Acari)

from Bulgarian soils. Acta. zool. hung. 8, 273-301.

GRANDJEAN, F, (1953) Sur les genres “Alemileius” Berl.

et “Siculobata” ng. (Acariens, Oribates), Mém. Mus,

SETOBATES, SCHELORIBATID MITES 27

natn. Hist. nat, Paris (n.s.) sér. A. Zool. 6, 117-138.

—— (1958) Scheloribatidae et Oribatulidae (Acariens,

Oribates). Bull. Mus. natn, Hist, nat. Paris (2), 30,

352-359.

HAMMER, M. (1958) Investigations on the oribatid fauna

of the Andes Mountains. 1. The Argentine and Bolivia.

Biol. Skr. 10(1), 1-129, 34 pls.

— (1967) Investigations on the oribatid fauna of New

Zealand, Part II, Ibid. 15(4), 1-64, 40 pls,

—— (1973) Oribatids from Tongatapu and Eua, the Tonga

Islands, and from Upolu, Western Samoa. Ibid. 20(3),

1-70, 29 pls.

Lee, D, C. (1987) Introductory study of advanced oribate

mites (Acarida: Cryptostigmata: Planofissurae) and a

redescription of the only valid species of

Constrictobates (Oripodoidea). Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 21,

35-42.

—— & Pasak, G. A, (1987) Anoplozetes, a new genus

of Zetomotrichidae (Acarida: Cryptostigmata) from

South Australia. Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. 111(2), 99-103.

& — (in press) Scheloribates (Acarida:

Cryptostigmata: Planofissurae) from the eastern

Mediterranean-type region of Australia. Jnvert, Tux.

Luxton, M. (1985) Cryptostigmata (Arachnida: Acari) —

a concise review. Fauna of New Zealand 7, 1-106.

MIHELCIC, F (1956) Oribatiden Sudeuropas. V. Zool,

Anz. 157, 154-174.

—— (1966) Zur Kenntnis der Milben

Zentralspaniens. Eos 41, 459-470.

Norton, R. A. & PaLacois-Varaas, J. C. (1987) A new

arboreal Scheloribatidae, with ecological notes on

epiphytic oribatid mites of Popocatepetl, Mexico.

Acarologia 28, 75-89,

PEREZ-INIGO, C. (1968) Neuvos oribatidos de suelos

espanoles. Eos 44, 377-403,

Ramsay, G. W. (1966) Two new oribatid mites from a

New Zealand pasture. N.Z. J. Sci. 9(2), 416-425.

SCHWEIZER, J. (1956) Die Landmilben des

Schweizerischen Nationalparkes. 3. Teil: Sarcoptiformes

Reuter 1909. Ergebn. wiss. Unters schweiz. NatnParks,

(n.f.) 5,- 215-377.

SHALDYBINA, E. S. (1975) Sarcoptiformes. Oribatuloidea.

pp. 100-101. Jn M. S. Ghilarov, ed., [dentification key

to the soil dwelling mites. Academy of Sciences,

U.S.S.R., Moscow: 491 pp, (in Russian).

Fauna

A NEW SPECIES OF NOTADEN (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE)

FROM THE KIMBERLEY DIVISION OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

BY G. M. SHEA* & G. R. JOHNSTON

Summary

Notaden weigeli sp. nov. is described from the northern Kimberley of Western Australia. It is

distinguished from congeners by its longer legs (TL/S-V 0.34-0.38 vs 0.25-0.34), more prominent

subarticular and palmar tubercles, red to fawn dorsum without black markings and lack of a pale

mid-rostral streak. The cranial skeleton is very reduced. N. weigeli is apparently allopatric to other

species of Notaden and is associated with rocky habitats.

KEY WORDS: Notaden, Anura, new species, morphology, osteology, discriminant function

analysis.

A NEW SPECIES OF NOTADEN (ANURA; LEPTODACTYLIDAE)

FROM THE KIMBERLEY DIVISION GF WESTERN AUSTRALIA

By G. M. SHEA* & G. R. JOHNSTON]

Summary

SHEA, G, M. & JoHsston, G, R. (1987) A new species of Nataden (Anura: Leptodactylidae) fram the

Kimberley Division of Western Australia. Trans, R. Soc. S; Auést, 112(1), 29-37, 31 May 1988,

Notaden weigeli sp. noy, is described from the porthern Kimberley of Western Australia. 1 is

distinguished fram congeners by its longer legs (TL/S-V 0.34-0.38 vs 0,25-0,34), more prominent subarticular

and palmar tubercles, red to fawn dorsum without black markings and lack of a pale mid-rostral streak.

The cranial skeleton is very reduced. N. weigeli is apparently allopatric to other species of Notaden and

is assoviated with rocky habitats.

Key Worbs: Notaden, Anura, new species, morphology, osteology, discriminant function analysis.

Introduction

The Known anuran fauna of the Kimberley

division of Western Australia currently comprises

38 species, the majority (22 species) having been

first described or recorded from the region since

1976, Ten of these species are apparently endemic

to the Kimberley or nearly so (Tyler, Smith &

Johnstone 1984; Tyler, Davies & Watson 1987), This

paper describes a further new species apparently

endemic to the Kimberley.

Materials and Methods

Specimens cited here are located in the Australian

Museum, Sydney (4M), South Australian Museum,

Adelaide (SAM) and Western Australian Museum,

Perth (WAM),

All measurements were made to 0.1L mm with a

pair of dial calipers. Snout-vent Jength (S-V), head

width (HW), eye diameter (E), eye to naris interval

(E-N) and internarlal span (IN) are as defined by

Hosmer (J962), Head length was not measured,

Tibia length (TL) was measured fram the heel to

the point of the tibial tuberosity, with the leg flexed,

Foot length (FL) was measured from the heel to the

Up of the fourth toe, with the foot straightened. A

single specimen was cleared and double stained for

bone and cartilage following the method of Hanken

& Wassersug (1981).

Descriptive statistics were calculated for S-V and

a number of morphometric ratios (Table 1) from

sainples of all Noltaden species. Multiple

comparisons of arcsine-transformed ratios were

made using single classification ANOVA (Sokal &

Rohit 1981). A multiple discriminant function

analysis (Reyment, Blackith & Campbell 1984) of

taw iMeasurement§ was done using SPSS PC+

* Deparment of Veieringary Anaromy, University of

Sydney, NSW 2006,

{Cy 16 McBwin Street, Whyalla Playford, S Aust,

560K),

(Norusis 1986) on a Pantek PC-16 computer. Sexes

were pooled for all analyses.

Ontogenetic variation was. examined by fitting

TL, FLand HW lor N. bennetii, N. melanoseaphus

and N. nichollsi ta the allometric equation Y =

bS-V" (Huxley 1932; Gould 1966), where Y is the

variable being examined, S-V is used as a measure

of overall size, ais the allametric coefficient (slope)

and ® is a constant. Allometric coefficients were

tested against unity using standard normal deviates

(Zar 1974),

Notaden weigeli sp. nov.

FIGS 1-9

Notuden sp. nov: Tyler, Davies and Watson 1987, p S45-

Holotype: WAM R77419, Sandstone Ck, WA,

(14°53'30"S 125°45'00"E), collected by C. Kemper

On. 26.X.1981.

Paratypes:AM R123896-99, Mitchell Plateau, WA,

(14°51’S 125°40'E), J. Weigel, G. Shea and A.

Harwood, 6-8.1.1987; WAM R§3428-29, 23 km NW

old Mount Elizabeth HS, WA {16"12'S 126°00'E),

H, Ehmann and G. R. Johnston, 29,xi.1982,

Diagnosis: Notader weigeli differs from all other

Notaden species in its longer legs (TL/S-¥ 0.34-0.38

vs 0,.25-0,34), more prominent subarticular and

palmar tubercles, red to fawn dorsum without black

markings and lack of a pale mid-rostral streak,

Description af holotype: Size large (S-V S44

mm). Head small, as broad as long, length

approximately 4 S-V (Fig. 1), Snout truncated

when Viewed from above; high and bluntly rounded

in profile (Fig, 2). HW/S-¥V 0.30. Nostrils superior.

Eye-naris interval equal to internarial span (E-N/1N

1.00). Nostrils nearer ta tip of snout than to eye,

Canthus rostralis poorly defined, very short, Eye

prominent (B/S-V 0.13), diameter approximately

twice E-N. Tympanum covered by glandular skin.

Maxillary and vomerine teeth absent. Tongue oval.

30 G. M. SHEA & G. R, JOHNSTON

TABLE 1. Comparative morphometrics of post-metamorphic specimens of Notaden species. Values are given as X

(SD) over range.

N. bennetti N. melanoscaphus N. nichollsi N. weigeli

N 22 49 7

S-V (mm) 38.4 (14.83) 43.3 (6.25) 46.2 (5.68) 57.0 (10.05)

20.7-67.4 27.9-50.7 37.9-60.4 46.6-71.1

TL/S-V 0.29 (0.02) 0.28 (0.02) 0.29 (0.01) 0.35 (0.01)

0.25-0.34 0.25-0.34 0.26-0,32 0.34-0.38

FL/S-V 0.50 (0.04) 0.51 (0.04) 0.53 (0.03) 0.58 (0.03)

0.43-0.59 0.40-0.61 0.49-0.59 0.55-0.64

HW/S-V 0.31 (0.03) 0.29 (0.02) 0.29 (0.02) 0.29 (0.02)

0.26-0.34 0.25-0.34 0.25-0.33 0.25-0.31

E-N/S-V 0.06 (0.01) 0.06 (0.01) 0.05 (0.01) 0.06 (0.01)

0.04-0.09 0.04-0.08 0.04-0.06 0.05-0.08

E-N/IN 0.98 (0.12) 1.17 (0.18) 0.83 (0.08) 1.18 (0.23)

0.75-1.25 0.92-1.65 0.68-1.00 1.00-1.59

E/S-V 0.12 (0.01) 0.11 (0.01) 0.14 (0.01) 0.11 (0.02)

0.10-0.14 0.10-0.13 0.11-0.17 0.09-0.13

Fingers moderately long, unwebbed, cylindrical,

without lateral fringes (Fig. 3); finger length

3>1>2=4. Tips of fingers slightly dilated.

Subarticular tubercles large and sharply defined

proximally, poorly defined to absent distally; several

moderately large, rounded palmar tubercles.

Hind limbs short (TL/S-V 0.34; FL/S-V 0.58);

toe lengths 4>3>5>2>1; toes with weak lateral

fringes and basal webbing, reaching to base of

antepenultimate phalanx of fourth toe (Fig. 3);

subarticular tubercles prominent at base of toes,

poorly defined to absent distally. Outer metatarsal

tubercle absent; inner metatarsal tubercle large,

projecting, shovel-shaped with smoothly rounded

free margin, length approximately equal to its

distance from tip of first toe.

Skin of dorsal and lateral surfaces of body and

head thickened, pustulose to tubercular (Fig. 1);

Fig. 1 Notaden weigeli sp. nov. (Mitchell Plateau) in life. (Photograph: J. Weigel).

NEW NOTADEN SPECIES

Fig. 2, Dorsal yiew of heads of A, Noltaden. weiveli sp.

nov. and B, NM, nivhallsi,

snout more finely and weakly tubercular; a distinct

crease from commissure of lips to Jaleral canthus

of eye, bordered posteriorly by a broad ridge.

Individual glands obvious subdermally on

posterolateral margins of body. Skin extends from

body to knee laterally, so that groin is nor distinct

in life. Skin on yentral surfaces smooth.

In preservative, dorsum of head and body reddish

brown, obscurely marbled with lighter and darker

shades, and with a few white to cream tubercles,

Limbs dark grey, with prominent to obscure white

or cream flecks. Face and upper lips dark grey,

finely variegated and flecked with cream; pale

midrostral streak absent; pale vertical canthal streak

weakly developed, Venter cream, with weak brown

flecking on mandible, Inner metatarsal tubercle

unpigmented.

Measurements of holotype (in mm): S-V 54.4, TL

18.7, FL 31.6, HW 16.5, E. 7.0, E-N 3.0, DN 3.0,

Variation

Overall variation in limb.and cranial proportions

is presented in Table J.

]

tae

The Mitchell Plateau paratypes are similar to the

holotype, ranging in size from 46.6 to 60.8 mm. In

preservative, (he dorsal ground colour is fawn, The

pale dorsal tubercles and canthal streak are absent

on ‘some specimens.

Gravid females have 1.3 mm diameter oocytes

with black animal poles and white vegetal poles.

The two Mount Elizabeth Stn paratypes are very

much larger than the Mitchell Plateau series (S-V

68.7-71.1 mm), and have a longer snout (E-N/S-V

0,07-0.08 vs 0.05-0.06, E-N/IN 142-159 vs

1.00-1.12). However, in other characters, including

all significant diagnostic characters, they agree with

the topotypic sample.

Color in life (based on AM _ RI23896-99);

Dorsum fawn with numerous white-tipped orange

tubercles and scattered indistinct wrey-green patches,

Limbs grey with a few fine white tubercles above,

sharply demarcated from fawn of dorsum.

Hindlimh also with a few small orange flecks. Face

grey with white tubercles. Venter greyish. Inner

metatarsal tubercle unpigmented.

Pupil horizontally elliptic, with a distinct ventral

notch. Iris finely variegated golden green with a

gold pupillary margin.

Ostevlogy (based on AM R123898)

Cranium poorly ossified (Fig. 4). Sphenethmoid

not ossified either dorsally or ventrally, cartilage

extending 44-44 length of orbit in dorsal view.

wal

if J / [

A Cc

Fig, 3..A, B, Hand and foot of Notaden weigell sp. nov;

C, D, hand and foot of N, aichellsi:

2 GM, SHEA & G. R. JOHNSTON

Fig. 4. A, Yentral and B, dorsal views of skull of Nosaden weigel’ sp. nov. Approxitnate extent of some cranial cartilages

and frontopsricta! fontanclle indicated by dashed lines.

Exoccipitals and prootics paired, unfused. Crista

parolica non-ossified, moderately long, robust.

Frontoparietal fontanelle fully exposed, ovoid.

Frontoparictals poorly ossified, anterior extremities

slender, parallel, extending anteriorly +4 length of

orbit. Anterior margin of frontoparietal fontanelle

formed by cartilaginous sphenethmoid, posterior

margin formed by prootic cartilage, Nasals small,

widely separated, not in asseous contact with any

other cranial bones. Palatines very reduced to absent

(represented by a sliver of bone on left, absent on

right). Parasphenoid robust, with broad, moderately

long and terminally bifid cultriform process; alae

moderately short, broad, at right angles to

culuiform process. Pterygoid reduced; anterior

ramus not contacting maxilla; medial ramus short,

slender, well ossified; posterior ramus minute.

Quadratojugal reduced, widely separated from

maxilla. Squamosal reduced, with long acuminate

zygomatic ramus and lacking otic ramus. Maxilla

reduced, edentate; pars facialis shallow, with low,

poorly developed preorbital process, widely

separated from nasals. Alary provess of premaxilla

narrow, tall, acuminate and vertical; pars palalina

very shallow; palatine process short. Vomers

reduced, with narrow elongate edentate dentigerous

process; alae bordering rostral margin of choanac,

Columella long, sinuous, with a medial posterior

convexity and lateral anterior convexity; ossified

medially.

Hyoid plate slightly broader than long (Fig. 5).

Anterior hyale without anteromedial process, Alary

process pedunculate, without distal expansion.

Posterolateral process prominent, dilated distally,

Posteriot cornu ossified, with a distal cartilaginous

expansion.

Pectoral girdle arciferal and robust (Fig. 6).

Epicoracoid cartilages broadly overlapping.

Omosternum cartilaginous, dilated distally,

Xiphisternum, mesosiernum present, cartilaginous.

Clavicles moderately robust, curved, moderately

separated medially. Coracoids robust, moderately

separated medially, broadly expanded at both ends.

Scapula bicapitatc, approximately 15x length of

clavicle, Suprascapula ossified anteriorly, with a

hook-like cartilaginous process projecting

posteroventrally.

Phalangeal formula of manus 2.2.3.3. Terminal

phalanges pointed, slightly knobbed distally,

recurved, Carpus poorly ossified. Prepollex

cartilaginous,

Eight non-imbricate presacral vertebrae (Fig. 7).

Vertebrae I and I] fused; centra of vertebrac [1 and

Til fused. Cervical cotyles yery narrowly separated,

almost confluent. Neural arches completely ossi-

fied, robust, Relative widths of transverse processes

Fig. 5. Hyoid of Noraden weleeli sp oy. Hawhed areas

are vartilage.

NEW NOTADEN SPECIES 34

Fie. 6, Pectoral girdle of Noltaden weixeli sp. nov. A,

sternal region, B, left supraseapula. Hatched areas are

cartilage,

sacrum >III[>IV>II=V=VI>VIT>VIL>1,

Sacral diapophyses moderately expanded.

Bicondylar sacrococcygeal articulation. Well-

developed dorsal crest along anterior third of

urostyle.

Ilium with well-developed dorsal prominence

bearing a shallow notch on dorsal margin (Fig. &)-

Dorsal protuberance small, Hial shaft round in

section, moderately curved, Pubis largely

cartilaginous, slightly calcified ventrally, Ischium

with a well-defined vertically ovoid ossification.

Phalangeal formula of pes 2.2.3.4.3. Well-

developed cartilaginous prehallux reinforcing inner

metatarsal tubercle. Distal tarsal elements poorly

ossified.

Etymology

This species is named after Mr John Weigel of

Gosford, NSW, co-collector of the Mitchell Plateau

paratypes, in honour of his. efforts ta promote

amateur herpetology in Australia.

Comparison with other species.

Distribution; Notaden weigeli is apparently

allopatric to its three congeners; NM. bennedti

Gunther, N. melanoscaphus Hosmer and N.

nichollsi Parker (Cogger 1986; Tyler, Smith &

Johnstone 1984; ‘Tyler & Davies 1986). Within the

Kimberley Division, N. nicholist is largely confined

to the southwest and south, N. melunoscaphus to

the far east, with a single record from the central

Kimberley, and N. weigeli to the north (Fig. 9).

Known localities for NV. weige/i are separated ftom

those of N, melanoscaphus by 87:km and from

those of N. nichollsi by 188 km.

External morphology; In addition to the

characters given in the diagnosis, NV. weigeli differs

from N. bennetti in having a reddish dorsum

without black tubercles (vs yellow dorsum with

rounded black and red tubercles arranged in

vertebral and transverse series) and inner metatarsal

tubercle subequal in length to its distance from tip

of first toe (vs 1.2-2:0 times as long; Parker 1940).

N. weigeli further differs from N. melanoscaphus

in having an unpigmented inner metatarsal tubercle

(vs black) and in lacking large discrete islands of

Fig, 7. A, Ventral and B, dorsal views of vertebral column

of Notaden weigeli sp. nov.

Fig. 8. Pelvis of Notaden weiyel sp. nay, Hatched areas

are calcified.

a4 G, M, SHEA & G. R, JOHNSTON

dark pigmentation on the back icf. Hosmer 1962;

Tyler, Smith & Johnstone 1984, Plate 4; Tyler &

Davies 1986, Plate 40).

N. weigel/ further differs from NV. richollsr in

lacking black tubercles on the body, and in having

more narrowly spaced nostrils (Table 1).

Osteology: Few comparative dala have been

published .on the ostcology of other Novaden

species, The skull of N. aichollsi has been ligured

by Lynch (1971 Figs. 18, 56,57), who also described

a number of posteranial characteristics in his

diagnosis of the genus, based on N. bennetti and

N, aichollsi, However, there are seyeral discrepancies

jn Lynch’s osteological descriptions and figures of

Noieden that suggest that re-examination of the

osteology of these species is warranted.

The ossified portions af the skull of N. weigeli

are even more reduced than in NV. nicholls! and N.

melanuscaphus (M. Davies pers, comm.), This

reduction is most notable in the loss of ossification

of the sphencthmoid and palatines, and the

reduction of the anterior extremitics of the

frontoparietals. The apparent lack of distal dilations

of the alary processes of the hyoid of N, weigeli

is consistent with Tyler’s (1972) observations on

congeners. The fusion of the centra of the second

and third presacral vertebrae present in the NV.

weigeli specimen examined has not been recorded

for other Notaden species, but may be an individual

anomaly. The itansverse processes of the more

posterior presacral vertebrae, while short, are noc

knob-like (ef. Lynch £971, p. 56),

The ilia of N, nichollsi and N, rhelanoscaphus

are illustrated and described by Lynch (1971) and

Tyler (1976). The round ilial shaft of N. weiketi

resembles that of congeners.

Discriminant function analysis; Discriminant

function analysis of seven measurements, using

species of Notaden as a priori groupings, resulted

in the correct identification of 93.2% of specimens

overall. AlN. weigeli, 95% of N. melanoscaphus,

93.9% of N. nichollsi and 86.4% of N, bennett

were correctly grouped,

The first two disctiminant functions accounted

for 92.45% of the variance (Table 2), Unstandard-

ised discriminant function coefficients and their

correlations with the discriminant functions’ are

presented in Table 2. All characters show the Highest

correlation with the second discriminant function,

which most clearly separates N, wergell From its

congeners (Fig. 10).

Allometry: in N. bennetti, N, melanoscaphus and

N. nichollsi, HW showed significant negative

allometry. In N. nichollsi, TL and FL also show

negative allometry (‘lable 3), The ratio of B-N/IN,

however, varied independently of S-¥ in all three

species (R? < 0.04). Comparisons of HW, TL and

FL between species should therefore be made

between similarsized specimens. The frequency

distribution of S-¥ varied significantly between the

samples. of each taxon used here (F3y)4 = 10.1062,

P < 0,01). Consequently, although ratios showed

Significant differences (P’s < 0.01; Table 1) between

{axa, it is unclear whether these differences are real

or an attefact of pnequal size frequencies between

sarnples.

L ‘ ' ' '‘ | |

12B¢E 126E

124°E

* of

122°E

Fig. 9. Distribution of Nofaden weigeli sp. nov, (Iriangles),

N. mefanascapinus (inverted triangles) and MN. nicholist

{dots} In the Kimberley region (based on SAM and

WAM records).

Taste 2. Unatndardised discriminant function coefficients (and pooled-within-groups correlations with discriminant

functions) of seven characters from all species of Notaden,

Discriminant Function

Variable I If Ut

3-V — 0651 (0.0711 — 0,267 (0.302) 0.425 (0.233)

HW ~ 0.949 (0.098) ~ 0.322 (0.333) — 0,438 (0,164)

E 1.301 (0.334) 0.247 (0.490) 0,911 (0.287)

E-N — 1.514 (-0.159) 0,106 (0.313) 2.355 (0.306)

IN §.353 (0.353) 1.383 (0.398) — 1.426 (0.118)

TL ~ 0.520 (0,042) 0.917 (0,560) — 1.370: (0.076)

FL — 0.137 {0.074} 0.258 (0.545) 0.630 (0,307)

canslanr — 1.561 —i.14) —3,831

% of variance 67.93 24.51 7.53

NEW NOTADEN SPECIES 35

Habits and habitat

The holotype was collected in open low woodland

al Planchonia australis, Xanthostemon paradoxus,

Buchanania obovata-and Eucalyptus brachyandra

over open scrub and hummock grasses on rugged

sandstone (Kitchener ez al. 1981).

The Mount Elizabeth Stn paratypes were

collected between 2030-2400hr within arid near che

entrance to a small gorge in an isolated 4-6 m high

quartzite outcrop. Open Eucalyptus spp woodland

with negligible understorey and a groundcover of

grasses and forbs surrounded the outcrop. The

gorge itself was overgrown with Mimosa, Isolated

DISCRIMINANT FUNCTION II

8 -6 -4 2 0 2 4 6 8

DISCRIMINANT FUNCTION |

Fig. 10. Plot of individual Nofeden weigeli sp. nov.

(triangles), N. bennetri (dots), VN, melenoscaphus (open

circles) and N. aieholls! (open squares) on the first. two

discriminant fnnetion axes.

clumps of Pandanus occurred on drainage channels

associated with the outcrop. Both specimens were

active after light rain on rock ledges covered with

Jeaf litter.

The Mitghell Plateau paratypes were collected

within 200 m of the Mitchell River. The habitat at

this site consists of a yellow sandplain with densely

packed, small to moderate-sized Plectrachne and

Triedia tassocks and an open woodland of tall

shrubs and trees dominated by £ucalypius spp and

Acacia spp. There are numerous, ¢xtensive quartzite

rock platforms, often with clifflike margins, raised

up to 3m above the level of the plain, bearing

scattered Plectrachne tussocks on a skeletal sandy

soil. Closer to the Mitchell River, these rock

platforms are higher (up to 6m), their bases riddled

with rock shelters and narrow tunnels, and the

sandplain is reduced to narrow sand drifts with

numerous partially buried boulders ‘and smaller

stones. The bed and bordering overflow area of the

Mitchell River consists of a bare shect of rock with

several steps and scattered piles of waterworn

boulders, and Pandanus and Melaleuca-fringed

pools. Specimens were active at night, in a puddle

on top of a raised rock platform (AM R123897),

on a low rock platform partially butied by coarse

river sand and surrounded by dense Triodia thickets

(AM R123898), and on a rock Icdge 1.5 m above

the surrounding sandplain, following light rain two

days previously (AM R123896),

One individual was observed torun rapidly ina

zig-zag fashion for more than 10 m on a rock

platform at night when being photographed.

Similar behaviour has been reported for N,

melanoscaphus and N. nichollsi (Tyler & Davies

1986).

Tabi. Allametric coxffictents and caleulated values for limb lengths. and head width in Notaden spp. Regression

Imes are of the form y= 6S-F". Cyy and Czy values are calculated praportinns af S-V at 40 and 60 mm. Probabilities

are based an standard normal deviates af the allametric coefficient compared [0 isometry.

R? u 6 n P Cay Ce

Noladen hennetti

TL 0,95 0.9615 0.3286 22 0.227 29 28

FI, 0,96 0.8913 0.7294 22 0,006 49 AT

HW 0.97 0.7782 0.6797 22 <0.00L It] at

Notaden melanoscophis

TL 0.86 1.0595 0.2265 40 0.192 28 29

FL 0.82 0.9643 0.5859 40) O.316 5 5h

HW O81 0.7450 0.7761 40 <().001 29 26

Notaden nichollsi

TL 0,84 0.7448 0.7677 ay <0).001 40 27

FE 0.83 O_T&RA 1.1800 4 <0,001 54 50

HW 0.79 0.8342 0.5493 49 0.004 30 28

\b G. M. SHLA & Ci, KR, JOHNSTON

Collection of these specimens in rocky sliuations

sugpests chat, welgel) may not burrow to the same

extent as its congeners (lucas & le Squef 19N9

Slnter & Main 1963: Mehs 1975; Barker & Grieg

1977; Wyler, Cronk & Davies 983}

When handled roughly, all N. wergels specimens

we collected exuded from the dorsal surface a

visecus Sticky white secretion, which rapidly dried

like glue on surfaces exposed to it. Similar cxudates

have been reported for other Metyder species (Lucas

& le Soucl 1909 Parker 1940; Main & Storr (466;

Mebs 1975; Barker & Grige 1977; Tyler, Crook &

Davies 9X4: wer Smith & Johnstone 1984: Tyler

1987).

Facces from the Mitchell Plateau paratypes

Consisted alfirost entirely of remailis of the ant

Crematogaster sp. (Myrmicinae; sample depoured

in Australian Natinnal Insect Collection, Canberra),

This species of ant Was common in caves and

amongst focks in the area, and rapidly attacked and

killed any frogs and small lizards held in open-weave

cloth bags or thin plastic bags. The gorge from

which the Mount Elizabeth Stn paralypes. were

collected was so heavily populated with ants hat

field work Was extremely uncomfortable; no other

reptiles or amphibians were found there, despite an

weensive sean ac sughr and during daylipht hours

The secretion produced by N, weigelf may play a

role in resisting, the attacks of the ants of which

ir feeds.

Myrmecophagy has been recorded in condeners

(Lucas & le Souef 1909; Parker 1940; Calaby 1960)

although the prevalenve of ants in the dict has been

interpreted as an artefact al food availability at

times of emergence (Calaby 1960).

Comparative material examined

N. bennetr: AM R11779, “The Plains", Nyogan, NSW;

K32163, Murrumbidgee River nr Hay, NSW: R45626-

R51216, RSIZIN-20, 14-22 km S Condoholin oi West

Wyulong Rd, NSW; SAM R3684, 23.3 kim 5. St George.

Qld; SAM R4736-38. nt Rockhamplon, Qld; SAM

Rls224a-i, RI7617-148, Coanamble, NSW,

N.omelunascuphus: AM RS3462. R53569-71, RSIST4,

R52591-92, K53703, Curanbirini Waterhole, 21 km N

McArthur River amp, NT, SAM R9663 97, SAM R9669,

Strathgerdom Hs, Qld; SAM R695-96, Edwand Raver Stn,

Old; SAM R)6336-37, Stonewall Ck, 19-26 km NE Lake

Argyle, WA: SAM R1I7904a-¢, 0.4 km 5 Jabiru, ME SAM

R27676-79, 18 kin S Northern/Dunesn jimeluin, “WA;

SAM k27680-92, 29 km S Northern/ Duncan junviwn,

No onachodisi, AM R26002-05, ny ‘The Gratites, N1;

KAOSTS, R49444-67, R49599-604, 25 km NW Refrigerayar

Bore, NT; R51653-55, 38.) kin N Neale Junction, WA;

RH0I46 Claw, NT R96371-76, 47.6 km SE The Granvies

by rd, NT RIN0739, 4.6 he S af turneff co Sita Downs

on Northern Hey, WA; REWO6I8-18, 8 kn 8 Mirrica Bore,

“Fuhabuka", NW Bedenirig, Old.

‘Acknowledgments

J, Wewel, A. Harwood, C, Hemsicy, B, Flonani

and H, Ehmann are thanked for field! assistatice.

H. Ehmano provided measurements for the Mt

Elizabeth Stn muterial, Specimens were collected

under permits issued by the Dept of Conservation

and Lan Management, Western Australia,

©. Catheart, M. Davies, A. Greer, M. Mahony,

A. Mariin, S. Richards, R. Sadher, L, Trucb, M.

Tyler and K. Walker pravided useful vomments on

the manuscript, To Schwaner (SAM) permitied

access lo specimens in his care, L. Smith provided

data on mialenal in the Western Australian Muscum,

PJ. M. Greenslade kindly identified the ant saniple.

B. Jantulik prepared rhe final illustrations.

References

Barker, J & Guida, G ©. 1977) "A Iheld gulde to

Australian frags,” (Rigby Lrd, Adelaide)

Cat aay, £. (1960) A nore on the food of Auatraltan desert

frogs. Wesr. Aust. Nat 7(3), 79-80,

Cocker, H, G. (1986) “Reptiles and amphitians uf

Australia.” 4th eda, (Reed Books Pry Ltd, Frenchs

Forest).

Govrp, S$, J. (1466) Atlometry and size in aflogeny atid

phylogeny. Biel, Rev 4b, 587-640.

Harker, J. & Wasser, R TYaT) The visible skebetan,

Bunet, Photag, Vad), 22-26. 44

Hosier, W, (1962) A new Ieptodactylid frog of che genus

Nataden from Northern Alistralla, Aa Mus Nawit

(2077), 1-8.

Hosiery, 1 & 41932) “Problems of relative growth.” (Dial,

ew Yark).

KiicHener, Do J. Ketter, Lo Ey CHAPMAN, A,,

Mexenvir, &. L., Starr, ALN. & KeneeaLty, KF

(1981) Observations on mammals of the Mitchell

Plateau arca, Kimberley, Western Australia, pp. 123-169.

Tn, “Biological Survey of the Milchell Plateau and

Admiralty Gulf, Kimberley, Western Australia.”

(Western Austratian Museum, Perth).

Lucas, A HOS. & Le Sourr, W. H.. D. (1909), “The

unimulé of Australia. Manimals, reptiles and

amphibians." (Whilcombe & Tombs, Methourne).

Dyace, | D, (1971) Evolutionary relationships, osteology,

and zoogeqvraphy of leptodactyloid frogs. Univ, Kansas

Mus, Nat. Hist. Misc, Publ. (83), 1-238.

Main, ALR. d& Storr, G. M. (1966) Range estenslons

and noes on the hivlogy of frogs fram the Pilbara

Tezion, Western Austrata, Hest Aust. Nat 1003), $261.

Moers, D, (1975) Herpetologische Beobachturigen adt

einer Exkursion vum Warrego River (New South Wales,

Austrahen) Selamandra (1), 47-356,

Nortiots, M. 1. (1986) “SPSS/PC. advanced statistics”

(SPSS, Chicaza)-

Pokkek, H, W. (1940) ‘The Australasian Trogs of the

family Leptodactylidae, Nows, Zool, 411), 1-105,

RiaMbnt, R.A, BoackitH, R.A. & Campurri, M.A,

(944) “Multivariate morphometrics.” 2nd ben

(Academic Press, London).

Sianek, P. & Main, A. RB. (1964) Notes on the bictagy

of Notaden nichalisi Parker (Anura; Leprodactylidag).

HWesy Alisth Nat, 8(7), 163-166,

SOKAL, R. R. & ROLF, F 4, (981) “Biometry.” 2nd Edn,

(W, H. Freeman, San Franciscew).

NEW NOTADEN SPECIES 37

TYLer, M. J. (1972) Superficial mandibular musculature,

vocal sacs and the phylogeny of Australo-Papuan

leptodactylid frogs. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 16(9), 1-20,

(1976) Comparative osteology of the pelvic girdle of

Australian frogs and description of a new fossil genus.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 100(1), 3-14.

(1987) Frog and cane toad secretions. pp. 329-339.

In, J, Cavacevich, P. Davie & J. Pearn (Eds.) “Toxic

plants & animals. A guide for Australia.” (Queensland

Museum, South Brisbane),

——, Crook, G, A. & DAVIES, M. (1983) Reproductive

biology of the frogs of the Magela Creek System,

Northern Territory. Rec. S. Aust, Mus, 18(18), 415-440.

— & Davies, M. (1986) “Frogs of the Northern

Territory.” (Conservation Commission of the Northern

Territory, Alice Springs).

——, —— & Watson, G. F. (1987) Frogs of the Gibb

River Road, Kimberley Division, Western Australia.

Rec. West. Aust. Mus, 13(4), 541-552.

, SMITH, L. A. & JOHNSTONE, R. (1984) “Frogs of

Western Australia.” (Western Australian Museum,

Perth).

Zar, J. H. (1974) “Biostatistical Analysis.” (Prentice-Hall

Inc, New Jersey).

THE GENUS ARTHROCARDIA (CORALLINACEAE: RHODOPHYTA)

IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

BY H. B. S. WOMERSLEY* & H. W. JOHANSENT

Summary

Two taxa of Arthrocardia Decaisne (tribe Corallineae, subfamily Corallinoideae) occur in

south-eastern Australia: A. wardii (Harvey) Areschoug and A. flabellata (Kuetzing) Manza ssp.

australica ssp. nov. The former was first described by Harvey (1849), and the latter is a new

subspecies of a species that is common in South Africa. Neither entity is common in south-eastern

Australia and neither has been collected west of Eyre Peninsula.

The genus Arthrocardia is closely related to Corallina, a genus that is much more widely

distributed and probably more primitive. Within Arthrocardia differences have evolved in the

organization of the fertile branches. In both genera the conceptacles are axial, but in Arthrocardia

fertile intergenicula all have the propensity for bearing branches, no matter what the reproductive

type. These branches usually consist of more fertile intergenicula and, hence, a branching system of

several fertile intergenicula develops. In Corallina the fertile intergenicula typically lack

surmounting branches, although in carposporangial plants, and less often in tetrasporangial plants,

they are occasionally present. Fertile intergenicula in male plants of Corallina invariably lack

branches.

KEY WORDS: Articulated coralline algae, Corallinacae, Arthrocardia, southern Australia,

Rhodophyta, marine algae.

THE, GENUS ARTHROCARDIA (CORALLINACKAR: RITODOPHYTA)

IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

By H. B. 5. WOMERSLEY* & H. W. JOHANSENT

Summary

Womersiey, H, B. & Jouansen, H. W, (1988) The genus Artérecardia (Corallinaceae: Rkodaphytal

in southern Australia, Trans, R. Soc, 8. Ausf, 112(1), 39 49, 3) May L988,

‘Two taxa of Arthrocardia Decaisne (tribe Corallineae, subfamily Corallinvideae) occur in south-eastern

Australia: A, ward{i (Harvey) Areschoug and 4. flabellata (Kuerzing) Manza ssp. australicg ssp, nov, The

former was first described by Harvey (1849), and the latter is a new subspecies of a species that is common

in South Africa. Neither entity is common in south-eastern Australia and neither has been collected west

tf Eyre Peninsula.

The genus Arthrocurifia is closely related to Corallina, a genus that is much more widely disinboted

and probably more primitive, Within -4rthrocardia differences have evolved in the organization of the fertile

branches, In both genera the conceptacles are axial, but in ArfArocerdia fertile intergenicula all have the

propensity for bearing branches, no matter what Ute reproductive type. These branches usually consist of

more fertile intergenicula and, hence, a branching system of several fertile intergenicula develaps. In Corallina

the tertile intergenicula typically lack surmounting branches, although in carposporangial plants, ane less

often in letrasporangial plants, they are occasionally present. Fertile intergenicula in male plants of Curntline

invariably lack branches

Key Worps; Articulated coralline alguc, Coraliinacae, Arthrocardiv, suuthern Austialia, Rhodophyta,

marine algae.

Introduction

Of the nine genera of Corallincideae, tribe

Corallineae (Johansen & Silva 3978) only

Arthrocardia (Decaisne 1342, p. 365) and Corulfina

Linnaeus occur in southerm Australia, These genera,

plus the three in the tribe Janieae, Chedlosporunt

Areschoug, Faliptilon (Decaisne) Lindley and Jara

Lamouroux, represent the subfamily Corallinoideae

in this area, Amphirow Lamouroux (it the

Amphiroideae) and Mefagoniolithon Weber van

Bosse (in the Metagoniolithoideae) also are present.

The species in these genera of geniculate (articulate)

corallines constitute a conspicuous component of

the shallow water biota on southern (and also other)

Australian coasts, especially where water motion is

considerable. However, as in nvany other parts of

the world, uncertainty exists in the identification

at both generic and specific levels of many

geniculate corallines. This uncertainty has resulted

in the publication of records from seuthero

Australia under a variety of names, many of which

are synonymous as exemplified by Haliptilon

(Johansen & Womersley 1986). Resolucion of the

taxonomic prablems can only be achieved by

studying these plants, as well as related entities,

from many parts of the world.

Two species of Arthrocardiv have been described

from southern Australia, both originally by Harvey

(1849, p. 99); A, mallardiae (Harvey) Areschoug

* Department of Borany, The University of Adelaide,

G.PO. Box 498. 5. Aust. SO0L.

1 Department of Bialagy, Clark University, Worcester,

Massachusents, US A_ CAIN

(1852) and A. wardi? (Harvey) Areschoug (1852).

This account aims at describing Arthrocardia in

southern Australia so as to (1) understand the

taxonomy of the included species, (2) gain a general

appreciation of the ecological importance of these

species in the marine environment and (3) further

establish the diagnostic fearures of Arthrocardia vis-

a-vis ather genera in the subfamily Corallinoideas.

Arthrocardia Decaisne (1842), with the South

Aftican A. corymbosa (Lamarck) Decalsne as the

lectulype species, is characterised (Johansen 1969,

1981) by pinnate branching with terete to flat

iMlergenicula, sometimes with acule to obtuse lobes,

and with 20-40 tiers of medullary cells, The

conceptacles are axial and deeply embedded and the

fertile intergenicula each bear two (rarely one)

branchlets, one on.¢ach side of the conceptacle pore.

The conceptacles originate in medullary tissue at

the apices of intergenicula and the chambers

become deeply embedded, swelling the

intergeniculum only slightly, with the pores centrally

positioned or just below the apices on the flat

surface, Thalli are dioecious, the female with the

carposporophyte prodicing gonirdablast filaments

from anywhere on the upper surface of the fusion

cell, and the male conceptacles with beaks

sometimes as much as | nim long. Bisporangia or

tetrusporangia occur. Arthrocerdia is closely related

to Coraflina. and rhe differences between them are

clarified in the Discussion,

Materials and Methods

Collections from many areas along the coast of

southern Australia were examined; there was,

40 li, 6.5. WOMERSLEY & HW, JONANSLN

however, a paucity of specimens from the little

explored Great Australian Bight. Specimens in ADU

provided a loundation for the study, but other

herbaria (notably MEL} also house historically and

nomenclaturally important collections. Collections

in the following herbaria were cxamined: ABU, HM,

CN, CUW, L, LTB, MEL, NSW, S, TCD, and UC.

Nranches were decalcified in dilute hydrochloric

avid and squashed or teased apart ro discern tissues

or conceptacular contents. Other branches were

fixed and deculcifivd in Susu seluiion (Suneson

1937) after which they were embedded in wax,

sectioned at 8-10 am thick, and stained with

huemalarylin (Johansen 1869).

Results

The specimens of irthrocurdia (rom Australia

(Table 1) comprise two distinct species, The

vharacteristics of one entity, a robust, compactly

hranched form, agree with the type specimens of

A, wardit (Fig. VA) and A. maflardiae, the other

entily (Fig, 2C, D) is undescribed, The diagnostic

characteristics of 4. wardif (including as a synonym

A. mallartiae), together with these of the new entity

hamed A, flabellata ssp, australica, Womertsley &

Johansen, are presented in Table 1,

Arthroacentia wardii (Harvey) Areschoug 1852:551),

Bailey 1883,791, Guiler 1952:87, Harvey 1863:xxix.

Lucas 1909:56, Sonder 1881;20. Tisdall 1898:307,

Wilson 1892:177,

Aimphiroa wardii Harvey 18499, pl, 34 (ies 1. 2h

1859310, Yenda 1905:8.

Cheflosporun wardit (Harvey) DeToni 1903;1828, Bailey

1914;829, Garnet 1971:96, Lewis IY84:14, Lucay 19) 2-164

Lucas & Perritt 1947:397, May 1965:356,

Amphirow rtatardiae. Harvey (649;99, Yenda 1905-8,

Arthracardia mallardive (Harvey) Areschaug (852;552

Guiler 1952;87. Harvey PROF esi Litcus 1909:56, Sonder

1881:20. ‘Tisdull 1R98:507.

Chetlusporum matlardiae (Harvey) Delonl T0S:1d24

Lucas 1912:164; 1929/27, Lucas & Perrin 19472397, May

1965:356,

Flabit: thalli (Figs 1, 2A, B) light to medium red,

(2-) 5-12 em high, robust, with clusters of 2-10

complanale fronds from ao discoid, crustose,

holdfast, essentially complandtely branehed,

epilithic.

Brenching: densely pinnate from axes in which most

of the intergenicula branch, lateral branches

frequently also pinnately branched; sexual plants

often with fertile branchlets displaced from plane

of branching. Jnzergenienda: in lower parts.of fronds

tercte, 0,5-1.0 (-1.5) mm in diameter; in middle und

upper parts flat and not or slightly lobed; axial

intervenicula (1.5-) 17-3 (-4) mm long and 1,4-3,5

min wide at widest parts, length to width nauo t-1.3;

20-40 (-45) ers oF medullary cells (Fig. 3A), each

50-75 (-95) ym lone, per intergeniculum, cortex

filamentous, with cells 6-10 «am in diameter, L/D

1-2, epithullium 1 (Or 2) cells thick, with wells 6-10

pm in diameter, L/D about |, Genicula: uncalcified

parts of cells 80-250 pm long, genicula (230-) 350-

104X) pat) broad, less in lateral branches. Curpoxurtial

concepracles; not observed. Carpospurangial

conceplacles (Fig, 3B): with or without

surmourting branghlets, chamber diameter. 300-300

pm, fusion cell 250-300 am in diameler, and 8-10

pin thick, bearing 2-4-celled gonimoblast filaments,

carposporangia subspherical to ovoid, 40-60 ym in

diameter. Male concéptacles (Fig. 3C): beaked,

usually without surmounting branchlets, chambers

240-350 (-390) pm in diameter, 260-330 am high,

vanaly 300-700 pm long. Bisporungial (or

Lelrasporangial) conceptacles (Fig. 3A): common,

terminal on axial or lateral branches, becoming

surmounted by two branches, chambers 250-520 ym

in diameter, 325-500 pm high? bisporangia 160-240

(-260) pm tong, 40-65 gm in diamerer:

tetrasporangia (in ADU, A57658) 200-280 jun long,

60-4) ain in diameter.

Type: from Port Phillip, Victoria (Muylfaras

holorype In TCD; Fig. 1A).

Distribution. From Cape Willoughby, Kangaroo

L, & Aust, 10 Norah Head, NSW. and around

Tasmania.

Selected specimens: Cape Willoughby, Kangaryo |, 5.

Aust, upper subliftoral (Moelkerting, 23.1)1979; LTB

11563; ADU. A$7530). Port Fairy, Vie, upper sublittoral

(Woelkerling, 6.11977; LTB, 11339; ADL, AS57434).

Lawrence Rock, Vic, 12-15 m deep (Matson, 204i 1881;

ADU, A§2798, bisporangia, male), Lady Julia Perey L.,

Vic, 5-8 mr deep (Shepherd, 11.1968; ADU, 432317, male)

Tale lL Ptatures divtinguisine sullen Ausrtedian idsu of Acthrovariia,

features

Frond height (cm)

Percentage of main intergenicula producing lateral branches

L/W ratio af main intergenicula (approx.)

Diameter of basal ttergenicula (mm)

Percentage of Arthrocardia-lke spotangial coneepaiicles

No. spores per sporangium

AL werdth A. flabellata ssp.

australicu

5-12 2 4( 6)

95-100 50

i 2

0.5-1.0 0.3-0.5

sd gS

usually 2 +

foceasionally 4)

ARTHROCARDIA IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 41

Lady Julia Percy 1, Vic., 3-6 m deep (Shepherd, 4.i.1968;

ADU, A32436, with mallardiae habit; ADU, 432437,

cystocarpic male). Port Phillip, Vic., type of Amphiroa

mallardiae (Mrs Mallard; TCD, isotype at BM). Rye

(Ocean Beach), Vic., upper sublittoral (Woelkerling,

14.11.1977; LTB, 11342; ADU, A57536), Green Cape,

N.SMW., 1-6 m deep (Shepherd 13.i1.1973; ADU, A43297

and A43298, bisporangial). Port Jackson, N.SW. (Harvey,

Alg. Aust. Exsicc. 453; NSW, A3281). Long Reef, N.S.W.,

below rock platform (May 2307, Feb. 1936; NSW). Green

Point, Broken Bay, N.S.W., in wave-washed gutters and

pools, upper sublittoral (Martin, 19.i,1969; NSW, A3284).

Tuggerah Lakes, N.SW. (Lucas, April 1911; NSW, A3287).

Norah Head, N.SW., very low eulittoral (Pope 13.xii.1947;

ADU, A10772). Fluted Cape, Bruny I., Tas., 16 m deep

(Shepherd, 10.11.1972; ADU, A41485). Lady Bay,

Southport, Tas., 2-3 m deep (Brown & Kenchington,

14.x.1986; ADU, AS57658, tetrasporangial).

The basis of the Queensland records of Bailey

(1913) and Lewis (1984) is unknown, since this was

not indicated in the publications and no Queensland

specimens are known.

1 2 3

Fig. 1. A. Arthrocardia wardii (holotype in TCD), B. A. ware

(ADU, A32426),

el a RU UAL

(ADU, A32317). C. A, wardti (4. mallardiae habit)

42 H. B, S. WOMERSLEY & H. W. JOHANSEN

Fig. 2. Fronds of A. Arthrocardia wardii (ADU, A43297). B.A. wardii (A43298). C. Arthrocardia flabellata ssp.

australica (ADU, A52790, holotype). D. A. flabellata ssp, australica (ADU, A31943). Scales = 5 mm.

ARPUKOCARDIA IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 43

Anhrocardia wardii also has been recorded Irom

New Zealand by Renibold (1899, p, 299) from ce

Chatham Is. by Adams (1972. p. 78) from the

Wellinginn area, and by Chapman & Parkinson

(1974, po 174, pl. 366, 4% Cheilosporue) Tron

varlous Incalities throughout New Zealand, The

New Zealand plants are similar superficially to

Australian A. werdii but the intergenicula are

shorier, with fewer medullary Gers Purther

comparative studics on the New “ealand plants are

neeessary:

A. werdil is predominately 4 low-light planl, wiih

collections from 3-22 m deep or from shaded upper

subhitteral regions. However, several collections

from just below low tide level are known from

N.SMW.

The holotype specimen of A. warclii is a well-

preserved frond with dense branching and robust

intergenicula. Untortunalely, it lacks concepracles.

The type specimen of 4. mallertiiae (see Fig, IC

for habit) also has large axial interyenicula, but they

are simaller than in the rype of AL werdii, More

strikingly it differs from 4. wardi7 in having thinner

fateral branches which arise from most axial

intergenicula (Fig. 1C). The type specimen of A.

matlardiwe falls within the range of forms

attributable to A. wardit, butit is not characteristic

of most specimens examined, Both type specimens

arefrom Port Phillip Bay (Harvey 1849, pp. 99-100),

in A. wardii, deviation from the 4nfrocardia-

type af branching occurs more often than in A.

flabellata ssp. australica, A survey of 233 fertile

intergenicula containing Mature conceptacles in sis

bisporangial collections of 4, warei/ revealed thal

21% tacked branches although most of these had

broadened -4yvArocerdie-hke upper parts, The

remaining 74% had | or 2 branches, ot provesses

if few of phe tranches.

Arthrocardia flabellata (Kuetzing) Manza ssp.

wustralica Womersley & Johansen, ssp, now

Thallws 2-4 ¢-6) cm altus, epilithieus,

fasclculatus. Axes principales sparse pinnati,

Intergenicula infra teretia, 300-00 ym diam., in

pactibus mediis et distalibus compressa, interdum

parvilobis obtusis, non ramosis vel 1-2 ramis

lateralibus, Intergeniculp axialia 1.5-3,5 mum longa

et 0.7-1.2 mm lata, ratio longitudinis et latitudinis

cree 2, 20-40 stratis cellularum medullariarum

30-75 pm Jongarum pracdita. Coneceptacula

carposporangialia ramos in uno vet utroque latere

pori, habent, interdum concatenata; loculus 300-520

pm diam. cellula coalescenti 220-310 ph diam. et

8-10 pm crassa; carpusporangia 55-8) wm diam.

Conceplacula spermatangiata rostrata. ramis

urroque latere pot; laculus 375-875 um diam,,

400-551) pm ultus, canali 800-900 jin longo.

Conceptacula tetrasporangialia paululum (umida,

loculus 30-750 ym diam, 600-700 pm altus,

letrasporangia 18(I-280 ym longa, bisporangialia

ignola.

Habis; thalli (Fig. 2C, Bi pale fed (usually

bleached), 2-4 (-6) cm high, relatively slender with

fronds in small groups, epilithic Brarcfing- main

axes sparsely pinnate. Iniergenicula: (Fig. 4A, BY

im [ower parts terete, 300-500 «in in diameter; in

middle and upper parts Pal, sometimes with small

obtuse lobes; unbranched or with | ot 2 lateral

branches; axial intergenicula (Fig. 31, K) 1.5-3,5 mm

long and 0.7-L.2 min wide at their widest, ratio of

length ro width about 2; 20-40 tiers of medullary

celis (Fig, 3G, H), cach 50-75 yn long (Fig, 48),

per intereeniculum. Genicula: uncalcified parts of

cells 120-200 um long, genicula 300-500 «an broad,

Corpeganial conceptacles (Fig, 4C): originating al

apices Of short lateral branchlets. Carpesporangiol

concepiactes (Figs 31, J, 4D): with branches.on one

or both sides of ostlole, sometimes concatenare,

chamber diameter 300-520 gm, fusion cell

221-310 pm in diameter and’8-10 ym thick; carpo-

sporangia (Fig. 4D) 55-80 ym in diameter. Male

eoncepracies (Fig. 3K, L): beaked, with branches

OF processes of each side of ostiole; chamber

diameter 375-650 pm, height 400-350 jm. canal

81X)-900 um long. Tetrasporangial carceptacies (Fig.

3D, E, F): not markedly swollen, chamber diameter

500-750 wm, height 600-700 pm, tetrasporanpia

180-280 pm long; bisporangia unknown,

Type: Nora Creina, S. Aust., uppersubiittoral jn

large shaded pool (Johansen 81-93-49, 16.ix, 1981,

carposporangial, male; holotype in ANU, AS52790).

Distribution; From Streaky Bay, S Aust. to

Walkerville, Vic. and around Tasmania, in shallow

water but usually in shaded situations.

Selected specimens: Smooth Pool, near Streaky Bay,

5. Aust. (Johansen 81 10-2td, 28.4198], tetrasporanpial),

West Bay, Kangaroo |, S. Aust. near low tide

(Meelkerling, 211.1979; LTB, 612; AL), AS57529), Point

Gillian, West [. &. Aust, O.S-1 m deep (Shepherd,

27.v,1967; ADL, 431943), Rabe. S. Aust., sublittoral (Jones

& Johansen §1-4-24, 4.15 J981, carposporangial; ADU,

A52792), Nora Creina, S, Ausr., 1 large shaded pool

(Johansen S|-9-25, Sis O81, carposporangial: ADU,

AS32791 and &1-9-43, 15.ix.1981). Point Lonsdale, Vie,

Upper sublittoral (JoAonsen R1-8-16, 3tviii, 1981,

lelraspirangial), Walkerville, Vic., low euliftoral (Pope &

Bensiett, WIN IVS: ADU, AIS), Curries R. mouth, Tas,

upper sublittoral {Worersfey, 2811949; At0I26),

Siapletan Paint, Prosser Bay, ‘las, U-3 m deep (Shepherd,

Woi197 ATU, A35686), Lady Bay, Southport, Tas., 7 0

deep (frown & Keachingion, 14.%.1926; ADU, A57693,

varmusporangial ind male)

Arihrocardia is the most common genus of

articulated corallines (nt soulherm Africa, aud hased

ARTHROCARDIA IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 45

op recent Studies (by PLW.1.) it appears that there

are four species in this area (in contrast 10 [he seven

species listed by Seaytief, 1984), One of them, A.

Jlobellata (Kuetzing) Manza, is abundant from

Capetown to Mozambique. Subsequent to being

described hy Kutzing (1858, p. 29, fig. 60, U1), it has

been described under several other names, eg. 4.

gardnert Manza and A. linearis Manza-

Arthrocariia flabellata is distinguishable from the

ether currently recognized South African species,

4. coryinbasa (Lamarck) Decaisne, A. duthiae

Johansen and A. /ifiend/a (Lamarck) Johansen, by

canceptacular pores that are strictly apical,

brariching that Is lax, and small intergenicular lobes

that are acute or subacute. In 4. flabellata spy.

Jlebellata fram Africa most plants produce clusters

of conceptacles in extensive branching corymbs

where the sucvessive intergenicula are all tertile. In

A. flabellata spp. ausrrafica from south-eastern

Australia, the conceptacles are produced in single

intergenicula which rarety branch to produce other

fertile intergenicula. The South African species is

also more robust, having clustered Fronds to 10 cm

high, branching more or less pinnate, intergenicula

terete belaw (to | mm diameter), (lat above, 1-3

(-3.5) mm Jong and 1-2 (-2.5) mm wide (L/W

15-3), with acute lobes up to 0.5 mm long often

present and with sharp edges, and with the upper

margin of the intergenicula sometimes. concave and

urn-shaped. Fertile intergenicula are at first similar

10 Sterile ones, but succeeding intergenicula are

much smaller, 0.7-L mom long and 0.5-0.8 mm wide;

when crowded, some have only one surmounting

branch.

Discussion

Two species from southern Australia now

ussignable tg Arvhrocardia were described as new

by Harvey (1849) under Amphirne A. wardii and

A. ntullardive. Harvey’s descriptions and

illustrations (ol A. wardii only) and the type

specimens (TCD) reveal! nwo similar entities, with

ihe main distinction being that the first is slightly

more rabyst than the second. Unlike the situation

for many other geniculate corallines from southern

Australia, no other specific names have

subsequently been applied to Hatvey’s two species,

although they have at times been placed under

Amphiroa (Harvey 1849) and Cheilosporuri (De

Tom 1905), Most authors have placed them in

Arthrocardia, but they have not been examined

closely, Our studies reveal that the type specimens

and other plants that can be assigned to one or the

olher all belong to the single species A. wardii.

Arthrocardia flabellata ssp. australica is more

representative of the genus Arrhrocaradia than is A,

wardil aud Was Wetrasporangial conceptactes that are

always of the “rrhracerdia type", as are also the

carposporangial conceptacles, The male

conceptacles of A. flabellata spp. australiiea

resemble those of Coraélina, bul not as much as do

these in 4. wardit.

The simplest way of distinguishing the lwo taxa

of Arthrocardia in southern Australia is hy

branching and intergenteular characteristics

{Table 1). Arthrocurdia wardéi is a robust plant and

A. flabellata ssp, australica is considerably more

delicate, The lower unbranched intergenicula

constituting the stipes differ in diameter in the two

taxa (0,3-0.5 mm in A, flabellata ssp, ausiralica and

0.8-1,0 (-1.5) mm in 4. wordis). In the latter,

unbranched intergenicula are rare, but in A.

Flabellata ssp, ausiralica they constitute about 50%

of the axial intergenicula. Instead of producing

lateral branches, short obtuse lobes tend to develop

and bracket the lower part of the intergeniculum

immediately above (Figs 2C, D, 3K, 1).

Sporangial characteristics are also helpful an

separating the two Australian taxa, Conceptacle

dissection usually reveals bisporangia (undivided

when immature) in 4. wardil (tetrasporangia in one

Tasmanian specimen), and tetasporangia in 4.

flabellata ssp, australica, but more study of their

repreduction is warranted,

In the two southern Australian taxa, mosr male

conceptacles lack branches, but usually the potential

for branch growth is present in A, /febellate ssp,

australicg as evidenced by processes where branches

might have developed (Fig. 31, K). In the few richly

fertile male collections of 4. wardi/ studied, there

were very few branching conceptactes (Piz. 3C). The

carposporangial conceptacles bear surmounting

Pig, % A-C 4rthrocerdia werdii, A.A branch of a bisporangial plant, with branchlets above the concepractes and

nicdullary Hers shown in one intergeniculum (ADL, AS52798), A. Branch of a cystocarpic plant (ADU, 432437).

C, Branch of a male plant (ADU, A32317),

DAL Arthrevardia flabellata ssp, austraficd, D. Branches of a telrasporangial plant, showing position of conceptacles

(Wotansen 81-8-14), &. A tetrasporangial conceplacle surmounted by young branchlets (Johansen 81-10-2ld). &

Enlurgericnt of partol D, with a tetrasporangial voncepracie surmounted by older branchlets, G, An intergeniculum

showing Gers of medullary cells Johansen 81-10-21d), #7, A more elongate intergeniculum showing tiers of medullary

ecils, and genicula Gohansen 81-9-25; ADU, AS2791). 7. Branches of @ eystocarpie plant with conceptactcs (Johansen

81-9-24; ADU, AS2792). J Enlargement of part of 7 with acystocurpie eonceptacts. A. Branches of a wale plant

(Johansen $1-9-49; ADU, AS52790), J, ‘Iwo male conceptacles of XK with elomgate beaks and narrow canuls ta

the Spermarangial chambers.

46 H. B. S. WOMERSLEY & H. W. JOHANSEN

Fig. 4. Longisections through branches and conceptacles ot Arthrocardia flabellata ssp, australica. A. Branch apex

with newly formed geniculum, in the type (ADU, A52790). B. Tiers of medullary cells and part of a geniculum,

in the type (ADU, A52790). C. Carpogonial conceptacle (Johansen 81-9-43). D. Carposporangial conceptacle

(Johansen 81-9-43), shown on its side.

ARTHROCARDIA IN SOLVHERN AUSTRALIA a

branches in A, flabellata ssp, ousiralica (Fig. 31,

J), but may or may not bear such beanches in A,

wardil (Pig. 34).

Arifvovardia fiebetlat ssp. anstratica ts rare in

seuthernm Australia. Afrhough overlapping jn

Victoria, (hé known ranges extend to the east and

north for 4. waredié and westward for A. flabellata

ssp. atestarlica,

Arthrocardia is probably most closely related to

Corelline, a genus thal tw distributionally and

structurally well known, Differences between

Arthrocardia and Corallina concern (1) branches

On tetrasporangial (or bisporangial) conceptacles in

Arthrocardia but only rarely in Corullina; (2)

configuration of intergenigula containing

(cirasporangial conceptacles (only slightly swollen

in Arthrocardia), (3) branches on male conceptacles

in Arthrocardta; (4) configuration of intergenicula

cantaining male concepracles, with more

pronounced beaks in Arthrocardia; (5) the position

of gonimoblast filaments on fusion cells, where they

are peripheral only in Coral/ina; (6) the number of

medullary tiers per intergeniculum (20-40. in

Arthrocardia, 10-20 Corallina); and (7) plant and

intergenicular sizes, with Arthrocardia generally

greater than Conilina, From Mariza (1937, (940),

Ganesan (1967), Johansen (1969, 1971), unpublished

data on South African plants (Johansen) and the

Study of various type specimens, a revised concept

of the genus Arthrocardia has emerged (Johansen

198}) and can be reviewed here,

The intergenicular medullary tiers in the tribe

Corullineae are uniform in dimensions, with the

cells 30-75 (-90) zm tong. There are usually 10-20

liers per intergeniculum in Corallina and 2-40 in

Arthracardia, a feature corresponding to the usually

greater intergenicular length in the latter genus,

The best diagnostic feature of Arthrocurdia is the

growth of branches from conceptacle-bearing

intergenicula and the potential formation of more

conceptacles by these branches (Johansetr 198),

However, this charactenstic must be analysed for

botlt tetra- or bisporangial plants and for male or

femate plants. [n sporangial plants (he formation

of branch primordia on the broadened shoulders

ol fertile intergenicula (usually when the

vonceptacles cotttaln immature sporangia) is an

Integral part of developmenr (see eg, Johansen

1969, pl. (8). On the other hand, in Coralfina the

usual condition is for intergenicula containing

telraspotatgial conveptacles not to flatten and

broaden and for surmounting branches, if

Produced, not to contain convepracles (Johansen

1981),

Conceptacles in Arthrocerdia are axial in that

they onginate at interzenicular apices (Johansen

1969). Cells destined to become seproductive

originate in the apical medullary menstems ina

straight line with the intergenicular axis. The

filaments surrounding the young tertile cells

separate so that a space, the future conceptacular

chamber, forms belween them, Further growth and

development result in'a roofed chamber and 2 canal

leading to a pore

Male conceptacles of Arthrocurdia slubetlain

from South Africa have been recorded (unpublished

data) with beaks more than 1 mim long and,

although the data are meagre, it appears that beaks

in Arthrecardia are longer than in Corallina, In

A. flabellata sp. australica variation in beak

lengths (Fig, 3K, 1) suggests an intermediate

position for this species. Male conceptagles in 4,

wardit are very similar to those in Corallina .

The position of gonimoblast filaments on

carposporophytic fusion cells may be significant as

an added feature distinguishing Arthrocardia and

Cerailina. The few studies of Arthracardia

(Ganesan 1967; personal observations of HW.J, on

South African specimens) all record the filaments

arising seemingly anywhere on top of the fusion

cell. In contrast, in Covallina they are restricted to

the margin, or nearly so (Suneson 1937, p. 33;

Segawa 1942: Ganesan 1968; Johansen 1970),

Caution in using this feature should be observed,

however, until definitive studies on carposporophyte

Vatte 2. Characteristics divtingaishing Arthrocardia aa Corallita, and comparisons with Arthrocardia wariii

Branches irom tetra (or bi-) sporafgial copceptacles,

Brauches From male conceptacles,

Upper parts of inter-genicula comaining vetra (et bi-)

sporangial concepracles

Beaks of male concepractes

Gonimoblast filaments on fusion vell

Meduliary cell iets per incergeniculian

Arthrocardia A, Wwarddii Corallinu

usually usually seldom

usually never never

wide, wide, narrow,

concepigacles conceplacles conceptacles

protruding protructing protruding

oaly slightly.

long short to short

(800-L200 wimp medium (200-600 pnt}

(300-700am)

gvet Upper probably over ai oT nest

surface upper surface muri

20-40 2-40 1-20

ah H, BS. WOMERSLEY & HW, ITIRANSEN

development aru made (sce Johansen 1972;

Lehednik 1977),

Ferlile letrasporangial conceplacles of Corallina

officinalis usually lack Surmounting branches.

Furthermore, the conceplacles are mofe

conspicuons than in slethrocardia because the upper

parts do not expand into a platform upon which

hranches can arise. The characteristics of

Arrhrocardia in southern Australia show that it is

possible and reasonable to segregate it from

Corallina (Table 2), but unusual male plants af A.

wud! with canceptacles like those in Corellia have

necessilaled sume re-evaluation,

Arrkracandia is most prevalent av the Southem

hemisphere, being most prominent in saulhern

Africa (Seagrie! 1984, pp. 5, 6). As currently

recognised, as well as from South Africa (Manza

1937) the venus Has been reported from Gough

Island (Chamberlain 1965), India (Ganesan 1967),

northern California (Johansen 1971), Brazil (loly

1965), and south-eastern Australia, ArvAvecardia

Slabellata ssp. flabellata is extremely common on

the east coast of southern Afrien in various forms.

In contrast, he Australian subspecies is knowl Prom

fow collections.

Acknowledgments

Assistance from MST grant 80/2004 to the Tirst

aulhor supported a research visit by the second

author to Adelaide in 1981, Thanks also ga to the

Curators of the herbaria listed in “Materials and

Methods" tor help in studying calloctions of

Arthrocardia, Our gratitude gues also to Scoresby

A. Shepherd (who supplied the Latin diapnasis),

Eric J. Johansen, Douglas Pabyt and the first

aurhor's colleagues in Adelaide for assistance in

field work and in other ways. Mrs Doris Sinkora

kindly assisted in enquiries aboul specimens its

MEL and Dr Michael J. Wynne helped in clarifying

the nomenclature of the South African

Arthrocaridia flabellata,

References

Anams, No M. (1972) The marine algae of the Wellington

area. A list of species Rec. Dum. Mus, 8, 43-98.

Arpscwotic, J GE. (852) Ordo XI. Corallinéae. In

JG. Avardh, Species, generg et ordines algarum .. .

22), pp. 506-576. (Glevrups, Lund.)

Haney, h My (1883) A synopsis of the Queensland

Flora, (Govt Printer, Beisbane,)

(1913) Comprehensive catalogue of Queensland

Plants. (Govt Printer, Brisbane.)

CHAMBERLAIN, Y. M, (1965) Marine algae of Gough

Island. Bull, Brit. Mus, (Nut, Hfst.2, Bot. 3, 174-232,

pls 16-19.

CHAPMAN, V. L & Parkinson, PG. (1974) The Marine

Alvae of New Zealand, Part {lf Rhodophyceae. [ssue

3. Cryptonemiales. pp. 155-278, Plates $1-94. (Cramer,

jermany.)

Decaisne, J. (1842) Rssais sur une classification des

Algues et des Polyplefs calcitéres de Lamouraux. Ann.

Sci. Nal. Bot, s@¢ 2, 17, 297-380, Plates 14-17,

De Tow, G. B, (1905) Sylloge Algarum opniiuig

hucusyue Cognitarum. Vol. 4. Plorideae, Ordo IV

Cryploneminae, pp. 1523-1973, (Padua)

Gannsan, LE. K. (1967) Morphological studies on the

gens Arrhrecardia Decaisne emend. Arcychoux. fn V.

Krishnauiurthy (¢d,), Proceedings of the Seminar on

Seu, Salt and Plants held at CSMCRI-Rhavnagar on

oer. 20-23, 1965, pp. 159168, } pl. Central Salt anal

Marine Chemicals Research Institure (Bhavnagar).

(1968) Studies on the morphology and reproduction

of the articulated corallines. LV. Cora/linu Linnaeus

emend, Jamouraux. Bol. Inst. Oceanogr, Univ, Driente

7, 65-97, pls 1-3.

Garnet, IR. (1971) Check-list No, 6 - Marine and

Freshwarer Algae. fa “The Wildflowers. of Wilson's

Promontory National Park.” pp. 93-97, (Lothian,

Melbuurnie.)

caer, ER, (252) The marine algae of Tasmania:

Checkhsl wih localities Pap, Proc. &. Soc. Tasm. 86,

T1106,

Harvey. Wo H. 1849) “Nereis Australis on Algae of the

southern Ocean.” pp. 65-124, Plates 26-50. (Reeve,

London }

(1059) Aluwe Jn J.D. Hooker, “Che Botany of the

Antarctic Voyage." Part IL. Plora Tasmaniae: Vol. 2,

fy. 2K2-343, Plates 185-190, (Reeve, London.)

— (1863) “Phycalovia Austratica, Vel 5, Plates 241-300),

synop, pp. -Ixxiii, (Reeve, London.

JOHANSES,, FH, W, (1869) Morpnaloay and systemarics of

coralline algae with special reference to Culliarthrive

Univ, Calif. Publs Bot, 49, vii 4 78, Plates 1-19.

—— (170) The diagnostic value of reproductive argans

in some gevera of articulated coralline red aleac. Ar

phycol. 3. 5, 79-86.

—— (1971) Changes and additions to the articulated

coralline flora of Calitarnia. Phycotogia WW, 241-249.

-— (1972) Conveptacles. in, Tie Coyallinaceag, Proc.

Seventh Internat. Seaweed Symp., Sapporo, Japait, Aue.

8-12. 1971. pp, 14-119, (Unix. Tokyo Press, Tokyo.)

— (1981) “Coralline Alves, A First Synthesis”. (CRU

Press, Boca Raton, Florida.)

——.& SIVA, B.C. (1978) Janieae and Lithatrichowe: wo

new tribes of acticulated Coratlinacene (Rhodophyta)

Phycologia V7, AV3-4N7,

—& Womersi ry, H. B.S. (1UR6) (eliypitihon foseter

(Corallingceac, Rhovophyta) in soulheri Australia.

Ansi. 4 Bot. 34, 551-567.

Jow, A, B, (965) Flore aisiinha do htoral porte Wo

Eslade dy Sao Paulo rewides cirvunvizinhas, Fae Fras

Cléwe. e Lei, Univ. Sao Paulo, Bal, Fol, 21, 5-393, 59

Piates,

Kieizing, FT. (1958) Tabulae Phycolagivag. Vol. #

(Nordhausen,)

Lrimonik. PB A. (1977) Postfertilization development in

Clathromorphumn, Melobesia and Afesnphytuen with

comments on the cyoluuiou of the Corallinacae and

Hy Cy plonemaili (Rhodophyw). Phycolagie 16

79-406,

ARTHROCARDIA IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 49

Lewis, J. A. (1984) Checklist and bibliography of benthic

marine macroalgae recorded from northern Australia.

I, Rhodophyta. Dept Defence Materials Res. Lab Report

MRL-R-912. (Melbourne.)

Lucas, A. H. S. (1909) Revised list of the Fucoideae and

Florideae of Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 34, 9-60.

—— (1912) Sapplementary list of the marine algae of

Australia. Jbid. 37, 157-171,

(1929) The marine algae of Tasmania. A classified

list of the algae which have been recorded from

Tasmania and the adjacent islands, Pap. Prac, R. Soc.

Tasmania 1928, 6-27.

— & Perrin, F. (1947) The Seaweeds of South

Australia, Part I]. The Red Seaweeds. pp. 109-458, (Govt

Printer, Adelaide.)

Manza, A. VY. (1937) New species of articulated corallines

from South Africa. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci, 23, 568-572.

(1940) A revision of the genera of articulated

corallines. Philippine J. Sci. 71, 239-316.

May, V. (1965) A census and key to the species of

Rhodophyceae (Red Algae) recorded from Australia,

Canir. N.S.W. Nat. Herb. 3, 349-429.

REINBOLD, T. (1899) Ergebnisse einer Reise nach dem

Pacific. Meeresalgen. Abh, Naturwiss. ver. Bremen 16,

287-302.

SeacrieF, S. C. (1984) A catalogue of South African

green, brown and red marine algae. Mem. Bor. Surv,

South Africa 417, i-vi, 1-72.

Secawa, S. (1942) Systematic anatomy of the articulated

corallines. IX. Corallina sp. J. Jap. Bot. 18, 573-580.

SONDER, O. G. (1881) Algae Australianae hactenus

cognitae, In F. von Mueller, “Fragmenta Phytographiae

Australiae. I. Suppl. ad Vol. XI.” pp. 1-42; 105-107.

(Melbourne.)

SUNESON, C. (1937) Studien iiber die

Entwicklungeschichte der Corallinaceen. Lunds Univ.

Arsskr. N. F. Avd, 2, 33(2), 1-101.

TISDALL, H. T. (1898) The algae of Victoria. Rep. 7th

Meet. Aust. Ass, Adv, Sci, Sydney, 1898, pp. 493-516.

Wixson, J. B. (1892) Catalogue of Algae collected at or

near Port Phillip Heads and Western Port. Proc. R, Soc.

Vict. n.s, 4(2), 157-190.

YENDO, K. (1905) A revised list of Corallinae. J Coll. Sci,

Imp. Univ. Tokyo 20 (art. 12), 1-46,

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 112, PART 2

AMINO ACID RACEMISATION DATING OF THE

“OLDER PLEISTOCENE MARINE BEDS", REDCLIFF,

NORTHERN SPENCER GULF, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY C. V. MURRAY-WALLACE*", R. W. L. KIMBER*, V. A. GOSTIN} & A. P. BELPERIO¢

Summary

Amino acid racemisation dating of the "Older Pleistocene marine beds", Redcliff, northern

Spencer Gulf, South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 112(2), 51-55, 31 May 1988. Amino acid

racemisation reactions are applied in relative and quantitative age assessments of the "Older

Pleistocene marine beds" from Redcliff, northern Spencer Gulf. The extent of racemisation

(epimerisation) for a range of amino acids in specimens of the fossil bivalve Anadara trapezia

suggests a Penultimate Interglacial age (oxygen isotope stage 7) of approximately 200 000 yrs B.P.,

consistent with the geological context of the fossiliferous marine strata.

KEY WORDS: Amino acid racemisation, Middle Pleistocene, marine sediments, sea level change.

AMINO ACID RACEMISATION DATING OF THE “OLDER PLEISTOCENE MARINE

BEDS", REDCLIFE, NORTHERN SPENCER GULF, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By © Vo Murray Watiace?!) R, WoL) KimMmerS Vo A. Gosting & A. P BELPeRio]

Suminary

MurRAY WaALLact, ©. Vi. Kimarr, Ro WoL. Gestis, YoA) & Brreemo, A, PO (IY88) Amine acit

‘acermisation dating of the “Older Pleisiaeene marine beds", Redeliff, narthern Spencer Ciull, South

Australig. Trans. R) Sue. S. Angst 112(2), 3-55. Al Muy 1988,

Amino acid racemisation reactions are applied in relive dnd quantilalive age assessments of The “Older

Pleistocene mating bods” from Redebff,. northern Spencer Gulf. The extent of racemisation (epimerisation}

fora rive of amine acids in specimens of the fossil bivalve 4madara trepezia sugecsts a Penultimate

Interetacial wee (Oxygen Isulope stave 7) OF approximaicly 200 000 vrs BP, consistent with the geological

comtest Of the fossiliferous siarine strata.

Koy Woerbs: Amino ccd cocemimation, Middle Plemtaceny, marine sediments, sea level change.

Introduction

Uruil recently, age assessments Of Quaternary

marginal marine sediments have been frusirated by

complex stratigraphic relationships and the

limitations af some established. dating, techniques,

In response co these difficulties, considerable

research undertaken recently has resulicd in the

development of a vanety of dating methods

insluding amino acid racemsation, thermolumines-

cence and electron spin resonance (Mahaney 1984;

Rutter (985), Although the principles on which

these techniques ace hased aré long established, their

application in Quaternary studies is relatively new,

Some of the difficulties of cstabhshing

vhronologies in Quaternary foanginal murine

settings have included the intertingering relationship

of terrestrial and marine sedimeits, the lack of

fossils an terrestrial sediinenrs, and 4 complex ot

envirenmental controls on the distribution of biota

in marine and paralie sirmations (Mutray-Wallace

1987!). Stratigraphic relationships influenced by

gtamorphie setting, lack of continuous outcrop,

irregular facies development and homotaxcds have

presented further complications (Charlesworth

1957: Vita-Pinzi 1973; Aver 1981; Bowen 1985).

Notwithstanding the “apparent” complexity of

stratigraphic relationships in (Quaternary sequences,

? CSIRG Division at Soils, Private Bay No. 2, Glen

Osmond, S Ause S64.

Present Address; The NWG Mucintosl Centre for

CQnarernary Dating, University of Sydney, Sydnev 2006,

Australia,

Department of Geology and Geophysics, The University

of Adelaide, P.O. Box 498, Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001.

' South Australian Department of Mines and Energy,

PO, Box 181, Eastwood. 5. Aus. 5063.

"Murray Wallace, CV. (1987) Evaluarion and application

of the aming aed racemisation reaction in studies af

Quaternary coastal and marine sediments in Australia.

Ph.L. thesis, Liv, Adelaide (Uiapubl.)

the problems in Australia are further complicated

hy the need to correlate over large distances. Lntil

recently, assessments of the age of Quaternary

coastal deposits in Australia telied on correlations

with European models of Alpine glaciation, which

themselves were poorly csiablshed (Tindale 1933,

1947: Bauer 1961: Sprigg 1952, 1959, 1979; Ward

96S) Twidale ev af. 1977). The general absence of

widespread glaciation during the Australian

Quaternary has meant that its indirect expression,

elacio-eustatic sea-level fluctuations, have figured

prominently in chronostratigraphic classifivation of

marine and paralic sediments. $f particular, a minge

of geomorphologival evidence hus been cited in this

connection and has proved unreliable (Bauer 196];

Twidale ex a. 1977) Buckley ef a/. 1987), Such

approaches generally resulted in erroneous age

assessments and an incomplete understanding of

process tutes in coastal evolution. Altitudinal

relationships of strandlines and the construction of

Shoreline relation diagrams formed the basis of

these early suudies and are sull used by some (Ward

1985).

In this paper, we report results of uminy acid

tacemisation dating of Pleistocene fossiliferous

marine strita froin Redelil{, northern Sperver Gull.

These resulls serve fo illustrate the significant

parential of applying amino acid racemisatian

reactions to the dating ef Australian Quaternary

sediments.

“Older Pleistocene murine heds"

tn a regional investigation of the submanne

Quaternary geology of northern Spencer Gull,

Hails ev a/. (1984a, bh) and Belperio et a/, ()984a)

described a sedimentary unit they termed the “Older

Pleistacene marine beds” (Fig. 1), These sediments

aré represented by poorly sorted sandy clays with

low calcium ecrbenate contents, Allhough they fave

similar tithological characteristics to distal alluvial

32 ©, VV. MURRAYWALLACE, RW, 1

fan sediments, the presence of foraminifera and the

bivalve Anadara trapezia attests to their marine

origin. According to Billing (1984) these sediments

experienced intense pedogenic modification

invulving decalcification and clay illuviation. The

presence of Anadara trapezia suggested a coastal-

interlidial depositional environment for these

sediments (Hails ef a/. 1984a, b, Ludbrook 1984).

Relative lithostratigraphic relationships indicate

these sediments are older than the Mambray

Formation (equivalent to the Glanville Formation

of the Adelaide region) (Fig. 1). In the absence of

quantitative data, Hails ef ak (1984b) invoked a

generalised global glacioeustatic sea level curve, to

fit an age to. the “Older Pleistocene murine beds”.

Based on altitudinal relationships of the strata, and

the suggested heights of former sea levels that were

likely to have penetrated northern Spence: Gull, a

Penultimate Interelacialage (220 ka, oxygen isalope

Stage 7) was assigned lo these sediments (Hails ef

al, 1984b),

Amino acid rucemisation dating

In fecenit years 2 large literature has emerged on

the principles of amino acid racemisation dating.

In particular, useful reviews are provided by

Schroeder & Bada (1976), Williams & Smith (1977),

Davics & Treloar (1977), Wehmiller (1982, (984) and

Rutter et af. (1983).

Amino acid racemisation dating is based on the

principle that in living organisms, amino acids:

bound in protein appear essentially in the left

configuration (L-amino acids), With the death of

an organism, the enzymic reactions that maintained

the former disequilibrium condition cease, and a

racemisation teaction commences. This results in

the gradual change to right handed (D-amino acids)

until an equilibriuin condition is attained (i.e, D/L

= 1). As amine acid racemisation is a chemical

traction, it is sensitive to a range of environmental

factors, particularly prolonved changes in the

diagenetic lemperature history of the host fossils

{Murray-Wallace & Kimber 1987). However, with

cautious sainpling, the lechnique hus potential uses

in chronostratigraphy, stratigraphic correlation,

studies Of reworking (Belperio & Murray-Wallace

1984, Cann & Murray-Walluce 1986), and

ecotherniometry,

Sample Collection

Several specimens of the fossil bivalve Anadara

frupezia (Deshayes) were collected from two

vibrocores (Fig. 2) from Redeliff, northern Spencer

Gulf, The cores were obtained as part of a wider

study of carbonate sedimentation (Belperto ef al.

1984a). Onky disarticulated Anadara were present,

KIMBER, V.A. GOSTIN & A. P. RELPERIO

and were sampled from cores RED 40 and RED 41

within the depth interval 90-135 cx. Latrashell

amino acid D/L. ratio variation was avoided by

analysing only the hinges,

Analytical Methods

The analytical procedures undertaken in this

investigation follow those described more

extensively in Kimber & Griffin (1987) and Murray-

Wallace & Kimber (1987), Analyses reported are for

the total acid hydrolysate’, # complex mixture of

high molecular weighi peptides, smaller peptides

and tree amino acids.

Results and Discussion

Representative results of the extent of amino aad

racemisation for the Avadara trapezia from the

Redcliff Cores are presented in Table 1, These data

are compared with Last Interglacial and

radiocarbon-calibrated Holocene specimens’ which

provide a regional chronostratigraphic framework,

| __(PPrER SPENCER GULF] GULF ST VINCENT

lHAILS ef ob. (9840) (FIRMAN, (969)

GERMEIN BAY

FORMATION

ST KILDA FORMATION

HOLOCEN

in POORAKA FORMATION| POORAKA FORMATION

| ae Sa a

IMAMBRAY FORMATION |GLANVILLE FORMATION

OLDER’ PLEISTOCENE

MARINE BEDS

;

MIDDLE

HINDMARSH CLAY HINOMARSH CLAY

Fig, (. Summary of local lithostratigraphic nomenctamure

of Quaternary marginal marine strata, after Birman

(1969) and Hails er a/, (1984a), plotted in a

chronastratipraphic context and showing the relative

Stratigraphic pasition of the %Older Pleistocene marine

beck". The gaps ropresenc depositional breaks,

AMINO ACID RACEMISATION DATING 53

As Anadara trapezia became extinct in South

Australian coastal waters after the Last Interglacial,

the Holocene specimen was obtained from Hervey

Bay in southern Queensland. The radiocarbon age

reported was calibrated to sideréal years using the

tables of Klein et a/, (1982), and has also been

corrected for the marine reservoir effect according

to: Gillespie & Polach (1979), The mean annual

temperatures (M.A‘T.) of the sample sites are also

indicated in Table 1.

Results are reported for aspartic acid (ASP),

alanine (ALA), valine (VAL), isoleucine

(ALLO/ISO), glutamic acid (GLU) and

phenylalanine (PHE). The relative extent of

racemisation of the different amino acids in

Anadara trapezia is in accord with those generally

accepted for mollusc fossils of similar age (Lajoie

et al. 1980), By analogy with the calibration

samples, the Anadara from the “Older Pleistocene

marine beds” are clearly older than the Last

Interglacial, which is most reliably dated at

125,000+ 10,000 yrs by Uranium. series

disequilibrium dating (Stearns 1984).

A quantitative age assessment of the “Older

Pleistocene marine beds” was undertaken by

applying the integrated rate expression for the

amino acid racemisation reaction (Mitterer 1975),

and using the Last Interglacial Anadara trapezia as

a basis for calibration, This approach takes into

account the non-linear nature of molluscan

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

& R

Sy og

Suguste

MEL ACE

fa 5 ey

KILOMETRES:

Fig. 2. Location map of Redcliff cores RED 40 and RED

TABLE L. Extent af aming acid racemisation in Anadara trapezia obtained from the “Ojder Pleistocene marine beds?

Redeliff, northern Spencer Gulf, coripared with Holocene and Lest interglacial results'.

Lithostratizraphic No of Age M.AT* Amino acid D/L ratio T

unit/locality specimens (°C) ASP ALA VAL ALLO GLU PHE

/ISO

Modern beach surface

Quarantine Bay

New South Wales 2 modern 14.7 0.05 _ 0.02 0.02 0.08 =

Holocene sediments 2 6400 1 140 21.5 0.44 0.52 0.15 0,17 _ —

Hervey Bay 40.005 £0.02 10.01 + 0,002

Queensland

Glanville Formation 8 125,000 17 0.54 0.68 0.32 0,43 0.42 0.73

Port Wakefield +0.03 +002 +006 40.04 40.01 +0,06

Gulf Sr Vineenr

South Australia

“Older Pleistacene 4 — 19 0.76 0.83 0.48 0.55 0.62 O89

marine beds" 10.02 +003 +0.0) 40.02, 10.02 +0.03

Redcliff

1 Holocene and Last interglacial results are reported in Murray-Wallace, C. V. (1987) Evaluation and application of

the amino acid raccmisation reaction in studies of Quaternary coastal and marine sediments in Australia (Unpubl.

Ph.D. thesis, Univ, Adelaide) 332 pp.

* Mean annual teniperature.

+ ASP = Aspartic acid, AIA # Alanine, VAL # Valine, ALLO/ISO # AlloisoleucineIsaleucine, GLU # Glutamic

acid, PHE # Phenylalanine,

S4 ©, V, MUERRAPWALLACE, RB, WoL KIMBER, V2 A, GOSTIN & ALB BEL PERIC

yucemsation hineics und therefore integrates the

kinetic complexities of the transition zone in the

Nonlinear Model of YWeluniller C1984). The

(acemisation pale Constant (k) used was 18.10

In view of the slight amount of racemisatien that

occurs during sample preparition (acid hydlralysis),

the extent of meemisation evident in modern

Anardard was sublracted from the Aner Obtained

from the “Older Pleistovene marine beds”

A nlean age of 200,000 £50,000 yrs BP was

calculated based on ihe extent of raucetmisation in

aspartic acid, valine, glutamic acid and

phenylalapine. The error terja allows for a

diagenelic jemperature history uncertainty of

approximacely 39°C,

These duty therefore indieaw the “Older

Pleistacene marine heds” were deposited during the

Penultimate lpterglacal (Stage 7 of the ararnne

oxyzen-isotope record) and supperts the

prelimisary age assessment made by Pails er af,

(984b). \ global glacio-eustatic sea level event of

aboul this age is also known [rom coastal deposits

in New Guinea, Barbados, Berniuda, New Zealand,

Western Australia and various localities in southern

Australia (Chappell (974: Gill 1977; Fairbanks &

Matthews 1978; Harmon ef wf. 1983; Hewaill ev ai,

1983, Belperio er u/ 19846),

Acknowledgments

This research was part of a PhD. project by C.

V. Murray-Wallace undertaken jointly ar the

University of Adelaide and the CSIRO Division of

Soils, Suuth Austratia under the supervision of Drs

V. A, Gostin and R. WL. Kimber, A. P. Belperia

publishes with permission of the Director General,

South Australian Deparimentof Mines and Enerzy.

Referenves

fork, DO VY. (IYSL) “Phe Natore ab ihe Srratieraplrt

Record.” (Macmillan, Creat Britain.)

Raupe, Fw. (1961) Chronic problem of terrace sry

in Southern Australia, £ Gearon 3, 87-72

Brinreio, Ay Po & MURRAY WALLACE, C. Vo i bYR4y

Conmmient: Wardang Istand - a refoge for Murmapions

vertehralis? Trang. R. Soe. 8. Ast. WR, 227-228,

» Hats, 1OR, Gimstis, VoAL & Porace, Hy oA.

(1984) The stratigraphy of coustal carbonate banks and

Holocene sea levels of northern Spencer Gull, South

Austria, Mar, Geat, @t, 297-413,

—. SMitH, BOW, Papacy, ERA. Nierimmpe. ©. AL,

Desasick, DS. Prescom. DR. Mans, i RO &

Gasiin, WA, (98db) Chropologival studies ot Ue

Qitaternary marine sediments ol northery Spencer Gulf,

South Australia, Man Geul, G1, 265-296.

Butina, N, 8. (984) Palaeasol development in

Quaternary muting sediments and palagactimarie

iitlerpretalions, Spenver Calf, Australia. tar, Goal Gt,

415.343.

Bowes, DOO. (1985) “Qhideraury Goology.” (Perzamon,

Oxford.)

Bocws.ty, RoC. Stioay. A, DA Foraikivcilam, FG

(1987) Late Pleisroogne sea-level maxims in the Great

Ausuiafian Biehl. Seared 1X, 86-89,

Cavs. 1 FL & Moka Wau acn OC. ¥. (986) bolooune

istribution and amino seid rayemisalion of tlie teatne

foraminitera Mossilina mille, worthern Spencer Gulf,

South Australia 4éavennga 10, 45-54,

CHarrrit, jk (974) Cenlogy of voral terreves, Muon

Peninsnilis,, Now Ciuinear A study of Quartet ners tectonic

movements and sca level changes. Geal Soe. let Ault.

85, 353-570.

CHakipswortin, dK. (1957) "The Quaternary Fra" Vol,

Z. pp. 595-1700, (Edward Aroold, bondon.)

Dayirs, Wo D. & Teetoak, bob. (977) he applivanon

of racemimnion dating in Archaeology; A eritwal review.

The Artifuer 2, 63-94.

Taiktanks, ROG. d& Marriews, ROK, (978) The marine

oxyeen wotope record in Pleistocene coral, Burbadas,

Wes! Indies, Oug?, Res, 10, 18) 196,

Pikatas, J.B, (1969) Quaternary Period. pp. 204-233. sn

1, W. Parkin (Fd.) "Handbook al South Australian

Cieology”. (Geol Sury, SA. Adelaide)

Gra. LD {T7) Time of migration af the nyotlise

Aeorerd io SE Australis. Seareh &, 4.1

Ginbeseio, R.& Poract TH. A. (1979) The suitshility of

marine shells for cadioearbon daring of Australian

Prehisiry, pp, 404-431. da R. Berger & H. E, Stiess (Bus.9

“Radiocarbon Dati", (Univ, California, Berkeley.)

Haus. J. Ray BocPekiG, AP. Gostin, VAL Ke SakGeNT,

G, E.G, W98da) Phe submarine Quaternary strtizraphy

of northern Spencer Catt, South Australia. Mer Ceul,

1, 348-372

ary ay & Gostin, VA, C9840) Quaternary see

levels, nurthern Spencer Gull, Australia, War Geol ol,

373-389,

HARMON, ROS, Mitte RiR, BR. ML, RRIAUSAKOD, NL,

Lavo, 1.5. 8crwarney, HP, Garkeri, By LARSON,

God. Yacwpr, Hob. & Rowe, M. (1983) Usertes and

GUNG dl racemization geochronology of Bermuda

Implizations for eustatic sea-level {uctuation over rhe

past 250,000 years, Pulueosrogm Patienelinietal.,

Paleeaveal, 44, 41-70,

Hewoith, POR, KeNprice, GW. Wes, RO &

Wrawork, KF (1983) Rowling ESR dating of

cingrgent Pleistovene marine units in Wester Australia,

Search 4, 215-217.

Kimkkn, Ro Wo Lb. d& Gripkin, CoV. (987) Portes

avidence of the vornplexily of the racemization prowess

in fossil shelly with implications. Jor aming acid

racumizition dating, Geochin. Cosmochim cra. 51,

$39-B46,

Kiting da herman, J. G.. Banwom, Por & Raven, BOR

(1982) Calibration of radiocarbon dates. Redivcarbun

24, 103-150.

MOI, K. Ry WiHaniite, J fo Renvens. OL.

(1980) Inler- and Intragenene trends in apparent

racemization kineues of amino acids in Quaternary

Mollusks. pp. 305-340. fn PE. Hare, 1 C. Hoering &

K. King Jr (Rds,) “Biogeochemistry at Amine acids’?

(John Wiley, New York.)

Tuberook, NH, (1984) “Quaternary Mofluses of South

Australia” (Denartment of Mines & Enurgy, South

Australia) Handbook Nu, 9

Maniasry, W)C, (Edo) (1984) “Quaternary Oaine

Methods." (Flsevier, Anisterdan )

AMINO ACID RACEMISATION DATING 35

Mirrerrr, R. M. (1975) Ages and diagenetic

temperatures of Pleistocene deposils in Florida based

on isoleucine epimerization in Mercenaria, Earth and

Plant Sci. Leti, 28, 275-282.

Murray-Wa.iacrk, C. V. & Kimber, R, W. L. (1987)

Evaluation of the aming acid racemization reaction in

studies of Quaternary marine sediments in South

Australia. Aust, <£. Earth Sei. 34(3), 279-292.

Pinians, B. (1982) Amino acid racemisation dating: A

review, pp. 228-235. Jn W. Ambrose & P. Duerden (Eds.)

“Archacometry: An Australasian Perspective” (Dept.

Prehistory, A,N1.).

Rutter, N. W., CRAWFORD, R. J. & Hamitton, R. D,

(1985) Amino acid racemization dating. pp. 23-30. In

N, W, Rutter (Ed.) “Dating Methods of Pleistocene

Deposits and their Problems”, Geosci, Canada, Reprint

Series 2.

Rutrer, N. W, (Ed.) (1988) “Dating Methods of

Pleistocene Deposits and their Problems.” (Geoscience

Canada Reprint Series 2.)

ScHrocper, R. A, & Baba, J. L, (1976) A review of the

geochemical applications of the amino acid

racemization reaction. Burth-Sei Rev, 12, 347-391.

Spricc, R. C. (1952) The geology of (he South-east

Province, South Australia, with special reference to

Quaternary coastline migrations and modern beach

development. Geol, Surv. S. Aust. Bull. 29, 120 pp.

(1959) Stranded sea beaches and associated sand

accumulations of the upper southeast. Trans, R. Soc.

S. Aust. 82, 183-193.

—— (1979) Stranded and submerged sea beach systems

of southeast South Australia and the acolian desert

cycle. Sed. Geol. 22, 53-96.

STEARNS, C, E, (1984) Uranium-series dating and the

history of sea level, pp 53-66. Jn W. C. Mahaney (Ed.)

“Quaternary Dating Methods”. (Elsevier, Amsterdam.)

TINDALE,. N, B, (1933) Tantanoola Caves, geological and

physiographical. Trans. R, Soc. S. Aust. 37, 130-142.

(947) Subdivision of Pleistocene time in South

Australia. Rec. S, Aust. Mus, 8, 619-652.

TwinaLe, C. R., BouRNE, IA, & Twinatn, N. (1977)

Shore platforms and sea tevel changes ift the Gulfs

Regen of South Australia. Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust, 101,

3-74.

Vita-Finzit, €. (1973)

(Macmillan, London.)

Warn, W. T. (1965) Eustatic and climatic history of the

Adelaide area, South Australia, £ Geol, 73, 592-602.

—~ (1985) Correlation of east Australian Pleistocene

shorelines with deep-sea core stages: A basis for a

coastal chronology. Geol. Soc. Am, Bull. 96(9),

1156-1166.

WEHMILLER, J. F. (1982) A review of amino acid

racemization studies in Quaternary mollusks:

Stratigraphic and chronologic applications in coastal

and Interglacial sites, Pacitic and Atlantic coasts, United

States, United Kingdom, Baffin Island and Tropical

Islarids. Quat. Sci. Rev, 1, 83-120.

(1984) Relative and absolute dating of Quaternary

mollusks with amino acid racemization: Evaluation,

applications and questions. pp. 171-193. Ja W, C.

Mahaney (Ed.), “Quaternary Dating Methods.”

(Elsevier, Amsterdam.)

WILLIAMS, K. M. & Smitit, G. G. (1977) A critical

evaluation of the application of amino acid

racemization to geochronology and geothermometry.

Origins of Life 8, 91-144,

“Recent Earth History.”

A REDESCRIPTION OF FZLARZNEMA DZSSZMZLE (WOOD, 1931),

WITH NEW RECORDS OF OTHER SPECIES OF FILARINEMA MOENNIG,

1929 (NEMATODA: TRICHOSTRONGYLOIDEA)

FROM MACROPODID MARSUPIALS

BY IAN BEVERAGE* & D. M. SPRATTT

Summary

Filarinema dissimile (Wood, 1931) (Nematoda: Trichostrongyloidea) is redescribed from material

collected from the type host, Macropus robustus Gould, 1841, from Petrogale assimilis

Ramsay, 1877 and from Lagorchestes conspicillatus Gould, 1842, all from Queensland. E cassonei

nom. nov. is proposed as a new name for F. asymmetricum (Cameron, 1926) sensu Cassone &

Baccam, 1985 from free-living Macropus rufogriseus (Desmarest, 1817) and Wallabia bicolor

(Desmarest, 1804) and from captive M. robustus Gould, 1841 and M. antilopinus (Gould, 1842). F.

woodi Cassone & Baccam, 1985 is suppressed as a synonym of F. asymmetricum (Wood, 1931).

Host records are revised. New records are given for F. australe (Wood, 1931), F. asymmetricum,

and F’. mawsonae Cassone & Baccam, 1985.

KEY WORDS: Nematoda, Trichostrongyloidea, Filarinema, Macropodidae.

A REDESCRIPTION OF /ILARINEMA DISSIMILE (WOOD, 1931), WITH NEW

RECORDS OF OTHER SPECIES OF FILARINEMA MOENNIG, 1929

(NEMATODA: TRICHOSTRONGYLOIDEA) FROM MACROPODID MARSUPIALS

By JAN BEVERIDGE* & D. M. SPRATTT

Summary

Brvenince, f. & Sprare, DOM. (1988) A redescription of Filarinema dissimile (Wood, 1931), with new

records of Gther species of Filarinemu Moennig. 1929 (Nematoda: Trichosirongyloidea) from macropodid

marsupials, Trans. A. Soc. S Awe. 142(2), $7-61, 71 May 1988.

Filarinema dissnmile (Wood, 193)) (Nematoda; Trichostrongyloidea) is redescribed from material collected

from (he type lost, Mucrepus robystus Gould, 1841, from Petrogele assimilis Ramsay, 1877 and trom

Lagorchesies conspicillatus Gould, 1842, all trom Queensland. FE cassonei nom, noy.is proposed as a new

same tor E asvmmerricum (Cameron, 1926) sensu Cassone & Baccam. 1985 from free-living Mfacropus

eufosrixeus (Desmarest, (817) and Wellabia bicolor (Desmarest, 1804) and from captive M- rebustus Gould,

1841 and Md. aattifopiius (Gould, 1842). F wooed: Cassone & Baccam, 1985 is suppressed as a synonym

of FE axynmetricnm (Wood, 1931). Host records are revised. New recordy are given for F australe (Wood,

1941), & asymunersicum, and & mansorge Cassane & Baccam, 1985,

Key Worps: Nematoda, Wichosirongyloides, #7larinema, Macropodidae.

Introduction

Species of the nematode genus Filatinemea

Moennig, 1929 are restricted to the pyloric antrum

of the sacculated stomachs of kangaroos and

wallabies (family Macropodidae), The genus was

recently reviewed by Cassone & Baccam (1985) who

redescribed all but one of the known Species and

added [ive new ones, F, dissimile (Wood, 1931) was

hot redeseribed since no new material was available

and because the male types deposited by Woad

(1931) are apparently no longer extant, Since

publication of the revision by Cassone & Baccam

{1985}, considerable additional material has been

collected, including new material of & dissimile, and

hence a full description of this species can be given

for the first time, While undertaking ‘this

redescription, and identifying the many additional

Specimens recently collected [rom related

macropodid hasts, it became evident that an

additional species, previously referred to 4s

asyinmierricuum by Cassone & Baccam (1985), existed

within the genus, This new species is naimed in chis

paper.

Materials and Methods

Specimens examined were lromt the Helminth

Collection (AHC), of the South Australian

Museum, Adelaide (SAM) and from the helminth

collection of the Division of Wildlife and Ecology;

* Cenrral Veterinary Laboratorics, Sowth Ausiralian

Deparrment of Avpriculture, c/o Insulcuce of Medical

ae Veterinary Scienve. Prome Road, Adelaide, S Aust.

S000,

4 Division of Wildlite and Feology, CS LR0,, Canberra,

ACT,

C.S.LR.O, Canberra. Specimens deposited in the

British Museum [Natural History), London

({BMNH), the CAB International Institule of

Parasitology, St. Albans (CIP) and in SAM were also

examined, Nematodes were cleared in lactophenol

for examination and drawings were made with the

aid of a drawing tube atiached to an Olympus BH

microscope, Ea face preparations of the cephalic

end and mid-body sections Were cut by hand, under

a stereomicroscope, using a fragment of razor blade

mounted in a holder. Specimens of the species

described in this paper have been deposited in SAM

and BMNH, Measurements are given in the texd in

millimetres a8 the range followed by the mean 7A

Purentheses,

Fitarinema dissimile (Wood, 1931)

FIGS 1-13

Trichastronnylus dissimitis Wood, {931

Asvinmetricosirongylus disstmilis Wood, 1931) Nagaty,

1932

Dipes: Scr colypes, from stomach of Macrapus robustus

woodwardi, Western Australia. Whereabouls unknown.

Maicrial examined: From M. robustus: 6 o Warrawee

Station via Charters Towers, Qld (SAM V4032-4034; AHIC

16281; BMN H 1986.100$-1006); from Petrovale assimilis:

Sort, Frederick Creek, Collinsville, Qld (AHC (4447);

from Lagerchesies conspicillatus: 10, Fletcher View

Station yia Charters Towers, Old (AHC 12325),

Description (measurements of 6 specimens from AL.

robusius): Small slender nematodes, 8.0-10.4 (9.5)

long, maximum width 0.10-0,15 (0.12). Body

covered with numerous, fine, transverse striations.

Synlophe absent; slight cuticular thickening present

on right-hind side of body (Fig, 5). Mouth opening

trangular in apical view (Fie. 3); 2 lareral amphids

avid 4 sub-median cephalic papillae present. Buccal

capsule poorly developed, tri-radiate in section,

Si L BEVERIDCIR & 1M, SPRATT

surrounded by musculature of vesophagus; dorsal

tooth present but very poorly developed (Figs 2, 4).

OCesuphagus filiform U.74-0.85 (0,79): nerve ring in

anterior arsophageal region, 0.20-0,30 (0.26) trom

antefios end; cacretory pore immediately posterior

lo nerve ring, (,21-0,32 (0.27) from anterior end

(Fig. 1); demrids not seen, Bursa covered with fine

srelgioats: lobes of bursa indistiner {Fiz 7); veniro-

ventral rays symmetrical, diverent, antertorly

direeted, thick, almost reach margin of bursa;

yentrevlaleral and lateral rays grouped together;

yentra-lateral ray lerinates near margin of bursa;

externola(ers! ray short, lerminates some distanee

from margin of bursa; mediolateral ray longer than

oller rays, terminates near margin of bursa:

posterolateral rays slender, shorter, do not reach

niargin of bursay externo-dorsal Tavs broad, slightly

asymmetrical, left ray thicker than gin, arise from

base of darsal ray, do not reach margin of bursa;

dorsal ray asymmetrical (Fig. 8), trunk divides at

‘4 length inte 2 unequal branches, which terminate

at bursa] margin in small but distinct bifurcations.

Genital Cone promiment (Figs 6 7); ventral lobe

small, appears as low eminence in ventral view with

simiple papilla; dorsal lobe longer, composed of two

separate raylets, Spicules heavily sclerotised, dark

brown in colour, 0.20-0,23 (0.21) long (Figs 9-11);

body of spicule tapers gradually to hne point, dorsal

subsidiary branch 0,080-0,095 (0,086) long, arises

ab middle of spicule brody, 0,078-0.096 (0.083) from

anterior end, pointed al exiremilys ventral branch

U.072-0.087 (0.478) lowg, arises just posteriur to

origin of dorsal branch, more robust chan dursul

branch, blunt and enlarged at tip. Gubernacylym

thick, curved (Figs 12, 13), 0,13-0,15 (0.14) long,

6.O10-0,020 (0,015) thick, slightly curved ventrally

in lateral view,

lariation: specimens from P. asséntilis and

conspiciffetas exhibit’ greater vanation in

dimensions of spicules Ihan specimens tra

rotustus, From PB wssimilis (5 specimens): body

length 8.4-9.5 (9.2), masimum width (11-012

(0,12), oesophaaus 0.66-0.77 (0.72), nerve ring

O.20-0.25 (0.23) from anterior ent, excretory pore

0.24. 0.28 (0.25) frein anterior end, spicale length

0.15-0.20 (017) gubermacutum O00-.14 (0,12);

Single specimen from L. consyeiilafus: length 11,6,

maximum width 0.18, oesophagus U.Y6, nerve ring

0.20 from anterior endl, excretary pare 1.35 fret

anrerior end, spicules 0.28, gubernaculuin 0.17

Filacinernra cassoner Wem. Noy,

Filerinemir asteninierricus (vey (Caieroil, 1926) sensi

Cassone & BKaccam, 1985 (fram Maevropis mefoeesnvs)

js 383-955, te, 2 AFH.

Tippee Holotype o from pylorus af Macropus cufogriseur

(Desmarest, ISI7}, Cape Barren Island, Fas, 12,40,1973,

in SANT V3578

Marerial examined: From M. rafoeeseus; holotype;

97 same collection daw (AHC 16284, BMNH

1986.1007-1008); Zoo, Melbourne Zoolagical Gardens

Vie; lo, Grampian Ranyes, Vie; doo, Cape Conran,

Vicj Soc, Bondo State Forest, Tumut, NSW, Jore,

Timbillica State Porest, Eden, NSM; 2c, “Iceng™

Gladstone, Tass from Hallabie bicelor (Desmarest, (M4jc

3ac, Orbost, Vie, tdet. as Howards by Cassone &

Racwun): from At falieinuses (Desmarest, BIT} Zor or

Melbourne Zoological Gardens, Vie. from ML aarileputus

(Gould, 1842); bo, capiive colony, CSERG, Canberra,

“Sunekalin”.

Description: See Cassone & Baceam (1985), Spicuics

winber in colour, 0.29-0.25 (0.22) long (mewn of 10

measurements}, tapering distally to -cxtremely fine

point; anterior wodivided part of $picule

0.076-G.09D (0.078) long; dorsal branch.of spicile

arises proximal to ventral branch, blunt-tipped,

0.052-6.070 (0,060) long; ventral branch sharper-

tipped, O.0SU-(.060 (0.053) long) guberiaculun

0.12-0.15 (0,13) tong, slightly sinuous in lateral view,

very thick, maximum thickness 0,014-0.022 (0.016)

New frost recerds

The following collections represent new host

recoris,

Filarinema mawsange Cassone & Baccam, 1985: Petrogule

ussimilis Ramsay, 1877, South Edge Sui via Mareeba, Qhi

tALLC 13404), Mi Clare near Invham, Qld }AHC 13394),

Expedition Creek, Blue Range, Qld (AHC 41921), Lander’s

Creck Stn Via Clare, Ol (AHC 13397), Valley of Lagoans

Stn Via Ingham, Old (APEC 13293), Glen Harding Stn via

Ingham, Old (AHO 11929); Pefrogale goddmané Thomas,

1923, Kings Plains Sin via Cooktown, Qld (AHE (3399);

Thylogale stigmatica Gould, 1860, Peeramon, Qld (AEC

8978); depyprvinnus rajescens (Gray, 1837), Inkerman Sey

via Home Hill, Old (AHC 11935).

Filurinema australe (Wood, 1931): Lagorchestes

conspicillatus Gould, 1842, Barrow Island, W.A. (AFIC

10860); Petrogale inernata Gould, 1842, Mynitia Sin Via

Collinsville, Old (AHC 14398); Perragile usriitilis

Rarnsay, 1877, Frederick Creek, Collinsville, Qkt (AHC

14446), Mi Clato via Ingham, Old (AHC 13394), Mt

Wickham Stn via Collinsville, Qld (13398), Natal Downs

Stn vin Chaners Towers, Gld (AHC 11928),

Filernema asvernoticum Cameron, 1926); Poterous

Iridactvlus (Kerr, 1792), Tas. (AH 11915),

Dimessiog

A dissemiile 4s most similar to Fl asyemelricun

(Cameron, 1926) (svn. fo wee) Cussoue & Baccara,

1985). & cassenei nom, nov. (- F asyramerricura

sensi Cassone & Bacvam 1988) and K haycocki

Cassone & Baccam, 1985 in having a long slender

spicule, tapering gradually to.a long, fine point, and

two hrauches al equal length acsing from the

spicule beady, FE dissyendle differs from fe

FILARINEMA FROM MACROPOD MARSUPIALS a4

dsmnericienain having much (nore robust spicules

whieh are dark brow) (n-colour compared with

arober in (he taller species, and in having much

longer and more rabast spicule branches than i)

F oasvnmetieumnt. The gubernacutum of F

usynimetricum has a characteristic Twist when

viewed laterally, abd a similar twist is lacking inthe

gubernacutum of F elissimile. F cussoner, for which

an excellent disctiption was given by Cassone &

Baccam (1985) fas FO uspemefricuni). ts

distriguished by its amber coloured spiculey, and

by the level al which the spicule branches terminate,

being closer Lo Ihe spicule tip in & dessimile. In

addition, ihe shoeter spicule branches in fy cussearey

and the fact that the more robustol the two spicule

branches is dorsal in F cassones but ventral in

dissimile distinguish the two species. F gessimile

Uiffers from Fl havcwcki in having darker spicules

as well as in the shape and disposition of the

branches of the spicule.

Wood (1931) provided a very poor description of

F. dissimile based on specimens obtained from

several Afacropus robustes (sya. ML woddweardt)

which dled soon after their imporation tno

England from Western Australia. The original

description is brief, lacks many important details,

and the legends to the figures of his paper are

incurrectly applied, Nagaty (1983) re-examined

Woud’s type specimens and gave a more detailed

description of thei In support of the erection of

the wenus -lsvrnerricostrongylus Napaty, 1932 Lo

winch he had earlier assigned the species. By

contemporary standards, Nagaty’s drawings of the

spicules are poor, but they agree in all important

features with the wew marerial. A redeseriplion of

the species is warranted to facilitate its separation

rom congeners. The male types are no longer

present in BMNH amd We have therefore deposited

aduivional specimens in thal museum,

The present specimens of F déssimite are trom

the same host sprees as Wood's specimens, [hough

not the same subspecies. Wood's material came

frum At. robustus woodwardi, a subspecies Ninited

to northern Western Australia and the Northern

ferritory, while the preseait natenal comes from M,

rofusns robusius which aceuTs along the Great

Dividing Range from Cape York to New South

Wales (Richanisan & Sbarmun 1976). The new

specimens differ from Wood's und Nagaty’s

deseriptions oaly in the following details. Wood

(1931) and Nagaty {5938) desetibed a cuticular

“flange” on the righe hand side of the body anid

similar cilicular thickenings were described in

several species by Cassone & Baccam (1985). tn our

specimens, the thickening is slight and ts only

evident in transverse sectiuns ol (he body, Woud

(1931) descrihed the tateral lobes of the bursa as

being markedly asymmetrical and the ventro-vential

ray being more divergent on une side of Lhe body

than the other, In our specimens, the asynimetry

is not as marked, che ventrn-ventral rays are equally

divergent and only the externodorsal rays are

obviously asymmetrical. In spite of these minor

differenves, our specimens are assigned (O FF

dissimile pending the availability of new collections

from Af robustus woodwardi trem Westera

Australia (6 resolve the significance of the

differences noted.

In their redescription af E asprimerricuy (sic)

from Mucropus rufogeiseus (syn MO beneils)

Cassone & Buccam (1985) noted discrepancies

between jhe original description of Cameron (1926)

and the comments made on the same species by

Wood (6931). Wood (199) himself noted that

Cameson’s description was inaccurate ut several

points, and sought to correct 1 based on a re-

examination of the type specimens deposited in the

British Museum, Nagaty (1938) provided a more

detailed desetiption of the same species, Cassone

& Bacvam (1985) hypothesised that Cameron in favi

had two species in his material, but failed to

recognise the fact. They concluded that Cameron

had prepared the descriprion [rom one of the species

but had deposited as lypes, specimens of the

second. Woud's (1931) comments on Cameron's

inaccurate description would then stem from the

fact Lbat Wood had examined only the specimens

which Cameron had deposited as types, and not the

specimens which formed the basis of his published

description. Cassone & Baceam's (1983) views are

certainly supported by an examination of

Cameron's Tigures of the spicules of &

asymmietriciem which do not conform at all with

the type specimens but do agree with a second

species uf Filerinemnu also found commonty in Mf.

rufoeriseus, On this basis, they designated a nearype

for K asyrimetricumt and renamed the type

Specunens of A asynumerricum in RMNIT as

waved! Cassone & Baccam, 98S,

Recent collections from Tasmania, Victoria, New

South Wales and Queensland indicate chat there are

indeed two species of /iletinerna tn the stomach of

Macrepus aifogriseus and that mixed infections are

usual, thereby further supperting Cassone &

Baceaim's hypothesis thal Cameron was dlealaig willl

a mixed infection of two species, Cameron

deposited a total of 15 type specimens of &

asyinmerricum, The holotype selected wus a feunule

and it, logether with two males and two female

paratypes, was deposited inh 19264 (BMNH

1926.10.12.1-3). In addition, live male and live

female paratypes were placed in dhe coflecdon of

the Landen School of Hygiene and Tropical

Medicine, housed at the CAB International Instivute

1. BEVERIDGE & D. M. SPRATT

FILARINEMA FROM MACROPOD MARSLPIALS or

oj Parasitology (collection no 178/A). We have

examined all the type specimens and all the males

are conspecific, belonging to the species described

by Cassone & Baccam (1985) as F woodi. The

females are also similar to one another and conform

to the description given by the same authors. The

name asymumetricum is determined by the lype

specimens, rather than the published description,

and all the male lypes clearly belong 10 the same

taxon. We therefore propose that £ woodi be

considered a synonym of J? asymmetricum, The co-

parasitic species in Macropus rufogriseus, F.

asynumetricuin sensu Cassone & Baccam, 1985

therefore is un-amed and we propose the name ©

cassonei nom. nov. for it, in recognition of the

important contributions made to the systematics of

the genus by J, Cassone, ‘The description of this

species already published (Cassone & Baccan) 1985)

is excellent, and we have merely added metric data

from the much wider range of specimens we have

available to us. The additional material we examined

came from the same host animal as that described

by Cassone & Baccam (1985), and we have therefore

designated as a holotype of F cassonei the specimen

in SAM formerly designated as the neotype of &

asyminetricum by Cassone & Baccam,

The nomenclatural changes made above result in

significant alterations to host records, Cassone &

Baccam (1985) recorded & wood! from Macropus

rufogriseus, M, parryi, M, robustus and Wallabia

bicolor, We have re-examined all the available

material to confirm the identifications and all now

become records for F asymmierricum.

Our new host records extend considerably the

host range of mawsonae, F. australe and, to a

more limited extent, thar of & asymmetricum.

Some confusion exists tn the literature as to the

gender of the genus Filarinema. Nema (= thread)

is neuter both in Cireek and Latin, and hence the

gender of the genus is neuter. Moennig (1929) used

the specific epithet flagrifer for the type species, and

it is assumed he intended it to stand as a noun in

apposition (= whipbearer) rather than as an

adjective (= whip bearing), in which case it would

have been flagriferurt, We have retained Maennig’s

(1929) original spelling of the nante, but have used

F-asyrnmeiricum, F. dissimile and #. australe in

contradistin¢tion to the use of Inglis (1968) and

Cassone & Baccam (1985).

Acknowledgments

We wish to thank Dr D. 1. Gibson, Mrs E. Harris

and Dr L. Khalil for the loan of type specimens and

ancillary information, and Dr R, Spesre, Mr P.M,

Johnson, Dr R, Close and Mr §. Barker for

collecting specimens.

References

CAMERON, T. W. M. (1926) On 3 new species of

Hichessougiie worm trom the Bennett's wallaby. 2

Helminthol, 4, 23-26.

Cassone, Jide BACCAM, D, (1985) Le genre Filar/nemu

Moennig, 1929 (Nematoda, Trivhostrongyloidea),

parasiles de marsupiaux australiens, Bull, Mus. nein.

Hist, nat, Paris, 4 ser 7, 349-382,

INGLIS, W. G. (1968) The geographical ond evolatianary

relationships of Australian trichastrongyloid parasites

and their hosts, J. Lint. Soc, (Zool) 47, 327-347,

Nacary, N. F, (1938) The gener: Asymnetricostronpylus

Nagaty, 1932 and Lihyostrongylus Lane, 1923 and

relation to the genus Trickastrongyius Loos, IX0S, Livre

rine Prof. Travassos, Rio de Janeiro, Brasil, TH,

RICHARDSON, B. |. & SHARMAN, G, B. (1976) Biochemical

and morphological observations on the wallarcos

(Macropodidae: Marsupialia) with a suggested new

taxonomy. J. Zaol, Lond. 179, 499.513.

Woon, W, A. (1931) Some new parasitic nematodes from

Western Australia Report Dir. Inst, Anim. Path,

Cambridge. 19291930 1, 209-219.

——— See

Figs, 1-13. Kilarinemta dissimile (Wood, 1931), 1, anterior end, lateral views 2, cephalic extremity, lateral view, dotsal

aspect on left-hand side; 3, mouth opening, en face view; 4, optical transverse section through buccal capsule, showing

huccal tooth and oesophageal masculature surrounding capsule; 5, transverse section in mid-body region, showing

thickening of cuticle on right-hand side;.6, genital cone, latctal view; 7, bursa, ventral view; 8, dorsal lobe of” bursa,

dorsal view, showing terminal bifurcarions of dorsal ray; 9-L, spicule from various oblique views; 12, gubernaculum,

ventral view; 13, gubernaculumy Jateral view. Scale tines: Fig. 1, 0.1. mm, figs 2-4 to same scale, 0.01 mm figs 5-13

to same scale, 0.1 mm.

MAGMATIC BANDING WITHIN PROTEROZOIC GRANODIORITE

DYKES NEAR STREAKY BAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. F. BERRY* & R. B. FLINT}

Summary

Early Proterozoic I-type granitoids are exposed on the west coast of Eyre Peninsula. Narrow

granodiorite dykes within this complex exhibit conspicuous banded margins. The banding is best

developed along the eastern margins of the dykes and is cyclic. A detailed petrological and

geochemical investigation was made of one of these banded margins from Point Brown. The dark

bands are strongly depleted in coarse-grained K-feldspar and enriched in fine-grained biotite. This

mineralogical and grainsize variation correlates with a strong enrichment in MgO, MnO and Rb and

depletion in Ba. The systematic variation in mineralogy, geochemistry and grainsize can only be

explained by dynamic crystal sorting in a crystal-rich granitic magma due to grain dispersive forces

(Bagnold effect) acting in the shear gradient along the margin of the dyke.

KEY WORDS: Early Proterozoic, granodiorite, magmatic banding, Gawler Craton.

MAGMATIC BANDING WITHIN PROTEROZOIC GRANQDIORITE DYKES

NAR STREAKY BAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. BK BERRY? & KR. B, FLINT

Summary

Berry, Rb. d& Prine, R. B. (1988) Magmaric handing within Proterozoic Cranodiorite dykes near Streaky

Bay, South Australia. Trans. R. See. 8. Auet. 19242}, 63-74, 31 May 1988,

fiarly Proterozoic {-type wraniloids are expased on the west coast of Byre Peninsula, Narrow eranodiorite

dykes within his complex exhibit conspictious banded marying, The banding is best developed alone the

easjern margins of the dykes and is cyelic, A detailed petrological and geochemical investigation was made

of one of these banded margins from Poin( Brown, The dark bands arestrongly depleted in coarse-grained

K-feldspar and enriched in fine-grained biotite This mineralogical and grainsize variation correlates with

8 strong encichment in MeO, MnO and Rb and depletion in Ba. The systematic variahion in mineralogy,

geochemisiry and grainsize can only be explained hy dynamic crystal sorting in a crystal-rich granitic magma

duc to gvain dispersive forces (Bagnold effect) acting in the shear eradient alony the inargin OF the dyke.

Kry Woros: Early Proverozvic, granpdioriia magmatic banding, Gawler Craton.

Introduction

Compositional banding and grading within

magmatic rocks are relatively common and well

studied in basic and ultrabasic lithologies but arc

much less well known within granitoids. Biotite-rich

bands have been described from an annular zone

of a porphyritic monzogranite in France, where (hey

were interpreted as the result of a shear gradient

at the edge of convection cells (Barriere 1981).

Banding of this type has not previously been

reported in South Australia, despite the abundance

of graniioids and extensive geological mapping in

the state, However, at Point Brown, between Streaky

Bay and Ceduna, granodiorite dykes exposed on the

shore platform have banded margins. The nature

and origin of these bands are the focus of this paper.

Geologival Setting

Rocks comprising the Gawler Craton range in age

from: late Archaean Jo Middle Prolerozoie The

craton is composed of schist, gneiss, iron Fannation,

quarnizite, calesilicate and acid 10 basic voleanic rock

intruded by granitoid, Three main phases of igneous

activity have been recognised; the Duiton Suite

inteuded during the Sleatordian Orogeny (25(K)-

20 Ma), syn-Kimban Orogeny graniloids

(1850-1650 Ma) and anerogenic granitoids

(1650-1450 Ma} (Parker e of 1985; Webb er al

LYKA). The syn-Kimban Orogeny granitoids are the

mast common rock type in the coastal exposures

of western Eyre Peninsula (Fig, 1), All the rock types

iicluded in this study are from the exposures of this

suite at Point Brown and were intruded after the

* Geology Department, Lijiversity of Tasmania, G0,

Box 252C, Hobart 7001, Tasmanio,

T Department of Mines & Energy, P.O. Box 151, Exsiwoud,

S. Aust. 5063.

second phase (D>) and before the third phase (D3)

of the Kimiban Orogeny.

A complex sequence of plutunism has been

recognised within the syn-Kimban granitoids

(Watkins & Flint 1983),! At Point Brown the oldest

rock type is a coarse-grained red granite, This is

iniruded by two generations ol diorite dykes and

an extensive swarm of granodiorite dykes, The

grariodiarite dykes strike at 010-035°, dip steeply

(~80°) to the east and vary in width from 1 to

15m, Many of these dykes have a series of fine dark

bands along these eastern margins (Figs 2 & 3).

Other features of the granodiorite dykes are

xenoliths of red granite and aggregates of diorite

xenoliths,

The granodiorite dykes and surrounding granite

have been deformed, A biotite foliation (S3), which

is subyertical and scriking 350-D10° js well developed

and overprinied by crossculling sinistral mylonite

Shear zones striking 140°.

Chemistry and Petrology

At Point Brown, the best example of layering was

selected for detailed analysis. A slab of the banded

pranodiorire was collected and sliced into 10

domains approximately [5 em thick enabling

analysis of successive nvelanocratic and leucocraric

bands. The average weight of these slices was 500 g.

The aim here is to demonstrate the internal

variability of the granodiorice, and the coterence

of the analytical results, even for elements

convenirated into accessory phases, confirms that

500 g samples were adequate for this purpose, In

addition, 5 kg samples of the centre of the

' Warkins, N. & Flint, R. B. (1983) Proterozoic intrusives,

Streaky Bay Area. S, Aust. Dept, Mines and Energy report

$4782 (usipubl,).

64 R, F. BERRY & R. B. FLINT

NUYTS /@)

cay 4 }

(Gg

ARCHIPELAGO

ee)

(COS. FRANCIS

—

(@) ISLANDS

Mee

vo,

(QHART ISLAND

CAINOQZOIC sediments

MIDDLE PROTEROZOIC Point Westall

anorogenic granites and volcanics.

EARLY PROTEROZOIC

orogenic migmatites, granitoids and diorites.

PORT

AUGUSTA

KILOMETRES

Fig. 1. Locality plan and regional geology,

BANDED GRANODIORITE DYKES 6s

Fiz. 2, Allernating melanocratic and leucoeratic layers

along the banded eastern margin of (he granodiorite

dyke at Point Brown selected for detailed analysis.

granodiorite dyke, the nearby granite and diorite

dyke were collected. All the samples were analysed

for major and trace elements by classical XRF

techniques (Table 1). Polished thin sections were

prepared across the banded zone to examine the

mineralogy, texture and grainsize, and to compare

these with the country rocks. The mineral chemistry

(Table 2) was determined by EDS analysis on a

JEOL+JXA 50A microprobe. Modal compositions

were calculated from whole rock and mineral ana-

lyses using the mixing equations of Le Maitre

(1979).

Massive granitoids

The red granite has a modal composition of 34%

quartz, 33% plagioclase (Angq), 27% microcline

and 4% biotite and is characterised by large (1 cm)

phenocrysts of microclime. Accessory minerals

include apatite, epidote, sphene, monazite, allanite

and magnetite. The diorite is composed of 50%

plagioclase (An35), 20% hornblende, 15% biotite,

5% quartz and 5% K-feldspar. The central part of

the granadiorite dyke sampled for this study (Fig. 4)

contains 16% quartz, 59% plagioclase, 10%

microcline, 8% biotite and 3% hornblende.

Accessory minerals are apatite, sphene, monazite

Fig. 3, Close up of the banding illustrating the major

bands which reflect variations in biotile and microcline

contents,

and magnetite. Epidote occurs as a metamorphic

mineral overgrowing and replacing many of the

accessory phases. Plagioclase phenocrysts are

zoned. All the rims are Anzs5 but core compositions

vary up to Ang (Table 2), Sericitised cores are

common. The microcline has a high BaO content

(1-2%) similar to the red granite. Biotite is slightly

more magnesian (Mg, No, 55) than the biotite in

the red granite (Table 2). Fine-grained, post-crystal-

lisation biotite has slightly lower TiO, but is very

close in composition to larger early grains. The

hornblende has green cores in larger grains but rims

and small grains are blue-green, suggesting meta-

morphic re-equilibration.

Textures within the granodiorite indicate post-

crystallisation metamorphism and deformation.

The strong biotite foliation, epidote overgrowths,

hornblende re-equilibration, recrystallisation of

quartz, complete inversion of K-feldspar to

microcline, and widespread sericilisation of

plagioclase cores all support a medium-grade, pro-

bably low amphibolite facies metamorphic event.

In addition, within the granite immediately adja-

cent to both the eastern and western boundaries of

the granodiorite dyke, there are narrow (J cm wide),

leucocratic, quartz-rich, recrystallised zanes witha

R. F. BERRY & R. B. FLINT

78 91

saat cOz

76 esl

trOz 9EL

9 9

LZ 91

617 zOl

Lv IZ

$6 s9

Ts ge

16°66 = PE66

OFT £r'0

£F'0 soo

6r'7 or'P

ple 6r'e

SB°s oe’!

6 9£°0

L10 90°0

S6L Ly'l

68°81 ssel

760 L10

86°7S O00°PL

6 8F €L 09 £6 96 £6 89 98 oF

S8E zOs ses SPs 76S 709 S19 009 FI9 909

1 Lil ofl FIT Sol L¥l tel Lu I8T 601

67S 986 OITT 6STI 088 8001 066 eLIl 696 SSIT

LZ 6 ra a LI SI 91 a 6! ra\

Ly 17 87 97 BE Or ty ce Le 67

68 7OT 887 [pz 19€ O6E 68£ OLZ £9£ Lol

cs oF 8P Ob 9s gs 09 SP vs Le

trl Sit TST IZ 8SI PL €Ll eel Stl Sol

SL £9 $8 L9 $8 £6 6 cL cL Ig

91001 IZO01 09°66 Or 001 6r'001 85°66 $0°001 91001 16°6 17001

£0°T 1s'0 0s°0 zs°0 69°0 850 89°0 19°0 938°0 790

£0 0z°0 97°0 tz" 9£°0 se0 Le"0 470 SPO LTO

SOT 66°1 0¢°7 a4 Lee Itz STZ LV? cre 06°C

8P'P 80° Lor ors rans LLY sos 07'S £8'p LO

ele SSE OL’ Sse LI't Lot SIF r0'r STP ose

S6°T Sel £9°1 6r'T 077 00°7 161 OL'T LST LVI

0c'0 S10 610 LTO sz0 70 tO LV'0 -7°0 £10

SSL cep sors 83° £T'L 80°L S69 6E°S 90°L ZO'F

£7 9l Ill BELT Peli 68°LI PO'LT L8°LI v8°LI S7'BL ze"LI

Stl 9r'0 6S°0 sso $30 cL°0 9L°0 £9°0 638°0 cro

97'6S 81°s9 Ly'c9 Pro OP'6S 0°09 P8°6S ae) 80°8s 66°79

I (4 £ ¥ s 9 L 8 6 or

USTEU UIsIses ST UO SUTEWOT

“Qed $B of [BIOL +

001 A

79S IS

061 qu

$68 Bg

ZI aN

ze A

£9€ IZ

Ls PN

ra 20

oll By

LS'66 IVLOL

L9°0 107

0£°0 Sofd

€7'7 om

ees O°eN

Sle ord

96'1 O3IN

070 OuW

L6'°9 +024

98°L1 ‘Oulv

ZL'0 “OLL

SS'6S “OIS

ulzIeUI

UIO1SO AA

ayoTpoursH

‘uUMOIG JU10g 1D splojlunsd JOf DIDp joIUayD “| AIAVL

BANDED GRANGODIORITE DYKES 67

Domaine i= ony

Pa e

A Srahodraite Dyke |

ras Foliation sane

1 METRES

Fig. 4. Field sketch of granodiorite dyke studied showing sampling focations. The diorite sample was collected 300 m

to the southwest on the tip of Point Brown,

mylonitic fabric. These observations are consistent

with the regional evidence of deformation at

moderate temperatures. after the emplacement of

all the granitoids (Watkins & Flint 1983).!

The granitoids of Point Brown are all

geochemically related. For example, they have very

similar trace element patterns (Fig. 5). We conclude

that the granite, gtanodiorite and the diorite have

a common source, based on this coherence across

a wide range of trace elements, despite the wide

range of major element composition. They all fit

the criteria for I-type granitoids of White &

Chappell (1983), They have low Kz0/Na0 ratios

and high Ca, The diorite and the granodiorite are

metaluminous while the extremely fractionated

granite is peraluminous but has a low Al. content

aod a high Ca content for a granitoid with 74%

SiOz, The Cr and Ni contents are all near the

detection limit of 2. ppm, The granitoids are

dominated by hornblende and biotite with

magnetite as the dominant oxide phase.

Pitcher (1982) suggested I-type granitoids can be

divided into a Cordilleran and a Caledonian

association, In this subdivision the Point Brown

granitoids fit into the Caledonian association based

on the predominance of biotite-rich granite and

granodiorite. Pitcher suggested that the Caledonian-

style I-type granitoids form during the uplift stage

after 4 major orogeny and are largely post-kine-

matic, On the chemical variation diagrams of Pearce

e7 al, (1984) the granitoids from this study plot in

the field of yolcanic are granitoids (Fig. 6). This

field is also occupied by post-orogenic granitoids

which can have a very wide range of compositions.

In combination with the classification of Pitcher,

this suggests that the Point Brown granitoids are

post-orogenic rather than haying a Cordilleran/

volcanic arc association.

Wyborn ev al. (in prep.)? have summarised the

Proterozoic granitoids of Australia, The syn-

Kimban Orogeny granitoids at Point Brown are very

similar 10 widespread “K-feldspar megacryst-

NOx)

Sraradicrine

Gronle

Borite

Rack camposinar

ORS nermelsing values

Qb .

x30 Ro Ba Ne Ce 2r bf

Fig. 5. Normalised geochemical patterns for the massive

gramitoids at Point Brown. Normalising factors are

from Pearce ef af. (1984).

> Wyborn, L. A, L, Page, R. W. & Parker, A, J. (in prep.)

Geochemical and peochronological signatures in Aus-

tralian Proterozoic teneous rocks.

68 R. F, BERRY & R, B. FLINT

100

\ WPG

\ \

\ *

\ «?

3 na

2 10 ‘ew

pac

G x

. 7 | ORG

SYN-COLG

+ VAG

10 id

10 Y 100

WPS ...... Within- plate granitoid. I-10...

ORG, ...... Qcedn-ridge granitoid, £

VAG... Voleanic- are granitoid. Ww

SYN-COLG | Syn-collision granitoid G

1900

SYN-COLG y"

_— 1

aa Ww ¥

a G Sy *g

* 3 B3y7

a *°

c 100

WhG

iis) Y4+Nb 190

Domains from eosterq margin of granodiorite dyke.

Centre of granodiorite dyke,

Western margin of granodiorite dyke.

Granite x.

_ Diorite

Fig. 6. Y/Nb and Rb/(Y + Nb) diagrams showing the fields of various granite types afrer Pearce et al, (1984).

hearing granodiorites and monzogranites” intruded

between 1870 and 1820 Ma, For example, compared

to the Kalkadoon and Ewen Batholiths at Mount

Isa (Wyborn & Page 1983), they have nearly

identical normalised trace element patterns and the

same REE contents but are more like Phanerozoic

I-type granitoids with higher Na,O/KO ratios and

CaO, and lower Rb. They are unlike the anorogenic

granitoids which are most common from 1800 to

1620 Ma.

Banded Granodiorite

The eastern margin of the granodiorite dyke

selected for this study has five dark, fine-grained

bands on its eastern margin (Figs 2-4). The first

of these, starting from the margin, has a sharp

contact on both sides. Its texture is now largely

metamorphic and substantial growth of chlorite and

green biotite has resulted from mylonitisation in

association with the quartz mylonite developed on

the boundary of the adjacent granite. While there

1s little chemical evidence of element mobility in this

layer (Table 1), textural evidence for recrystallisation

suggests that the campasition may have been

modified by metasomatism associated with

mylonite formation,

The second and third dark layers have sharp

contacts near the dyke margin and gradational

boundaries away from the dyke margin. The fourth

dark layer has relatively sharp contacts on both

sides. These first four dark bands are included in

the 20 cm wide sample which was subdivided into

10 domains, A fifth dark layer is very diffuse and

weak and was not included in this study,

The minetal chemistry within the banded grano-

diorite is very similar to that of the massive grano-

diorite in the centre of the dyke. Plagioclase;

microcline and biotite have the same composition.

In part, this may reflect metamorphic re-equili-

bration conditions, especially the low Na3O in the

microcline (Or9zAbgAn3). Hornblende was not

found in domains | to 9 and is a trace component

in domain 10, so it is not included in the subsequent

discussion,

In contrast there are major changes in grainsize

and modal composition which are illustrated in

Fig. 7. Individual bands are easily recognised by the

grainsize variation and modal bietite component.

Domains 1 and 2 form the first band, 3 and 4 the

second band, 5 to 8 the third band and 9 the

unzoned fourth dark band.

BANDED GRANODIORITE DYKES 69

100 r .

bi a

gole 4 : ah sou

Biatife: sce ces

Q 5 Q Q

Q Q 8 Q Quartz

6O- 0 +

c=)

40h

Plagioclase

ott 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (O___ Domain No.

8 | ' *

Cycle | Cycle 2 Cycle 3 ,

~ r |

: : |

E 4+ *

t- *

8 of *

in *

= ol

2 x * %

o | o

ol 1 L ss |

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 \60 it- 16]

Distance (mm) fro: Eastern Margin

Fig. 7. Variations in modal mineralogy and grainsize across the banded eastern margin of the dyke. Grainsize is

the average of the 10 largest plagioclase grains within 1 cm wide strips parallel to the layering, Madal compositions

were calculated from major element chemistry of domains and microprobe analyses of the phases using Genmix

(Le Maitre 1979),

Grainsize variations across these layers relate to

the mineralogy. Biotite has an average grainsize of

0,2 to 0,3 mm across the whole dyke and does not

vary significantly, Quartz mainly forms interstitial

grains and mimics the grainsize of the feldspars.

Both feldspars are relatively coarse grained in the

massive granodiorite with microcline up to 10 mm

and plagioclase up to 6 mm. The maximum grain-

R. F. BERRY & R. B. FLINT

‘AIIOPYS IO] QZ ‘apuslquioy toy ¢Z ‘aynoiq Joy ZZ ‘sedspjay 10) g ‘sJaquinu G— Fuimoa]joOJ uo paseg sje107 uoWED

*(% JYSIOM [°O UBY) Ssa]) Palsazap JOU sayeaIpur —

‘Qe S¥ 24 PIO] SI Oey

710% g9'ST oust 99'S 99°S1 OL’ST 19°ST LO 96'F 66°F L6P 86°F 86'F [e1OL

= 170 61'0 731 8° 08°1 rs"l 10°0 = 10°0 10°0 43°0 L3°0 x

= 67'0 8f0 — = = om 09°0 10 65°0 SL'0 90°0 LO'0 EN

= £6°1 —_— = — — — seo €7°0 6£'0 02'0 = — BD

_— — = = = = — = — + _ £0'0 £0°0 eq

rP's awe $vz LZ or'Z E8'7 erz — = = aw

££°0 90°0 +10 rl‘ s0'0 oro 91°0 — — — uA

ST'F Ist op’? ranra 19°T ZE'Z bez = — _ — = = ay

$9'F Z6°T oT L6'Z $8" 88'Z $3°Z rel a Ip] Iv sol s0'l IV

— Ol'o L0°0 LI'0 ze'0 810 rz'0 = a = = = at tL

9g"s isg 99°9 09°S €s's as's ¥9'S L9°% BLT 95°72 0s'z 96°% L6°Z IS

LL8 916 9°16 196 6 9°56 8°56 666 6001 6°66 ('Z0L TOI 6101 THIOL

_ vl or 56 '6 £6 o'6 10 — 10 70 6F1 6F1 Oy

= ol el ~ — — = OL £°8 9 06 L0 80 Of8N

— STI rl _ = = = CL os o's ep = ORD

— — — — _ = — — ¥'1 aa ord

ELT P'6 66 vz oOL 97 L'01 + — — = — = O37

£0 $0 V1 TI r0 g°0 ws — — oun

9°EZ L'61 T6l oLI loz €'8T 761 = = — = = = «OPd

L’8l Lol a) 3°91 ST Vol 651 oSZ I'tZ L'9@ REZ S'6I $61 'oyv

— 60 90 oT Lz oT lz —< — “OLL

$97 o'r 9 EF ELE ose 69¢ [Le 1-09 seo TBS 6'+9 Le ws9 ZQIS

ulny 3102)

sUOTA aon “poueriny SUWOTATA] SIO “‘pourlyy aTUBID sTHoid *pourig aTUBIH “pouring aUBIg

aoyyD apua,qui0oy ano ASBLIOTSET aUIPIOIN IY

‘soSKjouD josaulpy “Z ATAV L$

BANDED GRANODIORITE DYKES "

size ol feldspar is dramativally reduced in the

banded granodiarite and this is graphically dis-

played in Fig. 7,

The oulstanding contrast between the banded

aticl massive granodiorire is the distinctly lower

microcline component in all the dark bands. The

content drops from 12% in the massive granodiorite

to between 1 and 5% indeoniains 2 to 9, This pattern

is also shown in Tig. & where a distinct jump occurs

between the massive eranodiorite (C, 10) and the

trend within ihe banded granodiorite. The grainsize

range indicates the drop from 6 mm [vu 4 min is

associated with a less of S% microcline and, at

2mm, very little micrucline is present. Che finer-

grained biotite and accessory phases increase within

the banded zowes, but quartz and plagioclase

contents shaw no significant Variation.

Wilhin the banded granodiorite Sr is the only

clement which linearly increases away from the dyke

margin despite the variation in mincralugy. Delaney

& Pollard (1982) pointed our that rims of dykes are

commonly formed early in the dyke history whereas

the cores represent the late magma. The subtle, but

persistent, trenel in Sr content may reflect variations

within the magina chamber tapped by this dyke.

Most other tace-element concentrations are

strongly correlated with MgO which {5 controlled

hy biotite enrichment (Figs 8, 9), Since biotite has

a low distribution coefficient for many of these

¢lements (e.g. RIK, P) chis.correlation implies that

accessory phases, such ay apatite, are concentrated

with the bloticé (Milley & Mittlefehld) 1984; Watson

& Capohianco 1981), However the within-band

variation in Kt), Ba aud Sr is distinctly different

from the variation berween the banded and massive

ersanodiorite, The KO and Ba variation is best

explained by decoupling of K-feldspar depletion

from biotiie enrichment (Fig. 9). This geochemical

eviderice lor the dnvolvement of [he mineral phases

in the differentiation implies that the granodiorite

was partly crystallised at Ihe fine of emplacement.

Oriyin of the banding

Phe bulk of the magmas are affeetcd by crystal

fractionation during their evolution (Huppert &

Sparks 1984), in spite of cvidenoe that crystal

settling is implausible.as a process in most matinas,

and especially in the highly viscous and crystal-rich

granitic magmas (McBirncy & Noye 1979: Hildreth

1979), Recent work on the processes active in crys-

tallisation of complex liquids during convection

suggest that shear and/or convective flow al the

boundary of circulating magmas is the major con-

crolling influence on the segregation of liquids and

crystals in the plutonic environment (Rice 1YR1;

Thompson & McBirney 18s; Tumer& Gustafson

IS81). Ln the granitic system, Barriere (1981)

demonstrated the importance of gcain dispersive

pressure in separating not only liquid from crystals,

hut also biotite from feldspar. Grain dispersive

pressure has been witlely recogaised as the

cnntrotling influence on -crystal-liquid distributions

at the margin of dvkes (Komar 18724, b). ‘This

process produces a sirong grainsize variation with

small grainsives concentrated near the margin The

jiner-grained biotite is concentrated inte Unis zone

while the very coarse-grained K-feldspar is forced

away from the boundary, Other processes which

may produce erystal-liquid separation (e.g, ler

pressing) du not explain the decoupling of the

biotite from K-feldspar The internal segregation

between crvstals and liquid within granites has been

described by Sultan ef al. (1986). Biotite and

K-feldspar were removed in modal proportions ro

produce the range of compositions The variations

normally found within l-type granitoids contrase

with the mtargins of the Point Brown dykes in just

the same way. Por example. the l-rype gramtoids

from eastern Australia described by Hines ef al.

(1978) and Giriltin ef at (1978) have fractionation

trends indicating bintite is not decompled from other

crystal phases. The Point Brown cumulate margins

are strongly enriched in Rb, Mu, Zr and P2Qs,

reflecting the enrichment in biotite and accessory

phases, cumpared to L-type granitoids of similar

composition, All other elements are consistent with

this different behaviour.

Alternative models for fractionation i gtanitoids

do not fit the chemical and texcural vanations

observed in this study. Liqguid-stare ul!fusion

produces coherent enrichment in the highly mobile

alkali elements and volatiles (Miller & Mittlefehldt

1984; Cameron & Cameron 1986), Lesher (1986)

measured the [ractiungtion of many elements by

thermal (Soret) diffesion. In andesitic and davitic

compositions K, Rb, Na and Si are depleted in the

cold margins and most other elements, and

especially Ma, Mg, Ca and CREE, are enriched.

The predicted depletion in Rb, Na and K, and

enrichment in Ca is inconsistent with the cheniical

zonalion of ihe dyke margins at Point Brown,

Similarly the fractionation resulting lram yotatile

fluxing i4 different in character trom the grano-

diorite banding at Point Brown. Water-rich Muids

produce extreme enrichment in Rb coupled with

moderate depletions i SiO,, MgO, CaO and

LREE (Higgins er af. 1985), Boron-rich fluids

produce extrente Fractionation in K,O with minor

variation in MgQ (Rockhold ef af. 1987).

CO -dorminated fluids produce enri¢hment in Zr,

Nb, ¥ and REE ai relatively constant MgO (Taylor

eral. (981), None of rhese processes are consistent

with the strong enfichment in Meth With FIGs

72 R. F. BERRY & R. B. FLINT

S00

7 8 \

Ot 5 glk

300 :

E #48

= *4 x

a io & ”

M goo wee?

Iwo +

0 a

0 | 2 3

‘%e MgO

Fig, 8, P,Q,/MgO and Zr/MgQ diagrams. Symbols for racks as in Fig. 4,

Fig, 9, K,0/Mg0 variation diagram with symbols as in

Fig. 6. The approximate effect of K-feldspar depletion

and biotite enrichment is shown based on the analysed

composition of these phases.

and Rb, with little variation in alkalis and CaO

which occurs within the dark bands on the margin

of the granodiorite at Point Brown.

The textural evidence for preservation of igneous

mineralogy precludes any models involving

depletion during mylonite formation on the margin

of the dyke except in domain 1, The bands are

continuous over the length of the contact and show

ho evidence of a lenticular form which would

suggest they are deformed xenoliths, In addition

their chemistry is coherent with the granodiorite and

does not lie on 2 mixing line with the granite or with

diorite, For example, both the granite and the diorite

have a lower Nb content than the granodiorite but

this element is enriched in the dark bands (Fig. 6).

A feature of the dykes at Paint Brown is the

asymmeiri¢ development of the banding. On the

western side of the dykes the bands are usually

absent or inconspicuous but where they occur these

bands are very similar in composition to the banded

pranodiorites reported here (Table 1) demonstrating

that the same process is active on both sides of the

dyke, Theoretical considerations suggest the upper

and lower surfaces may react differently in

moderately dipping dykes (Komar (972b), In

feneral a better separation between biotite and

K-feldspar shoutd occur on. the lower side of

moderately dipping dykes and sills, due to the

density differences, This effect was observed by one

of us (RFB) in granitoid dykes on Cape Barren

Island where dykes with dips less than 60° have

stronger biotite enrichment on the lower margin,

At Point Brown the schistosity is subvertical and

steeper than the east-dipping dykes, so the structural

data suggest the banding is strongest on the upper

side of the dykes. However, no viable mechanisni

is known which preferentially produces and pre-

serves strong banding on the upper side of a large

number of narrow dykes. The orientation of the

dykes prior ta deformation is not known, but the

presence of well-developed banding along the

eastern “upper” margins suggests (he dykes may be

overturned.

Acknowledgments

The whole rock analyses were carried out by Mr

P. Robinson at the Geology Department, University

of Tasmania, This paper is published with the per-

mission of the Director General of the South

Australian Department of Mines and Energy.

References

Barring, M- (1981) On curved laminae, graded layers,

convection currents and dynamic crystal sorting in the

Ploumanac’h {Brittany) subalkaline granite. Cartrib.

Mineral, Petrol. 77, 217-224.

CAMERON, K, L, & CAMERON, M. (1986) Whole-rock/

groundmass differentiation trends in rare carth elements

in high-silica rhyolites. Geachim. Cosmochim. lcta 50,

759-769,

De.aney, P. T. & Poti arn, 1), D, (1982) Solidifacation

of basaltic magma during Mow in a dyke. Am. J Sct.

282, 856-885.

BANDED GRANODIORITE DYKES 73

Grirrin, T. J., Waite, A.J, R. & CHAPPELL, B. W. (1978)

The Mornya Batholith and Jindabyne suites. J. Geai.

Soc, Aust, 25, 235-247.

Hiaains, N.C., Sotomom, M. & VARNE, R, (1985) The

genesis of the Blue Tier Batholith, northeastern Tas-

mania, Australia, Lithos 18, 129-149,

HILoreTH, W. (1979) The Bishop Tuff: evidence tor the

origin of compositional zonation in silicic magma

chambers. Geol. Soc. Am, Spec. Pap. 180, 43-75.

Hines, R., Witttams, 1, S,, CHAPPELL, B. W. & Waite,

A. J. R, (978) Contrasts between I- and S-type

granitoids of the Kosciusko Batholith. .. Geel. Sac.

Aust. 25, 219-234,

Hueprert, H. B. && Sparks, R. S, J. (1984) Double-

diffusive convection due to crystallisation in magmas.

Ann, Rev. Earth Planet. Sei. 12, 1-37.

Komar, P, D, (1972a) Flow differentiation in igneous

dykes and sills; profiles of velocity and phenocryst

concentration, Geol. Soc. Am. Bull. 83, 3443-3448.

—— (1972b) Mechanical interactions of phenocrysts and

flow differentiation of igneous dykes and sills. bia, &3,

973-988,

Le Maitre, R. W. {1979) A new peneralised petrological

mixing model. Contrib, Mineral, Petrol. 71, 133-137.

LesHer, C_ E. (1986) Effects of silicate liquid compo-

sition on mineral-liquid clement partitioning from Soret

diffusion studies. < Geophys. Res, 91, 6123-6141,

McBirney, A. R. & Nove, R. M. (1979) Crystallisation

and layering of the Skaergaard intrusion. J, Pet, 20,

487-554,

MILLER, C, FB. & Mirtrerexior, D, W, (1984) Exireme

fractionation in felsic magma chambers: a product of

liquid-stare diffusian or [ractional erytallisation? Earth

Planet, Sci. Letts. 68, 151-158.

PARKER, A. J.. FawNinci, C. M. & Fiint, R. B. (1985)

Geology. pp. 21-45. Jn C. R. Twidale, M. J. Tyler & M.

Davies (Eds) “Natural History of Eyre Peninsula,"

(R. Soc, S, Aust., Adelaide.)

Pearce, J.A., Hares, N. BW. & TInpbLe, A, G. (1984)

Trace element discrimination diagrams for the tectonic

interpretation of granitic rocks. 2 Petrol, 25, 956-983,

Pitcuer, W. 5. (1982) Granite type and tectonic environ-

ment. pp. 19-40. Jn K, J. Hsu (Ed) “Mountain Building

Processes.” (Academic Press, London.)

ROCKHOLD, J. R., NABELEK, P. [. & Giascock, M. D.

(1987) Origin of rhythmic layering in Calamity Peak

satellite pluton of the Harney Peak Granite, South

Dakato: the role of boron. Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta

§1, 487-496.

Rice, A. (1981) Convective fractionation; a mechanisrit

to provide cryptic zoning (macrosegregation), layering,

crescumulates, banded tuffs and explosive volcanism

in igneous processes, J. Geophys. Res. 86, 405-417.

SULTAN, M,, Batiza, R. & Sturcnio, N. C. (1986) The

origin of small-scale geochemical and mineralogic

variations in a granite intrusion! a crystallisation. and

mixing model. Contr. Min. Pet. 93, 513-523.

TAYLoR, R, P., Strona, D: F. & Fryer, B, J. (1981)

Volatile contro! of contrasting trace element

distributions in peralkaline granitic and voleanic tocks,

Ibid. 17, 267-271.

THOMPSON, M. E. & McBirney, A. R. (1985) Distribu~

tion of phenocrysts by convective flow in a viscous

boundary layer, J. Volcan, Geethern, Res, 24, 83-94,

Turner, J, S. & Gustarson, L. B, (1981) Fluid motions

and compositional gradients produced by crystallisation

or melting at vertical boundaries. /bid. UL, 93-125.

Watson, E. B, & CAponianco, C. J. (1981) Phosphorous

and the rare earth elements in felsic magmas: an assess-

ment of the role of apatite, Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta

45, 2349-2358,

Wess, A. W., THomMson, B. P,, Buisset, A, Hy, DALY,

S. J., Fur, R. B. & Parerr, A. J. (1986)

Geochronology of the Gawler Craton, South Ausiralia,

Aust, J. Earth Sei. 33, 9-143.

Wuite, A. J. R. & CHapper, B. W, (1983) Granitoid

types and their distribution in the Lachlan Fold Belt,

southeastern Australia. Geol. Soc. Am. Memoir 159,

21-34.

Wyrorn, L. A, L. & Pace, R. W. (1983) The Proterozoic

Kalkadoon and Ewen Batholiths, Mouni Isa inlier,

Queensland: source, chemisiry, age and metamorphism.

BMR J Aust. Geol. Geoph. 8, 53-69.

A NEW INTERTIDAL BARNACLE OF THE GENUS ELMINIUS

(CIRRIPEDIA: THORACICA) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. F. BERRY* & R. B. FLINT?

Summary

A new species of intertidal barnacle from South Australia is described. Elminius adelaidae sp. nov.

is common in the Adelaide region in sheltered localities and is very abundant in mangroves.

It differs from E. modestus, with which it has been previously confused, by its brown colour,

distinctive opercular plates, particularly the tergum which has a small and shallow articular furrow

and its high intertidal habitat. The new species is compared in detail with E. modestus, which also

occurs in South Australia, and £. covertus from New South Wales.

KEY WORDS: Cirripedia, Elminius adelaidae sp. nov., intertidal, South Australia, mangroves,

taxonomy

A NEW INTERTIDAL BARNACLE OF THE GENUS ELMINIUS (CIRRIPEDIA:

THORACICA) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By D. E. BAYLiss*

Summary

Hayriss, 1, B, (1988) A new interridat barnacte of the genus Elminius (Cirripedia: Thoracica) trom ‘Sourh

Australia, Teas. R, Sac. S. Aust, 112(2), 75-79 31 May: TYss,

Anew species of intertidal barnacle from South Australia is described. El/ruinius adelaidae sp. nov.

is common in the Adelaide region in sheltered localities and is very abundant in mangvoves, It differs trom

&. modestus, with which it has been previously Confused, by its brawn volour, distinctive opercular putes,

particularly the lergum which has a small and shallow articular furrow and its high intertidal habitat, The

hew species is compared in detail with E&. modesius, which also océurs in South Austfalla, and E. cavertus

Trom New South Wales.

Key Woxus: Cirripedia, Bleniniws udelaidae sp. nov., intertidal, South Australia, mangroves, taxonomy.

Introduction

‘There is confusion over the identity of barnacles

belonging to the Genus E/miistius in Australia.

Foster (1982) has described a species, L£lminins

covertis, from New South Wales which had

previously been conlused with Alminivs modestus

Darwin. Furthermore, Foster (1980, 1982) has

suggested that £. snodesrus is a New Zealand species

which was introduced into Australian waters in the

Hineteenth century frorn fouling on shipping.

South Australian barnacles have been neglected

in the early taxonomic literature and A. mtodesrius

in Australia was only recorded from NLSW., Victoria

and Tasmania (Darwin 1854; Hoek 1883; Nilsson-

Cantell 1926; Moore 1944; Pope 1945). The earliest

report of £. modestus in S. Aust. is comparatively

recent (Womersley & Edmonds 1958). Nevertheless,

the gulf areas of S. Aust. provide a suitable habitat

in which members of this genus are highly

abundant,

In South Australia, & modestus has been

recorded on (he pneumatophores of Avicennia.

rourina in the Spencer Gulf and Gulf St Vincent

(Womersley & Edmonds 1958; Hutchings & Recher

1982; Bayliss 1982), on rocks and wooden s{ructures

on Kangaroo Island (Thomas & Edmonds 1979)

and at Adelaide (Foster 1982; Keough 1983). Poster

(1982) also records & covertus at Port Adelaide.

In this paper a new species of Evminius which

is abundant in the Adelaide region is described. This

species has escaped previous. description through

confusion with E. modesius and a neglect of

thorough taxonomic work on South Australian

barnacles.

* Kathleen Lumley College, 51 Tinniss Street, North

Adelaide, S. Aust, 5008.

SYSTEMATICS

Suborder Balanomorpha Pilsbry, 1916

Superfamily Balanvidea Leach, 1817

Family Archseobalanidae Newman & Ross, 1976

Subfamily Elminiinae Foster, 1982

Genus Elminius Leach, 1825

Type species Elminius kingii Gray, \831

Ebminius adelaidage sp. ov.

FIGS 1-2

Synonymy: Elminius modestus Bayliss, 1982:212

Eiminias covertus Tostwr, 1982:26

FHlolorype: SAM C4101, collected on leaves of

Avicennia marina on Garden Island, Port Adelaide,

3. Aust,, by D, Bayliss, 22.ix.1986.

Paraiypes: SAM C4102, NMYV 114009, WAM 83-87,

collected by D. Bayliss, 22.ix,1986, from same

locality. Holotype and paratypes preserved in 75%

alcohol, holotype dissected (partially),

Description of holotype: Shell (Fig. 1A and By:

conical, light brown, almost translucent. Parietes

slightly undulating with broad longitudinal folds.

Orifice pentagonal in outline. Basis membranous,

basal outline sinuous, Alae wider than radii with

less oblique summits. Radii with oblique summits,

narrow, not completely covering underlying alae.

Holotype 9 mm in basal diameter, 8 mm in width,

4 mim in height.

Opercula (Fig. 2A, B): Scutum longer than high.

Basal margin convex with upward curving at tergal

carer of basal murgin. Acticular ridge, articular

furrow moderately developed, Adductor ridyy,

adductor pit not apparent, Externally, growth ridges

present.

Tergum with vertical articular ridge not folding

inwards to form furrow except at apical end where

small, very shallow Jurrow apparent. Acticular

h [nim qh

Fig. |. Blranius adelaidae sp. nov. holotype, At External

view of shell; B: inner view al shell

margin concave. Crésts for depressdy (iUscles at

carinal end: No. spur.

Mouthparts (Fig. 2C, E, F): Labrum with 3 teeth,

with setulae on cach side of central notch. Mandible

with 5 teeth, short pectinate edge terminating in

short curved spine, Maxillule with 2 large spines

above notch, 5 smaller spines in notch, 4 large spines

below notch. Five smaller spines about half length

of large spines at lower angle.

Cirnl (Fig. 2G-1): Cirrus | with anterior ramus

twice as long as posterior ramus, distal segments

of anterior ramus with long setae. Segments of

posterior ramus slightly protuberant. Anterior

ramus of cirrus HI stightly longer than posterior

ramus, segments slightly protuberant anteriorly,

Cirrus Uf with anterior ramus slightly longer than

posterior ramus, Setae on both rami extremely long;

stoul pectinate setae on the posterior ramus

(Fig. 2J). Segments slightly protuberant anteriorly.

Cir IV to VI.all subequal in length, segments have

4 large pairs and 1 small pair of setae on anterior

face and small proximal pair of setae between

seements (Fig. 2D), Penis as long as cirrus V1, with

sctac, no basidorsal point. Number of segments in

the rami of cirri I-VI shown in Table |.

beriation: Shell sometimes tubular; paricties:can be

smooth or, if undulating, can have variable number

of gentle longitudinal folds. Maximum basal

diameter 13 mm. Brown coloration can be slight.

Specimens collected high in the intertidal zone sre

nearly transluvent,

—

D. E. BAYLISS

Etymology: The specific name is derived from thi

type lncality, Adelaide,

Comparison with other species: E. adelaidae can

be distinguished trom & stodestus and E. coyerins

by differences in the opercular valves, The tergum

of £. adelaidae has a concave afticular margin and

the articular furrow is restricted to the apical end

The vertical articular ridge runs the length of the

tergum and there is only a very slight narrowing at

the venire. In both E wrodes/us and £. covertus the

articular ridge folds inwards forming a deep

articular furrow and a marked narrowing al the

centre, The articular furrow continues from the

apical end to almost the basi-scutal angle and the

artivular margin forms a straight line excepr in worn

specimens.

The scutum of &. wdelaidee has an upward

curving of the tergal corner of the basal margin.

This feature may be observed externally in larger

specimens, but is difficult to detect in smaller

specimens in the field. The tergal corner of the basal

margin of £. modestus and £. cavertus is essentially

flat.

The shell of E. adelgidae is similar to [2 nodestus

except for.a slight brown coloration. Lt never has

the buff red colour with narrow contrasting ribs

observed in £. coverius. Colour is not a good guide

to distinguishing between Elmtinius species as they

xre subject to decoloration from wear and also from

algal growth. The shell of &. adelaidae can appear

almost black due to algal growth and golden brown

in other specimens due to the developing gonads

showing through the near translucent shell, In some

specimens the brown coloration js very slight.

The shell of & modestus is white, but this

barnacle also suffers from decoloration due to algal

growth and wear, The ribs on & covertus can be

worn away in older specimens, Care is required in

distinguishing between E. adelaidae and E. coverrus

in such cases, because £, edelaidae sometimes has

slight folds around the base which could be

confused with the remnants of ribbing on &

POverlys.

Stout pectinate setae are found on the posterior

ramus of cirrus II of both £. adeleidee and &

covertus, bul not E. medestus, The setae an both

Tasee }. Nuntber of segmenisin remtof hulotvpe end four ofherspecimens of Elminius adelaidae sp. nov., anterior

ramus first.

Shell length (mm) Cirrus

I son [Vv Vv VI

9.4 (holotype) 14,7 5, 9 12, 11 22, 24 27, 28 3, 29

4) 15, 7 5, 8 12, 11 20, 19 22, 22 24, 23

#0 14, 8 9,9 3, 11 35,25 28, 24 24, 28

1h V7, 6 8, 8 1, 1D 24, WB 2p, 19 22,2

10,0 13,7 10, 10 13, 12 26, 25 29, 25 *, 2Y

NEW INTERTIDAL BARNACLE

\ |

Fig, 2. Elminius adelaidae sp. nov. holotype. A: scutum; B: tergum; C: labrum; D: middle segment, posterior ramus,

cirrus VI; E: mandible; F: maxillule; G-I: cirri I-III. J: pectinate seta from posterior ramus of cirrus IIL,

78 D. B. BAYLISS

rami of cirrus Wl in/: adelaidee are extremely long

compared to those found on cirrus IN of £,

modestus avid E, covertus, The maxillule has two

large spines above a notch with four large spines

beneath the notch. £. modestus and & covertus,

however, have three large spines beneath the notch.

The labrum of £ @delaidae is similar to &.

miodestus and E. cavertus in that there are three

teeth on either side of the central notch. It differs

in a Gistinet curve at the ends giving a "handle-har™

like appearance.

In gaping animals the tergascotal flaps are white

te creum with two dark brown spors (Fie. LA). E

covermes has six pairs of dark spots on white

tergoscutal Maps and LL moadestus has one black

spot on white tergoscutal flaps (Foster 1982, Fig.

1A, B).

Habitat: E, adelaidae is found in the high intertidal

zone in sheltered waters where there is little wave

action, It is highly abundant on pneumatophores,,

leaves and branches of Avicennia marina which are

submerged at high tide. It is also found on. rocks

and artificial structures, E. modestus is usually

found at mean tide level and below. It sometimes

scilles in the mangroves and there may be a small

amount Of overlap between the two species.

Distribution: The distribution of the three species

in Australia has mot been determined. In the

Adelaide region, E. covertus does not oceur and &

wlelaidge is the main high shore species of

Eloriniius.

Niscussion

The description of Flatinius adelaidae sp. nov,

brings to four the pumber of extant species of

Himinius. OF these & kingit Gray, 1831 is restricted

to South America and the remaining three ate found

in Australia, & mrodestus is alsa found in New

Zealand and was introduced from fouling on

shipping into European waters (Flowerdew 984)

Only one extinet species, & ehapranieret From the

lower Miocene, is recognised (Buckeridge 1983). On

the basis of the setation of cirrus Ill, E. adejaidoe

is close to &. covertas, but the shell characteristics

of E adelaidee are more like those of E. madesms.

Foster’s (1980, 1982) hypothesis that E&. modestus

is a New Zealand species has received some support

from electrophoretic studies by Flowerdew (1984)

which indicate a lack of genetic differentiation

between specimens from New Zealand and

Tasmania, #, modestus does not appear ta be

permanently established in Sydney (Foster 1982;

Egan & Anderson 1985), In S, Aust, &. medestws

corresponding to the description of Darwin (1854),

Moore (1944 Fig. 1D) and Foster (1978 Fix. 57} is

found and appears ta be permanent and common.

Until more information is obtained about Efinimuus

in Australia, particularly the distribution and

clarification of species, tt should not be conchided

definitely that &. mrodesrus was introduced,

Acknowledgments

1 would like to thank Dr A. J. Butler for reading

the munuscript and for providing use of

microscopes for the examination of specimens. My

father helped to collect specimens of £ covertys

in New South Wales,

Refereoves

Bayuss, D, E, (1982) Switching hy Lepsiella vinasa

(Gastropoda) in South Australian mangroves.

Oecologia (Berl) 54, 212-226,

Buckeripce, J. S. (1983) The barnacle subfamily

E}miniinae — Two new subvenera and a new Miocene

species from Victoria. J. A. Soc N.Z. 32(4), 3$3-357-

Darwis, £. (1854) “A monograph on the subclass

Citripedia, with figuves of all (he species, The

Balanidse, the Verrucidae, cte™. (Ray Soviety, London)

Enan, E. A & Ansptrson, D. T. (1983) Larval

development of Eininivs cavertus Foster and

‘fexaninius popeianag Foster (Cirripedia;

Arehacobalanidae: Elminiinae) reared in the laboratory.

Awst, J Mar. Freshw. Res. 36, 383-404.

FLloweRTiEW, M. W. (1984) Electrophoretic comparison

of the antipodean Cirripede, Efmtinins modestus, with

immigrant European populitions. J. mar biol, Ass.

UK, 64, 625-635.

Fostre, B. A. (1978) The murine fauna of New Zealand:

Barnacles (Cirripedia: Thoracica). Mam NZ.

Queanagr Inst 69, 1-160,

—— (J980) Biogeographic implications of re-examination

al some common shore barnactes. of Australia and New

Zealand, Proce, Int Symp. Mur Biogeography &

Evolution in the Southern Hemisphere, 613-623. 2.

DSIR Information Ser, 137.

—— (1982) Two new intertidal balanoid barnacles Trom

enstern Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S Vit!) 21-32,

Hork, P,P, C. (1883) Report on Cirripedia collected by

H.M.S. Challenger, 1873-1876, Rep. Sei. Res.

Challenger, Zoal, %, 1-169,

Hereiinos, P A. & Recner, H. £. (1982) The fauna of

Seenaben mangroves, Proc, Linn, Soe, NSW UG).

KooucH, M. J, (1983) Patterns of recruitment of sessile

invertebrates in (Wo subtidal habitats. J. Exe Mar Biol,

feat bh, 213-245.

Monkre, L. RB. £1944) Some intertidal sessile barnacles of

New Zealand. Trans. R. Suc. NA. 73, 315-334,

NILSSON CasTELL. ©. A, (1926) Antarktisehe ainu

subantarkusche Carripedian, Gesanimelt vou S. Valin

(923-24. Anh. Zool. IBA, 27, Lt.

NEW INTERTIDAL BARNACLE 79

Pope, E. C. (1945) A simplified key to the sessile & Ling, J. K. (Eds) “Natural History of Kangaroo

barnacles found on the rocks, boats, wharf piles and Island” (Royal Society of S. Aust., Adelaide).

other installations in Port Jackson and adjacent waters. WomeRSLEY, H. B. S. & EDMONDS, S. J. (1958) A general

Rec, Aust. Mus. 21, 351-327. account of the intertidal ecology of South Australian

THomas, I. M. & EpMonps, S. J. (1979) Intertidal coasts. Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res. 9, 217-260.

invertebrates. pp. 155-166. Jn Tyler, M. J., Twidale, C. R.,

A NEW SPECIES OF TERTIARY CHITON

(MOLLUSCA: POLYPLACOPHORA: ACANTHOCHITONIDAE)

FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY K. L. GOWLETT-HOLMES & B. J. MCHENRY*

Summary

A new species of Tertiary chiton, Notoplax (N.) arenaria sp. nov., is described from the Dry Creek

Sands (Pliocene, Yatalan) from South Australia. The new species most closely resembles the extant

N. (N.) mayi, but is distinguished from it by a more regularly grooved jugum and by the strong

lateropleural rib on the median valves.

KEY WORDS: Chiton, Polyplacophora, Acanthochitonidae, South Australia, Notoplax, Tertiary,

Pliocene, new species.

A NEW SPECIES OF TERTIARY CHITON (MOLLUSCA: POLYPLACOPHORA:

ACANTHOCHITONIDAE) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By K. L. GOwWLETT-HOLMES & B. J, MCHENRY*

Summary

GowLetT-Hoimes, K. L.. & McHenry, B. J. (1988) A new species of Tertiary chiton (Mollusca; Polyplaca-

phora: Acanthochitanidae) from South Australia, Trans, R. Soe. §. Aus?, 112(2), 81-82, 31 May 1988.

A new spevies of Tertiary chiton, Notoplax (N.) arenaria sp. niov., is described from the Dry Creek

Sands (Pliocene, Yatalan) from South Australia. The new species most closely resembles the extant MV. (NU

mayi, tut is distinguished trom it by a more regularly grooved jugum and by the strong laterapleural rib

on whe median yalves.

Key Worps: Chiton, Polyplacophora, Acanthochitonidac, South Australia, Neloplax, Tertiary,

Pliocene, new species.

Introduction

A large number of Tertiary chiton species have

been described from southern Australia, but very

few are recorded from South Australia (Cotton &

Godfrey 1940; Cotton & Weeding 1941; Cotton

1944). The last species description from South

Australia was by Ashby (1940). During an examina-

tion of the fossil chiton collection of the South

Australian Museam (SAM) we located two median

valves Of a species of Nofoplax that differed from

all known fossil and extant species of the genus.

This new species is described here.

Notoplax (Notoplan) srenaria sp, nov,

FIG. 1

Holotype: SAM. P|2839, one median valye with

slight chips to the insertion plates and sutural

lamina, 4.75 » 5,6:mm, in excellent state of preser-

vation, collected from 100.9 m (331 feet) Angas

Home Bore, Parafield Gardens, Section 2259,

Hundred of Yatala, County Adelaide, S. Aust.

(34°47'06"S 138°36'26"B), collector unknown, 1940,

Paratype: SAM P27904, one worn median valve,

sculpture eroded from jugum. and part of pleural

areas, insertion plates and sutural lamina broken

and worn, 5.7 « 5.9mm, with same collection data

as holotype.

Diagnosis: Catinated. Jugum about 1/3 width of

valve with regular grooves; valyes beaked;

prominent lateropleural rib; pustules oval, flai-

topped. Slit formula ?/1/?.

* South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide,

5S. Aust. 5000.

Lindsay, J. M. (1987) Identificalion and depositional

environmen) of Dry Creek Sands, Angas Home Bore

(1940), Paratield Gardens, 5, Aust. Dept, Mines & Energy

Rept. Ak Na. 87/96:1-6, fig. 1. Unpubl.

Description af Holotype: Tegmentum about 50%

ol articulamentum. Jugum with regular grooves,

ridges at edge of jugum breaking up into elongate

pustules posteriorly; prominent beak (Fig, 1A),

Prominent diagonal rib separates lateral and pleural

areas, lateropleural areas including rib sculptured

with irfegular, oval, radiating, flat-topped pustules,

smaller near beak, not differentiated on rib. Slit 1,

44 width of articulamentum, in deep groove to edge

of tegmentum. Insertion plates and sutural lamina

well developed (Fig. 1B).

Etymology: From the Latin “arenarius” — relating

to sand, sandy; from its type stratum, the Dry Creek

Sands.

veriation: Although worn, the paratype (Fig. 1D)

is like the holotype. The anterior and posterior

valves are unknown

Stratigraphical occurrence, The specimens. were

retrieved from the Angas Home Bore at a depth of

100.9 m (33) ft), where the bore bottomed in “shell

sands” which are consistent with a stratigraphic

determination of Dry Creek Sands (Lindsay

1987).! The two valves of N. (N.) arenaria would

therefore be Yatalan (Late Pliocene) in age,

Comparison with other species: N. (N.) arenaria was

compared with other Tertiary and extant species af

Acanthochitonidae in the collections of SAM and

with extant species of Nofoplax in the collections

of the Australian Museum, Sydney (AM), the

Museums of Victoria, Melbourne (NM/Y), the

Western Australian Museum, Perth (WAM) and the

Tasmanian Museum and Art Gallery, Hobart (TM).

[t most closely resembles the extant species NV. (N.)

mayi (Ashby, 1922) but can be readily distinguished

from it by the regularly grooved jugum and the

strong Jateropleural rib. The new species can be

easily distinguished from N, (N,) adelaidae (Ashby

& Cotton, 1936), which is also from the Dry Creek

Sands, by its much greater percentage of tegmentuin

to articulamentum, the straight posterior edge of

82 K. L. GOWLETT-HOLMES & B. J. MCHENRY

Fig. 1. Notoplax (N.) arenaria sp. nov. holotype (SAM P12839) A. top view, x13; B. side view, x14.3; C. anterior

profile, scale bar = 1 mm; paratype (SAM P27904) D. top view, x10.

the median valve, the lateropleural rib and the

grooved jugum. It can be distinguished from other

Tertiary and extant members of the

Acanthochitonidae by the shape and arrangement

of the pustules, the presence or position of the

lateropleural rib, the form of the insertion plate slit

and the jugal sculpture.

Acknowledgments

We thank the following curators and collection

managers for providing data and specimens held

by their respective institutions: Mr I. Loch (AM),

Ms S. Boyd (NMV), Dr F. E. Wells (WAM) and Ms

E. Turner (TM). The photographs were taken by

Mrs J. Forrest.

References

AsHBy, E, (1940) A new fossil Cryptoplax from the

Pliocene of South Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust.

64(2), 266.

Corton, B. C. (1964) “South Australian Mollusca:

Chitons.” (S. Aust. Govt Printer, Adelaide.)

— & Goprrey, F. K. (1940) “The Molluscs of South

Australia, Part Il, Scaphopoda, Cephalopoda, Apla-

cophora and Crepipoda.” (S. Aust. Govt Printer, Ade-

laide.)

—— & WEEDING, B. J. (1941) The correlation of Recent

and fossil Crepipoda (Mollusca) of the Australian sub-

region. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 6(4), 435-450.

THE CRAB FAUNA OF WEST ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA:

THEIR ABUNDANCE, DIET AND ROLE AS PREDATORS OF ABALONE

BY A. G. J. MOWER & S. A. SHEPHERD*

Summary

Twenty-three species of crabs are recorded from West Island, South Australia. The vertical

distribution and densities of sixteen species occurring on the boulder slope at Abalone Cove on the

northern side of the Island, are described and the diets of the five most common species

enumerated. Four of the species are mainly herbivorous but eat small amounts of animal matter and

one species is omnivorous. Four of the species also ate small abalone in cage experiments and

represent potential agents of abalone mortality.

KEY WORDS: crabs, abalone, diet, predation.

THE CRAB FAUNA OF WEST ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA:

THEIR ABUNDANCE, DIET AND ROLE AS PREDATORS OF ABALONE

By A. GJ, Mower & §, A, SEICPIIcRD*

Sumoatary

Mower, A. G. J. & SHepHerp, 8, A. (1988) The crab fauna of West Island, South Australia: there

abundance, diet and role as predators of abalone. /rons. KR. Soe, S. Ause 192(2), 83-46, 3] May TYse:

Twenty-three species of crabs are recorded tram West Island, South Australia, The vertical distribution

and densitics of sixteen species-occurrify on (the boulder slope at Abalone Cove on the norihern side of

ihe Island, are desctibed and the diets of the five most common speaies cnumerated, Four of the Species

ure-mainty herbivorous but eat small amounts of animal matter and one species ty omnivorous. Four of

the species alsa are small abalone 4) cage caxperinicits aud represent potential agents of abalone mortality,

Key Woreos; crabs, abalone, diet, predation,

[niroduction

The need to understand the reeruitment process

in abalone, necessary for the proper management

of abalone fisheries has focused increasing attention

on the ccology of juveniles and in particular of the

agents of mortality. Dewi abalone shells are

frequently found damayed in different ways, but

there is dispute whether this is caused by crabs, or

is due to natural causes sch as abrasion (Hines &

Pearse 1982; Tegner & Butler 1985).

Studies on the ecology of juvenile Hulivtis

laevigata Donovan, and flalivtis scalaris Leach have

been in progress at West Island, South Australia

(35°36'25"S; 138°35'27"E) since 1983 (Shepherd &

Turner 1985) but their predators are still larecly

unknown. Several crab families, Which are

represented at West Island, are known to attack and

feed on molluscs, often inflicting shell damage

(Skilleter & Anderson 1986; Vermeij 1977; Zisper

& Vermeij 1978; Williams 1982),

This study describes the abundance and dict of

the crab species present on a boulder slope ai West

Islan] the site of earlier studies, and gives the resulrs

of preliminary eaperiments to determine whether

crabs eat abalone and (he type of damage to the

shell infligted by them, An ancillary purpose was

To accumulate information on a group of

consumers, leading toa better understanding of the

benthic food-web of the Island.

Materials and Methods

Twenty samples were taken at 1m depth mtetvals

from 1-5 m depths on the boulder slope of the study

site on the northern slope of West Island (see

Kangas & Shepherd 1984), A quadrat, 0.25 m* in

* Department wf Pishenes, 135 Pirie Streer, Adelaide,

S$. Aust. 4000..

area, was placed on the boulders and ihe area within

the perimeter was searched systematically for crabs

by removal of all boulders down lo the sandy

substratum, The sand below the boulders was then

sifted by hand ta vollevtany burrowing species,

Animals collected were identilied to species and

preserved in 70% alcohol, Subsequently the gastric

mill was removed in the laboratory and the contents

mounted on microscope slides in Karo, 4 light corn

syrup. Only gastric mills subjectively estimated to

be more than half full were examined in order to

avoid biased estimates duc to differential retention

time of different prey items in the mill (Williams

1981).

Slides were placed on a grid and the material

under ¢ach of 25 grid intersections was identified

(Oo the lowest taxonomic category possible: This

method estimates the percentage composition of

food items by volume (Berg 1979). Subsequently

plant material was classified as green, brown or red

macro-algac, filamentous algae (a polyphyletic

group), geniculate corallines, comprising species in

the genera Jania, Holiptilon and Cheilosporun,

seagrass, comprising Posidonia or Heterozostera,

and unidentifiable matter. Animal muterial was

classified as sponge, foraminiferans, echinoderms,

molluses, crustaceans, and unidentifiable matter.

The presence of sand grain§ was also vecorded.

A series of “no choice” feeding experiments was

conducted in plastic cages set on the sea-bed at West

Island to determine whether crabs attacked abalone

in the absence of other food, and to determine the

nature of slrell damage inflicted, In each cage 4-6

juvenile H. sewiaris over a range of sizes were placed

on boulders in the cage with a number (usually 4)

of crabs ola given species. Controls with abalone

but without crabs, were placed in an adjoining cage

and all capes were recovered after intervals of 5-21

days. In addition observations. were made on the

period of activily of four species of crabs kept in

ayuda.

ha A. G, 1, MOWER & §. A. SHEPHERD

TABLE |. List.of crab spectes at West Island, with their distribution und depth ranee. B = boulder slope on northern

share of West Island. E = exposed shores of Island. Depth range in metres.

Family

ANOMLIRANS

Porcellanidae

Lithodidae

Paguridae

Species

— Poarcellana dispar (Stimpson) B, 1-5

— Laiils furta (M. Fdwards) ®, 1-5

— Paguristes Jrontatis (M. Edwards) B, 3-5

— Paguristes sulcatus (Baker) B, !5

— Paguristes hrevirastrus (Raker) B, 5.

— Pagurus sp. 1 B, §.

— Pagurus sp. 2 B, 5.

Gulalheidue

BRACHYLURANS

Majidac

— Galathea australiense (Sampson) B, 1-5,

— Huenta proicus (de Waan) E, 10.

— Noxia ourita (Latrielle) B, 1-5; E, 13.

— Paratymolus fatipes (Baker) B, 2-4,

Goneplacidae

Hymenosomatidac

Dromidae

Xanthidae

— Lilecheira bispinesa (Kinahan) B, 3,

— Halivarcinus ovatus (Stimpson) B, 2 4.

— Petalomera lateralis (Gray) B, 3.

— Piluninus rufopunctatus (Stinipson) B, 1-5

— Pitumnus fissifrons (Stimpson) B, 1-5.

— Heterapilumnus fimbriatus (M. Edwards) B, 4

— Actaea peronii {M. Edwards) B, 3-4,

= Actuea cateulosa (M. Edwards) B, 3.

— Megametope carinatus (Baker) B, 1-5.

Grapsidac

— Plagusia chabrus (Linnacus) B, 1-2.

— Brachynotus octodentaius (M, Edwards) terrestrial

Portunidae

— Nectocarcinus tuberculosus (M. Edwards) B, 4-5.

Results

Twenty-three species of crubs, in 11 families, have

heen recorded in this and earlier collections at West

Island (Table 1). Of these 20 were found on the

boulder slope in this study. The vertical distribution

of density of the six commonest species (density

more than 0,1/m*) on the boulder slope is shown

in Tig, 1. The two species of Pilumnus were nat

readily distinguishable in the ficld and are plotted

together in Fig. 1. P fissifrans was. much less

common than P rufopunctatus, Porcellana dispar

escaped rapidly on disturbance and our sampling

technique is therefore likely to have underestimated

its density.

‘There are two very abundant species, Loyis Airta

and the hermit crab Paoguristes sulcatus, with

densities of 10-I5/m*, and four moderately

abundant species Pilummus rufopunctatus,

Paguristes brevirostrus, Megamtetope carinatus and

Paguristes frontalis. The remaining species are quite

rare with densities of less than '0.1/m2.

Five of the six most common species were used

for dietary analysis. The mean percentage

composition of food in the gut of a sample of 15

of each of these species is given in Table 2. The

percentage discarded for gut analysis, where the

Bastric mill was less than half full is also indicated.

‘Iwo species (Paguristes su/catus and Pilumnhus

rufopunctarus) are almost wholly herbivorous, two

species (Lomis hirta and Paguristes frontalis) are

DEPTH (m)

mainly herbivorous. but take small amounts of

animal matter, and one species, Megarnefope

carinatus takes about equal amounts of plant and

animal matter. Most collections were taken in

morning dives, and it seems likely that the high

incidence of empty gastric mills recorded by

noclurnally active species (Table 2) is related to their

nocturnal feeding and rapid fore-gut clearance

(Table 3).

The results of “no choice” feeding experiments

(Table 3) show that four out of five common species

captured and ate small abalone mostly in the length

range 15-32 mm. Two species of crab chipped the

1 * £2

a 9 || o 28

- = a Se

E sis 38

a1\ = Al

af =

Paguristes sulcatus

Fig. 1. Disttibvtion of density of crabs on the boulder

slope, in Abalone Cove, West Istind.

TABLE 2. Mean perceniage composition of contents of gastric mill of five species of crabs. In each case sample size

is 15,

Lomis hirta Paguristes Pagurisies Pilumnus Megametope

sulcatus frontalis rufopunctatus carinatus

Macro-algae

green 2 3 6 —

brown 50 36 7 49 5

red (non-geniculate) 2 6 5 6 10

(geniculate corallines) 6 24 31 3 16

filamentous 9 14 13 16 2

seagrass 1 9 18 7 16

unidentified 5 4 3 1 —

TOTAL. % ALGAE 2B “95 “80 “88 49

sponge = 51, Sy mn —

foraminiferan 6 1 ] — =

echinoderm i — — — 2

mollusc 5 1 i 5 12

crustacean 1 _— — — 12

unidentified 7 2 12 1 23

TOTAL % ANIMAL “20 3 1 6 4°

sand grains ie = “S aS 2

%o with gastric mill # half full 35 17 12 52 65

TABLE 3. The size range of predaceous crabs and prey abalone, and the sizes of abalone, consumed and nature of

shell damage inflicted and other details of “no choice” feeding experiments of crabs on abalone, Data on period

of activity are from aquarium observations.

Species Lomis hirta Paguristes Paguristes Pilumnus —Megametope

sulcatus Srontalis rufopunctatus — carinatus

carapace width of crab (mm) 11-18 B-12* 13-17* 10-15 18-35

abalone presented (length range - mm) 11-53 6-40 10-49 9-35 15-40

abalone taken (length - mm) 22-27 28, 40 25, 32 — 15-19

damage inflicted growing edge none growing edge — growing edge

sometimes chipped chipped

chipped

number of experiments 2 2 1 | 2

duration (days) §, 13 5, 13 12 12 13, 21

time of activity none kept day time day time night time night time

* inferred from size of shell occupied.

growing edge of the shell (Fig. 2) presumably during

the process of capture. The controls showed no

mortality of abalone and no chipped shells were

observed on any individual.

Discussion

The factors influencing the vertical distribution

of crabs are unclear and few comments can be

made, Lomis hirta is morphologically strongly

compressed in the dorso-ventral plane and clings

tenaciously to the rock surface. It is thus well

adapted to withstand strong water movements that

occur in shallow water of 1-2 m depth where it is

most abundant. It also has pinnate antennal

appendages suggesting that it also can filter feed

planktonic organisms. Megametope is a burrowing

crab mostly found below the sand surface under

boulders and this may account for its apparent

preference for depths of 4-5 m where sand Pig. 2. Chipped shells of Haliotis scalaris eaten by crabs

accumulates between and under boulders. during cage experiments.

86 A. G. T. MOWER & S.A. SHEPHERD

Despite the bias toward herbivory in most species,

whose feeding was studied, the cage experiments

show that all except Pi/uinnus rufopunctatus can

capture abalone and (hat the only damage inflicted

by these crab species is slight chipping of the

growing edge of the shell. This kind of damage is

similar to that inflicted on abalone by crab species

of the genera Gaetice and Charybdis (Kojima 1981),

Loxorhyneus and Cancer (Tegner & Butler 1985)

and Mucropipus puber (Clavier & Richard 1985),

“No choice” experiments do not indicate whether

or how many abalone are actually taken by a

potential predator, The incidence of dead juvenile

abalone shells with chipped edges in the under-

boulder habitat is low and only about 1-2/m?

(Shepherd unpubl.) and this suggests that predation

by these crabs is not high. This contrasts with the

studies of Kojima (1981) and Tegner & Butler (1985)

who reported that from one third to one half of

the total mortality of young abalone was

attributable to crab predation. Similarly Clavier &

Richard (1985) considered crabs a principal predator

of Haliotis tuberculata,

Acknowledgments

Messrs L, Gray, A. Bennett, V. Karo all gave

assistance in the field. We are grateful to Dr P,

Abrams for identifying Paguristes brevirostrus and

to Dr D. J. G. Griffin for identifying earlier

collections of crabs from West Island, We thank Mr

R. K. Lewis for criticism of the manuscript.

References

Bera, J. (1979) Discussion of methods of investigaling

the food of fishes, with reference to a preliminary study

of the prey of Gobiusculus flavescens (Gobiidae), Mar.

Biol. 50, 263-273.

CLAVIER, J. & RICHARD, ©, (1985) “Etudes sur les

ormeaux dans la region de Saint-Malo” 285 pp.

(Association pour Ja mise en valeur du littoral de la

Cote d’Emeraude, Saint-Malo).

Hines, A. H. & PEARSE, J. S. (1982) Abalones, shells and

sea-otters: dynamics of prey populations in central

California. Ecology 63, 1547-1560,

Kanoas, M. & SHEPHERD, S. A. (1984) Distribution and

feeding of chitons in a boulder habitat at West Island,

South Australia, J) Malac. Soc. Aust. 6, 101-111.

Kolma, H. (1981) Mortality of young Japanese black

abalone Huliotis discus discus after transplantation.

Bull. Jap. Soc. Sci. Fish. 47, 151-159.

SHmPHeRn, S. A. & Turner, J. A. (1985) Studies on

southern Australia abalone (genus Aa/lfolis) VI.

Habitat preference, abundance and predators of

juveniles. J. exp Mar Biol. Ecol. 93, 285-298.

SKILLETER, G, A, & ANDERSON, D. T. (1986) Functional

morphology of the chelipeds, mouthparts and gastric

mill of Ozius fruncatus (Milne Edwards) (Xanthidae)

and Leptograpsus variegatus (Fabricius) (Grapsidae)

(Brachyura). Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res. 37, 67-79.

Teoner, M. 1. & Butver, R.A. (1985), The survival and

mortality of seeded and native red abalones, Haliotis

rufescens, on the Palos Verdes Peninsula. Calif. Fish

and Game 71, 150-163.

Vermeu, G. J. (1977) Patterns in crab claw size: the

geography of crushing, Syst. Zool, 26, 138-152.

WILLIAMS, M. J, (1981) Methods for analysis of natural

diet in Portunid crabs (Crustacea; Decapoda:

Portunidae). Exp. Mar. Biol. Ecal. $2, 103-113.

—— (1982) Natural food and feeding in the commercial

sand crab Porrunus pelagicus Linnaeus 1766 (Crusacea:

Decapoda: Porjunidae) in Moreton Bay, Queensland.

Ibid, 59, 165-176.

Zisper, &, & Vermen, G. J. (1978) Crushing behaviour

of tropical and temperate crabs. /bid. 31, 155-172.

REDEFINITION OF UPEROLEIA TALPA TYLER, DAVIES & MARTIN,

1981 (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE: MYOBATRACHINAE)

BY M. DAVIES & A. A. MARTIN

Summary

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

REDEFINITION OF UPEROLEIA TALPA TYLER, DAVIES & MARTIN, 1981

(ANURA! LEPTODACTYLIDAE: MYORATRACHINAE)

Uperaleia talpa was described [rom three individyals

collected on a dry night south of Derby. W.A-!

Subsequent collections in the area have provided additional

material, and atlowed biological and additional

morphological, osteologicat and distributional data to be

assenibled, Here we report these data Morphological

measurements follow the methods of the original

deseription,! und are expressed ay mean — standard

deviation with ranges in parentheses.

Calls of three individuals were recorded ata sié 22 kit

S of Derby on 14.01.80, using a Sony TC-S10-—2 tape

recorder und a Beyer M88 dynamic microphone, ata 1ape

speed of 19 cnr/sec, Wet-bulb air temperatures measured

close (GO the calling sites af males ranged between

25.4-26,0"C, Calls were alialysed by means of a sound

speerrograph (Kay Model 6061-B Sona-Graph), wilh the

overall response curve maintained in the FL-1 position.

One call of each male was analysed,

Material evamined is deposited in the South Australian

Mustun, Adelaide (SAM), the Western Australian

Museum, Perth (WAM), and the Liniversity of Adelaide

asteological collection (UNZ).

Uperoleia talpa Tyler, Davies & Martin, 198i!

Gleuerlia mjobergi: Main 1965° p. 66; Barker & Cirize

1977,* pp 199,

Uperofeiu talpa Tylet, Davies & Martin, 1981,! p, 32.

Uperoteia talpa: Tyler 19823 p. 87. Covger. Cameron &

Covper 1983," p. 34; Tyler, Smith & Johnstone 1984," p.

102; Tyler 19S,’ p. 408; Cogwer 1986," p. 875 Tyler 1987,"

p. 232

Mjiageosis: A \arge species (Fo 26-38 mor S-V G4

32-36 mm S-¥) lacking maxillary tecth; (ops fringed wih

moderate webbing, metutarsal tubercles very large;

frontaparictal fontanelle widely exposed; carpus of six

ements; anteromedial processes of anterior hyale of hyoid

slender, short, ne ihal crest; adverrisement call of atraul

130 msec duration, with some 4) pulses produced ata

pulse repetition rate of about 315 pulses/sec.

Material examined: 49 cro and 9 2) were examined:

SAM R28792-94, WAM R9d430, 10-18 km S$ Derby: SAM

R28795, 22-41 kro S Derby; SAM R28K08, 41 kin S Derby;

SAM R31733, 28 kin S Derby; SAM R28809-38, WAM

R94431. 34, 28 km S Derby; SAM R28796-801, WAM

RYd4IG-38, 8 km NE Broome; SAM R28802-7, WAM

R94439-40, 106 kom E Broome.

External morphology: Large species (males 26-38 mm,

females 32-36 mnt S-¥) with shart snout, usually

truncated (4/5 of specimens) or slighty rounded when

viewed from above. Fye to naris distance greater than

internurial span (E-N/IN 1.20 +. 17 [1,00-1.56]) Fingers

short with lareral fringes in 2/5 of specimens, absent in

remainder, Subarticular tubercles prominent in about +2

specimens, moderately prominent in others. Palmar

tubercle ac base of thumb never prominenl; that on heel

of hand, prominent in 3/8 of specimens but poorly

developed in remainder Hind limbs very short (TL“S-V

0.31 1.02 [0.25-0,35]). Tors fong, broadly fringed in all

specimens, moderately webbed. in about 7/8 of specimens;

basully webbed in remainder Subarticular tubercles

conical, metslarsal (ubergles extremely prominent. Inner

metatarsal tubercle oriented along long axis of first toe;

outer metatarsal 1ubercle angled slightly to long avis of

Toot,

Dorsal surface with strongly defined dermal glands (in

cpntrase to specimens in type series). About 1/5 of

specimens with only maderatcly devetoped paroajoid

glands: 4/5 with strongly developed, and occasionally

hypertrophied, glands. Inguina) and <oceygeal gland

development as if paroroid glands, Submandithilar gland

poorly developed in about 1/6 of specimens, maderately

developed in 16, well developed in remainder, Dorsal

surfave smooth in 44 of specitnens, Moderately rogose in

abowt 2/9, rugose in remainder.

Veniral surface granular in about ’4 af specimens:

smooth in remainder.

Dorsum weakly patterned in ubout 4 of specimens,

moderarely marked in remainden ‘Ventral surtsce

unpigmented.

Fig, 1, (A) Lateral view of the pelvis; and, (B) ventral view

of the hyoid of Uperoleia talpa.

Ostealogy: Material examined, UAZ AS591-4,

4598-600, B864, 28 km S Derby; UAZ ASYSa, b, $3 km

E Derby on Gibb River Rely UAZ A602, X kim NE Broome;

WAZ A865-6, 10 km S Derby.

Variation occurs in posteromedial separation of nasals..

Nasals widely separated medially in some, less 50 7m others.

Anterior edges of nasals strongly crescentic in some

specimens, barely so in others.

Anterior extremities of trentoperictals vary in position:

barely reaching posterior extremities of sphenethmoid,

88 M. DAVIES & A. A, MARIIN

terminating at levels of amterior extremity of frontoparietal

fontanelle, or reaching anjeriorly to anterior edges of

sphenethmoid. Orbital edges of frontoparietals straight,

gently angled medially.

Zygzomatic ramus of squamosal tiny and bifid in many

specimens. Pars facialis of maxillary shallow to moderately

deep with sstrongly developed monticuline preorhital

process. Condition of palatines varies — bones always

reduced laterally, but in many specinigns nue extending

beyond Isteral extremities of nasals,

Cultriform process of parasphenoid moderately slender,

varics in length. none specimen (UAZ A602) it is dagger-

blade shaped. Well-developed pterygoid process. of palatal

shelf of maxillary, Anicrior ramus of pterygoid moderately

expanded, in moderately-long contact with pterygoid

process of maxilla. Epiotic eminences of crista parotica

incompletely ossified posteriorly. Yorivrine fragments at

edge of choanae in UAZ A602,

No: ilial crest. Dorsal prominence well developed,

monticuline; dorsal protuberance laterally situated on

prominence (Fig. LA),

Hyaid plate longer than wide. Anteromedial processes

of anterior hyale slender, moderately long, Alary processes

of hyoid plate not pedunculate. Posterolateral processes

broad, moderately Jong. Posterior cornua ossified (Fig.

IB).

Fig. 2. (A) Palmar view of the carpus; and, (B) plantar

view wf (he tarsus of Uperaleia talpa.

Carpus of 54 clements. Moderate degree of torsion. O.

radiale and ©. ulnare present; O. radiale is larger Both

articulate with O, radioulnare proximally, and with each

other on proximomedial border. Distally, both articulate

with large transversely elongated O, centrale postaniale.

O. radiale articulates with ©. centrale preaxiale.

O. centrale postaxiale articylates distally with bones of

O. metacarpii HI, [Y and V. Very small flange extends

proximally trom lateroproximal corner. Palmar sesamoid

situated ventromedially (rig, 2).

O. centrale preaxiale articulates laterally with O, radiale,

distally with O. centrale postaxiale, and with carpal

elements of O. distale carpale 2 and 3, laterally with basal

prepollical element.

Three distal tarsal elements present. Lateral! clement

largest, lying at base of O, metatarsus II] and extending

laterally to articulate with medioproximat side of hase of

©. metatarsus IJ. Medial element lies at base of ©;

metatarsus I and also articulates with O, centrale

prebullucis,

Distal prehallical element very long, slender and bullet~

shaped, extending for about 34 length of O. metatursus

I (Fig. 2).

O6 O86

Fig, 3, Audiospecitrograms of the advertisement call of

a inale of Uperuleia talpa from 22. km S of Derby, W.A.,

14.11.80. Left trace, 45 H, bandpass; right trace, 300 H,,

bandpass. Wet-bulb air temperature: 25.6°C-

Advertisement voll: A “creak” 130 msec (mean: n = 3)

in duration (range 125-135), with a dominant frequency

of 2450 Hz (2200-2900). The cull consists of 41 (40-42)

pulses repeated at a rate of 315 (311-320) pulses/sec

(Fig. 3), ;

Coniparison with other species: Uperoteia talpa is a large

edentate species with a widely exposed frontoparietal

fontanelle and moderately webbed toes. These features are

shared with U russell, U. orientalis and Li. borealis. Li.

talpa is distinguished from U. orientalis by the absence

of a midvertebral stripe in the former. burealis lacks

6 risthm

* my Ba ok

Mae re >

t SRR

hi phe

~1, vat ay SS SOF Ma

I¢ ces ,

£ pty

> Fa ae.

ea am

i Zt.

3 a =

Ww ao an

P mg ane Fee

or 7s Sy pe:

i \ Wess

, 1

‘ co Derby. a.

t 4 s

\ pat

\ cA

<4 J

8" — Broome fos

‘

v3"

Fig. 4, Distribution of Uperaleia talpa in the Kimberley

Division of Western Australia.

the back patterning characteristic of U. talpa and is

distinguished further by call! (pulse rate one third that

of U talpa). U. russelli has pigmented inguinal and

postfemoral patches; whereas, in U ftalpa, pigment is

lacking,

Breeding biology: Uperoleia talpa is sympatric with U.

mjobergi and U. asperu al sites between 12 and 42 km

S of Derby in W.A. The three species are spatially

separated with respect to calling site.!@ U, mijobergi calls

at the edge of or in shallow temporary waters, whereas

U. talpa calls from dry vegetated places a considerable

distance (up to 10 metres) from water. U. aspera calls from

the areas between these sites, In March 1980, breeding

activity followed torrential rainfall.

"Tyler, M. J., Davies, M. & Martin, A. A. (1981) Aust,

J. Zool, Suppl. 79, 1-64,

?Main, A. R. (1965) “Frogs of Southwestern Australia.”

West. Aust. Nat. Club Handbook 8, 1-73.

*Barker, J. & Grigg, G. (1977) “A ficld guide to

Australian Frogs” (Rigby, Adelaide),

“Tyler, M. J. (1982) “Frogs” (Collins, London and

Sydney), 2nd Edtn.

Cogger, H. G., Cameron, E. E. & Cogger, H. M. (1983)

“Zoological Catalogue of Australia. Vol. I. Amphibia

and Reptilia.” (A.G.P.S., Canberra).

°Tyler, M. J., Smith, L. A. & Johnstone, R. E. (1984)

Glandular secretions: Uperoleia talpa is unique amongst

Uperoleia in releasing copious quantities of white frothy

secretion from the parotoid glands in response to tactile-

stimuli such as those received when being picked up. The

secretion is toxic to other frogs placed in the same

container as the U. talpa.?

Distribution: Uperoleia falpa is confined to the

southwestern purtion of the Kimberley Divisian of Western

Australia, The distribution of the species is shown in

Fig. 4.

Field work was supported by a grant to M. J, Tyler by

the Utah Foundation, We thank M. J. Tyler and G. F.

Watson for field companionship.

_“Frogs of Western Australia.” (W.A. Museum, Perth).

"Tyler, M. J. (1985) In D. R. Frost (Ed,) “Amphibian

Species of the World. A Taxonomic and Geographic

Reference.” (Allen Press Inc. and Assoc. Syst. Coll.,

Lawrence, Kansas).

®Cogger, H. G. (1986) “Reptiles arid Amphibians of

,(ustrala.” 4th Edin, (Reed, Sydney).

"Tyler, M. J. (1987) /n Covacevich, J, Davie, P. & Pearn,

J. (Eds) “Toxic Plants and Animals. A Guide for

Australia.” {Qld Museum, Brisbane).

Tyler, M. J., Davies, M., Martin, A. A. & Watson, G. KF,

Unpublished data,

MARGARET DAVIES, Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.P.O. Box 498, Adelaide, S, Aust. 5001,

and ANGUS A, MARTIN, Department of Zoology, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vic, 3052.

NEOBATRACHUS PZCTUS (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE) FROM THE

MIOCENE/PLIOCENE BOUNDARY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

NEOBATRACHUS PICTUS (ANURA: LEPTODACTYLIDAE) FROM THE

MIOCENE/PLIOCENE BOUNDARY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

The fossil record of frogs in Australia hitherto has been

based upon Holocene, Late Pleistocene and Mid-Miocene

material, principally from Western Australia, South

Australia and Queensland.! Here I report an important

additional specimen from South Australia.

The specimen (South Australian Museum P27928) is

the right ilium of the extant leptodactylid species

Neobatrachus pictus Peters. It was collected by Mr N.

Pledge at Corra-Lynn Cave at Curramulka, Yorke

Peninsula, South Australia. The specimen (Fig. 1) is

complete and its identity is indicated by the narrow shaft,

obliquely situated dorsal protuberance and high dorsal

acetabular expansion.

The Curramulka fauna is considered to be on the

boundary between the Late Miocene and Early

Pliocene.’The record therefore is significant in bridging

one of the major gaps in the existing fossil record.

Only two species of frogs now occur on the Yorke Penin-

sula. These are Limnodynastes tasmaniensis Gunther*

which is distributed widely in southeastern Australia, and

N. pictus (previously reported from the southern end of

the peninsula as that species*~® or, erroneously, as N.

centralis>~*).

It is becoming apparent that extant species of Australian

frogs occur as early as the Middle Miocene. At least some

fossil ilia of that age cannot be distinguished from their

modern counterparts. If these observations are supported

by studies of other Tertiary frogs, anuran skeletal mor-

phology, as exemplified by the ilium, will have been shown

to be extremely conservative.

Fig. 1. Right ilium of Neobatrachus pictus (SAM P 27928).

'Tyler, M. J. (in press) “Australian Frogs” (Penguin, Mel-

bourne).

Pledge, N. (pers. comm.).

Tyler, M. J. (1973) Frogs In D. W. P. Corbett (Ed.)

“Yorke Peninsula — a natural history.” Dept of Con-

tinuing Education Publ. 36, University of Adelaide.

‘Tyler, M. J. (1977) “Frogs of South Australia” (2nd

Edtn). South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Roberts, J. D. (1978) Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 102, 97-105,

Brook, A. J. (1981) “Atlas of frogs of South Australia.”

Dest of Zoology Publ. 4, University of Melbourne, Park-

ville.

MICHAEL J. TYLER, Dept. of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Box 498, G.P.O., Adelaide, S. Aust. 5001.

STUDIES ON SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN ABALONE (GENUS HALIOTIS) 1X.

GROWTH OF H. SCALARIS

BY S. A. SHEPARD, A. G. J. MOWER & K. HILL

Summary

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

STUDIES ON SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN ABALONE (GENUS HALIJOTIS) 1X.

GROWTH OF H. SCALARIS

‘The non-commercial abalone Aaliotis scalaris Leach

iS.& COMMON Species Occwrring in a crypti¢ habital under

rocks in southern Australian coastal waters.! As part of

long-term studies on the recruitment .and survival of

abalone” in (his habilat ai West. Island, South Australia

(35° 37°S; 138° 35° E) we describe here the growth rate of

H, seqtatis during the first four years of life. The earlier

now? described the spawning cycle, recruitment and

juvenile growth in the first year only of this. species at West

Islann.

An underwater hand lens" was used to search for newly

settled 77. scafuris ona crustose coralline substratum on

and under boulders mostly 20 « 30 ¢m diameter at the

study site (extending over a distance of about 60 1m) where

previous studies were made * Sampling was. stratified

spahally at 4 and § m depths in five sections of the site

and swenty samples, ¢ach covering 0.25 m*, were taken

at each visit. Sampling consisted of measunng and

revording the size of all abalone within a quadrat frame

0.28 m? in area, Diving time was about five hours per

visit except that, on the October 1986 and December

JORG—January 1987 visits, about 35 hours in all were spent.

searching for abalone.

The MIX interactive computer program” was used to

separate modes\ of multimodal distributions and fit

Gaussian component dis(ributions with maximum like-

lihood techniques. Probability values exceeding 0.05

indicate statistically satisfactory fits. Some individuals were

also tagged with small plastic tags fixed te the shell with

superglue to verify he growth rate.

Leggth frequency distnbypons from under-boulder

censuses from Deeember 1984—January 1987 are given in

Fig, ly those obtained during 1983 and 1984 have been

published previously.? There was a strong recruitment (i.e,

numbers of individuals 1-5 mm lang recorded) in 1983,

'Shepherd, 5. A, (1973) Aust. J. Mar, Freshw. Res. 24,

217-257.

‘Shepherd, S, A, & Turners, J. A, (1985) L Exp, Mar, Biol,

beol, 99, 285-298,

*Shepherd, 8. A., Clarkson, PS. & Turner, J. A. (1985)

Tray. R, Soc, S. Aust. 161-162.

‘MeDonald, P, 0, M. & Pitcher, PE, (1979) J. Fish,

Res. Bd. Can. 36, 987-1001.

avery weak recruitment in 1984 (only detected as indi-

viduals grew into larger size classes), a weak settlement

in 1985 and a stronger one in 1O8G. The mades of length

frequency distributions (Fig. 1) are plotied over time in

Fig. 2, and the progression of the modes is taken to indi-

cate the growth Tate,

A lincar regression by the Icast squares method was

fitted to the modal means for all years combined, each

modal mean being weighted by the reciprocal of its stan-

dard error, The regression equation of best tit is

= 0.00854 + 0.03734 (R? = 0.98)

where L = length in mm and A = age in days. The

standard error of the slope is 0.0009 and of the constant

is 0.520. The mean growth rate of the successive cohorts

(derived trom the equation) is. 1.13 mm per month (S.E. =

0.03 mm). The X- intercept (I January) is a theoretical

Tather than a biologically realistic mean birth date. Earlier

studies! sugecst that settlement of the species occurs

preduminantly from January to June. If this is so, the

growth rate in the first few months after settlement must

be faster than Lhat indicated above.

The mean growth rate of four tagged individuals

(plotted in Fig, 2) is 1.12 mm per month (S.E, - 0,10 mm)

which is not significantly different from the growth rate

inferred from modal progressions. This growth rate is

stower than that of H, /aevigara in the same habitat,’ but

similar to numerous other species of abalone whose early

srowrh has been examined.o7A?

We are grateful to Jean Turner, P.S. Clarkson and C. H.

Deane for diving assistance. Funds supporting the study

came from Fishing Industry Research ‘Trust Account

(FIRTA).

‘Shepherd, 5. A. (in press) Aust. J. Mat, Freshw. Res.

*Poure, G. CB. (1972) N.Z. J. Mar, Erestiw. Res. 6,

passe.

(Sainsbury, K. J. (1982) NZ. J. Freshw, Res, 16, 147-161,

*Ichiki, T., Yamashita, K, & Tartemura, K, (1977) Bull.

g Nagasaki Pret. Inst. Fish. No. 3, 84-94.

"Clavier, . & Richard, O. (i986) J. Mar. biol. Ass. UK

66, 497-503.

8. A, SHEPHERD, A. G, J) MOWER & K. HILL, Dept of Fisheries, 135 Pirie Street, Adelaide, S, Aust. S000,

H. scalaris

N=38

: x2247 P=0.17

& oO = a

o N=49

rs Y, x2=98 p=0.98

T —T :

N=128

z x2252 P=0.47

et el aL Fina ES

T— T

N=161

10 ;

ul xX2=87 P=0.003

5 9 »

fr) Alles

N=116

10 2 ..

Dec. 86-Jan. 87 X*=67 P=0.15

m 1982 Length (mm)

Oo 1983

1984

m@ 1985

1986

O 1987

Fig. 1. Length frequency distributions of H. scalaris at West I. from December 1984 to January 1987. Triangles represent

the position of the modes of the fitted Gaussian distribuuons. Annual cohorts are distinctively shaded.

H. scalaris

70 41983 Ti

LENGTH (mm)

Fig. 2. Plots of modes (and standard errors) of annual cohorts from 1983 to 1986. The mean growth of tagged individuals

is shown (x....x).

VOL. 112,

PARTS 3 & 4

30 NOVEMBER, 1988

Contents

PUBLISH

Transactions of the

Royal Society of South

Australia

Incorporated

Sergeev, V. N., Clarke, S. M. & Shepherd, S. A. Motile macroepifauna of the seagrasses,

Amphibolis and Posidonia, and unvegetated sandy substrata in

Holdfast Bay, South Australia - - - - - - - -

Rondonuwu, S. A. & Austin, A. D. A new species of Uracanthus (Coleoptera:

Cerambycidae): A pest on ornamental cynressis in the Adelaide

Region - - - - -

Koste, W., Shiel, R. J. & Tan, L. W. New Rotifers (Rotifera) — Rusthiania - - -

Barker, S. Contributions to the Taxonomy of Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera:

Buprestidae) - - - - - - - - - - -

Hutchinson, M. N. & Donnelan, S. C A new species of scincid lizard related to Leiolopisma

entrecasteauxii, from southeastern Australia - - - - -

Campbell, R. A. & Beveridge, I. Mustelicola antarcticus sp. nov. (Cestoda:

Trypanorhyncha) from Australian elasmobranchs, and a reassessment

of the Family Mustelicolidae Dollfus, 1969 - - - - -

Gardner, J. A. Chromosome numbers and karyotypes of some Australian Stigmoderini

(Coleoptera: Buprestidae) - - - -

Gowlett-Holmes, K. L. A new species of Notoplax (Mollusca: Spaipneenphora:

Acanthochitonidae), from New South Wales, Australia - - -

Brief Communications:

Neverauskas, V. P. Accumulation of periphyton on artificial substrata near sewage sludge

outfalls at Glenelg and Port Adelaide, South Australia- - - -

Stott, P. Use of growth rings to determine age in the freshwater tortoise Chelodina

longicollis: a cautionary note - - - - - - - -

Zeidler, W. The European Shore Crab, Carcinus maenas in the Coorong — A potential

threat to local fisheries - - - - - - - - -

109

119

133

143

153

163

169

175

179

ED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 112, PART 3

MOTILE MACROEPIFAUNA OF THE SEAGRASSES, AMPHZBOLIS

AND POSZDONZA, AND UNVEGETATED SANDY SUBSTRATA IN

HOLDFAST BAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY V. N. SERGEEV, S. M. CLARKE & S, A. SHEPARD*

Summary

The motile macroepifauna was examined in stands of Amphibolis antarctica, in mixed stands of

Posidonia angustifolia and Posidonia sinuosa, and in nearby unvegetated sand at two sites in

Holdfast Bay, South Australia. In all, 178 species including 49 species of molluscs and 114 species

of crustaceans were recorded in the three habitats. There were significantly more species at both

sites, and significantly more individuals at one site, in vegetated than unvegetated substrata.

Seagrass biomass was significantly and positively correlated with the number of species and

number of individuals at the shallow site, but not at the deeper one. Seagrass biomass appears to be

only one of a number of factors determining the structure of the macroepifaunal assemblage.

Cluster analyses of samples show that the faunas of each habitat are distinct. Of the 25 most

common species, 11 were significantly associated with Amphibolis, eight with Posidonia, and six

were associated with vegetated as compared with unvegetated substrata, with which five were

associated. Only harpacticoid copepods of the genus Amphiascopsis were non-selective. The habitat

preferences of species appear to be a complex result of individual requirements for food and shelter.

KEY WORDS: macroepifauna, seagrasses, molluscs, crustaceans, Posidonia, Amphibolis, South

Australia.

MOTILE MACROEPIFAUNA OF THE SEAGRASSES, AMPHIBOLIS AND POSIDONIA,

AND UNVEGETATED SANDY SUBSTRATA IN HOLDEFAST BAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By V. N, SERGEEV, S, M. CLARKE & 5S, A. SHEPHERD?

Sammary

Srroney, V.N., Clarke, SM. & Siephierp, S& A. (i988) Molile macroepifauna of seagrasses, 4 miphiboliy

and Poesidenia, and unvegelared sandy substrata in Holdfast Bay, South Australia. Trans. R, Sag. S Ausé,

1(2, 97-108, 30 November, L988.

The motile mavroepifauna was examined in stands of Aniphibolis antareliva, in mixed Stands of Poxidonia

wneusiolia and Posidonia sinvosa, and in wearby unvegetated sand at nwo sites in Haldlasr Bay, South

Australia, In all, 178 species including 49 species of molluses and [14 species of crustaceans were recorded

in the three habitats. There were significantly minre species at both sites, and significantly more individuals

atone sire, i vexetaced than unyegetdied substrata. Seagrass biomass was significantly and positively

correlated with |he number of species aad number of individuals al [he shallow sile, but nol al (he deeper

one. Seagrass biomass appears to be only one of a number of factors determining the structure of the

macrvepifaunal asseniblage, Cluster analyses of samples show fhat the faunas of each habitat are distiner.

Of (he 25 most common species, 1 were significantly associated with 4niphibalis, cight with Posidania,

and six Were associated with Vegetated as compared with unvegetated substrata, with which five were

associgied, Guily harpacicoid copepods of the genus Arphiascapsis were non-selective, The habitay

preferences of species appear fo be a Complex resull of individual requirements for food anal shelter

Key Words; macroepifauna, seagrasses, molluscs, crustaceans, Povidanta, Amphibolis,

Sourh Australia.

Introduction

Scagrasses are a conspicuous element in temper-

ute Australian coastal waters (Larkum 1977:

Womersley 1984) and especially important in the

South Australian Gulfs. where they form extensive

meadows (Shepherd & Sprige 1976; Shepherd 1983;

Thomas & Clarke 1/988) and might be expected to

provide a large fraction of the toral productivity

(Mann 1982). Seagrasses also provide habirac,

shelter and food for many mobile invertebrates

which ip turn are used as food by fish and other

secondary consumers (Kikuchi [974; Robertson

1980: Pollard 1984 and reviews by Virnsrein 1987;

Howard ef /, 1988; Bell & Pollard 1988). Inverte-

brates are thus an important link in the trophic

nelwork in coastal Seagrass communities. Because

the seagrass beds in Haldfast Bay; South Australia

have become seriously degraded (see Clarke 1987,

and review by Shepherd e ai 1988) the conse-

quences of such loss on higher trophic levels needs

to be assessed,

This study was of a pilot nature and set out to

describe the matile macroepifauna of two major

seagrasses and unvegetated substrata, and so docu-

ment the faunistic changes that might be expected

to result from the decline of seagrasses in Holdfast

Bay. The seagrasses were Posidonia angustifolia

Cambridge & Kuo and A sinwosa Cambridge &

Kuo, which occur in mixed stands, and Amphibolis

antarctica (Labillardiere) Sander & Ascherson ex

* Department of Fisheries, 135 Pirie Street,

Adelaide, S. Aust. 5000

Ascherson. The unvegetated subsirata were blow-

outs, Which occur widely in these seagrass beds (Fiz.

la). P angustifolia and P. sinuosa are similar to

each other morphologically, both having long

narrow blades arising from a rhizome, and can be

readily distinguished only by examination of the

buried sheath or (microscopically) of the epidermal

cells (Cambridge & Kuo 1979). 4, aniarctica is

architecturally more complex with a tough

cylindrical stem supporting an array of tufted leaves.

We examined the species composition and

abundance of all taxa retained ina dl »« OS mm

mesh in vegerated areas over a range of seagrass

biomass valucs and in unvegerated sandy areas in

order to assess the importance of the structure and

biomass.of these seagrasses ta the macroepifauna.

In each case epifaunal, but not infaunal, taxa

associated with the substratum were saripled.

Because the macroepifauna is highly mobile anu

might be expected to select an optimal habitat,

based on seagrass archiecture and density, and

because survival may differ between habitats and

within habitats according to seagrass density,

differences im epifaunal species composition and

abundance should disclose the net outcome of these

two processes, ie. habitat preferences ane

differential survival.

An important collateral aim of the study was 16

oblain-a taxonomic reference collection of maere-

invertebrate taxa. wssociated with seagrass anu

unvegetated sybsirata in Holdfast Bay for use im

later studies, Voucher specimens are lodged in the

South Australian Museum, Except for the study of

Watson e7 al. (1984) on Heferozostera this has not

98 V. N. SERGEEV, 8S. M. CLARKE & S. A. SHEPHERD

previously been attempted for southern Australian

seagrasses.

Materials and Methods

Study Sites

Sites were selected in Holdfast Bay, S. Aust.,

where serious Seagrass recession has occurred

through expansion of blowouts and the effects of

sewage sludge effluent (see Shepherd ef a/. 1988).

One study area (Blowouts SI and $2) was located

1.4 km off Henley Beach (34°55.5'S, 138°30'B) at

6-7 m depth (Fig. 2) where extensive mixed stands

of Posidonia angustifolia and P. sinuosa, and

smaller patches of Amphibolis antarctica surround

blowouts. The second study area (Blowout S3),

examined at a later date, was 2.6 km off Brighton

(35°0O1'S, 138°31'E) at 10-11 m depth where P

angustifolia is dominant and A. antarctica occurs

only in small patches. The former area was chosen

because it was considered to be representative of

seagrass habitats in Holdfast Bay; this judgement

was based on extensive sampling during compre-

hensive studies of seagrass-sediment dynamics of

Holdfast Bay (Clarke 1987; Thomas & Clarke 1988).

The latter area was near the maximum depth of sea-

grass and was chosen to maximise contrast with the

former, and so test the applicability of the earlier

results to a deeper seagrass habitat.

Fig. 1. (a) Aerial photograph at Brighton in Holdfast Bay showing blowouts in seagrass beds. Bar scale = 500m.

(b) Diver sampling unvegetated substratum in a blowout. (c) Oblique view of Amphibolis bed, (d) Oblique view

of Posidonia bed.

MOTH.F MACROEPIFAUNA OF THE SEAGRASSES 99

sou _\

‘ AUSTRALIA /

“—

Fig, 2. Holdfas! Bay, South Australia showing study sites

and seagrass disiburiun,

A 25 « 25 cm quadrar frame attached co the

open end of a plankton net of mesh size 1 < 0.5

mm and enclosing a volume of 40 litres was used

for sampling. The net was secured co the quadrat

hy a lace and unfolded only when the quadrat was

rapidly thrust downwards to the seabed during (he

Sampling operation (Fig, 1 b, e, d). All samples,

both in vegetated and unvegetaled areas, were taken

abour 5m from the seagrass-sand houndary of the

blowour being investigated, in order to avoid

possible ‘edge effects’,

In the seagrass samples, the seagrass Was cut off

al sand level with shears operated from outside the

net. After the sample was taken, the net was

released from the quadrat, the surficial sediment

was manually disturhed (a a depth of 1-2 ¢m in

order to expel sheltering animals into the water

column, (he opening tied shut, and the net and con-

tents sealed ina plastic bag. The technique is simi-

lar to that described by Ledoyer (1962) and used

by Scipione & Fresi (1984), Virnstcin ef a/. (1984)

and others.

At the Henley Beach site six replicate samples

were Laken in each of three habitats (unvegetared

sand, Posidonia and Amphibatis) at twa blowouts

(Sl, 52) giving 36 samples in all, At Brighron eight

replicates were taken im the same three habitats «al

one blowour ($3) giving 24 samples.

Samples, including the surficial sediment and any

detritus, were preserved in 10% formalin und

seawater and later hand-sorted fo remove all

animals. The seagrass in cach sample was weighed

after removal of excess water, and animals were

identified ro The lowes! possible taxon and species’

abundances per quadrat tabulated. Sampling was

done at about noon, in March 1985 at SI and S2

and in November 1985 ar $3.

Only the motile niacroepilaung is considered

here. Bryozoans, foraminiferans, fivdrotls snd

polychactes, and meiofaunal species nol adequately

retained by the mesh, are excluded.

Analyses

Data for the two si(es cannot be compared direct-

ly due to differences indepth and time of sampling

and in locality, and are analysed separately.

A cluster analysis of Spectes’ abundances per

quadrat was performed on the data from cach site.

After a log (N + 1) transformation of the data the

Euclidean distance measure of similarity and the

eroup average sorting sirategy were used to achieve

clustering of quadrat data (see Clilford & Stephen-

son 1985, Field er al. 1982).

Data on number of species and number of in-

dividuals were examined by analysis of variance

(ANOVA), Where the variances are heterogeneous,

as disclosed by a Cochran C-test, data were trans-

formed to achieve homogeneity, A Student - New-

man - Keuls (SNK) test was then used to detect sip-

nificant differences between individual means.

Cluster analyses, ANOVAS and feast squares

regressions were performed with (he Biostut com-

puter package (R. A. Pimental & J. D. Smith 198s.

Sigma Soft Placentia, California).

Resulls.

Community Totals

{rall, 7124 individuals divided among 178 spe-

cies were obtained in the two vegetated habitats

(Amphibolis and Posidonia) and in unvegetated

sand, Where were 49 species of molluses, 114 spe-

cies of crustaceans (59 amphipods, 19 isopods, 13

decapods, five mysids, ten capepods and eight os-

tracods), seven species of pycnogonids and eipht

ma V. N, SERGEEV, SM, CLARKE & S, A. SHEPHERD

species of echinoderms, The species wilh authori-

lies are listed in ‘Table I

Analyses of variance show thut the number of

species differs slenificantly between seagrass habitat

and unvegetated sund wt both sites (Tables 2, 3). At

the Henley Beach sile Uiere is no significant

difference (P >0.05) between the twa blowouts (S1,

S2). There are signiticantly fewer species in

\invegerared sand than in scaprass at both sites, bul

no significant difference in number of species

between the two seagrasses (‘lable 3), Overall, there

are fewer species of molluscs than of arthropous

in seagrass, except that at Brighton there is Httle

dilference in the number of species of molluse

between unyegetared sand and Posidonia (Fig, 3),

The (wo sites do not give a consistent picture in

the variation in number of individuals per sample

i relation to habitat. At Henley Beach there is po

significant (P>0.05) difference beiween any

habitat, but at Brighton there are significantly tewer

individuals in Fosidonia and sand than in

Anphibatis. (Table 3).

Next we examined by regression analvsis the role

of seagrass biomass as a factor influencing the

number of species and of individuals per sample,

Significant linear regressions relaling dumber of

species and individuals with Postdonig and

Amphibolis biomass respectively are given in ‘lable

4 for Henley Beach, Here the number of species in

Pusidonia and both number of species and

individuals in Ampiibeatis are significantly related

tu buenass; ar Brighton there are no significant

TELTESSIONS,

HENLEY BEACH SRIGNTON

3200 200) re cruslsceans

E — — moalluece

> ~

= “.

= 100 “eto 7 100

i-]

Me of Sipeniee

hae. 4. Mean number of individuals aud species oF crusla-

ceans and molluscs per sample in three habitats,

(Aniphibodis, Posidunia and unvegetated sancl) at

Henley Reach and Brighion. Vertical bars are standard

crrors.

Habitat differences

Dendrogramms of sainple classifleutions sng

species abuodances a6 attributes (ip. 4) show iat,

With minor exceplions, the veyelated habitals,

Posidonia and Amphipolks, and unvegerated sand

sepurite oul att reluuive similarities of less than 42%,

indicating faunistic coherence within, and

substantial dissimilarity between, habitats, At

Henley Beach, the epitaunas of Posidenia and

Amphibolis are relatively distinct and more similar

to each other than either is to sand, whereas at

Brighton (here is preater similaruy between the

fauna of unvegerated sand and Posidonia. In-faer

one Posidoniu sample was. more similar to sand

samiples than to other Posidonia samples, due ta

the absence of the harpacticoid Porcellieitun sp

which was generally common in seagrasses but tare

in sand (Table 5).

Pie diagrams (Fig. 4) show the mean relative

abundances of molluscs and arthropods for cach

habitat; they incicate strong duminance by a few

species with a very large number of rare species, The

25 most common species (ie. those with mean

relative abundance per habitat of >So) difler

significantly in their absohite abundances between

the three habitats, and are categorised according ro

ther appatent preferences (Table 4), Eleven of the

25 species are more abundant in Amphibolis, twa

species are tnore ubundant in Posidonia, and six

species are more abundant in both seagrasses

without distinction between them. Only the

hurpacueoid Amphiascopsiy spp are indifferem| ta

hubitut; but this has little significance since several

taxa may be included,

There are very marked diflerences between the

faunas of the two sites, Henley Beach and Brighton,

Fourteen of the 25 mast common species, and 76%

of all species occur only at one site,

Unvegetated blowouts have a characreristic taund

which differs between the Iwo sites. Al Henley

Reach Lhe amphipod Guernia cl ge/ane and the

ostracod (ypridinoades zolatheae are dominunt, and

at Brighton the minute gastropad Lissolesta

contabulata, (he harpacticoid “AmpAhtuseopsis spp,

the mysid Lepromy'sis australis, the tanaid

Leptochelia igneta and the sea-star Alosdchastee

pelyplax ure Co-duminunt (Fig. 4).

Discussion

Despite the very limited sampling program threat

could be carned out in this study, some compari-

son can still be made with the species richness at

scugrass epifauna elsewhere. Virnsicin ev a, C1YN4)

hive assembled comparative Java on species abun

dances of amphipods, isopods and decapods in

MOTILE MACROEPIFAUNA OF THE SEAGRASSES

TABLE 1. List of species with authorities obtained in the study.

Phylum MOLLUSCA

Class GASTROPODA

Trovhidae

Fissurellidae

Liotiidae

Patellidae

Phasianellidae

Turritellidae

Epitoniidae

Calyptraeidae

Melanellidae

Potamididae

Cymatiidae

Vermetidae

Columhellidae

Olividac

Fasciolariidae

Pyrenidae

Nassariidae

Triphoridae

Muricidae

Buccinidae

Triphoridae

Pyramidellidae

Scaphandridae

Class BIVALVIA

Glycymeridae

Mytilidae

Pteriidae

Veneridac

Psammobiidae

Class AMPHINEURA

Ischnachitonidae

Class CEPHALOPODA

Idiosepiidae

Phylum CRUSTACEA

Amphipoda

Corophiidae

Ochlesidae

Cypriodeinae

Badepyrus pupeides (Adams)

Thalotia conica (Gray)

Cantharidus irisodantes (Quoy & Gaimard)

Cantharidus bellulus (Dunker)

Cantharidus apicinus (Menke)

Nanula sp,

Calliosioma sp.

Calliostama legrandi (Tenison Woods)

Calliostoma hedleyi Pritchard & Gatliff

Callistele calliston (Verco)

Ethminolia elveri Cotton & Goidlrey

Macroschisma tasmaniae Sowerby

Notoacmea flammea (Quoy & Gaimard)

Argalista sp.

Lissolesta contabulata Tate

Patella (Scutellastra) peronti Biainville

Phasianella australis (Gmelin)

Gazameda iredalei Finlay

Acutiscala minora Iredale

Calyptraea calyptraeformis (Lamarck)

Curveuhima indiscreta (Tale)

Batillaria bivaricata Ludbrook

Batillaria diemenensis (Quay & Gaimard)

Cymatiella gaimardi |redale

Tenagodus weldii Tenison Woods

Mitrella acuminata (Menke)

Oliva australis Duclos

Microcolus dunkeri (Jonas)

Macrozufra atkinsoni (Tenison Woods)

Niviha pyrrhus (Menke)

Hedleytriphora scitula (A, Adams)

Bedeva paivae (Crosse)

Lepsiella flindersi (Adams & Angas)

Cominella eburnea (Reeve)

Obesula albovitiala (Hedley)

Congulina sp.

Pyrgiscus sp.

Chernnitzia muariae (Tenison Woods)

Odostomia sp.

Acteocina fusiformis (A. Adams)

Glyeymeris radians (Lamarck)

Musculus paulucciae Crosse

Trichomusculus penetectus (Verco)

Electroma georgiana (Quoy & Gaimard)

Tawera lagopus (Lamarck)

Gari brazieri Tate

Stenachiton cymodacealis Ashby

Stenochiton pilsbryanus Bednall

Idivsepius notoides Berry

Corophium sp.l

Corophium sp.2

Corephium sp.3

Corophium sp4

Ericthonius sp.

Ochlesis eridunda Barnard

Austropheonoides mundoe Barnard

Cyproidea ornatu VMaswell

Naeapheonoides mullaya Barnard

101

102 V. N, SERGEEV, 5. M. CLARKE & S. A. SHEPHERD

Caprellidae Caprella scaura (Templeton)

Caprella danilevskii (Czerniavskit)

Paraproto spinosa (Haswell)

Corophilidae Cerapus abdictus (Templeton)

Prophliantinae Guernea c.f. gelane Barnard

Liljeborgiidac Liljeborgia sp.

Phoxocephalidae Brolgus tattersaili (Barnard)

Cunmurra itickerus Barnard

Matong matong Barnard

Birubius sp.1

Birubius sp.2

Birubius wirakus Barnard

Birubius c.f. chintoo Barnard

Booranus wangoorus Barnard

Haustoridac Urohaustorius sp.

Urothoides sp.

Dexaminidae Paradexamine goomai Barnard

Paradexamine c.f. guarallia Barnard

Paradexamine (hadalee Barnard

Paradexamine c.f. windarra Barnard

Paradexamine frinsdorfi Sheard

Puradexamine moorhousei Sheard

Paradexamine sp.

Atylus homachir Haswell

Lysianassidae Amaryllis macrophthalma Haswell

Tryphosella orana Barnard

Tryphosella spp.

Parawaldeckta spp.

Parawaldeckia stebbingi (Vhomson)

Parawaldeckia yamba Barnard

Gammaridae Maera viridis Haswell

Ceradocus sp.

Mallacoota carteta Barnard

Mallacoota subcarinata Haswell

Ampithoidae Cymadusa variata Sheard

Cymadusa filosa Savigny

Leucothoidae Leucothoe commensalis Haswell

Leucothoe sp.

Amphilochidae Gitanopsis sp.

Aoridae Aora typica Kroyer

Atytidae Atylus sp.

Eusiridae Tethygeneia megalophthalma (Haswell)

Tethygeneia sp.

Phliantidae sp.l

Poduceridae Podocerus sp.

Stenothoidae Ausatelson kolle Barnard

Ausatelson ule Barnard

Serolidae Serolis levidorata Harrison & Poore

Serolina delavia Poore

lsopoda

Sphaeromatidae sp.l

Exosphueroma sp.1

Exosphaeroma sp.2

Dynamenella sp.

Dynamenella parva (Baker)

Pseudocerceis ¢.f. irilobata Baker

Haswelia emarginata Haswell

Cymodoce coronata Haswell

Cymothoidae Cirolana sp. ;

mgen, nsp, (see Baker 1926, p, 279, Pl, XLVI)

Anthuridae Puranthura punctata (Stimpson)

Accalathura sp.

Paranthura sp.

T.gen, n.sp.

Janiridae spl

Jaeropsidae Jaeropsis sp.

Arcturidae Neastacilla sp.

Neastacilla deducta (Hall)

MOTILE MACROEPIFAUNA OF THE SEAGRASSES

Tdoteidae

Tanaidacea

Tanaidae

Decapoda

Hymenosomatidae

Crangonidae

Pandalidae

Hippolytidae

Processidac

Paguridae

Penaeidae

Majidae

Mysidacea

Mysidae

Class COPEPODA

Pseudodioptomidae

Harpacticoida

Porcellidiidae

Harpacticidae

Laophontidae

Cumacea

Bodotriidae

Dastyliidac

Nannastacidac

Class OSTRACODA

Nebaliacea

Myodocopida

Cylindroleberididae

Podocopida

Phylum CHELICERATA

Class PYCNOGONIDA

Ammiotheidae

Callipallenidae

Phylum ECHINODERMATA

Class ECHINOIDEA

Temnopteuridae

Class CRINOIDEA

Aporometridae

Class ASTEROIDEA

Asteriidae

Class OPHIUROIDEA

Ophionereididae

Crabyzos tongicaudalus (3. Bate)

Leptochelia ignota (Chilton)

Halicarcinus ovatus (Stimpson)

Pontophilus intermedius (Fulton & Grant)

Parapandalius leptorhynchus (Stimpson)

Crangon sp.

Hippolyte sp.

Hippalyte tenuirostris (S. Bate)

Hyppolyte ausiraliensis (Stimpson)

Latreutes compressus (Stimpson)

Latreutes sp.

Processa sp.

Paguristes sp.

Peneus sp.

Naxia aries (Guerin)

Australomysis acuta (Tattersall)

Australomysis incisa G.Q. Sars

Afromysis australiensis (Tattersall)

Gastrosaccus indicus (Hansen)

Leptomysis australiensis (Tattersall)

Calanoida

sp.1

Porcellidium sp.

Amphiascopsis spp.

n.sp.

sp.1

Cyclapsis sp.

Leptocuma sp.

Sympodomma baker Hale

Anchicolurus waitei (Halc)

Cumella laeve Calman

Paranebatlia longipes (Sars)

Cypridinodes c.f. galathea Poulsen

Alteratochelata c.f. lizardensis Kornicker

Vargula sp.

spl

Lowoleberis sp.

Xestoleberis sp.

Neonesidae sp.

Ascorhynchus longicollis (Haswell)

Achelia sp.1

Achelia sp. nov.

Callipallene sp.

Callipallene emaciata (Dohrn)

Pseudopatiene sp.

Propallene sp. nov.

Amblypneustes oyum (Lamarck)

Aporemetra wilsoni (Bell)

Uniophora granifera (Lamarck)

Allostichaster polyplax (Muller & Troschel)

Ophionereis schayeri Muller & ‘Troschel

103

104 VN. SERGEEV, S. M. CLARKE & S. A. SHEPHERD

Ophiopeza assimilis Bell

Ophiucomina australis HW. L. Clark

Ophiacanthidae Ophiacanthe aliérnata A.M, Clark

TAME 2. Analyses af variance lesting differences in number af species and individuals per sample at Henley Beach

and Brighton sites, *** P<@L004 as. P> (1.05,

HENLEY BEACH

No. of individuals

No. of species

(a) af. MS F (b) M5 EF

!ocation(L) 1 ().78 1.84 ns. 346.8 TLL ns.

Habilat(H) 2 4.39 19.36 ""* 176.9 0.73 ns.

-T. w-H 2 19.95 47.05 #0 H3dk.4 199 ns.

Error x) 0.42 S718.0

BRIGHTON

No. of species No. of individuals

dt. MS F MS F

Habital 2 1493 J2R *4# 44332 42.4 ***

Error 2) 12 1045

TABLE 3. Mean nuniber of species and individuals per sample in three habitats ut the Henley Beach and Rrighton

sues. Standard errors in brackeis. @’ indicates no significant (P>0.05) difference hy SNK jest,

HENLEY BEACH BRIGHTON

Species

Blowour ST Blawout $2 Blowout $3

Amphibolis 23.0 (3.0) it 21,3 (1.3) a 30.5 (1.1)

Posidonia 29,2 (3.4) a 22.8 (3.6) 2 15 (1.5)

sand 6.5 (1.0) 5.5 (0.6) 4.0) (LO)

Individuals

Amphibolis 151.2 (29-9) a 168.2 (18.3) a 170.1(10.5)

Pasydoria 178.8 (30.0)-a 136.0 (25.6) a 35.2 (5.7) a

sand 166.0 (42.7) a 81,7 (33.3) a 47.8 (16,0) a

Tani F 4, Regression equaiions of number of species (S) and number of individuals (1) per sample agairiyt wet weight

fH) in grams of Posidonia and Amplhubolis ia suniples at Menley Beach. (" P<0.05; ** P< 1.0L ns. P>0.05). In

euch regression sainple size is 12.

Species Posidonia

Amphibolis

Individuals Posidonia

Antphibolis

Equation R-

Ss 10.4 + 0.395 W 0),39*

S = 17.2 + U.03 W O.08 ns.

T- 49 +45 W O.G2**

L . 445 . 076 W 0.46*

seaprasses at various latitudes. Judged against Wus

compilation, the mean number of species record-

ed in vegetated substrata per site for amphipods

(36 species) and isopods (10 species) is higher, and

that of decapods (8.5 species) is lower compared

with other locations at about the same laptude

(35°). Similar comparisons lor molluses are not

available because of lack of uniformity in method

of collecting in dilferent places. However, Ledoy-

er (1966) recorded similar numbers of motluscan

species in scagrass to those given here. Overall, the

species richness of the epifauna in these seagrasses

in Holdfast Bay is comparable with that of the

Mediterranean Posidonia oceanica (Ledayer 1966)

which is notably rich in species (sce Virnstcin ef ai.

1984). The nunrber of species of macroepifauna in

eterozostera in much shallower water in. Victor-

ia (Watson ef af. 1984) is much lower than that

recorded in (his stucly.

The faunisti¢ coherence of habitats and the sig-

nificant differences in abundance of comman spe-

cles berween habitats suggest that there are strong

associations between many epifaunal specics and

habitat. Two causes of these associations — species’

reyinrements for food and for shelter - are of

recognized importance.

MOTILE MACROEPIFAUNA OF THE SPAGRASSES 105

HENLEY SEACH ‘SITE 1

RELATIVE SIMILARITY

FP Pare pF aly Aga aa Ma ApSeSeSe5-5555

a HONE

24pp

B Ca

= \

5 Gog

POSIDONIA AMPHIBOLIS SAND

b BRIGHTON SITE 3

RELATIVE SIMILARITY

MOLLUSCS

ARTHROPOOS

SAND

AMPHIBOLIS POSIDONIA

Fig. 4. Dendrograms of sample classificalons tor (a) Henley Beach and (b) Brighton sites, and pic diagrams of velarive

mean abundances of most common molluscs and arthropods 1h thee habirats, Anipitibolis, Posidanle wad wovegetned

sand. The key to species’ abbreviations is given in Table 5_

The food requirements of species are apparent

lor many molluses e.g. archacogastropods. which

graze on macro- or micro-alae on seagrass blades,

and mesogastropods and neogastropods which are

variously detritivores, carnivores or suspension

feeders (Ludbrook & Gowleu-Holmes 1988). A few

Species are host-specific, such as the two species of

Stenochiton (S. pilsbrvahus on Posidonia and 8S.

cymodocealis on Amphibolis), or have strict

microhabiiat requirements such as Musculus

pautyecige, which occars in the basal interstices

between séagrass blades

Similarly, many amphipods, isopods and

decapods feed on seagrass epiphytes or detritus

(Zimmerman ef af, 1979; Howard 1982, 1984;

Watson #/ vl 1984), and pycnogonids and some

decapods are predators wf smaller invertebrates

(Howard 1984; Staples!. These species are

presumably linked to seagrass habitats where their

food is more abundant.

The requirement for shelter in which plant ar-

chitecture, biomass, surface area and densily have

each been emphasized (see Homziak ef a/. 1982;

Stoner 1982, 1983; Lewis. 1984; review by Orth ef

'Staples D. A. Sea spiders or Pycnogonids. Unpublished

ms.

al, 1984: Virnstein & Howard 1987 a, b), may also

contribute to the observed association between spe-

cles and habitat. However our data do not allow

(nor was the purpose of this study) to distinguish

between the requirements for food and shelter or

assess Lhe relative importance of each, The existence

of simple linear relations between measures of plant

abundance and numbers of species or individuals

is consistent with hypotheses of requirements for

either food or shelter. But such relations may alten

be obscured by the existence of threshold effects

or other complicating biological or physical fac-

tors (Orth et a. 1984). The shallower Henley Beach

site shows linear relations in three out of four cases

but the deeper Brighton site shows hone. The like-

ly presence at the Brizhton site of organic matter

in surface sediments, a5 Suggested by the large num-

ber of detrital Veeding organisms (c.g. Lissotesta

and Leptomysis) in the samples from unvegetated

sand, could blur such relations even if they exist

ed, However the differences between the two sites

could also be duc to other factors related ta depitt,

time of year, or simply a function of the sites.

themselves.

Patches of bare sand in blowouts are coaliiu-

ing to expand in Holdfast Bay from numeruus

106 VY, N. SERGEEV, S. M. CLARKE & 8. A. SHEPHERD

TABLE 3. Mean abundances per sample of the 25 most common species in Amphibolis (A), Posidonia (P) und

unvegetated sand (S) at Henley Beach (H) and Brighton (B). Data*for Henley Beach are Sor Sites 1 and 2 combined.

No reference to @ habitat indicates zero abundance, Probability values are from t-tests. (*P<0.05; **P<0.0I

***P>0,001). Species ure listed in four ecological groups according to apparent habitat preferences. Abbreviations

of species are those given in Fis. 4,

Species Abbreviation

Amphibolis preferring

MOLLUSCA

Cantharidus irisodontes A 2.3, P 0.3** (H,B) Ci

Cantharidus bellulus A 1.4 (H,B) Cb

Bedeya paivae A 2.8 (H,B) Bp

Cingulina sp A 4.6, S 0,5* (B) C sp

Stenochiton eymodocealis A 13 {H) Se

CRUSTACEA

Cerapus abdictus A 13.8, P1.3* (H,B) Ca

Tryphosella orana A 12.2, P 0.5* (H) To

Parawaldeckia sp A 22,9 (H) Psp

Tethygeneia sp A 11,6, P 0.8** (H,B Tsp

Leptochelia ignata A 5,5, P 0.5, 5 1.2 A-S* A-P* (H,B) Li

Vargula sp A 17,7 (H) Vsp

Posidonia preferring

MOLLUSCA

Notoacmaead flammea P 9.4 (H) Nf

CRUSTACEA

Neonesidea sp P 4.8, A 0.7* (H) Nsp

Preferring vegetated substrata (V) (combining date for Amphibolis and Posidonia) to unvegetuied sand (S)

MOLLUSCA

Thalotia conica V 3.8 (H,B) ‘Ie

Macrozafra aikinsont V 6.4, S 0.2** (H,B) Ma

Musculus paulucciae V 17,8 (A,B) Mp

CRUSTACEA

Frichthanius sp V 2.40 (B) Esp

Ochlesis eridunda V 25,7, 8 0,3*** (H,B) Oe

Porcellidium sp V 8.1, 8 0.4* (H,B) Psp

Sand - preferring

MOLLUSCA

Lissotesta cuntubulata S 32.1 (B) le

CRUSTACEA

Guernia cf gelane P 1.1, S 93.9** (H) Gg

Leptomysis austratiensis § 2,3 (B) la

Cypridinodes af galatheae A 0.5, P 2.5, § 7.4, P-S** A-S** (H) Cg

ECHINODERMATA

Allostichaster polyplax P 0,7, S 11.8* (H)

Non-~selective

CRUSTACEA

Amphiascupsis spp A 7.9, P 14, § 2.9 ns (B) Ac

—_—_—_——:. nm ek = = —aee_

man-related and other causes (Clarke & Thomas

in press). Immediate effects of seagrass loss on the

epifauna are probably reflected in the differences

we observed between the complex epifaunal assem-

blage in seagrasses and the quite different sand-

dwelling assemblage. Longer term effects due to

loss of organic production are likely to entail

widespread and scrious declines in numbers of in-

dividuals and species of the epifauna that is trophi-

cally dependent on seagrass, its epiphytes or its

detritus, and of fish and other secondary consumers

that in turn depend for food on the epifauna,

MOTILE MACRORPLFAUNA OF THE SEAGRASSES 107

Acknowledgments

We thank C. tl, Deane, A, Dalgetty and N..

Holines lon assistance in che field and office. Drs

N. Ludbrook (molluses), A. N. Baker (ophiuroids),

G. © 6. Ponre (crustateans}, D. Staples

{pycnoginids), S J, Hall and C. Bartley (astracuds),

and R, Hamond (harpacticurds) each pave valued

taxonomiv advice o: determinations within cheir

specialties. Dr A, J. Butler and ain anunyeteus

referee constructively criticised the manuseript,

Funds for the study were provided by the Conman-

wealth Department of Employment and Industri-

al Relations and the Sourh Australian Department

of Labour (Community Employment Programme).

Rejerences

Banter. W. Ho 11926) Species af the isopod family

Sphaeromidae, fram the eastern, southern and westeri

voasts of Australia Trans, R, Soe. 3. Ausi, Si,

747-274.

Bett, J. Bok Pow ann, D. A, 11988) Ecology af lish

assemblages and fisherics associated with seagrasses.

Ch. 17, fa AoW, D. Larkuin, A. 1. McComb & S. A-

Shepherd (Eds) “Seagrasses” (Elsevier, | onedon)

Campripore, Mod. & Kua, 1. (1979) Two new species of

seagrasses from Australia, Payidonia simwosa and P,

aueustifola (Posiloniaceae) Aquatic Hatany, 6,

307 328,

Crarke. S, M, (1987) Seavsays — sediment dynamics in

Holdlust Bays summary, Safisit, 18¢2), 4-10,

— & Thomas, R. 1. (in press) Blowout forplology

and dynamics in the svagrass beds of Efoldfast Bay,

South Australia. Aquatic Botany,

Cuwrorp, Ho. T & Stepuexson, W. (F975) “An

imroduetion to yunwiival classification”. (Academic

Press, New York).

Ficup, J. G.CLarKL, KR. RO& Warwick, R. M. (1982)

A practical strarez¥ for analysing multispecies distri-

bution patterns, Marine Eovlogy Prog. Ser. %, 37-52,

Hewsian, J, Fowseaa, M.S. & Kinwoxtery, W. J.

11982) Macrobenthic cammunnty structure ina trans-

Biante telgrass (Zoster? maria) meadow. [hid 4,

Heowart, R. K, (1982) Impacr of feeding acthvities of

epibenthic amphipods on surface-louling of eelgrass

leaves. Aquatic Botany 14, 91-97.

—— (1984) Trophic evoloyy of Qaridean shrimps in an

eelyruss Guiuniuuity. fire Ta. 1S$-174

Euuar, 4G. J. & Elutcuines, P. (2988) Faunal as-

semblages. Ch. 16. jn A. W. 1 Larkum, A. J.

McComb & 5S, 4. Shepherd (Eds) “Seagrasses™ (EI-

sevier, Landon}.

KIKUCHI. T. (1974) Japanese contibubons on consumer

ecology in eelgrass (Zostera merina L.) beds, witht spe-

cial reference to trophic relationships and resauroes in

inshore PiM\ehies. Ayuaculre 4, 145-160.

Banke, &. WD. 11977) Recent research) on seae) ase

cammuinities in Australia. np. 247-263. Jn MeRay, C. P.

& Helllerich, <, (Eds) “Scagrass Lcosystems: 2

scleniifie perspective” (Marcel Dekker New Yorkt

Pirmiek.M. (1962) Etude de ta faune vapile des berbters

superficiels et de quelques bintapes d‘algues littarales.

Rec tro Std. Mor. End. 30, Bull, 24.

— (1965) Loologic de la lqune vapile des biaropes

Mediterranéens accessible en scuphondre suluguine. I,

Données analytiques sur les berbiers de phunerogames.

ibid 40. 145-164.

Liwis. FG. (1984) Distribution of macrobenthic

crustaceans associated with Tkolassio, Halodute and

bare sanel subsiraia Marine Ecology Prag. Ser 04,

IOi-L13,

Luvaroon, N, GoM ter t-TTotoes, K, (i9sby) “Chitors,

vastropods und bivalves" dn S. A. Shepherd & 1. M1.

Thotnys (Eds) “Marie fnvertebrares of Southern

Australia Part 2°. 15.A. Govt, Printer, Adelaide),

Mann, &K. 1]. (1982) Ecology of euastal waters; a systems

approach. Srudies in Geology, Vel. 8. (Blackwell

Scieutifie Publishers, Oxford).

Never auskas, V. P1985) Effects of the Port Adelaide

trearment works Aitdee discharge On phe aalacent

marine environment, Prac. 1985 Austratusiag Conf.

Coastal Oceun Eng. |, 193 202-

Dati, Re dy Heck, H, L, &vAN MonTrrans, J. (1984)

Faunal communities in seagrass beds: a review bf the

influence of plant structure and prey characreristies on

predator-prey relationships, Estuaries 7, 339-350,

POLLARD, D, A, (1984) A review of ecolugical studies an

seagrass-lish communities, with particular reference to

recent studies in Australia, Aquatic Boteny VW, I-42.

Ronaretsom, A. 1. (1980) The structure and organisation

of an eelgrass fish fauna, Oecologia 47, 76-82,

Sciprone, M. Ro & Fresi, E (1984) Disteybunen of

aniphipod crustaceans in Sysdanie-oceenica (L.) Delile

fohar suatum. International workshop Posidome

eceanica beds. Boudouresque, C, F., Jeudy de Grissad,

A,, and Olivier L (Eds) G43 Pasidorve, Fr. 1, 219-329.

SHEPHERD, §. A. (1983) Benthic communities of upper

Speneer Gulf, South Australia. Traws R. Soe. 8. Ause,

107, 49-85.

—— MecCimy, A J, Brits, B. A, NEVERAUSKAS,

V,, STEFFENSEN, D. A, & West, R. (1988) Decline of

seagrasses Cly, 12 fa WD. Larkum, AL. McComb

40S. A. Shepherd (Fils) “Seagrasses”: (Elsevier, | oneton},

& Spree, R. C. (1976) Substrate, sediments and

subtidal ecology of Gull St Vincent and Investigator

Strait, fn C. Ro Twidale, M, J. Tyler & 6. PB, Webb (Kas)

‘Natural History of the Adelaide Region’. IR. Sue.

S, Aust. Adelaide)

Stoncr. A. W. (1982) The influence of benthic

macrophytes Gn the foraging hehaviour of pinfish,

Lopodan rhomboldes (Linnaeus), 0 Exp, Mar Biol,

eal, 58, 271-284.

41982) Distributional eculowy of aniphipods and

Tanaldaceans associame with three seagrass specics. 2

Crustacean Brot 3 505-518.

THOMAS, RE. & Ctarku, 5. M-. (PUNK) Sedimeontolapy

and marpholopy of clasine Seagrass beds in bloldfas:

Bay, South Ausualisc ¥ locality of high wave enerzy for

species of the “Pusidania eusinulis” camples, Herter,

Coastal and Saelf Sei.

Vinssitin, Ry W, (1987) Seserasy wssociuted

inverrebrare commiuuitics of the suutheasiern UESAL a

review. Hlorida Afurie Research Publications No,

42 209 pp.

& Howard, RR. (19972) The motile epifauna of

marine macrophytes Hi the Lian River lagoon, Morida,

1, Comparisons amuyrig three species of seagrasses fom

adjacent beds, Mul, Mar Nel, #1, 1-12

& —— (1987b) The motile epifauna of marine

inacrnphyies in the (neian River lagoon, Flurida, I

Comparisons between drift algae and three species ol

soaprasses. Bull, Mar. Sci. 44. 13 26.

- NFISON, WG, Lewis, BG, HT, & Tlowatb, RK,

(1984) Latiludinl pallerms in seagrass enifauna: bo

108 Vv, N. SERGEEV, S. M. CLARKE & S. A. SHEPHERD

patterns exist and can they be explained? Estuaries 7,

310-330.

Watson, G, F,, ROBERTSON, A. I, & LITTLEJOHN, M. J.

(1984) Invertebrate macrobenthos of the seagrass

communities in Western Port, Victoria. Aquatic Botany

18, 175-197.

Womers.ry, H. B.S. (1984) “The marine benthic flora

of southern Australia Part 1”. (S.A. Govt. Printer,

Adelaide).

ZIMMERMAN, R., GIBSON, R. & HARRINGTON, J. (1979)

Herbivory and detritivory among gammaridean

amphipods from a Florida seagrass communily. Mar.

Biol. 54, 41-47.

A NEW SPECIES OF URACANTHUS (COLEOPTERA: CERAMBYCIDAE):

A PEST ON ORNAMENTAL CYPRESSES IN THE ADELAIDE REGION

BY S. A. RONDONUWU*f & A. D. AUSTIN*

Summary

A new species of cerambycid beetle from South Australia is described, based on both sexes of the

adult and all immature stages. Uracanthus cupressianus sp. nov. causes damage to cypresses,

Cupressus spp., planted as ornamental trees in parks and gardens around Adelaide. Notes on

Uracanthus are provided, and the relationships and biology of U. cupressianus sp. nov. are

discussed.

KEY WORDS: Coleoptera, Cerambycidae, Uracanthus cupressianus sp. nov., Cupressus spp.

A NEW SPECIES OF URACANTHUS (COLEOPTERA; CERAMBYCIDAE):

A PEST ON ORNAMENTAL CYPRESSES IN THE ADELAIDE REGION

by S. A. RONDONL WU"? & A. D. AUSTIN

Summary

Rompoantiwt, S.A. & Austin, ALD. (1988) A new species oF Cracanthuy (Coleoptera: Curambycidae):

a pest on ornamental eypresses in the Adelaide Region Trans. R. Soe S. Aust, 112100), 109 117, 30 November,

1988.

A new species of cerambycid beelle tram South Australia ty described, based on both sexes of Ure adult

and all immature stages, Wracanthus cupressianus sp, DOV. causes damage to cypresses, Cupressus Spp.,

planicd as ornamental trees in parks and gardens around Adelaide. Notes oa Urocenddies are pravided.

und the relationships and biology of U, eupressignus sp. nov. are discussed,

Key Worns Onteoprem, Cerambyeidac, Uracanrius cupressianus sp. NOV, Cupressus spp,

introduction

(n Australia the Family Cerambycidae is

represented by almost 1000 described species

(McKeown 1947), many Of which have been

recorded as causing damage to native (rees grown

for umber, wind-breaks or as ornamentals.

However, the taxonomy of the amily inthis country

has received virtually no attention in the last 30

years, even though the group is of significant

importance to [he ecalogy of trees and shrubs in

tiatural habitats and in commercial situations

(Linsley 1959),

Recently one of us (SAR) completed an extensive

project on the biology and ecology of a spocies of

Urocanthus which causes subsiantial damage to

ornamental cypresses, particularly Cupresviuy

sermpervirens L. (Cupressaceae) im the Adelaide

region. The members of this Australian genus were

described prior to 1950 and are dealt with in the

works of Lea (1916, 1917), McKeown (1938, 1940,

1942, 1947, 1948) and Dulfy (1963), The only key

tu speeivs is that presented in Lea (1916), which

covers 22 af the 37 known species. In this work our

species runs to either U. acutus Blackburn or

discicollis Lea, but is quite different from these

species. in a number of characters (see below). To

ensure that we had an undescribed species. we

borrowed all available holorypes, and examined rhe

Urecenthus holdings in the South Australian

Museum, Australian National Insect Collection and

the Waile Institule Insect Collection (see Table 1).

Our comparisons. using his malerial showed that

the species we had reared from branches of

seatpervirens im the Adelaide region was

substantially different in many important characters

+ Depariment of Entomology, Waite Agricultural

Research Institute, University of Adelaide, Glen Osmond,

S. Aust, 3064,

Present Address: Vavultay Pectain, Universitas Sam

Ratulinegl, Manodo, Sulawesi Utara, Indonesia,

fo wll other species and, accordingly, should be

considered as new.

In this paper we describe the species, discuss its

intrageneric relationships, and provide brief noles

on its biology. A detailed aceount of the ecology,

behaviour and interaction with the main host tree

will be presented elsewhere. Although we examined

other species tn the genus (Table 1), we cannot

provide a comprehensive kev because of unresolved

intraspecific variability i some taxa. However, we

indicate where these problems lie and whal

characters may prove useful in resatving them.

Methods

Larval stages were obtained from infested twigs

of C. sempervirens collected from Adelaide suburbs

during |986, They were either fixed and preserved

in 80% aleohol or reared through to adults in the

Jahoratory, Male genitalia and cuticular structures

from larvae were dissected out, soaked in 10% KOH

(4-6 lirs), placed in 10% acetic acid (15 mins,

dehydrated, and either permanently mounted on

slides in Berlese's Muid or temporarily mounted 10

glycerol, Adul| reproductive systems were drown

from freshly killed specimens dissected under

Ringer's solution. Descriptions of the larval stages

were compiled rom (reshly killed specimens

examined under 80% alcohol, except for sculpturing

and pilosity characters which were examined by

firstly drying specimens on filler paper,

The morphological terms used follow Duffy

(1953, 1997, 1960, 1963}, Torre-Bueno (1962), Eady

(1968) and Harris (1979). Abbreviations for

Institutions are: ANIC, Australian National Insect

Collection, CSIRO, Canberra; AM, Australian

Museum, Sydney; BMNH, British Museum

(Natural History), London; MV, Museum of

Victoria, Melbourne; NRS. Natural History

Museum. Stockholm: SAM, South Australian

Museum, Adelaide; HMO, Hope Museum, Oxford;

Wh S A. RONDONUWU & AO. AUSTIN

WAM, Western Australian Museum, Perth; WARI,

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide.

Genus Uracanthus Hope

A complete biblicgraphy to the venus is provided

by MeKeown (1947).

Comments

The Australian Uracanthini is in urgent need of

revisiom There are-seven genera, none of which is

well characterized! Ihe most recent works by Lea,

McKeown only provide descriptions of new species,

A key to some genera Is given by Les (1916) aad

a more estensive generic key is presented by

Rondenuwu (988'). Urecantius: is closest co

Seolecobrathus Hope, differing omy in the latter

having 12-segmented antennae, segments I] and 12

fully articulated, and the distal nine segments

dentale or serrate along one side. In Uracanthus the

antennae are Il-sepmented. Scgment 1 is

sumetines divided bya suture bul the Cwo parts are

never articulated, and the distal nine segments are

cylindrical or subcylindrical.

We found a number of characters to be more

variable thin indicated in Lea’s and McKeown’s

work, undoubtedly because they based thelr species’

descriptions on yery few specimens. Shape of elytral

upices, surlace sculpturing, pilosity and body size

varied im many species and, although these

characters will romain important in delimiting

snecies, their range of variation will need to be

documented in any future revisianary work,

Characters we fund useful at the-specics level were

the structure of the male genitalia, che proximity

of the eyes on che ventral head and the shape and

length of the antennae, Such characters may help

resolve the problem surrounding the U, trianyzularis

Hope complex, Which meludes three varieties (Var

A, Band C) designated by Lea (19146) on the basis

of differences in pilosity.

For nearly all known species of Uracurnthus only

descriptions of the adult stage are given, usually of

the male, Duffy (1963) is the only author wha hiss

provided any information on immature stages, and

then only for the final instar larva of three species,

viz. CC trianguders, Lo oryprepheges Ollifh and t

pallens Hope. We present here a description of all

hfe-history stages for the new species and have used

Tulty (19593, 1957, 1960, 1963) ay a guide in trying

to limit the destriplidn of non-adult stages ro

characters of specific value only,

'Rondonuwu, S. A. (1988) “Biulogy and Evology of

Cypress Twit Boren Cracanthus enpressiana sp.o

ft cranbyowacy™ Unpublished Phd Vhesis, Lutiversiry

al Adetatie.

Uracanihus cupressianus sp. nov.

FIGS 1-20

Holotype: o, SAM, Glenelg, South Australia,

peated ex Cupressus sempervirens, 5.x.1986, &

Rondonuwu, Paratypes: adults - 27 or, 26 2,

genitalia of 5 cr in glycerine capsules, same data

as holotype except for same with different collecting

dates; 30,3 9, SAM; 21 o, 20 9,5 & genitalia

preparations, WARI; 3 o. 3 9, ANIC.

Adult Male

Size (holotype), Length 13.8 mm, width across

anterior part of elytra 3.1 mm (also see Table 2).

Colour, Generally reddish brown; head, proximal

antennal segments, pronotum and femora usually

darker than elytra; almost entire body covered with

dense even pilosity of ahort hairs giving golden

sheen appearance over surface,

Head, Lower face (fron lower eye (0 lip of closed

mandibles) about a8 long, as wide, lateral margins

converging ventrally only slightly; clypeus (lat or

slightly convex, sparsely punctate, sparsely pilose,

dorsal margin triangular, bounded hy deep sutures;

medial impressed line deep and glabrous, excending

posteriorly to point just behind cyes: antennal

sockets raised well above surface of fruns on high

cone-like protuberances Which re moderately

narrow al apex; Trans and dorsal parts of genae

Coarsely punctate but punctures mostly hidden by

pilosity; lateral and ventral part of head mostly

glabrous; lateral part sparsely punctate, ventral

headpart with very coarse fransverse striae; eves

coursely facetied, broadly scparated in ventral

aspect by about half width of head (measured

weross posterior margin); antennae (Fig. 1) shorter

Ihan. body. tl-segmenred, sometimes segment LI

divided by feeble suture (ie, appearing

2-seginented}, segments 3-11 extremely narrow. and

elongate, evenly cylindrical, dpex of segments 5-10

produced only slightly on outer side:

Thorax, Pronotum (Fig. 9) longer than width actoss

posterior margin (5.(:4.3), pesterior margin wider

than anterior margin (4,3;3.3) so that in dorsal view

lateral margins converge anteridrly; lateral

pronotum with broadly pointed hump just posieciar

to midline: pronotum with two very bread

longitudinal bands of dense pilosity dorsally and

nartower piluse band above coxae, dorsomedial

longitudinal line narrow to moderately broad and

glabrous, lateral surface mostly glabrous, ventral

surface sparsely and evenly pilose; dorsal and lateral

part of pronotum with upeven transverse strizose-

punctate sculpturing, mostly hidden by pilosity;

NEW SPECIES OF URACANTHUS

TABLE 1 Species of Uracanthus known front Australia (*

holotype examined; x = holotype missing; - = apecies

known from South Australia)

Species

Uracanthus acutus Blackburn (*)

U albatus Lea (*)

UC. ater Lea (*)

U. bivitta Newman (*, +)

CL corrugicollis Lea (*,+)

U. er¥yptophagus OM. (*)

Ul, cupressianus sp.nov, (*, +)

U. dentigpicalis McKeown (*)

U discicallis Lea (*,+)

U. dubius Lea (*,4)

CU froggat{i Blackburn (*)

tl fuscocinereus White (*)

U. fuscustrialus McKeown (*)

UL fuycus Lea (*,+)

U gigas Lea (x)

| glubrilineatus Lea

inermis Aurivillius (*)

| jsignis Lea (*)

! lateroulbus Lea (*)

I leai McKeown (*)

longicornis Lea (*)

loranthi Lea (*)

maleficus Lea (*)

| marginellus Hape (*,+)

tninatus Pascae (*)

L multilineatus McKeown (*)

| pallens Hope (*)

paratlelus Lea (*)

parvus Lea (*)

I pertenuis Lea (*,+)

revalis McKeown {*)

| simulans Pascoe (*,+)

| strigosus Pascoe (*—-})

suturilis Lea

l triangularis Hope

! triungularts var. A Lea (*)

triangularis var. B Lea (*+)

U, triangularis var. C Lea (*,+)

| ropicus Lea (*)

ventralis lea (*)

MAGGS eaeeeeesecearaeanse

Holotype & Depositories of other

depasitory material examined

o RMNH SAM, ANIC, WARI

co SAM WARI, SAM

co SAM SAM, ANIC

> BMNH SAM, ANIC, WARI

co SAM SAM, ANIC

2 AM SAM, ANIC

cr SAM ANIC, WARI

cr WAM =—

o SAM SAM, ANIC, WART

o SAM SAM, ANIC

co BMNH SAM, ANIC

2 BMNH WAR, ANIC

co WAM ANIC

wy SAM SAM, ANIC

cr BMNH SAM, ANIC

ao SAM SAM

2 NRS =

9 SAM SAM, ANIC

co SAM SAM, ANIC

o SAM SAM

cof SAM SAM

o MV SAM, ANIC

o SAM SAM, ANIC

o¢ HMO SAM, ANIC

2 BMNH —

ao WAM ANIC

co HMO SAM, ANIC

ao My ANIC

co SAM ANIC

o SAM SAM, ANIC

a AM ANIC

oy BMNH SAM, ANIC

ot BMNH SAM, ANIC

o SAM SAM, ANIC

2 HMO SAM, ANIC, WARI

o> SAM SAM, ANIC

or SAM SAM, ANIC

9 SAM SAM, ANIC

co SAM SAM, ANIC

o SAM SAM, ANIC

dorsal part of pronotum with one pair (sometimes

two pairs) of small shallow glabrous depressions,

dorsomedial! longitudinal line slightly depressed;

scutelum pointed posteriorly, smooth, virtually

glabrous.

Flytra. Much wider than prothorax measured across

anterior margin, width decreasing posteriorly;

apices hroadly pointed either symmetrically or

asymmetrically (Figs 4, 5); anterior cornets

glabrous; surface of cach elytron with four feeble

raised longitudinal fines (Fig. 1), punctate all over

but punctures partly hidden by dense even pilosity,

Legs, Moderately stout; femora expanded in distal

two-thirds, widest approximately one-third from

distal end, lateral surfaces transversely strigose-

punctate and almost without pilosity; tibiae slightly

bowed, hind tibiae moreso than fore and mid tibiae;

first segment Of hind tarsus 1,54-1.56 times longer

than second; first segment of fore and mic tarsi 1.5

times or less longer than second.

Abdomen, Ventral surface with uniform pilosity,

moderately dense; S7 broadly truncate posteriorly,

sometimes slightly emarginate medially; T7 broadly

rounded posteriorly and slightly emarginate

medially; T8 (if visible) much narrower than T7 and

deeply cmarginate medially (Fig. 4).

Genitalia and Reproductive System. Genitalia (Fig.

7) with lateral lobes of tegmen cylindrical, apices

rounded with several short and several long setae:

basal piece thin and folded but becoming flat and

wider at tip; median lobe parallel-sided, becoming

narrower at apex; lateral margin af median orifice

112 S. A. RONDONUWI & A. O. AUSTIN

2° >

FIGS 1-7. Uracanthus cupressianus sp. nov, 1, adult male paraiype, 2 and 3, adult female, paratypes, variation in

the apices of the elytra; 4 and 5, adult male, paralynes, variation in the apices of the elytra; 6, adult male, paratype,

distal segments of the abdomen, ventral view; 7, adult male genitalia (aedeagus), paralype. Seales: Pig. 1 — 2 mri

Figs 2-6 — 0.8mm; Fig. 7 — 250 jum. bs

t - tegmen,

narrowed apically, rounded, slightly notched

niedially; dorsal lobe as wide as ventral lobe; basal

struls short and (truncate anteriorly; internal sac

with a knot behind aedeagus; arrangement of

glands and ducts as in Fig. 8.

Adult Femate

As for male except ax follows:

Size. (see Table 2); pranotum slightly broader in

posterior half, with broader more diffuse glabrous

basal strut; 11 = lateral lobe; ml = medial iohe; mo = medial orifice:

medial longitudinal line; elytra slightly more

parallel-sided, apices cither symmetrical or

asynimetrical (Figs 2, 3); terminal seaments of

abdomen with long golden hairs, T& retracted into

the genital chamber: ovipositor very short, beuring

pair of styli at distal edge; styli bearing 2-4 long

fine hairs interspersed with short tactile hairs;

coxites medially and dorsolaterally bearing 6-8 long

hairs interspersed with short (actile hairs; structure

of distal reproductive system as in Fig. 10.

NEW SPECIES OF URACANTHUS U3

FIGS 8-14. Uracanthus cupressianus sp. nov. 8, adult male reproductive system: 9, adult male, paratype, dorsal

pronotum, 10, adulr female, ovipositor and distal portion of the reproductive system. showing an egg in the common

oviduct; 11, larval insiar 1, paratype. anteona; 12, larvalinstar VII, paratype, antennas 13, larvalinstar VIL, paratype,

abdominal spiracle; 14, larval instar VU, paratype, pronorm, Seales: Figs 8 and 10 - 0.5 mm; Fix. 9 = L mim;

Fig. }L = 25 um: Fig. 12 — 50pm; Fig, 13 - 250 pm; Fig, 14 = 0S mm. ad = aedeagus; ag = accessory glind;

be bursa copulatrix; c - coxite; eo = common oviduct; ed = ejaculater duct; sp = spermatheea; st — stylus;

te = teslis; 4 = Supplementary process.

(nineture Stages

Hee: Length $5 mm width 0,6 mm; ovoid with one

end slightly tapering and bearing a group of

spicules, opposite end strongly tapering, truncate,

with spicules that are roundly inclined; chorion light

to dark grey and coarsely reticulate.

Larval Inster I: Length (Table 2); antennae hyaline,

segment 3 with | distal peg and larger

supplementary process (Fig. 11); mandibles and

pronotum not strongly sclerotized, spiracles very

small; abdominal segment 10 without caudal

process.and bearing few fine hyaline setae (Fig. 20).

ila

S.A. RONDONUWU & A. O AUSTIN

TABLE 2. Size of various life-history stages of Uracanthus cupressianus sp, nov, For stages LI to Pupa the width

Was meéasired across the pranotuim and for adults if was measured across (he widest part of the elytra.

STAGE LENGTH (mm)

7 $.D, RANGE

LI! 2.46 0.24 7.1-2.6

LIT 3.36 DSS 2.2-3,8

at 5,40 1.66 4.3-3.6

LIV 10.49 1.92 7.8 05.2

LV 13.74 1.44 10.3-16,0

IVI W8,73 2.10 15,5-22.2

LVIt 23.16 2 15.0. 31.0

Prepupa 13.44 4.7; 12.6-20,0

Pupa 16,83 1.44 13.5-19.0

Adult o 14.86 0.93 12.5-16.

Adult 9 17.65 1.42 14.4-19,6

Larval Instars 1-1¥; Length (Table 2); similar to

instar 1 but differing in being progressively larger

and more sclerotized and developing 3 small caudal

tubercles on segment 10 (Fig. 19) which

progressively become more sclerotized.

Larval Instars V and VT Length (Table 2); generally

similar (o instar VIT but smaller and with some of

the morphological characters described tor instar

VIL being difficult to see, particularly for instar V.

“Larval Instar VIT: Size (see Table 2); body elungate

and subcylindrical, yellow to white in colour;

pranotum with brown and pink patches; mouth

bright red-brown; mandibles, dark red-brown.

Head. Virtually paraliel-sided; epistoma indistinct,

with four epistamal setae; frons coarsely punctate,

weakly selerotized, bearing about 12. setae: median

suture well defined, frontal suture indistinct;

hypostoma strigate, bearing $ long sctac anteriorly

near gular Sulures; gular sutures raised and curved;

gular region raised, hairless and weakly sclerotized;

antennal segments strongly sclerotized, segments 2

antl 3 bearing pegs, segment 3 with larger

Supplementary process (Fig. 12); elypeus

inembranous, trapezoidal, narrow, hairless; labrum

Greular and fringed anteriorly with long thick setae;

mandibles short and stout, upper corner turned

inwards and pointed, inner surface concave, outer

surface with two long setac basally (Fig, 17),

Prothorax: Pronotum oval (Fig. 14), sometimes

subrectangular, only slightly wider than posterior

segments if at all, well sclerotized, posterarnedial

plate finely longitudinally striate with associated

Pigmented punctures, sparsely sctosc or glabrous,

anterior half and fateral margins with long setae;

prosternum sparsely selose, coarsely punctate,

lightly scterotized; eusternum semicircular, sparsely

WIDTH (mm)

3.D,

x RANGE ni

v.61 0.03 0.5-0.7 2fj

0.66 (),22 0.6-0.8 1)

0.89 0,26 07-12 25

1.52 0.28 1,2-3.2 2s

1.98 0.16 }.8-2.5 24

2.44 0.27 24-40) 25

3.27 42 27-44 25

3.27 0,56 2.5-3.9 25

2.42 0.16 2.2-2.7 15

2.89 6.23 2,5-1.1 28

3.54 044 2.7-4.7 26

setose, fincly punctate, sternellum very sparsely

sctose, with 6 10 fine setae,

Meso- and Metathorax: Mesoterguim bearing x-

shaped suture: metatergum with irregular suture:

both these tergiles with long reddish-brown setae

laterally; mesostcrnum and metasternum bearing

irregular Lransverse furraw,

Legs: Small; coxa strongly transverse; trochanter

narrower with one long seta; femur as wide as

trochynier, with three setae; tibiotarsus browd but

narrower and longer than femur, with 3-4 sctac;

unguiculus not particularly clongile, wboul as long

as libiotarsus (Pig, 18),

Abdomen; Virst two dorsal ampullae bearing 4-5

uansverse impressions delimited by one pair of

lateral furrows and a median longitudinal furrow,

remaining ampullac with indistinct tranyerse

impression; first four ampullue densely setose

lalerally, rernaining (hree very sparsely setose; first

five ventral ampullac with just one tranverse

impression, last two ampullae with 2-3 Impressions;

first four epipleura not protuberant, bearing

roundish pleural dise, Sth-7th epipleura slightly

protuberant, each with single thick long seta ane

a fow fine setac; 8th cpipleuron not proruberant,

with small round pleural disc; 91h epipleuron

rounded posteriorly with numerous long thick

reddish-brows) selae; (erminal segment (segment 10)

usually bearing three short well sclerotized processes

above anus, cach process bearing a few short setae

(Figs. 15, 16), sometimes: with additional smaller

lateral processes, or with main lateral processes

wanting so only one large niedial process is presents

spiracles complex (Vig. 11), well sclerotized,

red-brown,

NEW SPECIES OF URACANTHUS 15

FIGS 15-20. Uracenthus cupressianus sp. nov. 15, larval instar VII, paratype, distal segments of the abdomen, lateral

view; (6, larval instar VIT, paratype, distal segments of the abdomen, posteroventral view; 17, Jarval instar VII,

paratype, mandible; 18, larval instar VII, paratype, metathoracic leg; 19, larval instar Il, paratype, distal segments

of the abdomen, posteroventral view: 20, larval instar 1, paratype, distal segments of (he abdomen, posteroventral

view. Scales: Figs 15 and 16 = 0,5 mm; Fig 17 = 200m; Figs 18-20 = 100 pm (same seale for Figs 19 and 20).

Sexual dimorphism. Dissected male instar VIT

larvae differ from females by having two prominent

reddish-yellow testicular follicles lovated

ventrolaterally in abdominal segment 5. They can

also be distinguished by having; stouter and larger

mouth parts, The ovaries in the females are hard

to distinguish but can sometimes be seen as thread-~

like diffuse structures embedded in fat bodies.

Lit § A. RONDONUWL & A. O. AUSTIN

Prepupa; There is a progressive contraction of the

body diring the prepupal period, which is initiated

sno dfler farval instar VII has stopped feeding. The

segmentation is very distinctive due to deep inter-

segmental infolds, which develop asa result of this

contraction, The body colour changes to dull white

or yellow, it becomes shorter (see Table 2), the

thorax becomes thicker and the head turns ventrally.

Numerous fat bodies are visible through the sem-

Iransparent body wall.

Pupa Size (Table 2); morphology generally the

sume as that described. for other Cerambyeinue

(Duffy 1953); apparently with few unique

distinguishing characteristics.

Other material examined: Iramatuce stages - large

number of eggs. larval instars I-VI and pupae,

suine dala as adult paratypes, stored in 70%

alcohol, WARI.

Comments

Phe adult of Unarean/ias eupressiaius is distingt

(rom all described congeners. ln general appearance

iV is most similar to U. acutus but differs from this

species in Lhe pronotum being more tansverscly

stngate and pilose dorsally, the apices of elytea

being less aculely pointed, and the elytra having

four feeble longitudinal lines. (4 acutus has the

pronotum almost hairless and only weakly

transversely strigate, the apices of the elytra acutely

Spinose, and the surface of elytra coarsely: punctate

and lacking longitudinal tines.

U. cupressianus also. bears a superticial

resemblance tu U. fongicarnmis Lea, U loranthi Lea

ald U, discicolis Lea, but these Species differ in

several important characters, Uf longicorsis has the

eyes almost touching ventrally, the pronotum very

strongly transversely striate and unevenly pilese,

the antennae more robust and longer than the body,

and thie apices of the clytva narrowly rounded with

an inner acute Spine, (. forenthi has the pronojum

irregularly transversely strigate-nodulate, with four

longitudinal pilose bands ctorsally, and che apices

of the elytra broadly and diagonally truncate. U.

discivollis has the surfave of the pronotum

conipletely smooth with much longer pilosity, the

aintennae longer than the body, and the elytra with

dense inner longitudinal bands of dense long

pilusity, but lacking longitudinal raised fines.

Ol the three species of L/racanshus tor which the

final instar larva is known (Duffy 1963), U

clpressianys. is most similar to U. pallens,

pairticalarly in the shape and arrangement of the

posterior abdominal processes. These species differ,

however, inthe shape and pilosity af the pronotum,

While the orher ovo species, &. iriangularis and U.

eryiophagous, differ from Lt cuvpressienus in havin

smaller muyltilobed posterior abdominal processes,

Biulogy

Ui cupressianus causes substantial damage to

branches of introduced cypresses, Cupressus spp.,

parliculiarly €, sermpervirens, which are planted as

ornamental trees in parks and wardens throughout

the Adelaide region and in South Australian coutiry

towns, This insect also may be responsible for the

$porache daiage seen On eypresses td Victoria and

New South Wales, The larval stages tunnel up and

duwn briagiches, quickly turning then brown and

killing them. In some Adelaide suburbs up to 70%

of all trees are damaged by the feeding activity of

the larvae. The native host trees of UL. cupressianas

are thoughe to be Cel/itris spp. (Cupressaceae),

Adult beetles crenge in spring, mate and females

lay eggs soon alter at night on Lhe bark of trees,

The first instar Larvae burrew into the sapwood and

begin leeding and tunnelling. The larvae continue

to grow and moult, with each branch usually

accommodating only one larva. Small holes to the

outside are occasionally produced to allow for the

ejection of frass and possibly for the aeration of

tunnels, Final instar larvae construct 4 chamber at

onc end of the main tinnel where pupation occuts.

The lile cycle of most individuals is biennial and

includes a larval-pupal diapuuse, although some

individuals take as little as one year to complete

theit development. The larvx (UI-V) of &

cupressignus is parasitized by a bracanid wasp

(Helcottinge: Cenucvelini, genus and species indet_)

and is preyed upon by a clerid beetle (recorded only

in the larval stage), but these species never cause

much mortality, The physiological condition of the

host tree is probably a more impertant factor an

regulating population numbers, a phenomenon

whivh will be discussed in delail by ane of us (SAB)

at a jater date,

Acknowledgments

We thank Dr brie Marthews (SAM), Dr Terry

Houston (WAM), Mr Ken Walker (MV). Mt Geoll

Holloway ¢AM), Mr Chris O"loole (TIM@), Mr Les

Jessop (AMINE) and Dr Per Lindskog {NRS) for

loan of type material; Mr Paul Dangerfield for

drawing the figures, and Drs Roger | ssughtin areal

deny Ganloer for reading dralts of the manuscript,

This work was supported by a Colombe Man Award

from the Australian Goverment io SAR,

NEW SPECIES OF URACANTHUS 117

References

Durry, E. A. I. (1953) “A Monograph of the Immature

Stages of British and Imported Timber Beetles

(Cerambycidae)”. (British Museum (Natural History),

London).

—— (1957) “A Monograph of the Immature Stages of

African Timber Beetles (Cerambycidae)”. (British

Museum (Natural History), London).

——— (1960) “A Monograph of the Immature Stages of

Neotropical Timber Beetles (Cerambycidae)”. (British

Muscum (Natural History), London).

(1963) “A Monograph of the Immature Stages of

Australasian Timber Beetles (Cerambycidae)”. (British

Museum (Natural History), London),

Eany, R. D. (1968) Some illustrations of microseulpture

in the Hymenoptera. Proc. R. ent. Soc. Lond. (A) 43,

66-72.

Harris, R. A. (1979) A glossary of surface sculpturing.

Calif, Dep. Food Agric. Bur. Ent. Occas. Papers. 28,

I-31,

Lea, A. M. (1916) Notes on some miscellaneous

Coleoptera, with descriptions of new species. Part I.

Trans. R, Soc, S. Aust. 40, 272-436.

(1917) Descriptions of new species of Coleoptera.

Part XII. Prac. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 41 (1916), 720-745,

Linsey, E, G. (1959) Ecology of Cerambycidae. Arn.

Rey. Ent. 4, 99-138.

McKeown, K. C. (1938) Notes on Australian

Cerambycidae IV. Rec, Aust. Mus, 20, 200-216.

—— (1940) Notes on Australian Cerambycidae V. (hited.

20, 293-312.

(1942) Australian Cerambycidae, VI. Descriptions af

new species mostly from Queensland. Jbid. 21, 81-105.

(1947) Catalogue of the Cerambycidae (Coleoptera)

of Australia. Mem, Aust. Mus. 10, 1-190.

(1948) Australian Cerambycidae VIII, Notes on a

collection from the Western Australian Museum, with

descriptions of new species. Rec. Aust. Mus. 22, 49-63.

Torre-Bueno, J. R. De La (1978) “A Glossary of

pntonmalogy”. (New York Entomological Society, New

York).

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA

BY W. KOSTE®*, R. J. SHIEL” & L. W. TAN**

Summary

One hundred Tasmanian aquatic habitats were surveyed for Rotifera in spring 1987. Of 168 taxa

identified, 59 were first records for Tasmania, 21 new to Australia and four (Trichotria buchneri sp.

nov., 7. pseudocurta sp. nov., Lecane herzigi sp. nov. and Notommata tyieri sp. nov.) new to

science. New taxa are described and figured, several of the new records also are figured, and brief

ecological information is given.

KEY WORDS: Rotifera, new species, new records, Tasmania, zoogeography.

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA

by W. Koste*, R. J, SHEL + & L. W. TAN * +

Summary

Koste, W,, Swen, R. Jy & Tan, L. W. (1988) New rotifers (Rotifera) from Tasmania. Trans. ®. Soe. 5,

Aust. 112, 119-131, 30 November, 1988.

One hundred Tasmanian aquatic habitats were surveyed for Rotifera in spring 1987, OF 168 taxa identified,

59 Were first records for Tasmania, 21 new lo Australia and four (Trichoiria buchneri sp. novi, T. pseudocurta

sp. nov., Lecane herzigi sp. nov. and Norommara tyleri sp. nov.) new to science, New laxa are described

and figured, several of the new records also are (figured, and brief ecological information is given.

Kry Worps; Rotifera, new species, new records, Tasmania, zoogeography.

Introduction

In our first surveys of Tasmanian waters for

rotifers (Koste & Shiel 1986), the predominantly

humic, acid waters examined contained species as-

semblages more closely related to those of tropical

northern Australia than to the southern fauna (Shiel

& Koste 1986), With a small but distinctive endemic

component (Koste & Shiel 1987a),

To investigate the apparent abundance of

“pantropical” taxa at 42-43°S, and to add to our

data on rotifer species diversity and seasonality, a

further survey was made in Sept,-Oct. 1987, Most

of the LOO habitats visited in the earlier surveys were

resampled, and several acid dune lakes on the west

coast were included.

This paper reports on the results of the 1987

survey, in particular the Rotifera new to Australia,

with relevant ecological details. Full distribution and

ecological data are included by family in a

continuing revision of the Australian Rotifera (eg.

Koste & Shiel 1987b), Microfauna other than

Rotifera will be reported elsewhere on completion

of the sampling surveys.

Materials and Methods

Habitats sampled were as reported earlier (Koste

& Shiel 1986), with the addition of six sites in the

dune lake area north of Strahan on the west coast

(Fig. 1). The only change to sampling methods

reported previously was the use of a 13 | perspex

trap for quantitative collections from some sites.

In the laboratory, subsamples were scanned

sequentially in a perspex counting tray using a Zeiss

SV-8 stereo microscope, The first 300-400 individual

Organisms encountered were identified and scored,

and the remainder of the tray checked lor additional

species. A Zeiss Research compound microscope

* Ludwig-Brill-Strasse 5, Quakenbriick, D-4570, Federal

Republic of Germany.

+ Murray-Darling Freshwater Research Centre, P.O. Box

21, Albury, N.SW. 2640.

++ Westerh Mining Corporation, c/ CSIRO Division

of Soils, Glen Osthond, S. Aust. 5064.

was used to identily selected mounted individuals

(or trophi preparations after clearing with sodium

hypochlorite), and photomicrographs taken.

Beatine

1g7 ead Garewe

acting, DOCS

S GS +)06

Lint Bellinger

Fig. |. Additional sampling sites in 1987 survey (see Roste

& Shiel (1986) for survey siles). Inset: sites referred to

in text (a- L. Gareia sites; b. L. Pedder; c, Arthur's

Lake.

Selected specimens were prepared for scanning

electron microscopy (SEM) according to Amsellem

& Clement (1979), and photographed at various

magnifications in a Phillips SEM 505. Statistical

methods used are described in Hellawell (1978).

Results

Ranges of water quality recorded were as follows:

water temperature 4.0-24.0°C; pH 3,1-8.5;

conductivity (Kyg) 9.0-39,100 1S em!!; turbidity

0,5-160 Hach nephelometric turbidity units (NTU).

As in the earlier surveys, most siles sampled

had dark, tea-coloured humic waters (78% < pH

7.0) and were low in electrolytes (44% < 100, 46%

100-1000, 10% > 1000 nS em~'), With the

120 W. KOSTE, RK. J, SHIEL & L. W, TAN

exception of one highly turbid stock dam near

Karanja (Strathgordon road), turbidities were very

low (<10 NTU with the majority <1,0),

One hundred and sixty-eight rotifer species were

identified from the 1987 sample series; 59 of these

are new records for Tasmania (Table |), bringing to

249 |he known Tasmanian taxa; 2] are new to

Australia (total now 644), including four new taxa

described here.

Systematics

Notholca squamula (Miller)

FIG. 2

Brachianus squamula Miller, (786, p, 334, Vig, 47:4-7.

The typical form af this halophile occurs in

suuthern Victoria and Tasmania (Koste & Shiel

1987b). A population (sample 1996) differing from

the f typ, in size and antenor lorica morphology

was collected [rom Boggy Creek, near St Helens.

Measurements; Lorica (length » width) 200% 144

pm: anterior median spines 33 ym; submedian

spines 18 yum; lateral spines 9-10 jam.

Ecology: 18°C, pH 8.5, Kg 13.94 mS cm-!,

turbidity 0.5 NTU, Shallow water, entry of ereek

inlo esiuary, approx. 175m from sea. Emergent

macrophytes. The Boggy Creek plankton Was

simple, dominated by nauplii of an unidentitied

cyclopoid copepod, With minor components a

calanoid, Gladioferens spinasus, and another

halophile rotifer, Colurella udriatica.

Vig. 2, Nothalea squumula Miller) trom St Helens.

Lorca, ventral, Seale bar 100 yam.

Remarks; The St Helens specimens exceed the

wlobal range of 120-190 «96-144 pm (Kaste 1978)

and are considerably larger than the 132100 jam

N, squamula recorded from westem Victoria. The

anteriar margin also is distinctive; whereas the

mainland form (and N, squamula elsewhere) has

lateral ovcipital spines approximately half the length

of the median spine pair, with much shorter

Submedian spines, the Boggy Creek form has

submedian spines exceeding the range of 8-12 xm

reported by Koste (1978), and the lateral spines are

much shorter, It is likely that these morphological

differences are an ecolypic response to estuarine

habit.

Subsamples of the St Helens material are lodged

with the Koste collection (FRG), the Shiel plankton

collection (MDFRC), and a representative series of

individuals mounted on a microslide (V,4104) with

the South Australian Museum (SAM),

Trichotria buchneri sp, nov.

FIGS 3-5

Material: \fi females in formalin, sample No, 2050,

Holotype: Loricalté temale on microslide, sample

2050, Coll, 02.%,87, Ri J. Shiel, SAM V.4106.

Paralypes: Date and place ol collection as for

holotype. ‘Two slides in the Collection Rotatoria,

Limn. Ecology, Senckenberg Museum,

Frankfurt/M. No, 7340 and 7341; one slide SAM

V.4A107; ane slide and one SEM stub Shiet Coll.

(MDFRC),

Type locality: Roadside poo! west of corner of Lake

Rd and Garcia Rd, Lake Garcia, Strahan (42°09'S,

145°19'E),

Descriplion: Rigid lorica (Fig. 5a) of nearly

triangular eross-secuion (Figs 3c, 5b); median keel

on dorsal plate, ending in long caudal spine (Figs

da, b; Sa, c); antenor dorsal margin with deep

rounded aperture (Pig. 5d) projecting laterally to

pointed, sinuate cusps (Figs 3b, 5d); ventral plate

domed medially, with large pastero-ventral

semicircular foot opening (Fig, 3d); anterior veritral

margin with curved aperture between two blurt

triangular projections (Figs 3d, 5d); foot twa

seginented, strongly loricate (Figs 3d, e); toes long,

rigid, with acute points; head with rectangular

plates (Fig. 3f) which form a pyramidal projection

in the contracted state (Figs 5a, b, d); dorsal plate

surface with long rows of minute denticles (Fig, Se);

fateral anterina on cuticular papilla; dorsal antenna

not visible in contracted state.

Measurements: Lorica length 160-|82 am; width to

115 pm; height to 84 wm; proximal foot segment 24

ym; distal foot segment 15 wm; toes 50 jam.

Ecology: From 0.75 m depth, apen water between

emergen! reeds, over organic silt on sand; dark

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA 121

Vig. 3. Trichotria buchneri sp. nov. A. dorsal; B. lateral; C. cross-section; D. foot and toe, lateral; E. ventral; P.

head, extended; G. ventral, head fully contracted.

. ;

Fig. 4. Trichotria buchneri sp. nov. Photomicrograph,

dorsal.

humic water. 17.0°C, pH 3.1, 80.6 «S cm!. The

most abundant plankter in this collection was a

calanoid, Culamoecia tasmanica (Smith), however

the rotifer assemblage accompanying 7. buchneri

was the most diverse yet recorded from Tasmania:

35 spp. in at least 20 genera, with Keratella procurva

(Thorpe) the most abundant.

Remarks: The new species apparently is related to

the T. fetractis group, however their cross section

is hexagonal (Fig. 6c), there are two keels, the foot

segments are strongly pustulated, with dorsal hooks

on the second, and the foot is three-segmented.

Paired hooks on the second segment of T- tetractis

caudata (Lucks, 1812) are shown in Fig. 6. The

reflexed caudal spine can be seen in Fig 6, which

also shows the more terminal position of the foot

groove, ventrally placed in the sp. noy.

Etymology: Dedicated to Professor Hans Buchner,

Zoological Institute, Seidlstrasse, University of

Munich, in recognition of his investigations of

heterogony in rotifers.

Trichotria pseudocurta sp. nov.

FIGS 7-8

Material: 3 \oricate females, sample No. 2024,

coll. 27.1x.87, R. J. Shiel.

Holotype: Designated by illustration (Fig. 9). All

specimens treated for trophi analysis. Trophi

preparation in Trichotria section, Koste Coll.

(FRG).

Type locality: L. Pedder, from Serpentine Dam boat

ramp (42°46'S,145°59'E) west of Strathgordon (Fig.

1).

Description: Lorica U-shaped in outline, both

surfaces punctate/stippled; short, acute lateral

122 W. KOSTE, R. J. SHIEL & L. W. TAN

Fig. 5. Trichotria buchneri sp. nov. Scanning-electron micrographs a. lorica, dorsal; b. lorica of a second individual,

lateral; c. anterior elevation of third individual; d. plates of contracted head of specimen in a; e. dorsal lorica

denticulation of same individual, magnified at right. Scale bars a-c 50 wm, d 10 wm, e 5 pm.

spines at anterior margin; dorsal plate with twin _ single keel before posterior margin; ventral plate

keels commencing on either side of median notch _ with twin ribs terminating at raised ridge at anterior

in anterior margin, running posteriorly to fuse to margin of oval foot opening; foot 3-segmented,

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA 123

Fig. 6. Tricholeria tetractis eaudata (Lucks). Dorsal,

lateral and cross-section, Redrawn from Wulfert (1967).

Scale bar 100 pm,

Fiz. 7. Trichotria pseudocurta sp. nov. a. dorsal; b.

ventral. Seale bar 50 um.

lacks spines on segments; toes with short claws.

Measurements; Lorica length 125 xm; width 74 pm;

toes (incl. claws) 36 nm,

Ecology: Collected from 1 m depth over gravel,

vicinity of emergent reeds; water dark brown,

humic, 21°C, pH 5.2, 32.6 pS em~!, 0.5 NTU.

Rotifers dominated the Lake Pedder plankton at

this site, with Keratella cochlearis (Gosse) and K.

australis (Berzins) most abundant of ten species

Fig. 8. Trichotria pseudocurta sp. noy. Photomicrograph,

dorsal.

identified. Microcrustacean plankters were

Calamoecia australis (Searle) and Bosmina

meridionalis Sars.

Remarks: This small species resembles a Volga River

species, 7. curta (Skorikov, 1914), which has a lorica

length of 80-110 am, toes 30-40 pm (Rudescu 1960),

however the latter lacks the frontal corner cusps and

has more angular lorica morphology.

Squatinella cf. levdigi (Zacharias)

FIG, 9

Stephanops leydigi Zacharias, 1886:255, Fig. 9:1, 2.

Squatinella levdigi (Zacharias) after Voigt (1957).

In sample 2050, from a small, humic roadside

pool near L. Garcia, north of Strahan (Pig. 1), were

several §, /eydigi resembling the f. /ongiseta

described by Pourriot (1971) from Europe. The

typical form is not known from Australasia.

Measurements: body 210-235 am; dorsal spine

270-378 pm; toe length to 37 um.

Ecology; ca. 0.75 m depth, dark, humic water over

silt. 17°C, pH 3.1, 80.6 wS cm~!, 0.5 NTU.

Remarks: \n view of the exclusion of “form” under

article 16 of the International Code of Zoological

Nomenclature (Ride ef af. 1985), and the

considerable variation within Squatinella (Koste

1988), this taxon must await more detailed

treatment. It is likely that specific status is

warranted,

124 W. KOSTE, R. J. SHIEL & L, W. TAN

Fig. 9, Squatinella cf. leydigi (Zacharias). a. lateral (an = anus; bu = buccal field; da = dorsal antenna; fd = foul gland;

fyl = foot segment; g = subcerebral ganglion; m = mouth; nucl ~ nucleii; oh = “ear"; rst = dorsal spine; sei = subitancous

exes z= Low);

b, dorsal (an = anus; au = eye; bl = bladder; ksch = head-shield; la = lateral antenna; ma = stomach; mdr = gastri¢

gland; mx = mastax; vi « vitellarium);

¢. trophi (f= fulcrum; ma =manubrium; ra = ramus; rz = ramus tooth; un = uncus);

d. trophi, lateral (ful = fulcrum; Iman = left manubrium; ra = ramus; unz = unci teeth);

e. trophi, ventral (ful = fulcrum; mus = musculature; ra= ramus; unr = unci ridge).

Lecane (Monostyla) subulata (Harring & Myers)

FIG. 10

Monostyla subulata Harring & Myers, 1926:410, Fig. 45:3,

Lecane (M.) subulata (Harring & Myers) after Voigt (1957).

Also in sample 2050 were two specimens of this

small acidobiont lecanid, known previously from

wet Sphagnum in Europe and North America. They

were within the size range given by Koste (1978:243).

Full description and ecology will appear in Koste

& Shiel (in press).

Measurements; Total length to 100 «am; lorica to 68

am long, 65 xm wide; toe to 27 pm; claw to 10 um.

Ecology; ca. 0.75 m depth, open water between

emergent reeds, over organic silt. 17°C, pH 3.1, 80.6

aS cm~!, 0.5 NTU.

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIPERA) FROM TASMANIA 12

Lecane (Lecane) ratundata (Olofsson)

Fla.

Cathypae rotundata Olofsson, 1918:593, Fig. 53.

Cathypna Hudson & Gosse (1886) = Leeare Nirzsch

(1827) by priority.

Collected ina ret tow (sample 2027) from L.

Pedder, 17 km east of Strathgordon (Fig. 1), this

is a Surprising record of a species previously known

from northern Canada, coastal waters of Novaya

Zemla, Spitsbergen, Swedish Lappland and

Hokkaido (Koste 1978). Full description and

ecology will appear in Koste & Shiel (in press).

Measurements: Dorsal plate 90*105 xm; ventral

plate 10666 jam; toes 31 ym; claws 6 wm.

Ecology; From ca. 2m deep, dark humic water, no

visible vegetation, over tocky/gravel substratum.

14.3°C, pH 61, 33.0 pS cem~!. Possibly an

incursion dislodged from submerged vegetation by

strong wind-induced wave action at the time of

collection.

VOOurn

fv \

Fig. 10 Lecane (J,,) subulata Harring & Myers, ventral.

Fig. 1, Leeane (M), rotundata (Olotsson), dorsal, Pia.

12. Lecane (LJ herzigi sp. nov., dorsal. Pig. 13. Lecune

(s. st") herzigi sp. noy., ventral. Seale bar 100 pm,

Levane (L.) herzigi sp. nov.

FIGS 12-14

Malerial: 52 loricale females in formalin, sarnple

Nos 2049, 2050.

Holotype; Loricate female on microslide, sample

2050. Coll. 02.%.87, R- J. Shiel. SAM V.4108.

Paratypes; Date and place of collection as for

hiolorype; three slides in the Collection Rotatoria,

Limn, Ecology, Senckenberg Museum,

Frankfurt/M.. No. 7360-62; one slide SAM V,4109;

one slide Shiel Coll. MDFRC,

Tipe locality: Roadside pool west of corner af Lake

Rd and Gareia Rd, Lake Garcia, Strahan

(42°09'S,145°19'R). Also present in Lake Garcia, ca.

1 km east of the pool,

Description: Lorica outline ovate, widest medially;

head aperture margins with deep rounded sinuses,

ventral deeper than dorsal; pointed cusps at external

angles of head aperture short, incurving; dorsal

plate ovate, broadly truncate posteriorly; ventral

plate slightly narrower than dorsal, with posterior

segment a broadly rounded lobe commencing al

second foot sezment; deep lateral sulci; coxal plates

small; toes straight, acutely pointed, without claws.

Measurements: Dorsal plate 96«74 ym; ventral

plate 177% 70 pm; width of anterior points 41 um;

toes 38-39 pm,

Evology: From 0.75 m depth, open water between

emergeni reeds, over fine organic malerial/sand.

Water very dark, humic. 17.0 °©, pH 3.1-4,3,

80.6-98.3 pS cm~!, O.5 NTU.

Etymology: Dedicated to Dr Alois Herzig,

Biologische Station des Burgenlandes, Illmitz,

Neusiedlersee, Austria, in recognition of his work

on Rotifera.

Remarks; The new species resembles £ (£.) mitis

Harring & Myers, 1926, from New Jersey, but differs

in the shape of the anterior margins of the lorica

and caudal part of the ventcal plate, which is mot

clearly separated into a distinct lobe as m L.. hersigi.

Notommata tyleri sp, nov,

FIG. 15

Material: 17 females in formalin, sarnple No-

1987.

Holotype: Parl-contracted female on microslide,

sample 1987. Coll. 22.ix.87, R. J.Shiel. SAM V.4110_

Paratypes: Date and place of collection as for

holotype; one slide SAM V.4111; one slide Shiel

Coll, MDFRC (Nofommata # 1987),

Type locality: Arthur's Lake (41°59'S/146°55'E)

(Fig, 1). From shallow water (<1 m) at boat ramp

on western margin off Miena-Poatina Rd.

Description: Very small species, body short and

stout; greatest width <'% body length (non-

ovigerous, Fig. 15b) to slightly more than 2 (with

126 W, ROSTE, R. J. SHIEL & L. W. TAN

Fig. 14, Lecane herzizi sp. nov. Photomicrograph,

ventral,

subitaneous egg); integument soft, flexible, but

outline constant; head and corona typical for genus,

with slight constriction of body ca, '4 length (Fig.

15b); body dilated distally to rounded rump with

median, indistinctly segmented lobulate foot

bearing two short toes (Fig, 15b); toes conical,

tapering from broad base to recurved, acute tips

(Fig. 15c) (only Gps visible in contracted state);

dorsal and lateral antennae small, papilliform;

mastax (Fig, 15e-g) modified virgate type (cf. Koste

& Shiel 1987b); rami strongly convex on outer

margins no inner denticulation; fulcrum slender,

siraight, dilated distally, manubria slender, curved,

with distinctive handle-like median structure (Fig.

15g, h); internal organs normal, viteilarium

conspicuous; foot glands clongate, club-shaped.

Measurements: Total lenuth 120-139 pm; incus

194m; Loes 12-16 ym, subitaneous egg 30-45 « 50-65

em.

Ecolagy: Collected from open water over gravel, no

emergent vegetation, 8.0°C, pH 7.7, 17.4 uS cm—!,

0.8 NTU, Dominant plankiers were rotifers (10

spp.), with most abundant taxa Polvarthra vulgaris

Carlin and Gastropus minor (Rousselet). Dominant

microcrustacean was Boeckella rubra (Smith),

Etymology: Dedicated to Dr Peter Tyler,

Department of Botany, University of Tasmania, in

recognition of his continuing contributions to

Tasmanian limnolopgy,

Remarks: Nearly all specimens were contracted in

the preservative, however analysis of the trophi

showed elements resembling those of N. Irvpeta

Harring & Myers (1922:602, Fig. S0:5-8), with

differences in the rami and manubria, N, ty/eri sp.

nov, is slightly smaller than N. trypera (150 wm) with

larger mastax and longer toes (16 wm and 9 am

respectively in N. rrypeta) Harring & Myers noted

that N. 7rypeta appeared to be an obligate parasite

of Cyanophycean Gomphosphaeria, The animals

in our sample were all free-living, and no

Cyanophyceae were present. We consider differences

in trophi structure and habit to indicate a distinct

species.

This animal belongs to a graup which could be

delineated from No/ommata and defined as a new

genus. Lt would include Pleurotrocha (Notommata)

vernalis Wulfert, 1935, PR. (N.) chalicodis Myers,

1933, P robusia (Glascott, 1893), Notommate

thitasa Harring & Myers, 1922, and N. trppeta

Harring & Myers, 1922.

Trichocerca weberi Jennings

FIGS 16-17

T. weberi Jennings, 1903:309-10, PI. 1, Figs 12-14, PLXIU,

Figs 116-7)

In a formalin-preserved sample, coll. L. Garcia,

25.1x.87, PA, Tyler, Botany Department, University

of Tasmania, (Subsample no, 2049a, Shiel Coll.

MDFRC), were several females af a Trichocera

resembling 7 weberi Jennings, described front

North America. There were appreciable differences

in body and trophi measurements.

Measurements: Lorica length 340-148 pm (vs

112-120 pm for TN. weber); trophi 47 um (vs. 42 jum);

left toe 60 «am (vs. 40 am); right toe 50 yan (vs, 30-36

wm); height 47 um (vs. 45 um). Ranges in Koste

(1978) are: lorica length 95-133 wm; trophi $2 pm:

left toe 30-45 pm; right toe to 42 pm; height ta 50

pm; anterior cusp to 12 jum).

Remarks: The larger dimensions than the size ranges

reported by Koste (1978) are notable, byt in the

absence of more detailed work on this species,

indeed on Thichocercu generally, we consider this

form may represent ecotypic variation. 7) weberi

is known from Qld (Russell 1961) and. a billabong

in Vic. (Shiel unpubl.), alsa from N.Z. (Jennings

1903).

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA 27

Fig. 15. Notommata tyleri sp. nov. a, lateral, semi-

contracted; b. dorsal; c, toe, lateral; d, subitaneous egg;

e. incus; f. incus, lateral; g. traphi, ventral view; h-

manubrium, lateral. Scale bar left 50 am (a-d), right

10 ym (e-h).

Discussion

Community campasition

As in the earlier surveys, there was marked

heterogeneity of resident rotifer communities within

and between habitat categories (cl. Table 1). From

1-32 rotifer species occurred in each locality (mean

= 9,95), with a distinct ranking of species richness

according to general habitat type, This did not

follow the same sequence as the earlier surveys,

Where permanent natural lakes had the most diverse

rotifercommunities (i.e. highest H’ index) > rivers

flowing from them > permanent stock dams >

marshes > streams > vegetated roadside pools >

stock dams > ditches,

In the 1987 survey very low species numbers were

present in several of the Central Plateau lakes. In

Lake St Clair, for example, only two rotifer species

were recorded (H" = 0.29), whereas 16 species were

present at the same site in Dec. 1985 (H* = 3,15),

Extreme wind turbulence at the time of collection

is a likely cause for the apparent decline; the rotifers

may have been deeper and away from ihe shoreline,

thus avoiding turbulence and abrasion Irom fine

suspensoids.

In all other habitat categories, species diversity

was higher than previously recorded, with rivers

carrying the Widest range of species (H’ = 2.8; mean

no. of taxa 11.5), Marshes and vegetated roadside

pools had comparable communities (H’ = 2,7; 11,9

and 9,8 spp. respectively), followed by stock dams

(H’ = 2,4; 10.3 spp.) > natural lakes (H’ = 2.2;

10.3 spp.) > streams (H’ = 2.0; 6.5 spp.) >

impoundments (H' = 1.9; 7.7 spp.). Where a higher

mean species number for the site category

accompanies a lower diversity (e.g, impoundments

vs, streams), the index used (Shannon-Weaver) (see

Hellawell 1978 for comparative indices) has taken

into account the relative numbers of individuals.

In impoundments, the rotifer community tended to

be numerically dominated by one or two species,

whereas in streams a more even distribution was

apparent. Overall, hizher species numbers collected

from the same sites by the same methods suggest

a seasonal effect, considered. later.

tig..16, a-c Trichocerca weberi Jennings. a. lateral; b-

trophi: c. lefe manubrium: d. T. weberi trom Jennings

(1903).

128 W. KOSTE, R. J. SHIEL & L, W, TAN

Fig. 17. Trichocerce webert, lateral, photomicrograph.

We should nate here that in many of these habitat

categories rotifers-were not dominant in numbers

or biomass. In most sites, community dominants

were nauplii of the calanoid copepod Calamoecia

fasmanica, or testate amoebae (eg. Difflugia and

Arcella spp.) These assemblages will be the subject

of a detailed report at a later date (Shiel & Tan in

prep.).

The new sites in the dune lake area were

Unexpectedly rich in species, including many of the

new records given in Table |. Site 2050, a permanent

humic roadside pool near Lake Garcia, contained

32 taxa (H' = 3.9), both the highest number of

species and H' index we had recorded from a

Tasmanian collection. Lake Garcia (site 2049) at

that time (02. «.87) contained 25 rotifer species (H’

= 2.96), with only seven species common to the two

sites. A subsample collected from lake Garcia

25.ix.87, a week before our visit ta the same locality,

was provided later by Dr P, A. Tyler (Botany

Department University of Tasmania), It contained

35 taxa (H'’ = 4.4), including eight new records

(claimed by Dr Tyler to represent “superior

methods"!), Remarkably, Jess than 44 of these

species (JL) were present in our sample the following

week. While inter-site community dissimilarity was

at feature of earlier surveys, iL Was Unexpected to find

>40% similarity between intra-site samples

collected a week apari, This possibly reflects a

combinauon of intra-site patehiness of the

microfauna and temporal species replacement, both

of Which are unstudied in Tasmanian waters, and

indeed, are poorly known from mainland waters.

feg. Ganf e/ al, 1983, Shiel ef ai. 1987). More

intensive study of the species-rich dune lake series

clearly is warranted, particularly in view of the

preaitts age, permanence and isolation of these

lakes,

Within-habitat patchiness was evident in a Series

of samples from the northern shores of Lake Pedder

(Fig. 1): UO) rotifer spp. occurred in a tow from the

Serpentine Dam arm (western end, west of

Strathgordon), with Keratella australis the dominant

(83%), 4.5 km east of Strathgordon, Conochilus

hippocrepis comprised 810 of the five taxa present,

while at the eastern end of the lake, ca. 12 km away,

K. cochlearis (33%) dominated the 12 taxa

recorded, eight of which were not present at the

opposite end of the lake.

Given the size of the impoundment, it is not

unexpected that its filling submerged a range of

waters with diverse planktonic and littoral

microfauna. It is, nevertheless, remarkable that in

a continuous and presumably mixed water mass,

such distinct plankton communities are maintained.

The dendritic morphology of Lake Pedder may be

a contributing factor, permitting some spatial

separation of mixing currents.

Jn general, high inter-site community dissiovlarity

held across the 100 localities surveyed, with only

a few closely-situated morphologically or chemically

similar habitats sharing more (han 25% of their

rotifer species, Table 2, for example, compares simi-

larity indices of eight arbitrarily selected sites,

Shared species tended to be those most widely dis-

tributed in the 1987 survey: Keralella slacki (44%),

Lecane flexilis (40%), K. australis (38%),

Brachionus angularis (32%), K. cochlearis/

Trichocerca similis (29%), Polvarihra dolichaptera

(26%), Pilinia longiseta/K. procurva (24%) and L.

Junaris (23%). Allexcept L. flexilis and B. angularis

were also the most widely distributed species in

earller surveys; all are widely tolerant endemic or

cosmopolitan rotifers, pancontinental on ihe

mainland. Other rotifer species in Tasmania are

patchily distributed: 45 of the new records in Table

| (76%) were collected from single habitats,

Seasonality

Two of our surveys were made in autumn, two

in spring. Summer and winter surveys are desirable

before mare specific comments on seasonality af

the Tasmanian rotifer fauna are possible, Neverthe-

less, different “most abundant” taxa and changes

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA 129

TARLF 1. Rotifera recorded from Tasmania for the first time. An asterisk (*) indicates a new record for Australia.

Oceurrence is shown by + = rare fone locality), ++ = limited distribution (>10% of localities). Habitat is given

by § = stock dam, P = pond or small roadside pool, L. = lake or large impoundment, R = river or stream (flowing).

Known distribution on the mainland is given by state.

Bdelloidea

1. Habrotrocha angusticollis (Murray) + L NSW, NT, Qld

2. Otostephanus Milne sp.

3. Philodina megalotrochy Elirenberg ++ S Qld

4, Rotaria tridens Montet* + 1

Monogononta

5. Asplanchna girodi (De Guerne) ' S Qld, Vic

6. Brachionus quadridenitatus ancylognathus (Schmarda) + S Vie

7. Cephalodella auri:ulata (Miller) + 5 Vic

8. C. gracilis (Ehrenberg) 4 P Vic

9. C megalocephala (Glascott) + R NSW

ll. C. tinea Wulfert + S Vie

2. Conochilus hippocrepis (Schrank) ++ . Qld, Vie

13. Dicranepharus epicharis Harring & Myers ++ R/L NT

14. D, liirkeni (Bergendal) ' P Vic

15. Eothinia elongata (Ehrenberg) + § Vie

16. Buchlanis triquetra (Gosse) + L NT

17. Filinia longiseta limnetica (Zacharias) \ L NSW, SA, Vic

18, Gastropus minor (Rousselct) ++ L NT, Qld

19. Heterolepadella hererostyla (Murray) + P NSW

20. Lecane (M.) elachis Harring & Myers t P NT

21. L, (MJ optas Harring & Myers* + P

22. L, (M,.) subulata (Harring & Myers)* + BP

23. L. (L.) doryssa Harring ++ P NT

24, L, (L.) herzigi sp, nov + L

25. L, (L.) mira (Murray) + R Qld

26. L, (L.) ratundata (Olofsson)* \ L

27, Lindia ecela Myers* + P

28. Macrochaetus collinsi (Gosse) + L Qld

29. Monommata actices Mycrs t P NT

30. M. aequalis (Ehrenberg) + L Qld

31. M. longiseta (Miiller) + R NSW, Qld, Vic

32. M. maculata Harring & Myers { P Qld

33, M. phoxu Myers* + P

34. M. viridis Myers* + P

35. Notommatu cerberus (Gosse) + P NSW, Qld, Vic

36. N. cerberus fonginus Wulfert* + R

37. N. pseudocerberus De Beauchamp? 44 R

38. WN. tvlert sp. noy* + L

39. Ploesoma truncatum (Levander)* \ L

40. Proatlinopsis caudatus (Gasse) + L. NSW, WA

41. P staurus Harring & Myers* + P

42. Prygura pilula (Cubitt) + P NSW, NT

43. Resticula nyssa Marring & Myers* 4 L

44, Rhinoglena frontalis (Ehrenberg) + $

45. Squatinella cf. leydigi (Zacharias)* \ P

46, Synchaetu grandis Zacharias + $ NSW, Vic, WA

47. §&. lackowitziana Lucks + P SA, Vic

48. Textudinella ahistromi Haucr* ++ L/P/R

49. T. incisa (Ternetz) 4 L Qld

50. Trichocercu bidens (Lucks) +4 L/P/S Vic

$1. T hraziliensis (Murray)* + P

52. Ti dixon-nutialli (Jennings) + L Qld

53. T. rosea (Stenroos)* + + P/R

$4. T. scipiv (Gosse}* + P

55. T. similis grandis (Hauer) ++ S NSW, SA, Vic

36. T, weberi (Jennings) + . Qld, Vic

57. Trichatria buchneri sp. nov* ++ L/P

58. TT. pseudocurta sp. nov* + L

59. 7. tetractis similis (Sten!oos) +4 L/P/R

mn W. KOSTE, R. |, SHIRL & L, W. PAN

Tape 2, Sdvenson indices for eight representative rolifer communities (0= na species shared: 1 =all species shared).

Od 22

2\ 07 Iz

i] 4 0 16

2050 2049 2027 2002

1977

Stream

0 199]

Stock Dam

2001

m a R'side Poot

2K)2

wy Wa a R'side Pool

. . 2027

19 26 19 Lake Pedder

2049

D9 (04 da Lake Garcia

. 2050

05 OS Bai) Dune Pool

2066

av 09 4 Riside Pool

2001 1991 1977

in species dominants within habitats are indicative

of seasonal community responses. Prominent is the

appearance of Lecane flexifis, which was neither

common nor abundant in the three earlier surveys,

but was relatively widespread (43 sites) and

numerically abundant in many localities in 1987,

and is clearly of spring occurrence.

General trends of species replacement were

similar in large permanent lakes and smaller water

badies more prone to seasonal extremes, ¢.g. stack

dams, although the species composition differed in

each case, In Lake Pedder, for example, the sequence

of rotiler community daminants and ther propor-

tions over the four surveys were: (1980, 4 spp., H*

= 1.49) K, cachleoris (62%) > Trichacerca similis

(20%) > Pompholvx complanata (12%); (1984, 8

spp., H’ = 1,89) Filinia pejleri (37%) > K.

cachlearis (37%) > Conochilus dossuarits (21%);

(1985, & spp., H’ = 0.82) K. cocklearis (86%) >

C. dossuarius. (10%) > Hexarthra mira (3'%0); (987,

10 spp., H' — 2.19) A. australis (46%) > K.

iochlearis (22%) > C. dossuarius (16%).

Dominants in a stock dam, eg. Wallaces, Southport

(uot sampled in the first survey) were; (1984, 10 spp.,

H’ — 2.92) Brachionus angularis (31%) > K,

tropica (16%) > F pejleri (13%); (L985, 4 spp., H"

~ 1.84) B& angularis (46%) > F, longiseta (3)%)

> K. slacki (19%); (1987, & spp., H? — 1.40) K.

stacki (65%) > Polyerthra dolichoptera (23%) >

8 angularis (7%).

Zoogeography

Each field survey has added considerably to the

known Tasmanian rotifer fauna; 62 spp. in 1980/84,

120 in 1985, 59 in 1987, Predictably, the proportion

of first records for the island has declined:

75%..47%9..35% as each survey has collected a

greater proportion of known species.

To date, 12 new rotifer taxa have been described

from Tasmania, with one subsequently recorded

from the southeast of S.A. (Koste & Shicl 1986).

This represents only 4% endemicity relative to ca,

12% on the mainland, but notably approx. 20% (49

species) of the extant Tasmanian fauna is not

recorded from the mainland, Of those remaining

species listed in Table 1 which are known from the

mainiand, 16 (44%) are recorded only from

northern N.S.W., NoT ar Qld.

Too many gaps exist in rhe sampling record to

allow more than speculation on the apparent

disjunct distribution of many rotifers previously

considered tropical taxa. The classification of these

species as “pantropical” by reviewers (eg. Koste

1978) indicates only that rhey have been collected

mainly in the tropics. Interesting, anomalies occur,

€g. a distinctively tropical comyponent of the rotifer

fatina was recorded dawns|ream of heated outflows

from nuclear power plants on the Loire River (Lair

1980), seen as a response to human interference,

The significant “tropical” component in the

Tasmanian rotifer fauna may represent relicr

populations from an earlier period, or opportunist

species: Occupying Suitable habitats. Either alter-

native depends on the moderate environmental

conditions of much of Tasmania’s “lakeland™”

A longitudinal sample series east of the continen-

tal divide would determine if the distributions are

real, or simply those of collectors! Although some

of our mainiand samples have been collected fram

Cape York, at 11°S, and some in this series belaw

43°S, our most intensive surveys have been west of

the continental divide, where alkaline, highly turbid

waters bear little resemblance io those of Tasmania.

NEW ROTIFERS (ROTIFERA) FROM TASMANIA 131

Avid humic waters certainly occur at higher

altitudes along the divide, but little is Known of their

aquatic microfauna. These waters, or lower altitude

sheltered waters east of the divide, may provide

refuges for taxa hitherto considered “tropicai”, and

explain the apparent disjunct distributions.

Acknowledgments

The Australian Biological Resources Study

supported Tasmanian fieldwork (RJS/LEWT) and

graphic costs (WK). Dr P. A. Tyler (Hobart)

provided material, suggested that the west coast acid

lakes might have “a few” rotifers, provided maps

thereto, and freely gave lodgings and hospitality.

Numerous property owners willingly provided

access to stock dams. The Deutschen Forschungs-

gereinschaft provided long-term loan of micro-

scope facilities to WK. Facilities of the Botany

Department, University of Adelaide, and Murray-

Darling Freshwater Research Centre were used in

MS preparation, Dr Derek Duckhouse, Department

of Zoology, University of Adelaide, and an

anonymous referee commented critically on adrafl

MS. All the above are thanked for their assistance.

References

AMSELLEM, J. & CLEMENT, P. (1880) A simplified nicthod

for the preparation of rotifers for tatismission and

scanning, electron microscopy. Hyerobivlogia 73,

1)9-122,

Ganr. G. G.. Seicr, Ro 5, & Merrick, C. J. (983)

Parasitism): the passible cause of the collapse-al a Folvax

population in Mount Bold Reservoir, Squth Australia.

Aust, Jo Mar. Freshwat. Res, 34, 489-494.

Hageina, H. k, & Myers, F, J, (1922) The rorifer tauna

of Wisconsin. Trans. Wise. Acad. Arts Sci, Lert, 20,

553-662.

— & (1926) The rotifer fauna of Wisconsin, I,

A revision of the genera Lecare aad Manostyla. [hid,

22, 319-423.

Heniawerr, J. M, (1978) “Biological Surveillance of

Rivers”, (NERC, Stevenage).

Huosos, C. T, & Gosse, P. H, (1886) The Rotifera or

wheel-animalcules, both British and forcign.

(Longmins, London).

JEMMINGS, HL 5. (1903) Rotatoria of the United States. 11.

A monograph of the Ratlulidae. Bu/f UL5, Fish. Comen.

(tor 1902), 278-352.

KosTE, W. (1978) “Dic Raderticre Miiteleuropas” 2 vols,

(Borntraeger, Stuttgart),

— (1988) Das Ridertier-Porrrat:

Squatinella, Mikrokosmos 77, 140-145.

—— & Smec, R. J. (1986) New species and new records

of Rotifera (Aschelminthes) from Australian waters.

Trans, R. Sug, S, Aust. 109, 1-15.

—& (1987a) Tasmuniyn Rotifens: affinities with

the Australian fauna. Hyvrohiolegia 147, 4-43,

— & (Y¥87b) Kotfera from Australian infand

waters, IL. Epiphanidgae and Brachionidae (Rotifera:

Monogononta), Invert. Taxon, 1, 949-102).

—— & —— (in press) Rorilera from Australian inland

Die Gacrung

waters. IY, Colurcllidac and Lecanidae (Rotifera:

Monogononta). Jhid. 3.

Lam, NW. (1980) The rotifer fauna of the River Loire

(France), at the level of the nuclear power planis,

Hydrobiologia 73, 153-160.

el marina, quae deLlexit, systematice descripsit eb ad

vivurn delineari curavit. . .". (Quarto, Copenhagen).

NitzscH, C. L. (1827) Cerearia. 4g. Eneyel Wiss.

Kunste 16, 66-69,

Spitzbergens. Zool, Bidr, Uppsala 6, 183-6448,

Pourrior, R. (971). Deux formes nouvelles du genre

Squatinella (Rotiféres) observees en solugne, Cuh.

Naturalistes, Bull. N.P. n.s..27, 97-101.

Ringe, W. DL, Saprosey, C. W, Bernarp, G,,

Metvinit, R. ¥., Coriiss, J. O.. Torest, J. Key,

K. KL, & Wricat, C.. W. (Eds) (1985) “Loternational

Code of Zoulogicval Nomenclature" (Univ. of California

Press, Berkeley).

Ruvesec, L. (1960) Rotatoria. Fura Repub, Pop. Rom.

2, 11-1192.

Sriec, R. J & Koste, W, (19864) Australian Ratifera;

ecology and biogeography. pp. 141-150 7 De Deckker,

P, Williains, W. D. (eds) “timnology in Australia”

(CSIRO, Melb. “Junk BY, Dordrecht),

—, Mewsick, C.. & Gane, G, G, (1987) The Rotilera

of impoundments in southeastern Australia,

Hydrobialogia V7, 23-29,

Vorot, M. (1957) Roratoria, Die

Mitteleuropas, (Borntracges, Berlin),

7actartas, QO. (1886) Ergebnisse einer zoologischen

Excursion in das Glatzer-, tser- und Riesengebirge. 2.

wiss, Zool, 43, 252-89.

Radernerc

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA

(CASTIARINA) (COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE)

BY S. BARKER*

Summary

Three new synonyms of Stigmodera (Castiarina) are recognised (valid name is given last):

acuta Deuquet = delicatula Kerremans; tripartita Kerremans = deserti Blackburn = atricollis

Saunders. S. mimus Saunders is resurrected from synonymy. Ten new species of Stigmodera

(Castiarina) are described: S$. ashburtonensis sp. nov., S. deliciosa sp. nov., S. distantia sp. nov.,

S. macquillani sp. nov., S. mayoiana sp. nov., S. murchisonensis sp. nov., S. sedlaceki sp. nov.,

S. tepperi sp. nov., S. watkinsi sp. nov. and S. williamsi sp. nov.

KEY WORDS: New species, Stigmodera (Castiarina), Coleoptera, Buprestidae

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA)

(COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE)

by ‘5S. BARKER*

Summary

Barker, S. (1988) Contributions to the taxonomy. of Stigniodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae),

Trans. R. See, S, Aust V2, 1399-142, 30 Navember, 19KR.

Three new synonyms of Sfigmiodere (Custiarina) ave recognised (valid name is given last): acu/a Deuquel

= delicaniia Kerremans} triparrita Kerremans = deserti Blackburiy = africollis Salindets..5. miinitis Saunders

iw resurrected from synonymy. Ten new species of Stiztodera (Castiarina) are deseribed: S, ushburtanensis

ip. noy., 8, deliciosa sp. noy., S. distantia sp. nov., S. macquillani sp. noy, S. mayotana sp. toy, S.

murchisonensis sp. nov, S. sed/aceki sp. nov., S..tepperisp. nov.,.S. warkinsi sp. nov, and S. wilanasi sp, nev.

Kev Woros: New species, Siiemeodera (Castiarina), Coleoptera, Buprestidae

Introduction

New species of Stizmodera (Castiarina) have been

collected recently by some very active collaborators,

In particular, the innovative use of a mechanical

cherry-picker in the Gosford district of N.SW, over

a flowering lilly-pilly (Acmmena sp.), produced two

new species in the S&S. producta Saunders mimicry

complex. Although Sdentodera (Castiarina) species

occur in New Guinea, few collections have been

made there, A small collection made by Mr J.

Sedlacek resulted in a further species being added

to the New Guinea fauna. Ten new species are

described here and other species are resurrected or

plaged in synonymy,

Materials and Methods

Male genitalia were prepared and displayed by

the method desenbed by Barker (1987), Abbrevia-

tians used in the text for museum and private collec-

tions following Watt (1979) are: AMSA Australian

Museum, Sydney; ANIC Australian National Insect

Collection, €.5,1,R.0., Canberra; BMNH British

Museum (Natural History), London; Muséum

Nalionale d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris; NMVA

National Museums of Victoria, Melbourne; QMBA

Queensland Museum, Brisbane; SAMA South

Australian Museum, Adelaide; TADA Department

of Agriculture, Hobart: WADA Department of

Agriculture, South Perth; AHQA Mr A. Hiller, Mt

Glorious; GBVA Mr G. G, Burns, Morningtony

MHSA Mr T. M.S. Hanlon, Ryde; RMNA Mr R.

Mayo, Narara; MPWA Mr M. Powell, Atradale;

ASSA Mr A. Sundholm, Elizabeth Bay; SWNA Mr

S, Watkins, Caparra;s GWNA Mr G. Williams,

Lansdowne,

* Deparment of Zoology, University of Adelaide, G.PO.

Box 498 Adelaide. S Aust. SOOL

Species resurrected from synonymy

Barker (1979, L986) wrongly followed Kerremans

(1903) and Carter (1916) in listing S. mimus

Saunders: (Holotype female, Qld, BMNH) as a

synonym of 8, perivi C & G (Holatype, Aust.,

MNHN). | have recently examined series of both

collected in N.SW. 8. mtimus has a ted pronotum

and fewer dark pronotal markings than S. pertyi

which has a yellow pronoturn. Their male genitalia

as shown (Figs LA, !B) are quite distinct. | consider

each a valid species.

New synonyms in Stigmodera (Castiarina)

Barker (1983) listed §, acuta Deuquel, 1956

(Holotype male, Acacia Plateau, N.SW., Harold

Davidson, AMSA) as a synonym of S. délicarula

Kerremans, 1903 (Holotype female, N,SW,, Sland-

ing, BMNH) and deseribed S. pseudasilida,

designating the female paratype of S, acuta as a

paratype. Barker (1986) resurrected §, acuta from

synonymy and pointed out that (he illustration of

Deuquet (1956, Fig. 1) was not of 8, aew/a, but in

reality the female paratype later designated a

paratype of S. pseudasilida,

A re-examination of the types of 8. spectabilis

Kerremans and 8S, delicaiu/a Kerretnans has

reconfirmed that S acuta is synonymous with §,

delicatula, The species is unique in having atten-

uated elytra with two very small equal spines, che

margui rounded between, Deuquet (1956) p. 15S

described the male of S. acuta as very acuminate,

minutely lunate, very shor! narrawly separated

spines,’ a precise description of S. delfeatula,

Blackburn (1890) deseribed §. deserti as a variety

ofS, atrico/lis Saunders (Halotype male, S. Aust.,

BMNH) alter examining a short series collected in

the Queen Victoria Desert by the Elder expedition,

He could find little difference between this species

and the typical S. atrievellis, except that it was much

smaller and the fascia and apical marks were heavier

TAXONOMY OF STAGMODERA 1ts

than typical, Barker (1983) elevated 8. deserti to

specific status on the basis of differences between

the genitalia Of specimens attributed to S$, deserti

from the Murchison and Gascoyne districts, W,A.

and those of §, atricollis (Figs JE, IF), Barker (1986)

recognised that the genitalic comparison had not

been made with S. africollis, but instead with an

undescribed W.A. species: S. cracenta Barker. A

series of old specimens of S: africollis collected in

S. Aust. were examined, and a single recently collec

ted male from the northern Flinders Ranges was

dissected and illustrated wlongside the genitalia of

S. cracenta Barker (1986), It appears thac the

specimens altributed to S. deserti were unusually

small specimens of S. africollis which is widespread

in W.A. and has been redescribed as 8. Iripartita

Kerremans (Holotype male, Aust., BMNH), Barker

(1979) listed S. fripertita Kerremans 4s a synonym

of S, atricollis but Barker (1986) listed it as a valid

species, The problem with the identification of S.

deserti has oecurred because of my inability to

locate the type specimen. | now consider §. deserti

and S. Iripartita to be synonyms ol S. arricollis

which is a common ad Widespread species in arid

areas of S, Aust, and WA. The adults usually are

collected on the flawers of Cassia sp., Gecasionally

on the flowers of Melalenca uneinata R.Br

Problems with identification of two species of

Sdemodera (Castiarina) ave been caused by

misidentification in Carter (1929), PL. 32, Fig. 25

is labelled cupricallis Saunders, but illustrates S,

deyrollei Vhomson, whereas Fig. 31 18 labelled

coccinata (Muope) bur illustrates S$. @fronotaia

Waterhouse. A further confusion is that the figures

were not reproduced to the same scale, Moore (1987)

labelled as S. cupricellis Saunders an illustration

ol S. devroiley Thomson (a unilasciate morph,

previously known as S. savcra Carter before being

svnonymised by Barker (1986)) and also wrongly

identified an illustration of S, drico/or (Kirby) as

S. trifasciaia C & CG (Pls 7, %, Fig F).

Stigmodera (Casiiarina) ashburtonensis 3p. 10y.

FIGS IK, 3B

Holotype, %, Ashburton R., Ashburton Downs

Stn, WCA., 27.viil, L977, K. 7, Richards, ANIC.

Allotype. 9, same data as holotype ANIC,

Paratypes. W, A,r 1 o,2 9 2, same data as holo-

type, WADA, SAMA; | 9? Cue, Allershaw,

SAMA; lor, 29 9, Cuc, SAMA; Io, Cue,

27.1,1899, Ellershaw, WAMA.

Colour, Head, antennae coppery-purple. Pronotuis

dark purple medially, coppery-purple laterally,

Scutellum purple, Elytra orange with following dark

blue markings: narrow basal margin; anieromedial

spot on each elytron and one On suture; postero-

medial fascia, convex anteriorly, reaching margin;

anteroapical spot on suture Ventral surlace:

sternum coppery-purple; abdomen dark purple

Legs: femora dark purples tibiae and larsomeres

coppery-purple. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

broad median sulcus, very short muzzle, eyes bul-

bous. Antennae compressed, segments: 1-3 obcon-

ie; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum closely pungtured,

basal fovea extending forwards to middle as gla-

brous line, basal notches surrounded by glabrous

area on each side more niarginal than medial; api-

val margin broadly projecting medially, basal mar-

gin barely bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base,

angled inwards, rounded, widest anteromedially,

rounded to apex. Scutellum scutiform, flat, excite

yate. Blytra punctate-striate, intervals convex,

punctured) laterally angled owt trom base, round-

ed at humeral callus, concave, rounded

posteromedially, narrowed to hispinese apex, both

spines minute, rounded and indented between,

apices diverging, Ventral surface with shallow

punctures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous,

sparse medium length hair. Sz: male truncate; fe-

male medially indented, faintly bilobed.

Size. Males, 15.9 ~ 5,8 mim (4). Females, 18.3 +

0.26 » 6.8 + 0.09 mm (6),

Male genitalia. (Fig. 1K). Paranieres parallel-sided

from base, rounded anteromedially and angled out-

wards, rounded posteromedially and parallel-sided,

rounded apically, Median lobe blunt, sides acute-

ly angled away. Apophysis of basal piece narrowed

medially, truncate apically.

Remarks. Member ol 8. trifusclata C & G species

group. Closest to 8. jnsignicolliy Blackburn. That

specics is smaller, has yellow elyira with a ted

Margin, and the male genitalia (Fig. 1J) bave para-

meres parallel-sided from base, rounded medially

then parallel-sided, rounded apically, Median lobe

blunt, sides acutely angled away, Apopliysis of basal

piece medium width, rounded apically. The red

Fie. |. Photomicrographs of male genitalia of the tollowing Arighiodera (Castarinad species: A. S. periph C & G,

B.S. minus Saunders, C. S. peacyuillani sp, nov, OS, mnurchisonensis sp, nov, E. So watkins? sp. nov, FS

wilhantsi sp. nov, Gi. dy mayelana sp. nov, TH. S. evlindraceu Saunders, 1, S. distantia sp. now, dS. dasigeivoltis

Blackburn, K. 8. eshburrenensis sp, nov,, L. 8. feypperr sp. nov., M.S. burasi Barker, NS. delielasa sp. nov, OL

5. sedlaccki sp. nav.

136 5S. BARKER

margin fades in ald specimens of 5. insignicollis and

they are difficult to distinguish. Ashburton R.

specimens were collected on the Mowers of Petal-

ostylis labicheoides R.Br. The name is derived from

the type locality.

PIG. 2, A. Stigmodera murchisonensis sp. nov., B.S.

distantia sp. nov. C. S. watkinsi sp. nov., D. 8. williansi

sp. Nhav.(x3)

Stigmodera (Castiarina) distantia sp. nov,

FIGS 11, 3B

Holotype: a, 4 km W Zanthus, W.A., 21,x, 1986,

M. Powell, WAMA.,

Allotype: 9, same data as holotype, SAMA 1

21207.

Paratypes. W.A.: 3 2 @, same data as holotype,

MPWA.,

Colour: Head mostly green, black at base. Anten-

nae green. Pronotum black medially, green later-

ally. Scutellum black. Elytra yellow with follow-

ing dark blue markings: narrow basal margin;

anteromedial fascia consisting of three connected

spois not reaching margin, in allotype three

Separate spots, one on each elytron and one on su-

ture; posteromedial fascia reaching margin,

projecting anteriorly from middle of each elytran;

spade-shaped apical mark, last three marks con-

nected along sulure, red margin. Ventral surface

and legs green. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture: Head shallowly punctured,

shallow median sulcus, very short muzzle. Anten-

hae compressed, segments; 1-3 obconic; 4-1]

toothed, Pronotum shallowly punctured, basal fov-

ea extending forwards to middle as glabrous line,

basal notches represented by glabrous area on each

side more marginal than tedial; apical margin

projecting medially, basal margin bisinuate; later-

ally parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest part

medially, rounded to apex, Scutellum scutiform,

glabrous, excavate. Elytra punctate-striate, inter-

vals convex, shallowly punctured; laterally angled

out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave,

rounded posteromedially and narrowed to

bispinose apex; blunt marginal spine, minute sutur-

al spine, margin indented between, apices hardly

diverging. Ventral surface with shallow punctures,

edges of abdominal segments vlabrous, sparse

medium length hairs. S7: male truncate and slight-

ly indented medially; female bilobed.

Size. Male, 13.5 » 4,8:mm (1). Females, 13.9 ~ 5.2

mim (4),

Male genitalia: (Fig. 11). Parameres parallel-sided

basally, widened anteromedially, rounded apically,

Median lobe ‘bluni, sides acutely angled away.

Apophysis of basal piece moderately wide, rounded

apically.

Remarks: Member of S. trifasciata C & G species

group, The elytral markings and colouration most

resemble S. cylindracea Saunders, except that the

pronotum in ¢yv/indracea is all green and the body

smaller and cylindneal. The male genitalia of

evlindracea (Fig, 1H) have paramere parallel-sided

basally, rounded anteromedially, parallel-sided,

rounded apically. Median lobe sharp, sides acutely

angled away, Apophysis of basal piece narrowed,

rounded apically. All specimens were collected on

the flowers of Melaleuca uncinata R.Br. The name

is derived from dis/antia L. “remoteness”,

Stigmodera (Castiarina) macquillani sp. nov.

FIGS 10, 34

Holotype. o, Mt Algonkian 1073 m, Tas.,

26.11.1987, RMcQuillan, SAMA | 21208.

Paratype. o, same data as holotype, TADA.

Colour, Head green with yellow reflections.

Antennae blue. Pronotum and sevtelluin green with

yellow reflections. Elytra yellow with the following

black markings with blue and blue-green reflec-

tions; very broad fascia from base to middle reach-

ing margin, enclosing medial elongate yellow spot

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA 137

FIG. 3. A. Stigmodera macquillani sp. nov. B.S.

ashburtonensis- sp. nov. C. S. mayoiana sp. nov.(x3)

and one on margin at humeral callus; posteromedial

fascia reaching margin, expanded on suture; spade-

shaped mark covering apex, marks irregular, Ventral

surface green with yellow reflections. Legs: dorsal

surface blue-green; ventral surface green. Hairs

silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured,

median sulcus, shor( muzzle, hairy. Antennae,

segments: 1-3 obvonic; 4-11 toothed. Pronotum

closely punctured, basal fovea extending forwards

to middle as impressed line then to apex as glabrous

line; basal notches represented by glabrous area on

each side more marginal than medial; apical margin

projecting medially, basal margin barely bisinuate;

laterally parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest

anteromedially, rounded and narrowed to apex,

hairy. Scutellum seutiform, no punctures, excavate.

Elytra costate, scutellary, 3rd, Sth, 7th and 9th

intervals raised and smooth, those between flat and

wrinkled: laterally slightly angled out from base,

rounded at humeral callus, parallel-sided, rounded

posteromedially and narrowed to truncate, spineless

apex. Ventral surface with shallow punctures, edges

of abdominal segments glabrous, long sparse hair.

S3: male truncate medially indented; female

unknown.

Size. Males, 12.0 « 5.3 mm (2).

Male genitalia. (Fig 1\C), Short, Parameres angled

outwards from basal piece, rounded postero-

medially, straight, rounded apically, Median lobe

with sharp point, sides acutely angled away,

Apophysis of basal piece broad, rounded apically.

Remarks. | am unable to group this species with

any other. [tis the third known species in the genus

with hairy head and pronotum, the other twa being

S. jubata Blackburn and S, rudis Carter. All occur

in montane areas in Tasmania and it is possible that

the unusual presence of hair is associated with tem-

perature regulation. Both specimens were collected

on the flowers of Leptospermum rupestre J. D.

Hook. Named after Mr P. McQuillan, Hobart.

FIG. 4, A. Stigmodera deliciosa sp. nov., B.S. sedlaceki

sp. nov., C. S. fepperi sp. noy.(x3)

Stigmodera (Castiarina) deliciosa sp. nov.

FIGS 1N, 4A

‘Holotype. o&, Ourimbah, NSW, 6,xii.1987, &.. Mayo,

SAMA I 21209.

Allotype. 9, Mt Glorious, Qld, 26.1.1982, A. Hiller,

QMBA.

Paratypes. Qld: 19, Mt Glorious, 10,1.1984, A.

RMNA; | o, Ourimbah, 30.x1.1987, R. Mayo,

RMNA; 1 co, Ourimbah, 29.xi.1987, 7) M. S.

Hanlon, MUHSA; 9 oa, Ourimbah,

30.xi./5.xii,1987, R. de Keyzer, A. Sundholm, ASSA.

138 S, BARKER

Colour, Head bronze or purple bronze with green

muzzle. Antennae, scutellum green. Pronotum green

laterally, bronze or purple bronze medially, Elytra

yellow with the following black markings: marrow

basal margin; broad anteromedial fascia ends

expanded anteriorly and posteriorly enclosing a

yellow spot on each side and an clongate yellow

mark on margin; posterormedial fascia ends

expanded anteriorly and posteriorly enclosing a

yellow spot on each side between it and the

anteromedial fascia and clongate apical mark

enclosing a yellow mark with red margin between

itself and posteromedial fascia, Ventral surface

green, Legs blue. Hairs silver,

Shape and sculpture. Head shallawly punctured,

median sulcus, medium-length muzzle. Aniennae,

segments. 1-4 obconic, 5-11 toothed. Pronotum

shallowly punctured, glabrous, small basal fovea,

extending forwards to middle as faint impressed

line, basal notches on each side more marginal than

medial; apical margin projecting medially, basal

margin bisinuates laterally parallel-sided at base,

rounded to widest part anteromedially, rounded

and narrowed to apex, Scutellum cordiform, faintly

punctured, glabrous, excavate. Elytra costate, 3rd,

Sth, 7th and 9th slightly raised, margin flanened,

intervals faintly punctured, glabrous; laterally an-

gled out from base, rounded at humeral callus, con-

cave, rounded posteromedjally and tapered |o

bispinose apex; large sharp marginal spine, smaller

sharp sutural spine, margin rounded between,

apices diverging, Ventral surface shallow pune-

tures, edges of abdominal segments glabrous,

sparse medium length hajrs, $7: male truncate; fe-

male rounded, Meso-sternal process slightly

inflated.

Size. Males, 13-8 » O10 « 4.9 4 0.04 mm (14).

Females, 15.0 « 5,2 mm (2),

Male genitalia. (Fig. 1S). Parameres angled out-

wards from basal piece, rounded al apex, Median

lobe pointed, sides obtusely angled away, Apophy-

sis of basal piece moderately large, narrowed,

rounded apically,

Remarks. This species is a member of the S.

producta Saunders mimicry group. fam unable to

place it in-any Species group on the basis of exter-

hal morphology and structure of male venitalia.

Adulls were collected on Euodia sp. at Mt Glori-

ous and on Acmena sp, at Ourimbah. The name

is derived from delicjasus 1,., delightful.

Sigmodera (Castistina) mayviana sp. nov.

FIGS 1G, 3c

Holotype. &, Ourimbah, N.S.W,, 20,x11.1987, 2.

Maya, SAMA 21210,

Paratypes, N.S.W.: 1 or, Ourtmbah, 23. xii. 1987,

A. Sundholm, R. de Keyzer, ASSAj 1 or, Ourim-

bah, 26.xi.1987, &, Mayo, RMNA,

Colour, Head green with yellow reflections, muy.

zle blue-zreen, Antennae, segments: 1 blue-green,

2-11 green with yellow reflections, Pronotum and

scutellum ercen with yellow reflections, Elytra yel-

lew with the following black markings: basal mar-

gin; anteromedial fascia; posteromedial fascia, the

above ail coalesced on margin enclosing, yellow

basal spot, spot on humeral callus, anteromedial

Spot; mark covering apex and spines, between it

and 2nd fascia a yellow spot merging with red mark

on margin,

Shape und sculpture. Head shallowly punctured,

shallaw median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae,

segments: [~4 obconic: 5-11 toothed. Progotum

shallowly punctured, clabrous, small basal fovea,

small basal notches, more marginal than. medial;

apical margin straight, basal margin bisinuate;

laterally angled inwards rom hase, rounded

anteromedially, rounded and narrowed tg apex.

Scutellum tulipiform, glabrous, excavate. Elytra

punctate-striate; 3rd, Sth, Tih and 9th intervals

prominent, apical margin flattencd, intervals eor-

vex. and smooth; laterally angled out from base,

rounded at humeral callus, eoneave, rounded

posteromedjally and tapered io acuminate,

bispinose apex; sharp marginal spine, smaller sharp

sulural spine, margin rounded between spines,

apices diverging. Ventral surface with shallow

punctures, edges.of abdominal seements glabrous,

short sparse hair. Sz! tale truncate, slightly in-

dented medially; female unknown, Mesosternal

process inflated, Male: legs 2 and.3, tarsal pads ab:

sent jarsomeres 1-3, replaced by median spine,

larger On tarsomere 3 than on tarsomeres 1 and 2,

Size. Males, 12,9 + 4.6 mm (3).

Male genitalia. (Fig, 1G). Parameres angled out-

wards from basal piece, rounded apically. Median

lobe with sharp point, sides obtusely angled away.

Apophysis of basal piece elonzate, medium width,

narrowed medially, rounded apically,

Remarks. This species is a member of the S,

producta Saunders mimicry group. | am unable to

Broup it with any other species on the basis of ex-

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA ae

temal morphology ond structure of Lhe mate eenita-

tia. Named after Mr R. Muvo, Narara,

Stlemodera (Castiarina) marchisonensis sp, nov,

FIGS ID, 24

Holotvpe: ow. 56 km N Murchison R,, W.A.,

23.41.1986, MM. Powell, WAMA.

Alloiypes 3. same data as holotype, SAMA I

21201,

Colours Head, antennae, pronotum bronze. Scutel-

lum black, Elytra yellow with Tollowing black

markings: narrow basal margin; anteromedial fas-

cia, ends ¢xpanded anteriosty, not reaching mar-

vin, and posteriorly reaching margin; poslero-

medial fascia reaching margin, projecting anteri-

orly from middle of each elytron; apical mark, last

three marks connected along suture. Ventral sur-

face and legs bronze. Hairs silver.

Shape und sculpture: Head closely punctured, me-

dian sulcus, very short muzzle, Antennae com-

pressed, segments: 1-3 obconie; 4-11 toothed.

Pronojium closely punctured, basal fovea extend-

ing to middle as glabrous impressed hne, ther to

apical margin as impressed line, basal notches

represented by glabrous arca on cach side more

marginal than medial; apical margin straight, basal

margin bisinuate; laterally purallel-sided at base,

rounded to widest part medially, rounded to apex,

Seutellum scutiform. Rlytra punctate-striate, iter

vals convex, punctured; laterally angled oul from

base, rounded at humeral callus, concave, round-

ed posteromedially and natrowed to bispinose

apex; sharp marginal spine, small sharp surtural

sping, Margin rounded and indented between,

apices diverging, apical margin subserrate, Ventral

surface with shallow punctures, edges of abdomi-

nal segments glabrous, hairy, hairs short, $7: trun-

cate both sexes,

Size: Male, 11.3 « 4.) mm (1). Female, 12.17 »

4.5mm (1).

Mate genitalia: (Fig. 1D) Short, Parameres parallel

sided basally, widened, rounded anteromedially,

parallel-sided, rounded to apex, Median lobe blunt,

sides acutely rounded away. Apophysis of basal

piewe moderately wide, rounded apically,

Remarks: Memter of the S. cupricauda Saunders

apecies group. Must resembles §, chinnaeki Bar-

ker but male genitalia are more like those of 5.

cupricauda (Barker 1983). However S. cfinnocks

has denser punctuations on the head and prono-

tum, the clytral intervals are flatter and it has a

southern distribution in W.A, and S. Aust. The

name is derived from the type Tocality,

Stigmodera (Castiaring) sedlaccki sp, nov.

FIGS 10, 4B

Holorvne. o, Mt Kaindi, New Guinea, 2350 m,

24.1.1979, #. Secflavek, SAMA | 21212.

Cofeur. Head, antennac, pronowm and scutellury

dark blue. Elytra very dark blue with an elongate

red mark on each ¢lytron from base ro anteromedi-

alarea over the humeral callus and along the mar-

gin, nol reaching suture. Ventral surface and legs

dark blue. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, me

dian sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae, segments: 1-4

obeconic; 5-11 toothed, Pronotum closely punc-

iured, basal fovea extending forwards co middle

as glabrous line, basal notches represented by gla-

brous urea Of cach side more marginal than medi-

al; apical margin broadly projecting medially, basal

margin bisinuate; laterally angled inwards from

base, rounded to wides! anteromedially, rounded

and narrowed to apex, Scutellum cordiform, few

punctures, glabrous, cxeavate. Elytra punctate-

striate, intervals convex, smooth; laterally angled

out from base, rounded at humeral callus, concave,

rounded posteromedially and narrowed to

bispinose apex; sharyy marginal spine, small, sharp

sutural spine, margin rounded and indented be-

tween, apices diverging. Ventral surface with shal-

low punctures, cdges of abdominal segments gla-

brous, short sparse hair, S7: male truncate; female

unknown, Mesnsternal process slightly inflated,

Size. Male, 11.0 « 4.4mm (1).

Male genitalia, (Fig, 10), Parameres parallel-sided

basally, rounded anteromedially, parallel-sided,

rounded apically, Median lobe sharp, sides acule-

ly angled away. Apophysis of basal picce medium

width, narrowed, rounded apically.

Remarks, Lam unable to group this with any other

species on the basis of external morphology or

siructure Of male genitalia, Superficially this resem-

bles §, boreg/is Barker which ix a similar colour and

also has red elytral markings. However, 8S. borea-

lis isa much smaller species and the elytral apices

are markedly serrate whereas (hey are srmucth in

S. sedlaceki, Named after the collector Mr J, Sed-

lacek, Brookfield,

14t) 5. BARKER

Stigmodera (Castiarina) lepperi sp. nov.

FIGS IL, Ac

Holotype. >, Ardrossan, §. Aust, /, G. 0. Tep-

per, SAMA | 21213.

Alloiype, 9, same data as holotype. SAMA |

21214.

Paratypes, 5, Avst.: 2 oo, 3 9 2, satne data as

holotype, SAMA; 1 ct, Evre's Pen,, SAMA; 1 9,

Hincks N.P., Eyre Pen., 7...1979, D. PL Lueis,

SAMA? 1 G, Addison Park, Eyre Pen,, 11,x. 1981,

J-&D, Gardner, SAMA: 1 9, Wharminda Soaks,

Eyre Pen., 13.xi,1987, G. G. Burns, GBVA,

Colour. Head branze-green. Antennae, segments;

1-2 blue-green; 3-1! bronze-green. Pronotum and

seutellum bronze green, Elytra yellow with the fol

lowing blue-green markings; narrow basal margin;

short vitta over cach humeral callus; narrow post-

inedial fascia not reaching margin; diamond-

shaped pre-apival mark often reduced, all marks

connected along suture. Ventral sertace: sternum

bronze-green; abdomen tesraccous. Legs bronze-

ereen. Hairs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, short

muzzle. Antennae, seaments; 1-3 obconic) 4-11

toothed, Pronorum closely punctured, basal fav-

ea extending forwards (o middle as glabrous line,

small basal notches on each side more marginal

than medial; apical margin projecting medially,

basal margin barely bisinuate; laterally rounded

from base, Widest postero-medially, rounded and

narrowed to apex. Scutellum scutiform, glabrous,

flat, Elytra punctate-striare, intervals convex; later-

ally anvled out from base, rounded at humeral cal-

lus, concave, rounded postero-medially then ta-

pered 19 bispibose apex; both spines small and

blunt, margin straight and indented between, apiccs

diverging. Ventral surface with shallow punctures,

edges of abdominal segments glabrous, moderate-

ty Watevy, hairs short. Sj: male truncate: female

rounded,

Sise, Males, 15.8 + 0,48 » 6,0 + 0,13 mm (5%.

Females, 15.2 + 0.37 « 5.9 + 0.22 mm (4)-

Male genitatia. (Fig. LL) Parameres parallel-sided

from basal piece, rounded postero-inedially, rounu-

ed and tapered, rounded to apex. Median lobe

sharp, sules obtusely angled away, Apophysis of

basal piece short, narrowed medially, rounded

apically.

Renyirks, This species is a member of the S.

siaintined Saunders species group on che basis of

its external morphology, structure of the male

genitalia and testaceous abdomen, It most resembles

S. burasi Barker, However the head, pronotum and

sternun) are bronze-green whereas they are bright

ercen in.§. burasi. The elytral markings are bluc-

green in S. éepperi and blue in S. hurasi and the

mitle genitalia are a different shape and smaller in

S. fepperi, despite individuals being the same size

as. §. burnsi (Fig. 1M)..S, tepperi has been collected

from the Yorke and Eyre Peninsulas, 8, Aust., while

S. burnsi has been collected on the Adeliide Plains,

Murray Mallee and Victorian mallee districts.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) wathinsi sp, nov,

FIGS (E, 2c

Holelyper o, Mt York, Blue Mrs, N.S.W.,

1S.xii_ L987, 8S. Wietkins, SAMA 1 21215.

Alletspe: 9, same dala as holotype, SAMA I

21216.

Paraiypes, M.S.Wa; lot, 19. Blue Mts, G.

Masters, SAMA; | o, bo, Medlow, A. J. Care-

er, SAMA; 5 coor. 4-9-5, sane data as holotype,

SWNA; 6 oo, 8 Fo, Mt York, 21/25. xii, 1985,

12,7.1986, 13/21 817, 1987, & Heatkins, SWNAS 17

creer, LL O 2, Mt Boyee, Blue Mts, 27 «ii. 1985,

13/15/17.xt1.1987, 5S. Watkins, SWNA; 4 ctor, 3

"9, Macquarie Pass, Mt Murray Rd, Blue Mis,

2.1.1986, S. Watkins, SWNA; 6 wo, 2 2S,

Leura, 23.xii.1985, 28.xi1.1987, S. Warkins,

SWNA; 2 cro, Wentworth Falls, 25,2i).1985, 8.

Wafkins, SWNA; | cr, Bald Knob Rd, Dundee,

19_xi1. 1987, 8. Warkins, SWNA; lool) 9, i3km

SW bhor, 8. Warkins SWNA:1 o,2 9 9. Coxs

Rd, State Foresr, 20.xi1, 1987, S. Wrrkins, SWNA;

4oao,l 9, Hartley Vale, 15.xi),1987, 8, Haskins,

SWNAL2 O° O,4 9 >, 14-16 km NE Deepwater,

20,xi1-1987, G, Williams, GWNA,

Oofaur; Head and antennae blue-green with yel-

low reflections or blue. Pronotum blue-green or

blue medially, orange laterally except neck collar

and base. Scutellum blue-green with yellow reflec

tions or bluc. Elytra orange, with following mark-

ings either green with yellow reflections ar blue with

purple reflections: yery broad basal fascia: pusteru-

medial faseia reaching margin, expanded anteriorly

On anterior margin at suture and postenarly on

posterior margin at suture! spade-shaped upicil

mark, all mark§ connected aiong suture, Ventral

Surface and legs green with yellow reflections ot

gZreen blue, Hairs silver.

TAXONOMY OF STIGMODERA Jal

Shape and sculpture; Head closely punctured, me-

cian sulcus, short muzzle, Aniennae, segments: 1-3

obconic; 4-11 toothed, Pronatum closely punc-

Jured, basal fovea extending forwards to apical

Margin as impressed line, upical margin praject-

ing medially, basal margin barely bisinuate; tater-

ally parallel-sided at base, rounded to widest part

medially, rounded to apex. Sculellum scutiform,

punctured, flat. Elytra punctate-striate. intervals

convex, punctured; laterally angled oul from base,

rounded at humeral callus, concave, rounded

postéromedially and narrowed to rounded, spine-

less apex; apices hardly diverging. Ventral surface

with shallow punctures, edges of abdominal seg-

ments glabrous. moderately hairy, hairs short, 54;

mitle truncate; female rounded.

Size! Males, 10.2 2 0.10 nm - 3.9 + 0.04 nim

(54), Females, 10,8 + O,12 « 4.2 + 0,05 mm (39),

Male genitalia: (Fig. 1E). Short. Parameres wi-

dened basally, rounded medially, narrowed, round-

ed apically. Median lobe sharp, sides acutely an-

gled away, Apophysis of basal piece medium width,

tapered, rounded apically.

Remarks: Member of S. distinguenda Saunders

Species proup. Carter (1929) apparently confused

this species with S, erata Saunders, as he listed S,

grata occurring in Old, N.S.W., Vie., aod 8. Aust.

S, grate is red on the dorsal surface with blue mark-

ings and occurs only on Fleuricu Peninsula and on

Kangaroo Istand, S. Aust. It isa larger species and

its male genitalia are distinct from those of this spe-

cies (Barker 1983). The elytra! colour atid patiern

are distinct from all other members in this species

eroup (Barker 1986). Named after Mr S, Watkins,

Caparris.

Stigmodera (Castiarina) williamsi 5). nov.

FIGS |r, 2D

Hatoippe. of, Wingham, NSW, 3. xii.1987, G.

Williants, SAMA 1b 21217

Allorype. >, same data as fialotype, SAMA L 21218,

Poratypes, NSW. 2 oro, 2 99, Wingham,

3-5 xi1.1987, G. Williams, GWNA.

Cafoue Head; apex yellow-green) base eoppery.

Antennae yellow green, Pronotum and scutellum

coppery. Elytra pale yellow wiih the following black

markings with green reflections: narrow basal

margin; curved mark over each fumieral callys

connected 10 basal margin; anteromedial fascia

represented by diamond-shaped mark on suture and

a medial mark on each side and one on margin

vatiably absent in soine specimens; posteromedial

fancia reaching margin, projecting anteriorly on

suture and on anterior margin closer to lateral

margin than suture; mark covering apex, all marks

connected slong suture. Hitirs silver.

Shape and sculpture. Head closely punctured, broad

median sulcus, short muzzle. Antennae, segments:

{-4 obeonic; 5-1) toothed. Pronotum closely

punctured, basul fovexs apical margin straight, basal

margin bisinuate; laterally parallel-sided at base,

rounded to widest pari medially, rounded ta apex.

Scutellum scutitorm, few punctures, glabrous,

excavate, Elytra punctate-striare, Intervals convex,

smooth; laterally angled out from base, rounded at

humeral callus, concave, rounded posteramedially

und narrowed to bispinose apex; sharp marginal

spite, minute sulural spine, margin rounded and

indented belween, apices hardly diverging. Ventral

surface shallowly punctured, edges of abdominal

segments glabrous, sparse very short hairs, S+

truncate in both sexes.

Size. Males, 6.6 ~* 2.3mm (3). Females, 6.8 « 24

tm (3).

Male genitalia. (Fig. VF) Short. Parsmeres widenal

basally, rounded anteromedially then narrowed,

widened pre-apically, rounded apically. Median lobe

pointed, Apophysts of basal piece wide, rounded

apically.

Remarks, The male genitalia of this species most

closely resemble those of 8, selboldi C & G, Barker

(1983) Mg. IK, Both species belong in the S, crenala

(Don.) species group, §. sieboldi, Barker (1983) Fiz,

4r, has bicolourous pronotum, blue medially and

green laterally. Jt has orange-red elytra with black

pre- and post-medial fascia and pre-apical mark,

is a lafger species and occurs only in southern W.A.

Named after Mr G. Williams, Lansdowne.

Distribution of 5. putealala Curter

I haye examined a single male specimen of S.

puteolata Carter, colleeted by Mr kb. &. Adams on

bremophila higtoniiviora (Benth.) F. Muell, near

che junction of the Dawson and MacKenzic Rivers,

ventral Queensland. There is a single specimen of

the same species in the S.A. Museum, collected at

Ooldea, 5. Aust, These records represent a consider-

able range extension as ihe species was previously

Known from the eastern goldfields district, W.A.

inralum

Barker (1987) p. 136. Holotype of Stigenudera

(Castiariana) duggenensiy Varker SAMA shatld

read No J 2118] mot | 21378

142 5, BARKER

Acknowledgments

I thank the following for assistance: Dr G. F.

Gross and Dr E. G. Matthews, South Australian

Museum; Dr D. S. Horning, Macleay Museum,

Sydney; Dr A, Neboiss, National Museum of

Victoria; Dr R. Chinnock, S.A. Herbarium,

Adelaide; Mr K. T. Richards, Department of Agri-

culture, South Perth; Mr P, McQuillan, Department

of Agriculture, Hobart; Mr T. Weir, A.N.LC.; Miss

C.M.F. von Hayek, British Museum, (N.H.); Dr T,

F, Houston, Western Australian Muscum; Mr E. BE,

Adams, Edungalba; Mr G. G, Burns, Mornington;

Mr H. Demarz, Quinns Rocks; Mr T. M. S. Hanlon,

Ryde; Mr A. Hiller, Mt Glorious; Mr R. Mayo,

Narara; Mr M. Powell, Attadale; Mr A. Sundholm,

Elizabeth Bay; Mr S. Watkins, Caparra; Mr G,

Williams, Lansdowne; Miss H. Vanderwoude, Dr

J. Gardner and Mr P,; Kempster Department of

Zoology, University of Adelaide.

References

Barker, 5. (1979) New species and a catalogue of

Stigmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera; Buprestidae).

Trans R. Soc. §, Aust. 103, 1-23.

——, (1983) New synonyms and new specics of

Sugmodera (Castiarina) (Coleoptera! Buprestidae),

Thid.. 107, 139-169,

——, (1986) Stizmodera (Custiarina) (Coleoptera:

Buprestidae): taxonomy, new species and a checklist.

Thid. 110, 1-36.

——, (1987) Eighteen new species of Stigmodera

(Castiarina) (Coleoptera: Buprestidae). /bid. 111,

133-146,

BLACKBURN, T. (1890) Scientific Results of the Elder

Exploring Expedition. Coleoptera. [hid. 26, 16-61.

—,, (1892) Further notes on Australian Colcoptera. /bid.

15, 207-291.

CARTER, H, J. (1916) Revision of the genus Stigmodera,

and descriptions of some new species of Buprestidae

(Order Coleoptera). Ibid, 40, 78-144,

—— (1929) A check list of the Australian Buprestidac,

with tables and keys to subfamilies, tribes, and genera,

by Andre Théry, correspondant de Muséum de Paris;

and figures (Pls xxxi to xxxiii) drawn by Cedric Deane,

A.M.LE. (Aust.). Aust. Zool 5, 265-304,

Deuguet, C. M. (1956) Notes on Australian Buprestidae,

with descriptions of three new species and two

subspecies of the genus Stigmodera, subgenus

Castiarina. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 81, 153-156,

KFRREMANS, C. (1903) ‘Genera Insectorum, Coleoptera;

Serricornia, Fam. Buprestidae’ Tase. 12c p. 207.

(Verteneuit & Desmet, Bruxelles).

Moore, B. P, (1987) A guide to the Beetles of South-

Eastern Australia (Australian Entomological Press,

Greenwich, N.SM.).

Watt, J. C. (1979) Abbreviations for entomological

collections. N.Z, Zool. 6, 5-9-520.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

VOL. 112, PART 4

A NEW SPECIES OF SCINCID LIZARD RELATED TO LEZOLOPZSMA

ENTRECASTEAUXH, FROM SOUTHEASTERN AUSTRALIA

BY MARK N. HUTCHINSON*, & STEPHEN C. DONNELLANT

Summary

A scincid lizard, Leiolopisma rawlinsoni sp. nov., is described from southeastern Australia. It is

confined to swampy habitats from sea level to subalpine elevations and is rare in collections.

The new species belongs to the L. baudini species-complex, which also includes two other eastern

species, L. entrecastreauxii Groups 1 and 2 (Donnellan & Hutchinson in press) and a southwestern

species, L. baudini Greer, 1982.

KEY WORDS: Taxonomy, species-complex, Leiolopisma, Scincidae, Reptilia, distribution,

ecology.

A NEW SPECIES OF SCINCID LIZARD RELATED TO

LEIOLOPISMA ENTRECASTEAUXIT, FROM SOUTHEASTERN AUSTRALIA

by MARK N. HUTCHINSON®*, & STEPHEN C. DONNELLANt

Summary

Hurcninson, M. N. & DoNNELDAN, S.C. (1988) A few species of svincid lizard related to Lefo/upismia

entrecasleauxii, from southeastern Australia, Trans. BR Soc. S. Aust. 112, 143-151, 30 November, 1988.

A scincid tizard, Lefolopismu rawlinsoni sp. noy., is described from southeastern Australia, It is confined

to swampy habitats from sca level (o slibalpine clevalions and is rare in collections. The new. species belongs

tothe L. baudini species-complex, which alsoincludes two other eustern species, &.. entrecastreauxil Groups

land 2 (Dunnellam & Hutchinson in press) and a scirhwestern species, L, baudin’ Greer, 1982,

Kev Woros: Taxonomy, species-vomplex, Leivlapisma. Scincidae, Reptilia, distribution, ecology:

Introduction

Donnellian & Hutchinson (in press), using

allozyme electrophoresis, showed that the castern

Australian skinks identified as Lefolopisme

entrecasteauxii (Duménl & Bibron, 1839) included

at least rhree distinct biologival species.

Morphological features appeared to correlate with

the biochemical markers, and both the morphology

and biochemistry suggested thal. the common

ancestor of the three species had initially diverged

into two entities. One consisted of a pair of specics

(L. entrecasfeauxi: Groups 1 and 2), between which

morphological and electrophoretic divergence was

shebht, but which differed appreciably (five fixed

genetic differences) from the third species (L.

entrecasteauxi] Group 3). Studies by Hutchinson &

Donnellan (in prep.) indicate that the name

entrecasteauxii belongs to onc of the twa closely

related species; Which one is still uncertain because

of the overlap in morphological characters between

Groups | and 2 plus the poor state of preservation

uf the type specimens. The morphology of the

Group 3 skinks, particularly the Hight dorsolateral

line centred on seale row 3, makes itclear that none

uf the available names presently synonymized with

L. entrecesteqnadi applics to these specimens, so that

a new Name is required for them,

The new species is especially similar in some

respects to L, havdini of Western Australia. L.

bandit was described froma sinyle specimen which

shewed several scalation and colour pattern

differences from L. enrrecasteauxil (6.1), although

itstrongly resembled the eastern “species” and was

regarded as its closest relative (Greer 1982). Since

the holotype description was published, further

specimens of L. baudini have been collected and

work in progress (Hutchinson & Donnellan in prep.)

will provide data on variation within chls species.

* School of Biological Sclenyes, La Trobe University,

Buidtoora, Vic. 3083.

t South Australian Museum, North Terrie, Adelaide,

5. Aust. 5000,

L. daudini and the new species share higher

supracliary and lower midbody scale row counts

than are seen in L. entrecasteauxii Groups | and

2, bur differ trom each other in several over

sealation and colour pattern features.

The new species, L beudini and the two eastern

species tacluded in ZL. entrecasteauxit (si) form a

closely related proup of species which we term the

L. hawdini species-comptex-

Materials and Methads

Definition of head shields and methods for

making scale counts follaw Greer (1982), The

positions of the longitudinal stripes are also as

described by Greer, in terms of their position on

one or more lofigitucinal scale rows, Scale rows are

numbered on each side starting from the paraver-

tebral row as row | and proceeding laterally.

Scalation features occurring bilaterally, such as

supraciliaries, upper and lower labials, presub-

oculars and subdigital lamellae, were counted on

hoth sides, andl mean and modal values therefare

refer to the overall values for hoth sides,

Measurements of preserved specimens were made

using a steel ruler graduated to 0.5 mm, Snout-vent

lengths (SVL) were measured to the nearest 1.0 mm,

4s were tail lengths (TL), while forelimb length

(FLL) and hind limb length (HLL) were measured

to the nearest 0,5 mm. Eye, palpebral disc and car

diameters. were measured using a calibrated

Microscope eyepiece to the nearest 0.1 mm.

Females with snout-vent lengths equal to ofr

longer than that of the smallest female in the

population containing oviducal eggs or embryos

were gssumed to be sexually mature. Sexual

maturity in males was judged by the presence of

enlarged testes,

The following collections included specimens of

the new species, or provided comparative material

of the other species in the cotniplex. Institutional

abbreviations follow | eviton ef af, (1985): Australian

Museum, Sydney (AMS); Australian National

M4 M,N, HUTCHINSON & S, C, DONNELLAN

Wildlite Collection, Ganberra (ANWC Author's

collectian, La Tmbe University (MNH); Museum

ol Victoria, Melbourne (NMY); Queen Victona

Museum, Lauovcston (QVMT}); South Australian

Museum, Adelaide (SAMA); Tasmanian Museum,

Hobart TMH», Western Australian Museum, Perth

(WAM).

TAXONOMY

The Leiolopisnra buudini species-complex

The term “species-complesx" is used here for the

list ume in relution to these livards, although Greece

(1982) had alreacly pointed out some of the similari-

lies Which suggested a close relationship between

£. baudini and the eastern species then known as

“ entrecestedusii, The vooiples vonsists of at least

four species (Donnellan & Hutchinson in press}, all

members of the Australian viviparous Leiolopisnra

radiation (Greer 1982; Hintchinsan ef al. 1988).

The L. baudini species-complex belongs to the

Evgongyiny subgroup of the £ugonpyfus group

(Greer 1979) within the subfamily Lyzosominae, and

has nine of the ten character states outlined by Greer

(1979) as being diagnostic tor the Fugoneyvius

subgroup, The anly exceplion to this cancerns the

palare, which varies between the typically alpha

condition, with snypothly diverging medial margins

of the pterygoids, to one with a marked develop-

ment of posteromedially directed processes similar

ta the beta palate condition of the Lanipraphotis

Subgroup (MINH per. obs.). Lefulopisema is a

“etade” group of generalized, window-eyed

Eugorle vies group species, [t is not demonstrably

a natural group and is in need of revision. We use

Greer’s (1974) concepuof Leiolopisme as modified

by Sadlier (1986), differing trom che latrer author

only in that, currently, we include Prengemoig

(sens Rawlinson 1974b) within Lerelopisea,

Centent: Leidlopisma beauctiné Greer, 1982; L,.

enirecasfeauail Group 1; L. enfrecasteauxti Group

2: ruwlinsant sy. How It should be noted that

Group | and Group 2 (Duntellun & Hutchinsen

in press) are assemblages which only partly

correspond 10 the division of tis species tito Forins

A and B (Pengilley 1972)'.

Characteristics of Ihe £. bapdini species-complex

In inferritty ihe evolutionary polarity of the

character states discussed below, outprouy

bompurisot, using the other Australian Eugortey les

group taxa as the outgroup, hus been the method

used to identify plesiomorphic character slates.

'PENGILLEY, R. (1972) Systematic relationships and

ecology of some lygosomine lizards from southeastern

Avsuralia, Unpub, Ph) thesis, Dept ol footagy, Australian

National University, Canberra

Within the Eveoneylus suberoup, the /.. baudini

species-complex is characterized by the following

combination of primitive and derived character

states: a telatively deep, blunt head and a relatively

deep body with moderate limbs (hind limb normalty

30% to 40% of snoul-vent length); paired fronto-

parictals and distinct intecparictal; supranasals and

postiasals present or absent; large to moderately

small midbody scales (im 23-36 rows); a very large

transparent disc (diameter > 50% of eye diameter)

in the moveable lower eyelid; upper temporal

fenestra closed; 30 or fewer presacral vertebrae. The

species are sexually dichromatic, with males

developing areas of red pigmentation, and three (0

data available for L, baydini) are viviparous,

Of ttese, four are synapomorphies: viviparity, &

large palpebral disc, a closed upper lempori!

fenestra and sexual dichromatism. These four in

cumbination are unique within the Avgengyles

group, inplying that the L, banwdini species-complex

is not only readily defined but also monophyletic.

Osrived characier siales of the L. baudini

species-complex

Loree palpetrral disc: A transparent palpebral disc

is present in most Eugoneylus group taxa. It is

usually mod¢rately sized, with a diameter about

40% of the eve leneth. In the L. baudini specics-

complex, the disc is inarkedly Jarger, 30-60% of the

eye diameter, This large disc appears to be apo-

morphic with respect to the smaller dis: seen in

other taxa with movable eyelids, but plestomerphic

(and possibly immediately ancestral to) ihe state

seen in ablepharine genera such as Moretfie and

Cryptoblepharus.

Dichromatism: Greer (1980, 1982) has

commented on the presence of areas of red

colouring present jo some Australian Lefafopisiia

and related genera. In the £L. bawdini species.

camplex, as in some, bur not all, of the other jaxa

with red pigmentation, the colour is limited to

males, This sexual dichreimatist reaches its must

vivid development in late summer-autumn, when

testis size is at ad Maat and mating veours

Whether the presence or absence of red pigment

per se is plesiomorphic or apomorphic im the

Eygoneylus group is not clear. However, sexual

dichromitisrn as felatively rare in this group of

tkinks and is probably apomorphic,

Viviparity: By far the most common mode of

reproduction in the ugongylus group is oviparity,

and this is no doubt the plesiamorphic condition.

Viviparity acvur only in some Leilopisma specles

in Australia (Greer 1982), and in most Leiolopismma

and all Cye/oaineg in New Zealand (Hardy 1977),

Viviparity is therefore an apomorphic character

Mare in the f. haudiné species-complex, ‘The

NEW SCINCID LIZARD 145

reproductive mode of L. hevdini is not yet known.

However, it appears fo mate in autumn, as

evidenced by enlarged testis size in males.and fresh

bite scars around the chest and shoulder area of

females, and autumn mating is a characteristic of

viviparous skinks im Southeastern Australia (Smyth

1968; Rawlinson 1974a).

Upper temporal fenestra: This opening in the

skull roof, bordered by the parietal and postlrontal

in the Buvgongy/us group, is a plesiomorphy in

skinks. The opening, when present, is reduced in

the Eugongylus group, and in many taxa it is

completely obliterated or no more than a pinhole.

This apomorphic condition (completely closed or

almost so) is. present in the L, bandini

species-complex.

Leiolopisma rawlinsoni sp. nov.

FIGS 1-4

Lygosoma (Liolepisma) entrecusteauxii (part) Lucas &

Frost (1894).

Leiglopisma entrecusteauxu (part) Rawlinson (1967,

1971, 1975), Spellerbere (1972); Cogger (1975); Greer

(1982); Copger ef af. (1983).

Leiolopisma entrecasteduxi Form A (pact) Jenkins &

Bartell (1980). [designation ex Pengilley (1972)!].

Leiolopisma entrecasieauxit Group 3 Donnelan &

Hutchinson (in, press).

Afolotype, NMV D55450. Adult male. Mouth of

Bunyip River (Main Drain) (38° 13'S; 145° 26° E),

6,5 km E Tooradin, Vic. Collected by P, Robertson

on 211.1981),

Diagnosis: Member of the L. Gaudini species-

complex, characterized by strongly striped colour

pattern completely lacking lighter or darker dorsal,

lateral or caudal speckling, light dorsolateral bne

on scale row 3, and having dorsal and head scales

with highly glossy surface,

Generally distinguished from other eastern

species in complex (L. entrecasteauxti Groups | and

2) by position of light dorsolateral! stripe on scale

row 3 (rather than tow 4, or 3+4), in normally

having 6, rather than 5, supraciliaries, and by having,

fewer rows of midbody scales (mode 26, rather than

30). Most similar in these respecis to LZ... bauelini

{sensu Hutchinson & Donnellan in prep.), from

which it is distinguished by lacking partial or

complete supranasal or postnasal scales and any

trace of light dorsal or caudal flecks, and by mid-

lateral white stripe continuing clear and strajett—

edged from groin io side of head, rather than

becoming vague and wavy-edged anterior to axilla,

Also distinguished from L, baudini by highly

glossed dorsal scales, by having fewer subdigital

lamellae (17-23, mean 19.0, versus 20-25, mean

22:3) and higher paravertebral scale counts [in

males, 37-63, mean 59.6, versus 50-58, mean 54,1];

in females 57-65, mean 62.2, versus 53-60, mean

57.6), and by its. strict preference for densely

vegetated swampy habitats.

Etymology: Named after Peter A. Rawlinson,

Department of Zoology, La Trobe University, in

recognition of his studies of the scineid lizard fauna

of southeastern Australia.

Description af holotype: Moderate-sized with

pentadactyl limbs overlapping when adpressed,

snout relatively blunt, head and body deep and

squarish in cross-section, and colour pattern

1151. Holotype of Lemlapismarawlinsonl sp, nov, (NMYV 45450), Head sealation in (a) neh lateral and (b) dermal

view, Seale bar = 10 min.

nr M.S. HUTCHINSON & S. C. DONNELLAN

consisting sulely of longitudinal dark and light

stripes. Hemipenis colunmmar (Greer 1979) not

deeply bifurcated. [ris paler than pupil,

Midbady scales in 26 rows. Dorsal scales with

three moderately strong keels, lateral scales mare

weakly tricarinate, trailing edges of Uorsal and

lateral scales angularly three-sided rather than

smoothly rounded, Paravertebral scales 60, Mid-

ventral scales (mental 10 preanal inclusive) 63.

Preanals 10, median four distinctly enlarged.

Palmar and plantar tubercles rounded, Subdigital

lamellae smooth, undivided, 20 under fourth toe.

Dorsal surface of digits covered by single row of

scales, No trace Of supranasals or postnasals, Width

of rostral-frontonasal suture less than half width

of frontonasal, Prefrontals well separated; frontal

contacting frontonasal. Supraoculars 4, second

largest; firsc and second oconracting frontal.

Frontopurictals paired, Interparietal distinct, almost

as large as a frontoparietal, Purietals lange, in

contact behmd interparietal, Each parietal bordered

posterolaterally by upper secondary temporal and

enlarged ouchal. Supraciliaries f. Loreals 2, anterior

taller than broad, posterior squarish. Preoculars 2,

lower larpest and undivided. One presubocular.

Upper olianes 9, lower ciliaries 13, Large irans-

parent disc in lower eyelid, bordered above by 4 (left)

or 5 (right) lower ciliaries. Upper fabials 7, fifth

subocular. One primary and two secondary tem-

porals, Lower labials 7. Postmental contacting first

and second lower labials. Eat opening subcircular,

withour enlarged lobules.

Dimensions: SVL $3 mm. TL 91 mn (distal half

regenerated), FLL 13.0 mm (25% of SVL), HLL

20,5 im (39% of SVL), Head width 7.4 min (14%

of SVL). Length of eye 24 mm, Length of palpebral

disc |.4 mm (58% of eye length). Maximum

diameter of ear opening 09 mny (38% of eve

length).

Colour (in preservative); Dorsal surface of head,

hack, tail and limbs medium greyish olive Straight-

edged black vertebral stripe occupying medial third

of two paravertebral scale rows (row | on each side),

hiding anteriorly on michal scales und posteriorly

about 20 mm on to base of tall. Prominent, straight-

edged white dorsolateral stripe alang middle of scale

row 3 on each side, bordered by black tines; stripe

fading anteriorly to level of ear but still visible on

head behind supruciliary scales, Clear white

midlateral stripe, bordered by narrow black lines,

along scale row 6 {intruding slightly on Lo row 5)

from posreriot margin of ear Opening, above axilla

10 base of hid leg. Pale dorsolateral and pale

midlateral stripes extending well on to tail,

becoming progressively less well defined; upper

fateral zone between these stripes dark brown,

volour ealending forward uver temporals co eye,

where it narrows and continues as dark loreal streak

to naris, White midlateral stripe extending forward

as thinner white line from upper margin of ear

opening along upper labials co below eye, No traee

of darker or lighter speckling on dorsal or lateral

patterns. Top of head unmarked except for few dark

smudges on supraoculars. Upper surfaces of limbs

wilh dark flecks arranged longitudinally, forming

weak lines, Lower cheeks and sides of neck weakly

marbled with grey, otherwise ventral surfaces

immaculate silvery white, Palmar and plantar

surfaces and basal subdigital lamellae grey-white;

distal subdigital lamellae brown,

Variation

Poratypes AUSTRALIAN CAPITAL TERRITORY.

{(ANWC), R2980, Picadilly Circus. (WMV). D38215, Mi

Ginini; DS9874, Ginini Flats.

NEW SOUTH WALES, [NMY¥}, 036966, 16 km N of

Tin Mine Hut; D59K73, Smiggin Holes; DS9875-76,

Round Mountain; 650875-76, Danjers Gap, Kosciusko

National Park; DG0873-74, Tooma Reservoir, Kosciusko

National Park; D60877, Kiandra.

VICTORIA. (AMS) R15837, Healesville; R67484,

Tolmié; R67574, Maroondah Hwy, 5 km S of Buxton,

R8i649, 4 km SSW of Woodside Bast; R163, 9.1 km

[road] § of Forge Creek; R97269, Gembrook Stare Rarest,

(NMYV), D722, Western Port; DI852, Ringweod: 92392,

Alessandra; DII7I1, Benambra; 034210, 4 km SW of

Bemm River; 036964, Port Camphell; 037325, 4 kin N

of Whittlesea; D37492, Yan Yean; D37500, 4 km N of

Darby River, Wilsons Promontory; D39918, St Kilda

Junction", Wilsons Promontory; D40191, French Islands

142059, high plains NE of Benaintra: D47553, Davies

Plains (NE of Benambray D47608, LO km NE of

Benambra: D48408, Boneo; Ddsdil, 7 km E of

Stringybark Creek, Healesville; D48412-15. Yan Yean;

D43945, Dennison Lake, D48948-49, Lach Smiths Lake

[= Salt Lake]; D52700, 25 km E of Tooradin; DS4$25—24,

salunarsh, between Tankerton and Tortoise Head, French

Istand; DS$344-45, Cockatoo Creek, 1.6 km § of

Yellingbo; DSS388, Gembrook State Forest; D5$448-49,

mouth of Bunyip River, main drain, 6,5 km E of Tooradin;

1DI660], 4 km SSW of Woodside Fast, 056606, Bayles;

157035, $.4 kin N of Koctong; DS$797-800, 4 km SSW

of Woodside East; D59869-70, Deep Creek, 4 km E of

Toorudin; DS9871-72, 4 km SSW of Woodside East,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA, (SAMA), R17492, N af Mr

Gambler (Dismal Swatap area) RIIGG6, Bool Lagoon.

TASMANIA, (NMV), D12349, Cape Burren Island,

Referred Specimens! (AMS). R4I74, R27008, Victoris,

(no other data],

Semation, Midbody scales i 23-30 rows (mean

26,6, mode 26. = 61). Puravertebral scales 57-64

(mean 60.7. mn — 51). Subdigital lamellae under

fourth toe 17-23 (mean 19.0, n = 30), No

supranasal or postnasal scales. Prefrontals nearly

always separated (in contact jn 4 out of 64, freq =

0,06), Supraciliaries 5-8 (mean 5.9, mode 6, n =

6)}, All haye 7 (synimetrically) upper labials.

Usually one presubocular, tess frequently cwo

sinvlat-sized presuboculars present on one or both

sides (mean 2, = 30), Lower preocular and

NEW SCINCID LIZARD 147

FIG, 2. (a) Holotype of Leiolopisma rawlinsoni sp. noy. (MNV D55450), as preserved. (b) Paratype NMV D55449

(adult female) from type locality, in life.

148 MN, HUTCHINSON & 5. 0. DONNEL! AN

anterior Joreal undivided in all specimens, Lower

labials usually 7, sometimes 8 (mean 7.1, = 30).

Dimensions; SVL of adult males 37-63 mm

(mean 48.3, n — 25), of adult femnales 40-6] mm

(ment S14, = 22). Smallest juvenile 27 mm. HLL

30-40% of SVL, TL 157-185% of SVL (mean

172%, nm = 8).

Colour (in preservative}; Generally very similar

to holotype. Ground colour often darker, vertebral

stripe strong, faint or absent. Laterodorsal black

lines may be well developed, running along junction

between scale tows | and 2 on each side.

Dorsolateral light stripe always runs down middle

of scale row 3. Whire midlateral line generally

centred on scale row 6, but atten including upper

part af row 7 for part of its length. Jn specimen

wilh Towesl nidbody geale count (NMY DSs345,

MBSR =23) midlateral white stripe running down

middle of row 5. No trace of light or dark speckling

on any specimen, Paratype AMS R&1649 (4 km

SSW of Woodside East, Vic.) is illustrated by Greer

(1982, Fig. 5).

Colour in life: Generally similar to colour in

preservative, but usually more greenish. Scales with

a very noticeable opalescent gloss, Belly cream to

pale yellow. Breeding males may have weak orange

midlateral stripe.

Sexual dimorphism: SVL ot adult females on

average is larger than that of males, Although

largest specimen examined was male {NMV D484],

63 mm SVL), most males were small, less than 50

mm SVL, Females appear to mature at slightly

larger SVL (40 mm) than males (37 mm),

Paraveriebral scales significantly more numerous in

fernales (57-65, mean 62.2) than in males (57-63,

mean 59.3); ty = 4.73, p < O01. Females with

signilicantly shorter limbs; HLL in females ranges

29.5% 37.8% of SVL (mean 33.4, SD = 2.39),

while males range 32,6%-40,0% (mean 36.6, SD

1,86); ta) = 4.84, p < .001, Larger SD in females

because relative leg length appears 10 decrease as

females grow larger, suggesting negative allometric

growth of limbs. HLL dimorphism much tess

evident tf only small aduits considered, when

comparison restricted fo adults less than 51) mm

SVL, mean value for femules rises ro 35.2 (SD —

1.95) while that for males remains the same (36.7,

SD = 1,98); ty = 1.70, p > O1. Sexual

dichromiatism does not appear to be well developed,

in contrast to two other eastern members of the

species-complex. W., Osborne (pers. comm.) has

recorded breeding males with weak orange

colouring in anterior part of midlateral white stripe,

but males collected in southern Victoria in carly

suinmer showed Ho orange colour at all (MNH,

pers, abs,), while red pigment also absent in others

collected in June. No live colour data available for

Victorian specimens eollected during height of

breeding season, February-April,

Distribution

L. rawlinsoni is restricted to southeastert

Australia, and apparently occurs in several disjumet

areas, in southeastern $.A., southwestern Victoria,

south-central Victoria, alpine areas of northeastern

Victoria through the Snowy Mountains of N.SMW.

to the Brindahella Ranges on the N.SW, - A.C,

border, and Cape Barren Island in Bass Strait (Fig.

3), The status of several of the outlying populations

is unknown since they are based on. single

specimens, from Port Campbell (SW Vic.), Cape

Barren Island, and Bemm River (SE Vic.). The

species is rare in collections, sa that future range

extensions (e.g. to Tasmania) or discovery of

populahons bridgmg apparent gaps are possibilities.

Geographic Variation

Colour paltern is very conservative, all specimens

having a light to dark olive green to grey-brown

dorsum with the dorsolateral white stripe on scale

row 3, The major colour pattern Variations consist

oF reduction or absence of the yer(ebral stripe, and

the addition of a pair of black larerodersal stripes,

and we degree to Which the upper lateral zone js

pale centred. Geographic variation in colour does

not appear to be much greater than local variation.

Variation in scajation is also minor. The principal

geographic variation is the degree of carination of

the dorsal scales, Which is most pronounced in

southern Victorian specimens, but greatly reduced

or virtually absent in other populations. tii all

populanons the medal nndbody scale raw count is

26, and only (wo specimens are known 10 exceed

28 (NMYV 648943 from Gennison Lake and NMV

DI852 from Ringwood have 30). Sjx supraciliaries

is by far the most common count in most areas,

but the three wWeslern-most specimens, fram

southeastern South Australia and Port Campbell,

Victoria, have five supraciliaries.

Cranial Osteology

The skull (Tig. 4) conforms to the Eugongylus

subgroup (Greer 1979) in having WW premaxillary

teeth, a completely closed Meckel's groove and the

palatal rami of the palatines well developed and in

broad medial contact. It is similar in mast respects

to that of the other members of the complex, wilh

the upper temporal fenestra closed by expansion of

ube parietal, but differs from L. enrrecasteaunii

Group } and Group 2 in pterygoid structure. The

Jattet tWO species Show an angularity or process on

tie wiedial margins of the palatal rami of the ptery-

NEW SCINCID LIZARD 149

FIG, 3. Distribution of Lefolopisma rawlinsoni sp, nov. The star indicates the type locality, and the arrow, Cape

Barren [sland.

goids, in some specimens resembling the beta

palatal processes of the Lamtpropholis subgroup

(Greer 1979). The two specimens of L. rawlinsoni

examined haye little development of these processes.

One of the two specimens examined shows a modest

angularity of the medial margins, while the other

has completely smooth, evenly diverging pterygoids

as in the typical alpha palate,

Ecology and Reproduction

L. rawlinsoni is known entirely from localities

characterized by the presence of very humid micro-

enyironments. In southern Victoria, the species has

been found in saltmarshes, boggy creek valleys, the

margins of permanent lakes and swamps and in wet

heathland, while at high altitudes in northeast

Victoria and southeast N.SW., it ovcurs in similar

swampy habitats, including fens and sphagnum

bogs. These habitats are usually densely vegetated

at ground level, and the species apparently basks

and forages largely within this cover. The swampy

habitat preference of this species is reflected by the

faci that most of the southern Victorian localilies

from which it has been collected have yielded

specimens of Agernia ceventryi, also known to be

an obligate swamp/wet heathland species (Smales

1981; Schulz 1985), Similarly, at the high altitude

localities, such as Davies Plains, Vic., and the

Perisher area, N.SW., L. rawlinsoni is syntopic with

Eulamprus kosciuskoi, an alpine swamp specialist

(Coventry & Robertson 1980).

Throughout its range, L. rawlinsoni is broadly

sympatric with one or both of its close relatives,

L, entrecastequxii Group 1 and Group 2. At several

localities (e.g. the Woodside area, Vic. and the

Perisher area, N.SW.), J. rawlinsoni and L.

entrecasteauxit Group 2 are syntopic, while L.

entrecasieauxit Group | has been collected within

1 km of L. rawlinsoni in the Perisher area and in

the Yan Yean area north of Melbourne. Marphol-

ogival data reinforce the electrophoretic evidence

that there is no intergradation between these

sympatric or adjacent populations.

The dense vegetation of the species’ preferred

habitat may explain Gne of the more striking aspects

150 M. ‘N. HUTCHINSON & S. C. DONNELLAN

FIG, 4. Skull of Leiolopisma rawlinsoni sp, noy, in (a) dorsal view and (b) palatal view. Arrows point to (a) the position

of the minute upper temporal fenestra and (b) the palatal rami of the pterygoids which show a slight angularity

in this specimen. Specimen MNH No. 85/46, 4 km SSW of Woodside East, Vic. Scale bar = i0 mm.

of this skink: its relative rarity in collections, It is

widely distributed through the well-collected south-

east of Australia, where many other small species

of skink have been collected in large numbers. The

two near relatives of ZL. ruwlinsont, L.

entrecasteauxii Group | and Group 2, are represen-

ted in southeastern museum callections by many

hundreds of specimens, including long series from

some siles, but these same collections have yielded

only 64 specimens of L. rawlinsoni, with the greatest

number from any one location being eight.

The species is viviparous, litter size ranging 4-8

(mean 5,6, n=13). Females with oviducal eggs or

developing young have been collected us early as

15 October and as late as 28 January, As with the

other eastern species, mules show a peak in

testicular size during late summer-autumn, and

females ovulite in mid spring, so. that overwintering

of sperm by the females must occur.

Acknowledgements

The following colleagues assisted in providing

access to or loans of specimens in their care: A. J.

Coventry (NMV), R. H. Green (QVMT), A- E.

Greer and R. Sadlier (AMS), K. Medlock (TMH),

T, D, Schwaner (SAMA), L, A. Smith (WAM) and

J. Wombey (ANWC). W. Osborne, Zoology Dept,

ANU, Canberra and P. Robertson, Fisheries &

Wildlife Division, Victoria, provided access to

specimens held by them and gave valuable infor-

mation on field biology. D. Walsh, Dept of Zoology,

La Trobe University, provided photographic

assistance. Rarjier drafts of the manuscript were

improved by the helpful comments of P. Baverstock,

R. Andrews, M. Mahony, M. Adams and an

anonymous reviewer. This work was funded in part

by ARGS grant No Al841625 to P. Baverstock and

a CTEC special research grant to M. Hutchinson.

NEW SCINCID LIZARD 15]

References

Coccer, H. G (1975) “Reptiles and Amphibians of

Ausiraha". (A, H. & A. W. Reed, Sydney).

—, Cameron, E. FE. & Coaccrr, H. M. (1983)

“Zoological Catalogue of Australia, vol. 1, Amphibia

and Reptilia" (Aust. Govt Publ. Serv., Canberra),

COVENTRY, A. J..& ROBERISON, P. (1980) New records of

scincid lizards from Victoria, Mich Nat. 97, 190-193,

Donmeccan, § C. & HiercHisson, M, N, (in press)

Sibling species of Leiolapisma entrecasteauxii (Dumeril

and Bibron) (Scincidae: Lygosominae) detected by

allozyme electrophoresis. Aust £ Zool. 37-

DuMeERIL, 4, M. C. & Bipron, G. (1839) “Erpétologie

Générale ou Histoire Naturelle Compléte des Reptiles”,

Vol. 5. (Roret, Paris).

Greer, A, E. (1974) The generic relationships of the

selncid hzard genus Lejolopisia and its relatives: Aust.

J. Zool., Suppl. Ser. No. 31, 1-67.

—— (1979) A phylogenetic subdivision of Australian

skinks. Rec. Aust. Mus, 32, 339-371.

—— (1980) A new species of Morethia (Lacertilia:

Scincidae) from northern Australia, with comments on

the biology and relationships of the genus, /bid. 33,

89-122,

—— (1982) A new species of Leio/opisme (Lacertilia:

Scincidae) from Western Australia, with notes on the

biology and relationships of other Australian species.

Ibid. 34, 549-573,

Harpy, G. 5. (1977) The New Zealand Svincidue

(Reptilia: Lacertilia); a taxonomic and zoogeographic

study. MZ. J. Zool, 4, 221-328.

HUTCHINSON, M. N., Schwaner, T. D. & MEBLOCK, K.

(1988) A new species of scincid lizard (Lygosominae:

Leiolapisma) trom the highlands of Tasmania. Prac.

R. Soc, Vict. 101, in press.

Jenkins, R. W, G, & BARTELL, R, (1980) “A Field Guide

to the Reptiles of the Australian High Country”. (Inkata

Press, Melbourne).

Leviton, A. &., Graas, R. H., Htar, BE. & Dawson, C,

E. (1985) Standards in herpetology and ichthyology: Part

I. Standard symbolic codes for institutional resource

collections in herpetology and ichthyology. Copeta,

(1985) 802-832,

Lucas, A. H. S. & Frost, C. (1894) The lizards

indigenous to Victoria, Prac. R. See. Viet. 6, 24-92.

RAWLinson, P, A, (1967) The vertebrate fauna of the Bass

Strait Islands. 2. The Reptilia of Flinders and King

Islands. /bid. 80, 211-224.

—— (1971) The reptiles of west Gippsland. Zhid. 84, 37-33.

— (1974a) Biogeography and ecology of the reptiles of

‘Tasmania and the Bags Strait area, pp, 291-338, In

Williams, W. D, (Ed.), “Biogeography and Ecology in

Tasmania”, (W. Junk, The Hague).

— (1974b) Revision of the endemic southeastern

Australian lizard genus Pseudemoig (Scincidae:

Lygosominae). Mem. Nail Mus. Vict. 35, 87-96.

— (1975) Two new lizard species from the genus

Leiolopisma (Scincidae: Lygosominae}-in southeastern

Australia and Tasmania. /bid, 36, 1-16.

Saptirr, R. A. (1986) A review of the scincid lizards of

New Caledonia. Rec. Aust. Mus. 39, 1-66.

Scnurz, M. (1985) The occurrence of the mourning

skink, Egernia covenirvi, in salumarsh in Westernpart

Bay, Victoria, Viet. Nut. 102, 148-152.

Smaces, 1. (1981) The herpetofauna of Yellingbo State

Faunal Reserve, (bid, 98, 234-246,

SMYTH, M, (1968) The distribution and life history of the

skink Hemiergis peronii (Fitzinger). Trans R. Soe.

S. Aust, 92, 51-58.

SPELLERBERG, |. Ff. (1972) Temperature tolerances of

southeast Australian reptiles examined in relation to

reptile thermoregulatory behaviour and distribution.

Oecologia (Beri) 9, 23-46.

MUSTELICOLA ANTARCTICUS SP. NOV. (CESTODA:

TRYPANORHYNCHA) FROM AUSTRALIAN ELASMOBRANCHS, AND A

REASSESSMENT OF THE FAMILY MUSTELICOLIDAE DOLLFUS, 1969

BY RONALD A, CAMPBELL* & IAN BEVERIDGET

Summary

Mustelicola antarcticus sp. nov. is described from adult worms in the spiral valve of Mustelus

antarcticus (Guenther) collected in coastal waters off Bicheno, Tasmania. Characters differentiating

M. antarcticus from M. woodsholei Dollfus, 1969, the only other known species, are a much smaller

ratio of pars bulbosa to pars vaginalis (1: 1.3 versus 1: 2.1), approximately twice as many testes per

segment (av. 780 versus 3W), and reversed order of hook sizes 2(2') and 3(3') for the two species.

The armature of M. woodsholei is completely described for the first time. As in M. antarcticus, it

consists of a unique poeciloacanthous type consisting of three double chainettes and is most similar

to members of the Lacistorhynchidae Guiart, 1927 and Callitetrarhynchinae Dollfus, 1942. Other

new morphological features described are an hermaphroditic sac, pre-formed uterine pore, lack of

true prebulbar organs, and origin of the retractor muscle in the anterior 113 of the bulb. The family

Mustelicolidae is considered justified, based on unique features of the armature, scolex and

genitalia, and is redefined accordingly.

KEY WORDS: Mustelicola, Cestoda, Trypanorhyncha, new species.

MUSTELICOLA ANTARCTICUS SP. NOY. (CESTODA: TRYPANORHYNCHA) FROM

AUSTRALIAN ELASMOBRANCHS, AND A REASSESSMENT OF THE FAMILY

MUSTELICOLIDAE DOLLFUS, 1969

by RONALD A. CAMPBELL? & [AN BeEVERIDGET

Summary

Camprett, R.A, & Brvexinee, 1, 098%) Mustelicola eniarericus sp, noy, (Cestoda: Trypanarhyneha) trom

Austialian elasnvobranclys, and a reassessment of the Fainily Mustelivalidae Dollfus, 1969. Trans, R. Soc.

S Anse. U2 J, 153-161, 30 November, 1988.

Mustelicola antarctious sp, nov, is described from adult wornts in the spiral valve of Musrelus antarcncous

(Guenther) collected in coastal waters off Bicheno, ‘lasmania, Characters differentiating Af. avttarcticns

from MM. woodsholet Dolltus, 1969, the only oiher known species, are a much smaller ratio of pars bulbosa

fo pars vaginalis (4) 1,3 versus 1) 2.1), approximately wice ay many lestes per segment (av. 780 versus 300),

and reversed ortler of hook sizes 2(2’).and 3(3') for the two species, The armature of Af. weodsholei is

completely described for the first time. As in M. anlarcticus, it consists of a unique poeciloacanthous type

consisting of three double chainettes and is most similar to members of the Lacistorhyachidae Guiart,

1927 and CalliteWarhynchinae Dollfus, 1942. Giher new morphological features d¢suribed are an herm-

aphraditi¢ sac, pre-formed uterine pore, latk of true prebWibar organs, uid origin of the retractor muscle

in the anterior 1/3 of the bulb. The family Mustelicolidae is considered jystificd, based on unique features

of the armature, scolex and genitalia, and is redefined accordingly.

Key Worps: Mustelicola, Cesunda, Trypanarhyncha, new species.

Introduction

Dollfus (1969) erected the faintly Mustelicolidae

fer a single trypanorhynch found in the spiral valve

of Mustelus canis (Mitchill, 1815) caught in Atlantic

coastal waters near Woods Hole, Massachusetts.

Dollfus considered the armature of Mustelicala

woodshalei to be of the atypical heteroacanthous

type though.a complete description of rhe tentacular

armature and reproductive system was not provided,

Schmidt (1986) revised the systemiaticy of the

cestodes and considered Mustelicoliday to be a

synonym of Eutetrarhyochidae Guiart, 1927,

making the genus Mustelicofa Dollfus, 1969 a

synonym of Purdechristianella Dollfus, 1946, The

precise position of the species within

Purachristianela was not specified. Schmidt’s

proposed synonymy of an atypical heteroacanth

(Mustelicola) with a typical heteroacanth

(Purachristianelle) prompted a re-examination of

M, woodsholei (o determine the exact nature of its

armature and anatomy, Attempts to find additional

speciments of Af, woodsholei have been fruitless, but

a second species, described herein, was recently

collected from Mustelus antaretieus (Guenther,

1870) off (he coast of Tasmania. In this paper the

uescription of the type species is corrected and

expanded, a new species is added ta the genus, the

~ Dept. of Biglogy, Southeastern Massachusetts

ee ie North Dartmouth, Massachusetis 02747,

Central Verernmry Laboratories, 2/0 Institute of Medical

wid Veterinary Selene, Fronte Road, Advluide, S. Aust

S000

—

taxonpmic position of the family re-assessed, and

the family Mustelicolidae redefined.

Materials and Methads

Miustelicolid cestodes were found in the spiral

valves af two of 73 sharks (Mustelus antarcticus)

examined off southern Australian coasts and were

fixed in hot 10% buffered formalin. Whole mount-

ed specimens were stained with Celestine blue, dehy-

drated in ethanol, cleared in clove oil and mounted

in balsam. ‘lentacles were dissected (ree, examaned

im glycerol, and niounted in glycerine jelly. Some

seymenis were embedded in paraffin, serially sec-

tioned at 8-10 pm, and stained with Haris’

hematoxylin and eosin, Dullfus’ holotype wis

examined from the Museum National d'Histoire

Naturelle, Paris. The specimen was remounted and

a tentacle removed and examined to provide precise

orientation of the armature. Drawings were made

wilh the sid of a drawing tube,

Measurements are given in micrometers, unless

otherwise stated, as the range followed by the mean

and the number of measurements (n) in parentheses,

Terminology for trypanorhynch morphology

follows Dollfus (1942), Specimens have been depas-

ited in the South Australian Museum (SAM).

Adelaide.

Mustelicola woodshalei Doallfus, 1969

FIGS 1-9

Description; Measurements of the holotype

specimen. Scolex and strobils acraspedoic. roral

lcngth 6.7 em, maximum width (O70. Seolex 4166

1S4 R.A. CAMPBELL & J, BEVERIDGE

PIGS 1-5. Auatomy of Mustelicola woodsholei. 1. Scolex, 2, Immature proglortid showing osmoregulatory ducts.

3, Male genital (crminalia. 4. Uterus and preformed utcrinc pore. 5. Detail of bulb showing origin of tentacle sheath

and insertion ol retractor muscle: Scale lines: 0.1 mm,

NEW ELASMOBRANCH CESTODE 155

long, subeylimdrical, slightly wider in region of

bulbs, Maximum width in region of bulbs, $60. Twa

bethridia, oval, elongate, 1520 long, maxinium

wilh 440, with broad indistinct rim, not indented

posteriorly. Pars vaginalis 2440 long, tcutacle

sheaths slightly sinuous, not coiled; each sheath

originating from bultr in prominent, symmetrical,

lateral sinuesily; circular muscle bands similar to

those associated with prebulbar organ present ar

posterior end of sheath, but thickening of lateral

wall of sheath and “nucleus absent; numerous

sland cells surround tentacle sheaths in pedunculus

scOlecas, Bulbs short, (200 long, 2801 drameter:

retractor muscle originates in anterior third of

bulbs, Pars post-bulbosa, 200 long; junction of

scolex and neck demarcated by a slight constriction,

Scolex ratio {pbo: py: pbulb} ft: 21: OB.

‘tentacles not fully extended, longest tentacle

1400; diameter 80 at base, 70 in mid-region; basal

swelling and distinct basal armature absent.

Armature heteromorphous, poeciloacanthaus.

Principal rows alternate, beginning on internal face;

hooks bullow, arranged in ascending half spiral rows

ol six hooks each (Fig. 7), Hooks I(1') ro 404") rose-

thorned shaped, with gently curved blades and long

bases of jinplantation; hooks 1(1') 24-30(28, n=1)

long, bases 18-28 (24, n-10), hetaht 13-18) hooks

2(2') slightly larger, blade 26-38 (33, n=10) long,

base 22-28 (24, n-10), height 17-24; hooks 343’)

30-34 (33, n=10) long, base 20-22 (21, 1=10), height

20-24; hooks 4(4') 26-30 (28, n-10) long, base

14-21) (17, n-10), height 17-20; hooks 5¢57)

spiniform, 14-22 (1% n=10} tong, base short, 8-14

(Ul, n=10), beight 10-14; hooks 6/6”) in randem or

“satellite” position with respecr to S(S"), spiniform,

blade 14-16 (15, n=10) long, base 6-8 (7, n=I(),

height 10-12. External surface of tentacle with 3

double chaineties, distinctly separated from

principal rows, paired clements in cach chainette

Upposite each row of principle hooks: chainette

elements subtriangulas, 16-22 (19, n=10) long, base

12-16 (14, n=10), height 10-13.

First evidence of segmentation 900 from scolex:

segments initially Much wider than Jong, becoming

almost as Jong as wide Mature segments

acraspedote, IW)0-2500 12240, n=5) by 3080-3470

(3260), 1-5); genital pores alternate irtegularly:

genital pore 45-50% of segment length from

anterior margin. Cirrus (7) sac elongate, 890-980

(930, n—4) by 20X}-260 (220, n=4), cirrus unarmed,

sinuous When fetiacted; proximal cirrus surrounded

hy a few layers of gland cells; internal seminal vesich

absent; external seminal vesicle elongate, diminutive,

will single surroundite layer of cells; vas deferens

passes medially, ovils anteriorly then posteriorly to

ovanat isthtius. Tesies humerous, approximately

400 in minature segments, scattered through

medulla; testis diameter 40-50 (43, n=5). Vagina

a very thin tube, closely paralleling cirrus sac along

posterior mareii; course of vagina could nor be

traced 10 genital pore, Ovary bilobed in dersovenrral

view, Situated near posterior margin of segment,

lobes 350-450 (3%), n- 5) by 310-380 (350, n=5),

Mehlis' gland post-ovarian 280-300 (200, n = 5) by

330-400 (360, n=5), U-shaped; uterine duct covered

by dense mass of gland cells, passes anteriorly ta

join uterus about 150 anterior to ovarian isthmus;

wlerus thin-walled, saccular, extends to anterior

marein af seyment; preforined uterine pore present

near anterior end of urerus, Vitelline glands

Osmoaregulatory system complex, most clearly

visible in inimatute seoments; complex al 4-6 large

canals present at lateral murging of segments, canals

anastomose frequently; on dorsal and ventral

surfaces of scements are 10-12 narrower canals,

either straight or regularly sinuous which branch

and anastamose infrequently; three pairs of long-

tudinal canals visible in posterior end of scolex:

anterior commissures not visible.

Eggs ovoid, 43-55 (45, 1 =3) by 25-35 (28, n-3).

Hast and Locality: Mustelus canis (Mitchill, 1815),

at Woods Hole. Massachusetts, LS,A,

Miusiclicola antarcticus sp. aov.

FIGS 10-19

Deseription: Measurements of three fragmented

adult specimens. Scolex and strobila actaspedota,

strobilia up to 6 cm Tong; maximum width 4.1 ma.

Scolex 2720-2832 (n=2) long, subcylindrical,

Slightly distended in region of bulbs, maximum

width at bulbs. 792; scolex demarcated fram neck

bya slight constriction, Two bothiridia, broadly oval,

rim indistinct, slightly indented posteriorly, leneth

1000-1140 (n=4) by 980-1020 (n= 4). Pars vaginalis

1520-1640 (n=2), tapering into junction with balbs;

tentacle sheaths allehtly sinous; small eland cells

scattered in parenchyma of pedunculus scolecis.

Bulbs 1080-1240 by 240-320 in ciamerer; prebulbar

organs absent: retractor muscle originates near

anterior extremity of bulb; pars postbulbasa

extremely short, 80 long, Seolex separated From

strobila by slight constriction. Scolex ratio (pbo; py:

pbulb) 1:13: 9,

Armiture poeciloacanthous, with three chainertes

of paired hooks on internal face. Fully everted

tentacles 1.7 mm long; diameter 114 at base, 99 at

mid-tentacle, 4 at tip; basal armature and swelling

absent. Principal rows ajternaty, beginning on

internal lace, forming ascending ball spirals of six

huoks each, Hooks 11) rose-tharn shaped. with

sarply aheular blades and tune bases at

156 R. A. CAMPBELL & J, BEVERIDGE

Sowe- o

fs)

A SEAS

SPE Pr IA |

sar

DPSS

BND

;

t hos = = 4 =

‘a = > WES :

Se ~ D “ + 3

iat ' ‘ - = ~

Ke \ : nN

ice]

— =

PS SIS,

| \

aero OD a

;

a = RY

/ ( a

Sy 8

) Soo!

f \ ‘\

a \. / \

CS SS — : >

FIGS 6-9, Armature of Musteliculu woodshalei. 6, Internal tace, métabasal region, turned slightly toward antibothridial

face. 7. Antibothridial face, metabasal region, external face on left. 8. External face, metabasal region, showing

three double chainetles (C,-Ca). ¥. Hooks | 6 of principal row drawn to scale and chainette hook (c). Scale lines:

Figs 6-8, 0.1 mm; Fig 9, 0.01 mm.

NEW ELASMOBRANCH CESTODE 1s7

FIGS 10-15. Anatomy of Mustelicola anrarcticus sp, nov. 10, Scolex. 11. Hermaphroditic sac. 12. Female reproductive

system. 13. Fegs. 14 Mature proglottid, 15, Bulbous eversion of genital pore. Scale lines: Figs 10, 14, 0.5 mm:

Fig. 15, 0.3 mm; Figs H, 12, 01 mm; Fig. 13, 0.03 mm. GD, gland cells; MG, Mehlis* glands; OC, oovapt; OD,

Briss OV, ovary; SD, sperm duct; SR, seminal recepracte; 1/1, aterine duct; UT, uterus; VA, vagina: VD, vilelline

uct.

185 RK. A. CAMPBELI. & |. BEVERIDGOE

implantation, blades 33-36 (35, n=10) tong, height

15-19 (n=l); hooks 2(2) larger, blade length 39-42

(40, n=10), base 29-3) (30, n=10), heaght L3-21

(=10), Hooks 33) similar to 2(2°) but smaller;

blades 32-36 (34, n=10) long, baxe 23-26 (24,

n=10), height 15-28 (n=10); hooks 4(4’) only

shighcly curved, 27-30 (24, n=10} long, base length

17-18 (17, n=10), height 15-21 (n=10); hooks 5(5’)

analler, 21-22 (21, n=10) longs bases 14-16 (15,

n=10), height 13-13 (n=L0); hooks 6(6') in tandem

or “sarellite” posttian anterior to 5(5"), spiniform,

17-t8 (17. 1=10) long, hase 6-9 (8, n=10), height

10-|3 (n-10). Duernal surface of tentacle with three

double chaineties, distinctly separated [rom

principal rows, chainette elements subtriangutar,

22-25 (23, n-10) long, base 12-14 (13, 1=10), height

13-17 (n=30).

Number of segments about 200 (n=L). First

segments appear 1.7-2 mm pasterior (g scolex. All

segments wider than long, aceaspedote, enlarging

with age. Mature segments always wider than long,

900-3400 by 1560-S600, Gravid segments always

longer than wide, 108-1800 by 3900-420), Genital

pores marginal, irregularly alternating, equatorial,

located 50% of segment length (rom anterior mar-

gin. Testes medullary, subspherical, 42-76 by 38-49

{n=20), layered, occupying available space between

lungitudinal osmorceulatory canals and extremitics

of segment. Testes number about 741-803 (780),

n=3) per segment, Hermaphroditie sac 544-1160

(A96, n=50) by 176-352 (248), surrounded by weakly

developed layer of mvuscle fibres, Cirrus unarnied,

glandular, immediately dista! to ovoid internal

seminal vesicle. Vagina median, dilated to form

seminal receptacle umterio’ 10 ovarian isthmus, turns

laterally, lying parallel with posterior margin of

hermaphroditic sae and then enters sac; genital

sinus apens by @ single duct at genital pore.

Contraction of walls of hermaphraditi¢ sac forms

bulbous, sucker-like protuberance io which cirrus

andl vagina are brought close to the wurtace. External

seminal vesicle present. Vas deferens coiled, arches

toward midline, runs parallel with vagina posteriorly

toward ovary, Ovary posteromedial, bilobed in

dorsoventral view, crescen{-shaped, imiaximuin

dimensions 650-980 by 178-320, isthmus up to #4)

long. Mehlis' gland postovarian, shallow L-shaped,

maximum cimensions 112-120 by 156-288.

Vitellaria follicular, irregularly shaped, forming a

layer enclosing osmoregulatory canals and

reproductive organs, maximum dimensions of

follicles 56-64. Uterus median, thick-walled,

erinindling near anterior margin of segmetit,

voluminous in gravid scaments. Uterine pore near

distal extremity uf uterus. Eges oval, 38-49,5 (45,6,

W=ID) by 26.6-34.5 (30,4, n 10), thick-shelled, non-

operculate, wiembryonated.

Host und Lacalitys Mustelas aritareneys (Guenther,

1870) (type heet), olf Bicheny, Tasmania, call, BO,

Robertson.

Site in hose: Spiral valve.

Types: Holotype SAM ¥4104, ewo paratypes SANT

17875,

Etymology: The specific name is after that of its

host, AL. untarcticus. bollowing Article Way) of the

International Code of Zoological Nomenclature,

the generic name iy masuuline in gender.

Discussion

Dottfus (1969) described M4, weudshoter and

erected the genus Mustelicola and family

Mustelicolidac for it based on a single specimen.

Distinctive characters of the new genus were based

upon the armature, viz, Mustelicola is an atypical

heteroacanth with twice as many hooks in

longitudinal files of the external face as occur in

longitudinal tiles of the internal face (Dollfus 1969).

This diagnosis was never expanded. Schmidt (1986)

subsequently synonymised both the family and

eenus with the typical heteroacanth Parachrtsi-

ianeta in the Butetrarhynchidae.

Unforiunwely only a single specimen of MW.

woadsholgi exists and it is not satisfactory for the

complete description of the reprodue¢live system.

Hawever, some specimens Of the new species, AZ,

atitarericus described above, were gravid and clearly

provide these details. A generic definition can

therefore be derived front the combined characters

of the two species. The two species possess a

combination af characters not found together in

other teypanorhynch cestodes, foremost of which

is Ihe type of armature, Examination of rhe

armacure of the type species, 44. woudshole/, clearly

shows major discrepancies with the oviginal des-

cription (Dollfus 1969) and these must be addressed

because come af them have major consequences fur

its taxonomic position. In udddirton, four characters

differ substantially from the original description.

Firstly, a preformed uterine pore is presenr and

clearly visible as a mass of cells at the adteripr end

of the uterine anlagen in immature segments.

Secondly, an external seminal vesicle Is present,

Thirdly, the tentacle retractor muscle uriginates in

the anterior third of the bulbus not at the posteriac

end. Fourthly, a typical prebulbar orean is not

presence. Muscle clements surrounding che Organ of

the sheath are present in Afvstelicola bul it is not

comparable to the prebulbar organ of cutetrar-

Iynchids, [a the latter group, an enlarged projection

of the external surface of the tentacle sheath,

NEW ELASMOBRANCH CESTODE

nd -chainette

17. Bothridial face,

és, C,-C

‘TICUS SP, NOV. : met region, c

§ e@ht, 18. External face, metabasal region, showing 3 double chainett

i 19. Hooks !-6 of princi §

scale a

vy. 16. Internal face, abasal

of principal row drawn to same

le, 19. Hook

n; Fig 19, 0,03 mm,

of tentacle,

anturcricus §

al face is on ri

. Scale lines: Figs 16-18, 0.05 mi

of Mustelicola

clovk wise Lorsion

160 4, 4, CAMPRET |. & 1 BEVERIDGE

sometimes described a8 being nucleated and

supported by vircular bands of muscle runoing

around the tentacle sheath js. clearly visible (Dolifus

1942),

The most iinportant character of the gets, iy the

armature which is poecilvacanthous in form and

not that of an atypical heteroacanth or a typical

hereroacanth. Dolltus (1969) did not illustrate rhe

external surface of the tentacle armature fully, By

re-orienting the type specimen and examining an

isolated tentacle, a unique poeciloacanthows ar

rangement consisting of three double chainettes was

Clearly seen (Pigs 6-9) This same armature was seen

in specimens of the new species, AL. antarcricus,

described above. Wheli compared with the armature

of genera such as Locis/arhyachus and Callitetra-

rshynchus there isa remarkable constancy of hook

number. In both of these genera, each row contains

five major hooks. Hook 6, however, is small and

is situated slightly out of aligninent with the

principle row, Hooks 7 and 8, the so-called “satellite

hooks”, are arranged in tandem, much as the pairs

of hooks 9(9’) of the chainette. If the armature uf

Lacistorhynchys and Callitetrarhynchus were re-

arranged simply by displacing hook 5 so that it lay

in tandem with hook 6, and hooks 7 to 9 were of

the sameshape, then there would be six hooks per

principal row and three chdinettes formed, exactly

the armature present in Mustefico/a, Because of the

similarities oF hook number and disposiion we

believe that Mustelicola has close affinities to

fucistorhynchus and Cullitetrarhynchus; both

venera, of course, are poeciloacanths, A herm-

aphroditic duct is also present in Afiestelicota,

Lagistorhynchus and Caltitetrarhynchas,

Details of the reproductive system of Mustelicota

woodshalei could not be obtained because the single

specimen lacks lully developed segments. However,

the major organs can be sen and the vagina can

be traced in close parallel to the “cirrus sac” to a

point beyond its midlength where it appears to

unite Phe sac is surrounded by a coat of musele

‘thers anu 4 dilation ig apparent in the vas deferens

before it enters the sac, In Af, woodshkoles all the

mallire Segments have everted cirr) and herve the

details of the distal ducts cannot be derermined_ tt

probably pussesses a hermaphroditic sac. In the new

species, Ad. unlureficws, details of che “eireus sac”

cin he seen clearly. The vagina enters the Suc on

its posterior margin, and rhe unarmed vitrus resides

ina sinus cavity distal toan internal seminal vesicle,

A common duct less to the genital pure on the

scemnent marin, This arrangement js, therefore, a

hermaphroditic sae oot a cirrus sav. Contraction

of the muscular cut causes formation of a sucker-

like protuberance it which the sinus cavity is

brouglie to the surties.

Both M. woodsholei and M. antarcitcus possess

armatures of six hooks per principal row and three

chainettes, two bothridia, pars bothridialis longer

than pars bulbosa, lack prebulbar organs, possess

numerous gland cells in the pedunculus seotecis,

acraspedote segmenrs, uterine pores, sdecate uteri,

crescent-shaped uvyuries, and U-shaped shell glands,

M. antircticus may be distinguished from Av.

woodsholei by the following characters: scolex

proportions of pars bathridialis (o pars vaginalis

(1; 1,3 versus > 2.1); hooks 2129 ancl 3¢3°) differ in

form {abruptly curved in M. anttarclicus versus

gently curved in Mf. woodsholel) and size (hook

length 2(2’) markedly larger than 3(3°) in AG,

antarcuicus but equal to or slightly smaller in M4.

woodsholer, testis number (about 780 in Ad.

antarcrieus versus abour 300 in Mo woordshole);

internal seminal vesicle in ML ansereticus apparently

absent in M. woodshkolei,

We propose that the diaynoses of (he Family and

genus be emended te include these correectms and

distinctive characters that separate them front other

trypanorhynyhs as follows:

Mustelicalidae Dollfus, 1969, emended

Diagnosis Order Trypanerhyicha. Poeviloa-

cuilhous with multiple chainettes opposite principal

rows. Scolex woh two, well-separated sessile

bothridia witht free margins. Rhyncheal apparatus

well developed, True prebulbar organs abscnt.

Tentacles and bulbs relatively shurt, Segments

numerous, Genilal pores marginal, Testes numeraus,

intervascular, internal or external sensinal vesteles

present. Ovary posterior. Uterus saccular with

ventral pore, Vitellaria circumeortical. Adults

parasitic in spital valve of elasmobranchs. Type and

Only cenus=

Mustelicola, Dollfus, 1969 emended

faagaosis: Scotes acraspedote. Two borhredia pat-

cllifomm, trimmed, without posterior notch; noc

contiguous apically: Pars tothridialls longer Mian

pats bulbusa. Bulbs short. Pars postbulbosa very

short, Tentacle sheaths irregularly sinuous Ke-

tractor muscle orivinaltes i) anterior portion of bulb

Tentacles lick husal swelling. Armature consisting

of three double chainettes apposite hooks IL") uf

principal rows. Principal rows alternate. Strebila

anapulytic (2), segments acraspedore. Genital pores

Trrenularts alrernaus, Hermaphroditic sac presenl,

Cirus present, initennl seminal vesicle present;

NEW ELASMOBRANCH CESTODE 16L

external seminal vesicle present. Testes medullary,

surround ovary and available intervascular space.

Ovary bilobed in dorsoventral view, shell gland well

developed; uterus median, pore preformed. Vitelline

follicles form a sleeve enclosing all reproductive

organs. Eggs anoperculate. Osmoregulatory system

complex, anastomosing frequently.

Type species: Mustelicola woodsholei Dollfus, 1969.

Other species: M. antarcticus sp. nov,

Hosts: Spiral valves of triakid sharks.

Acknowledgments

Our thanks to Dr A. Petter, Laboratoire des Vers,

Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, for

loan of the type specimen.

This project was supported financially by the

Australian Biological Resources Study,

References

Doutrus, R. Ph. (1942) Etudes critiques sur les

fetrarhynques du Muséum de Paris. Arch. Mus, Natl.

Hist. Nat. Paris 19, 1-466.

—— (1969) Quelques espeéces de cestodes Tétrarhynques

de la cote Atlantique des Etats Unis, dont l'une n’était

pas connue a l’état adulte. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 26,

1037-1061.

Scumipt, G. D. (1986) “Handbook of Tapeworm

Identification.” (CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, Florida).

CHROMOSOME NUMBERS AND KARYOTYPES OF SOME AUSTRALIAN

STIGMODERINI (COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE)

BY JENNIFER A. GARDNER*

Summary

Karyotypes of eight species of Australian Stigmoderini are illustrated and compared. Stigmodera

(S.) goryi Gory & Laporte, S. (S.) porosa Carter, S. (Themognatha) donovani Gory & Laporte,

S. (T) heros Gehin, S. (T) tricolorata Waterhouse and S. (T.) viridicincta Waterhouse have a diploid

complement of 22; S. (T.) alternata Lumholtz and S. (7) nickerli Obenberger have 2n = 20. A

chromosome number of 2n = 22 is reported for 26 additional species. All Stigmoderini studied have

an Xy, sex-determining mechanism.

KEY WORDS: Coleoptera, Buprestidae, Stigmoderini, Chromosomes.

CHROMOSOME

NUMBERS AND KARYOTYPES OF SOME AUSTRALIAN

STIGMODERINI (COLEOPTERA: BUPRESTIDAE)

by JENNIFER A, GARDNER*

Summary

Gakpner,J, A. (1986) Chromosome aimbers and karyotypes of 4ome Australian Stigmoderini (Coleoptera:

Buprestidae), Trans. R, Soc. S, Aust, 992, 163-167, 30 November. 1988.

Karvotypes of cight species of Australian Sdgmederini are illustrated and compared Stignindera (8)

roryi Gory & Laporte, 5.8.) porosa Carter, 8. (Themognatha: danoveani Gory & Laparte, $8. (T) heras

Gehin, §. (7) triceleraia Waterhouse and S. (7) viridieineia Waterhouse have a diploid complement of

22, 8. (2) ehernate Lumholiz and S. (7) nickerli Ohenbereer have In = 20. A chromosome mimber of

2n 22 1s reported for 26 additional species, All Stigmoderini studied have an My, sex-determining

mechanism.

Key Worps: Coleoplera, Bupresiidas, Stigmodenai, Chromasonies.

Introduction

Coleopteran cytogenetics was pioneered by Ste-

vens in the first decade of the twentieth century,

and two species of buprestids, un-named spruce

borers, were among the earliest examined (Stevens

1906). Smith & Virkki (1978) listed 22 species of

buprestid, whose diploid chromosome number

ranged from 12-26,

The XYp association is one in which the y is very

small, approaching the lawer limit of visibility, The

X and y form a characteristic ring bivalent which

Stevens (1906) deseribed as a "parachute" in which

the X chromosome represents the parachute proper,

and the y represents the load. It is the commonest

system in Polyphaga, occurring in practically all

families, and Smith (1950) adapted the symbol XYp.

This siudy was undertaken as part of a revision

of the tribe Stigmoderini. The aim was to determine

if karyological characters could contribute to an

assessment Of the higher categories as delineated

on the basis of morphological characters.

Materials and Methods

Adult male specimens were dissected as soon as

possible after capture. Based on the technique of

Imai et al. (1977) the testes Were treated with a cold

hypotonic (1% sodium citrate solution) for 1h, then

0.005% w/v colchicine in hypotonic for 15 min

before fixation in 3:1 ethanol: acetic acid for 30 min.

The cells were spread and air-dried belore staining

with JO% Giemsa in Sdrensen buffer at pH 6.8 for

15 mins, Photomicrographs were taken on a Zeiss

Photomicroscope Model 11 at magnification 400x,

using a green filler and Agla-Gevaert Copex Pan

Rapid Tri 13 film. Chromosome preparations and

* Department of Zoolagy, University of Adelaide, G.P.O,

Box 498, Adelaide, S. Aust. SOOD.

Present address: Wa\te Agricultural Research Tnstitule

Universiry of Adelaide, Glen Osmond, S, Aust. 5064.

corresponding specimens are lodged in the South

Australian Museum, Adelaide,

Chromosome counts were obtained for the

following species: Stigmodera (Stigmodera)

cancellata (Donovan), 8. (S.J gorvi Gory & Laporte,

S. (S.) gratiasa Chevroiat, S. (S.) macularie

(Donovan), S (S) porosa Carter, S. (S.) roel

Saunders, S. (Themognatha) alternare Lumho}tz,

S. (T) barbiventris Carter, S. (T) bonveuloiri

Saunders, S. (7) chaleodera Thomson, S. (1)

chevrolatt Gehin, 8. (7) donovani Gory & Laporte,

S. (1) heros Gehin, S. (1) witchelli Hope, 8. (7)

niniszech( Saunders, S. (T.) niekerli Obenberger, S,

(7) parvicollis Saunders, S. (7) pubreollis

Waterhouse, S. (7)) regia Blackburn, S, (7)

tricolorata Waterhouse, 5. (7) vartabilis (Donovan),

8. (1) viridicincta Waterhouse, 8, (Castiarina)

adelaidae Hope, &. (C) argillacea Carter, S. (C)

cupreoflava Saunders, 8. (CJ decemmaculaia

(Kirby), &. (C) flavapicra (Boisduval), S.. (C) grata

Saunders, S. (C.) rufipennis (Kirby), S. (C)

sexplagiata Gory, §, (C) simulata Gory & Laporte,

§. (CG) subnorata Carter, §. (C.) subtincta Carter,

and S. (GQ) triramosa Thomson,

Between one and three karyotypes were made

from mitotic metaphase spreads of 17 Spevies, and

where more than one was made, there was good

agreement, to the nearest percentage, between the

relative total chromosome lengths (TCL) and arms,

as measured from the enlarged photographic prints,

Karyotypes are assigned formulae following Smith

(1965).

Results

Of the 34 species examined, S. nickerli and S.

allernata have 4 diploid complement of 20, the resi

have 2n = 22, All have an X¥p sex-determining

mechanisin (Figs 1, 2). Karyotypes of 17 species are

summanzed in Table 1, and eight of these are

illustrated in Fig, 3

164

Autosomes are predominantly metacentric, but

some of the karyotypes analysed have acrocentrics

eg. S. nickerli (autosome 9), S, viridicincta (auto-

somes 7 and 10), or submetacentrics eg. S.

tricolorata (autosome 10). Changes in arm ratio

may be due to pericentric inversion, changes in

heterochromatin, or reciprocal translocation (Imai

et al. 1977). Karyotype variations due to pericentric

inversions in congeners are known in many genera

of beetles (Yadav & Pillai 1979).

Of the eight species whose karyotypes are

illustrated, six (S. porosa, S. nickerli, S. tricolorata,

S. goryi, S. alternata, and S. donovani) have an

autosomal pair with a nucleolar organizer region

(NOR) (Figs 3a, b, d, e, g, h). When present, it is

usually on autosome 8 or one of the adjacent

chromosomes which are often so close in length that

it is difficult to order them exactly. The position

of the NOR is either pro-centric on the long arm

as in S. porosa, or subterminal as in S. nickerli and

S, alternata. (n the latter cases, the distal ends of

the arms form satellites.

J. A. GARDNER

Fig. 1, Late male meiotic metaphase I of Stigmodera (S.)

gratiosa, arrow indicates Xy,, bivalent.

In §. nickerli and S, alternata, autosome 1 is

approximately twice the length of autosome 2, and

represents about 22-23% TCL (Table 1). In the

other Stigmoderini, autosome | yaries from 1-1.5

x length of autosome 2 and represents only 12-15%

TABLE 1. Karyology of 17 species of Stigmoaderini. A = autosomes; superscripts m, sm, sa, a, represent metacentric,

submetacentric, subacrocentric and acrocentric respectively; S,M, L = small, medium and large size of X chromosome

relative to autosomes; Al% =

length of autosome 1 expressed as a Yo TCL; NOR = autosome number on which

NOR occurs, where several autosomes are the same length so that the exact order cannot be determined, the number

is given as a group; — indicates that no NOR was discerned.

Taxon

Stigmodera (Stigmodera)

cancellata 10 A™

goryi 10 A™

gratiosa 10 A

macularia 1OA

porosa 10 A™

roei 10 A"

S. (Themognatha)

alternata 9

barbiventris 10 A™

chevrolati 7

donovan 1A

heros io A"

mitchelli 9

nickerli 8

regia 9

tricolorata 9

A™

eariabilis 8

A”

Viridicincta 8

Formula x Al% NOR

x™y, S 17 ~

xy, 8 13 7-8

Xy, S 13 =

xy, L 18 ak

xy, L 18 7-8

xy, L 16 _

AMY, S 22 8

X"Y5 5 15 —

3A™ + XM, S 13 —_

xy, $ 14 6-8

xy, L 15 —

1A® + Xy, S) 12 =

1A® + xy, S 23 8

TA® act Xy, M 12 _

1A 4 X*y, S 13 7-8

2A + X*y, S 13 71-9

2A*® + X¥y S 15 —

BUPRESTID KARYOTYPES |

Fig. 2. Male merone metaphase {1 of Srigmodera regia (A) 10 A + y; (B) 10 + X.

TCL S&S. (Themognatha), or 13-18% TCL Stig-

modera (Sensu stricto).

The most distinctive difference between species

is the relative size of the X chromosome (see Table

1). In some species e.g. §. porosa and S. heros, the

X approaches the largest autosome in length, but

in most it is one of the smallest, In the majority

of species the arms of X are unequal, often

markedly so, and the X is heterochromatic as

indicated by both the differential staining and its

diphasic form. A chromosome appears diphasic

when the euchromatic arms condense earlier and

the split between their chromatids becomes clearly

visible, whereas the condensation of the hetero-

chromatic arms proceeds more slowly and the

chromatids remain jointly coiled for a longer time

(Smith & Virrkj 1978).

Discussion

The study of 34 species of Stigmoderini indicates

generic stability of chromosome number. The

limited data on other buprestids support this eg.

the four species of Agrilus studied by Smith (1949,

1953) have 20 or 22; the three species of Dicerca

reported bave 20 (Smith 1953), and two species of

Sternocera have 26 (Asana ef al, 1942).

The differences in chromosome number of S, /7))

nickerli and S. (T.) alternata, with 2n = 20 may be

due to Robertsonian rearrangements. Centric fusion

or fission are suggested when there is a change in

the number of chromosomes, but not in the total

number of major chromosome arms (the

fundamental number). The centric fusion of two

acrocentric autosomes such as 7 and 10 of S.

virideineta could have given rise to a karyotype such

as §. alternata with nine metacentric autosomal

pairs. The fused chromosomes would approximate

in size the large relative length of chromosome 1.

On the other hand, translocations have played

an important role in the karyotype evolution of

beetles (Virkki 1984). The large size of autosome

1 in S, nickerli and S, alternata (22% TCL) may

have evolved from a karyotype similar to the other

Stigmodera by translocation of one of the smaller

autosomes (6-9% TCL) on to autosome |

(12-18%), followed by a pericentric inversion which

resulted in the new autosome | reverting to a

metacentric.

The preponderance of species with 2n = 20 +

XYp in Stigmoderini suggests that 22 chromosomes

may be the ancestral condition of the tribe, with

the complements of S. nickerli and S, alternate

being apomorphic.

The Xyp sex-determining mechanism has been

recorded in ten of the 2! species of Buprestidae

reported by Smith & Virkki (1978), the others had

XY, Xy, neo-XY or XO, Crowson (1981) maintained

that it is the most primitive condition, and is

suspected to have been a feature of the ancestors

of the Endopterygota at the beginning of the

Permian period, although this question is still under

166 J. A. GARDNER

>) Rf AR RX VE AN AK AAG A

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Xy

CPU RCH RL TL UE G3HE a

>) (aca Qe ee eee

(PE ACM A

e RK XI KY fa NB Sk ERE AK Bea

F {] TX UK SR MK AR ax ax TR RAY:

¢ ( (1 CF CU UR ER ima

HAR URN AR OCR NC aaa

5pm

Fig. 3. Male karyotypes derived from mitotic metaphase plates. (A) Stigmodera porosa; (B) S, tricolorata; (C) S.

viridicincta; (D) S. danovani; (E) S. goryi; (F) S. heros; (G) S, nickerli; (H) S. alternata. Arrows indicate NORs,

all karyotypes are at the same scale.

debate. Opinions about the mechanism of pairing It is probable that the variation in relative size

Xp and yp have oscillated between nucleolar and — of the X chromosome is due to the duplication or

chiasmate modes and there is now evidence for both deletion of constitutive heterochromatin which

associations (Virkki 1984), could occur without deleterious effects. Structural

BUPRESTIN KARYGTYPES 167

alterations such as translocations also may have

been responsible for some of the variation ohserved.

Variations in the X chromosome do not correspond

to species groups formed on the basis of other

characters (Gardner 1986!).

Crowson (1981) asserted that chromosomal

features of Coleoptera do not provide very reliable

characteristics of taxa at higher levels, though he

noted Lwo exceptions: superfamily Cantharoidea in

which all 25 species studied have an XO sex-

determining mechanism; and superfamily

Curculionoidea In which the karyotypes of all

species studied are derived from a basic ten

autosomal pairs, not nine Blackman (1980) in his

study of 180 species of Aphidae expressed a similar

opinion, although he found that in ecneral, chro-

mosome data corroborate peheric concepts since

there is a clear tendency for the chromosome

number to be stable ar chis level, and chat differences

in chromosome numbers sometimes agree with

recognized subgeneric groupings

Yadav & Pillai (1979) in their study of phylo-

fenetic relationships of genera and subfamilies of

Scarabaeidae, placed considerable importance on

chromosome number which they found varies from

nh = 6-11, with 150 of the [94 species having the

modal number ofn = 10. They considered the wo

tribes Adorrhinyptiini and Adoretini to be closely

related because they both have 2n — 22. However,

the occurrence of 2n = 221n two genera rom other

subfamilies, Georrupes and Dynemepus, not

considered taxonomically close on other grounds

was considered to be parallelism,

My exploratory chromosome studies of Stig-

moderiai support the general observation of generi

stability in chromesome number and suggest that

GARDNER, J. A. (1986) Revision of the higher categories

of Stigmioderini (Coleoptera: Buprestidac) Ph.D,

Thesis, University of Adelaide, Unpwil.

karyology may he useful in delimiting species

groups, §. sickerfiand § alternate which both have

20 chromosomes are morphologically very similar.

The use of C-banding techniques when more

maternal becomes available could provide insights

into the relationships between the complements of

20 and 22, the evolution of the acrocentrics, and

the evolution of the X chromosome:

Coleopteran cytogenctics is still in its infancy

because of the small size of the chromosomes and

associated problems of obtaining high quality

karyotypes, 50 perhaps il 1s too catly to assess its

use in systematics, Uniformity of many of the gross

chromosomal features supports the naturalness of

Srigmoderini a8 a group, but gives less scope for

elucidating relationships within the wibe. More

detailed karyological analyses in the futuré may

provide valuable phylogenetic information, and be

useful at the level of species eroup.

Acknowledgments.

This work was supported by.a Commonwealth

Postgraduate Award and an Australlan Mijseurn

Trust Postgraduate Award, and undertaken in the

Department cf Zoology, University of Adelaide

For the provision of fresh specimens [ am in-

debied to Mr A, Sundholm, Mrs N. Cawthorne, and

Mr M. Hanlon, all of Sydney.

For theiy constructive commeris on an earlier

draft of this manuscript ] thank Dr M. Mahony,

South Australian Museum, Dr D. Hayman, Depart-

ment of Genetics, and Dr M. Davies, Department

of Zoology, University of Adelaide,

Tam grateful to Dr S, Barker for his support and

supervision, Dr G. Browning fur instruction in

Karyological techniques, arid Mr P. Kempster for

assistance in preparing the plates. I especially. thank

my husband, Doug, for his constant encouragement

and for accompanying me on collecting trips across

the continent in search of live material.

References

ASANA, J. J, MARINO, Sid Nugama, H. (1942) A chro-

mosamal survey of some Indian insects. 1V; On the sex

chromasomes cf same species of beetles (Coleoptera),

Cytalagia 12, 187-205.

BiackMan, R. L. (L980) Chroniosomie numbers in the

ARBITER, and their taxonomic significance. Syst, Ent.

5, 7-25,

Crowson, R. A. (1981) “The biolagy of Coleoptera".

(Academic Press, Londen),

Imaal, H. T., Crozier, R. H. & Tayior, R. W. (1977)

Karyotype evolution in. Australian ants. Chromosoma

(Berl) 3, 341-393.

Surth, & G, (1949) Evolutionary changes in the sex

chromosomes of Coleoptera, 1, Wood Borers of the

genus Agrilus. Kvolution 3, 344-357,

es sy Aals cyto-taxonomy of Coleoplers. Cen. Ene.

—— (1953) Chromosome numbers of Colcoptora.

Heredity J, 31-38.

—— {1965} Cytological species-separation in Asiatic

Exvehomus (Coleaptera: Coceinellidae), Cart. £ Genet.

Cyto), 1, 363-373,

-—- & VIRKKC, N. (1978) “Animal cytogenetics, Yot. 3;

Insects 5 Coleoptera", (Gebruder Borntraeger, Berlin).

Stevens, N, M, (1904) Stuclics in spermatogenesis Ll.

Carnegie Inst, Wash. Publ. 46, 33-74.

ViRKKI, N, (1984) Chromosomes. J Sharma, A. K. and

Sharma, A. (Eds) “Chromosomes in evolution af

eukaryotic groups” 1, 41-76 (CRC Press, Boca Raton,

Flonda).

Yabay, £5. & Piitar, RK. K. (1979) Evolution of karyo

types and phylogenetic relations in Scarahacidae. Zoal,

Anz 202, 1S-i1h,

A NEW SPECIES OF NOTOPLAX (MOLLUSCA: POLYPLACOPHORA:

ACANTHOCHITONIDAE), FROM NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA

BY K. L. GOWLETT-HOLMES*

Summary

A new species, Notoplax lancemilnei sp. nov., is described from deep water off central New South

Wales, Australia. It most closely resembles N. speciosa Adams but is distinguished from it by the

larger, more irregular tegmentum pustules, ridges filling in part of the insertion plate grooves, and

by its colour. The new species was trawled by the F.R.V. "Kapala" in 400-500 m of water.

KEY WORDS: Chiton, Polyplacophora, Acanthochitonidae, New South Wales, Australia,

Notoptax, new species

A NEW SPECIES OF NOTOPLAX (MOLLUSCA: POLYPLACOPHORA:

ACANTHOCHITONIDAE), FROM NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA

by K. L. GOWLETT-HOLMES*

Summary

GOWLETT HOLMES, K. L.

(1985) A new species of Notoplax (Mollusca: Polyplacophora:

Acanthocithonidae), from New South Wales, Australia, Trans. R. So, S. Aust. 112, 169-173, 30 November,

L988.

A new species, Notepliax Jancemilnej sp, nov.,.is described [rom deep water aff central New South Wales,

Australia. It most closely resembles N, speciosa Adams but is distinguished from it by the larger, More

irregular tezmentum ptistules, ridges filling in part of the insertion plate grooves, and by its colour. The

new species was lrawled by the PR, “Kapala” in 400-300 m of water.

Key Woros: Chiton, Polyplacophora, Acanthochitonidae, New South Wales, Australia, Nofoplax,

new species

Introduction

The shallow Water chiton fauna of eastern

Australia is relatively well known (Iredale & Hull

1927), but few collections of chitons have been made

in waters over 50 m in depth. During recent

experimental fishing operations in the continental

shelf waters of eastern Australia by the ARN,

“Kapala”, a number of chitons belonging to the

genus Notoplax were collected. Most of these

proved to he specimens of Notoplax mayi (Ashby,

1922), but three specimens could not be assigned

to any known species of Notoplax and were

recognised as belonging to an undescribed species

of the genus. This new species is described here.

Materials and Methods

The material reported here is deposired in the

Australian Museum, Sydivey (AM) and the South

Australian Museum, Adelaide (SAM), It was

trawled by the F.R.V. “Kapala” during experimental

fishing operations. All material is preserved in 2%

formaldehyde/propylene glycol solution. Ag all

specimens are curled, length measurements are

along the curved surface, and width measurements

aré maximum width, A linear measurement is also

given for the holotype. As the radula of the

holotype disintegrated during preparation, the

radula was removed from one of the paratypes

(SAM D18436) for examination under the scanning

electron microscope (SEM) using the method of

Bande! (1984), Colour descriptions are trom spirit

specimens and follow Kormerup & Wanscher (1978),

Notoptax Jancemilnei sp. nov.

FIGS 1-3,

Holotype: AM C151130, partially disarticulated, in

spirtt 107 ~ 37.45 mm (39,7 mm linear}, trawled

* South Australian Museum, Narth Terrace, Adelaide, S.

Aust. 5000,

by F-RV. “Kapala" at 439 m depth, off Wollongong,

N.SW,, Aust., (34°21-19'S, 151°23-25'B), collected

by K. Graham, 13.%11,1978.

Paratypes; SAM Di8436, one complete specimen

(radula removed), in spirit 79 «29.35 mm, with

same collection data as holotype AM Ci4899s,

complete specimen in spirit, 133 = 39.35 mm,

trawled by FRY. “Kapala” at 503-452 m depth, off

Sydney, N.SW., Aust., (34°18-23'S, 151°26-23'B),

collected by K. Graham, $.xi1.1983.

Diagnosis: Large chiton to about 100 mm,

Carinated; low elevation; valves small in relation

to girdle (Figs JA-D). Tegmentum white; about

30-35% of articulamentum; jugum smooth, about

1/12 width of tegmentum; pustules irregular, “U"-

shaped, rounded to almost rectangular.

Articulamentum white, slit formula $/1/5, with

ridges filling in part of slit grooves. Girdle very

fleshy, completely encroaching between valves;

colour pinkish white, made up of a brownish red

base colour with dense clear spicules: small white

sutural tufts (Fig. 2A).

Description of Holotype: Tegmentum of anterior

valve (Fig, 3A) with five slightly raised radial ribs;

seulptured with random pustules, very small, not

coalescing, mainly “U"-shaped near apex, becoming

larger and irregularly rounded in shape towards

outer edge of tegmientum, with very large, irregular

pustules on ribs, Slits 5, very short, about 1/10

width of insertion plate, in broad, shallow grooves

for 1/4-1/3 width of insertion plate, grooves then

filed in with prominent ridge to edge of

tegmentum,

Median valves (Fig. 3B, D) beaked, anterior edge

slightly concave; jugum smooth, narrow, abour 1/12

width of tegmentum, toothed near beak. Lateral

and pleural areas separated by low diagonal rib;

both areas sculptured with random pustules,

pustules very small, mainly “U-shaped near beak,

becoming larger and irregularly rounded to almast

rectangular toward oufer edge of tegmentum,

K. L. GOWLETT-HOLMES

Fig 1. Notoplax lancemilnei sp . nov. paratype (AM C148995), A. lateral view, x 1.5; B. dorsal view, x 1.8; C. anterior

view, x 1.6; D posterior view, x 1.6.

NEW SPECLES OF NUTOPLAX 17

pustules usually Girger on rib. Tegmentum with

Aumerous random acstheres on and in between

pustules (Fig. 2B). Slut 1, short, about 1/6 width

of insertion plate, in broad, shallow groove 3/4-4/5

width of insertion plate, groove bordered by distinct

ridges which merge (6 form a broad ridge filling

in the groove ta edge of tegmentumy slit, groove and

ridge angled sharply posieriorly agmss insertion

plate.

Posterior valve (Fig, 3C, E, F) tegmentuat longer

than wide; jugum smooth, narrow, weakly toothed

near mucro. Abternucronal area sculptured with

random, irregular “U-shaped to almost rectangular

pustules, very small near mucro, becoming larger

towards outer edge of teymentum. Mucro granulose,

in posterior |/4 of tegmentum; postmucronal area

slightly convex, steep, sculptured like antemuctonal

area With four ribs of larger, irregular, rounded

pustules, Slits 5, shon, 15-14 width of insertion

plate, in deep groeves 4 to-almost whole width of

insertion plate, grooves bordered by distinct ridges

which merge to form ridges like on median valves

to edge of tegmmentum,

Cilrdle large, very fleshy, completely encroaching

between valves, densely covered with numerous

clear, long (15-3 mm), thin (90-100 ym), very

slightly curved, sharp-tipped spicules, Sutural tufts

small, with many clear, straight, sharp-tipped

spicules (1-2.5 mm long, 70.100 pm wide}.

Ctenidia numerous, merobranchial, abanal, 33 on

right side and 36 on Iefi, tapering large to small

anteriorly.

The radula distntegrated during preparation but

examinatwon of the fragments showed u ro be

identical to the radula extracted from [he paratype

(SAM DI8436).

Etymology; Named for Mr K, Lance Milne

(1915-) who, as arr avid collector of chitons from

many parts oF the world, has made sipniticant

contributions to the collections of SAM, In

particulary, his Jarge, diverse collection of chitons

in spirit forms the basis of SAM’s present significant

spirit collection of chitons. He also published

several papers on chitons, including descriptions of

several new species from eastern Australia. His

continuing enthusiasm and support for work on

chitons in Australia is greatly appreciated.

Additional Characters fram Paratypes: Radula

(Fig, 2C,D) with central teeth narrower basally, with

wider, asymmetrical, concave heads: first lateral

teeth forming large folds around central eth, one

on higher side of central tooth longer than other;

major lateral teeth elongate, narrower basally, with

wider tricuspidate heads, central cusp about twice

qs long as Outer cusps, central cusp with a shallow

dorsal groove either side of median ridge.

Foriaion; Orher than sninor variations in

sculpture, the two paratypes are like che holotype

and vary only in the number of gills, The smaller

paratype has a similar number of pills to the

holotype, with 34 ctenidia on right and 33 cenicia

on left sides, As the other paratype is much larger

than the holotype, it has more gills. with 44 crenidia

on right and 39 ctenidia ou left sides, In this larger

paratype, the anterigr jueum of the posterior valve

breaks up into a series of large “U'"-shaped pustules,

This feature may be related to wrealer maturity of

the specimen.

Kange, Central New South Wales, Australia,

Hoabitar. Unknown. Trawled in 400-500 m depeh.

Comparisan with other species: N. lancemiinei

was compared with other species of Wafeplax in

the collections of AM, SAM, the Museums of

Victoria, Melbourne (NMV), che Western

Australian Museum, Perth (WAM) and the

Tasmanian Museum and Art Gallery, Hobart (TM).

Ic most closely resembles WV. speciosa (I, Adams,

1861) but can be distinguished by the characters

given in Table 1, Both N. lancemilnei and N-

speciosa can be distinguished from other Australian

species of Noreplax by their large size and the large,

fleshy girdle with long, fine spicules completely

encroaching between the relatively small valves.

Remarks; An unusual feature of N. lancemilnes

is the asymmetrical heads of the central teeth of

the radula, This feature has not been recorded lor

any other member of the family, However. | have

found it also in two other species, both of uncertain

systematic status, in the family. A more detailed

examination of radulae of species in the

Acanthochitonidae is required to establish (he extent

of this unusual feature, The only other record of

central radula teeth with asymmetric heads in the

Polyplacophora is for Choriplax grayi (H, Adams

& Angas, 1864), the sole member of the family

Choriplacidae (Gowlett-Holmes 1987),

The current restricted range of N. lancemilnet is

a reflection of the few collections of chitons that

have been made in deep warer in Australian seas

This range undoubtedly will be extended when

further collections of chitons from deep water are

made.

Acknowledgments

I thank Ms S. Morris, British Museum (Natural

History), London, for the loan of a synitype of N,

speciosa (BMNH 1951.2.7.2/1), and the follawing

curators and collection managers for providitiy dala

and specimens from collections held by their

respective institutions: Mr 1. Lach GAM), Ms 8.

Boyd (NMV), Dr EF, E. Wells (WAM) and Ms E.

Turner (TM). The photographs were taken by Mrs

J, Forrest and Ms A. Renfrey (SEM). Mr I, K. Grant

172 kK. L. GOWLETT-HOLMES

Fig. 2. Notoplax lancemilnei sp. noy. A. girdle and sutural tuft, paratype, scale bar = 1 mm (AM C148995); B. detail

of tegmentum surface showing aesthetes, holotype, scale bar = 100 wm (AM C151130); C. radula, paratype, scale

bar = 100 ym (SAM D18436); D. radula, detail of major lateral teeth heads, paratype, scale bar = 100u4m (SAM

D18436).

is thanked for his assistance with Fig. 3. Dr D. by a grant from the Keith Sutherland Award,

Duckhouse and Ms T. Cochran are thanked for administered by AM.

critical comments. This work was supported in part

References

BANDEL, K. (1984) The radulae of Caribbean and other IREDALE, T. & Hutt, A. F. B, (1927) “A Monograph of

Mesogastropoda and Neogastropoda Zool. Verhandl. the Australian Loricates (Phylum Mollusca-Order

Leiden 214, 1-188, pls 1-22. Loricata)”. (Royal Zoological Society of New South

Gow ett-Hotmes, K. L. (1987) The suborder Wales, Sydney).

Choriplacina Starobogatov & Sirenko, 1975 with a Kornerurp, A & WawmscHer, J. H. (1978) “Methuen

redescription of Choriplax grayi (H. Adams & Angas, Handbook of Colour. 3rd Edition.” (Eyre Methuen,

1864) (Mollusca: Polyplacophora). Trans. R, Sec. 8. London.)

Aust. 111(2), 105-110.

NEW SPECIES OF NOTOPLAX

Fig. 3. Notoplax lancemilnei sp. nov. holotype (AM-C151130), A. anterior valve; B. median valve; C, posterior valve;

D. median valve (posterior profile); E, posterior valve (posterior profile); F. posterior valve (lateral profile); scale

bar = 2 mm,

TABLE lL. Distinguishing characters af Nowoplax speciosa and N. lancemilnei sp, rav;

Character

aac. > > —x—xX—Xs—a—s!!:_—“_- Or

Tegmentum colour

Girdle colour

Sutural tuft colour

Pustules on valves

Insertion plate slit length

(width insertion plate)

1, anterior valve

2. median valves

Insertion plate slit

grooves

Ctenidia each side

Radula

1. central teeth

2. major lateral teeth

N. speciosa

coloured

orange, ureyish to

brownish orange

orange

small

1/5-1/4

about 1/3

grooves to edge of

tegmentum, no ridges

26-32.

head symmetrical

central cusp of head

about 4 times as long

as ouler cusps

N. lancemilnei

witite a

pinkish white

white

larger, more irregular

1/12

about 1/6

grooves partly to edge

of tegmentum, ridges rest

of way

33-44

head asymmetrical

central cusp of head

abour twice as long as

ouler vusps

ACCUMULATION OF PERIPHYTON ON ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATA NEAR

SEWAGE SLUDGE OUTFALLS AT GLENELG AND PORT ADELAIDE,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY V. P. NEVERAUSKAS

Summary

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

ACCUMULATION OF PERIPHYTON ON ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATA NEAR SEWAGE

SLUDGE OUTFALLS AT GLENELG AND PORT ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

Two sewage sludge outfalls are sited in seagrass meadows

offshore from the metropolitan area of Adelaide (Fig. 1).

There has been extensive loss of the seagrasses Posidonia

(P sinuosa and P. angustifolia} and Amphibolis (A.

antarctica and A. griffithii) around the Port Adelaide

sludge outfall! and plants in partially-affected areas have

an increased abundance of epiphytes on their leaves?,

SGUTH AUSTRALIA

ADELAIDE

biomass reflected the pattern of seagrass loss. Lesser

effects have apparently occurred on seagrasses near the

Glenelg sludge outfall?.

The aim of this study was to compare increases in

epiphyte biomass at sites adjacent to the two outfalls.

Underwater observations indicated that in late summer

extensive mats of algae developed throughout the denuded

ESITE No.1

SITE No.2

GLENELG

SITE No.3: STW

A SLUDGE OUTFALL

GO EFFLUENT OUTFALL

<3 STORMWATER DISCHARGE

6 9

—

+ i

SCALE IN KILOMETRES

Fig. 1. Study area and sites for deployment of artificial substrata.

Increased growth of epiphytes in response to increased

nutrient levels in the water is an apparent cause of the

decline of seagrass beds* and studies with artificial

substrata indicated thal the rate of increase of epiphyte

area at Port Adelaide. There were signs of increased algal

growth near Glenelg but no such mats developed,

suggesting that seagrass epiphyte growth may have been

reduced in that area.

The accuniulstion of epiphyte bieniass referred was

Periphyton®) on dilificial subsirala was assessed at three

sites (Fig. 1). Site | was $00m N of the Port Adelaide

sludge ourtall, covncidenr with a site used ina previous

study? Site 3 was in a Similar position relative to the

Glenelg sludge outfall and site 2 was 4 control site situated.

in apparently healthy scagrass meadows, The depth of

wuler al cach site was approximately 13m.

150 substrata were deployed at each site in the early part

of November 1986 2th sub-sumpled at monthly intervals

for five months. The dimensions of the substrata, their

mode of deployment, collection and processing, have been

described previously*.

The design of this study was simple and it was essentially

unreplicated, tf did nor Measure Within-site Vaciabilily nor

was up ustimute roade of variabilily between different

cantrol sites, Underwater observations. did, however,

indicate Whaceach site was homogenvous over a large area

and site [ has been surveyed in detail!, Periphyton

biomass accumulation has heen studied at a number of

differen) contre! syes? and tiese factors suongly

supvested thaLahe above sources af Variiinn were small

compared co the variation between experimental anc

vonlral stiles,

Se ei hl 4

2 gbatiee o «

ae 2 abemees —— ow

u OI

“ €

DAY wt. 00 am SUBSTRATE ge

EXAOSUNE TIME Devs!

Flip, 2. Changes tn dry weight a! substrata due in

accumulation ef petlplivton. Meay « S.D. (n = 5),

Changes in the dry wowhrt of substrara, as a result of

the accumulation of periphylon, er slowe in Fig 2 AC

all times the mean value of dry weightian substrata at Ure

cuulrol site was below thar recorded st rhe experimental

sites. There were ulsu differences between tliese Iwo sites,

Periphyton biomass accumulalion was initially greater al

Site 3, adjavent. to the Glenelg outfall than at site |,

adjacent 10 the Port Adelaide outfall, After this inital

result however, periphyton biomass accumulalion was

eieater and reached higher values at site 1.

Detailed studies at the Port Adelaide outfall have

indicated that (he most important lactor Uelerpiging ie

distribution of sludge is tidal flow. [is oriented in a north-

south direcrion and as a result sludge is mostly confined

10 a narrow Strip north and south of the outfall, The

40 ia) on Int ~ Wo oy

Cilenelg outfall has nat been smidicd in [he same detail

but itis Known that the tidal flow ts similurio that at Port

Adelaide both in strengtl: und direction”.

The two experimental sites used in this study wore

directly north of each outfall and therctare influenced by

Sludge. a ref saurce ol soluble nitrogen and plusphorus,

The composnon and concentration uf these nutrients in

sludge discharged Jrom both Sewage Treatment Works

(STW) are similar. Jischarge rates are similar but au

average Of 480kL of sludge is daily distharged Fron

Glenelg STW and 280kL. from Port Adelaide STW. [t is

likely that the initial differences between the substrata at

the corresponding sites Was a reflection of a greater

availability of nutrients at Glenelg,

Lhe differences between the biomass estiinates on the

substrala at the experimental sites during February and

March were associated with distinct changes at the twa

sites, At Port Adelaide large algae developed! and, allached

Lo residual sedurass fibre with its associated mussel beds.

formed extensive mats up to 50cm in depth, They were

sinilsrly prominent on the artificial substrata, Though

it remained visibly grearer than at the contral site, sueh

growth of algae did not occur around the Glenelg outfall

and no large algae developed on the substrata deployed

there.

During the last month of exposure, periphyton biomass

ar Porr Adelante decreased sharply. The early part of

HULU iy Oflu associated with the first significant storms

Of the year and large algae are physically removed from

ihe area®. Other observations suggested thal a similar

mechanisis may have affecred the accumulation of

periphyton biamass at Glenely. When the substrata were

sampled divers noted that at Port Adelaide the water

column was calm except tor tidal movendent, At Glenelg

a distinct swell was consistently present and this resulted

in vigarDus mation of the substrata over anc above their

response to [he tide,

While no dats are available lo compare the incident wave

cnerey al ihe twa sites, Ihe gradient of the sewtloon the

Presence of offshore shoals ac Point Malcolm and the

presones of erosion cusps within seayrss beds south of

Poine Malcolm indicare thar wave energy differs benween

the two sites”, Ibis possible thai he initially higher

peciphyion biomass.at the Glenelg site was a reflection

of a Faster growth rate of algae. As they became larges,

however, they were yemoved by wave action and this

resulted in smaller increases in periphyton biomass relative

10. the Port Adelaide site.

In Western Austtalia he species of periphyton tound

on ariilicial subsb ate were simnilac to the epiphytes found

on the leaves of Posidenta austratis", Weis likely that the

same applies itv the piescund otudy, The respome of

periplyloi ke iiceedsed levels OF nutrients, from sludge,

may therefore indicare rhe response of scagtass ¢plpliytes.

under the same conditions.

The cesully presented above suggest that seagrasses in

the vicinity of the CHenele, ouifall do nar agoumulate

quantitics of epiphytes ay lary ay (hose which wccumulied

of Seagrasses around the Port Adelaide ourfall. Individual

species of epiphytes may: grow faster ar the former sic

but duc to prearer Incident wave enemy (hey we removed

Hort Ute scape before hey blankel and burden the leaves

ay chev do at Port Adelaide,

Thus one of the major factors known to cause the

decline of seagrass beds seems to be reduced at the Glenelg

sludge outfall. This may help to account for the apparently

large differences between the extent of seagrass decline

’Neverauskas, V. P. (1985) Proc, 1985 Australasian Conf.

,Coastal Ocean Eng, 1. 193-202.

-Neverauskas, V. P. (1987) Mar, Pollut, Bull. 18, 158-164,

‘Cambridge, M. L., Chiffings, A. W., Brittan, C,

Moore, L. & McComb, A, J. (1986) Aquat. Bot, 24,

269-285.

4Neverauskas, V. P. (1987) Est. Coastal Shelf Sci. 25,

509-517.

5Caldwell Connell Engineers. (1981) Sludge disposal

from Glenelg STW appendix A. Biological survey at

outlet. Rept. to Engineering & Water Supply Depi,

Adelaide. Unpubl,

Silberstein, K., Chiffings, A. W. & McComb, A. J.

(1986) Aquat. Bot. 24, 355-371.

177

around this outfall’ and the extent of decline around the

Port Adelaide sludge outfall!.

I thank Steve Slack and Debra Mooney for their capable

assistance.

?Neverauskas, V. P, (1987) Port Adelaide Sewage

Treatment Works sludge outfall. Effect of discharge on

the adjacent marine environment. Final Report.

Engineering & Water Supply Dept, Adelaide. Rept.

87/28.

’Petrusevies, P. M. (1982) Offshore water studies —

metropolitan Adelaide. Coastal Management Branch,

Dept Environment & Planning, Adelaide. Rept. 82/9.

Shepherd, S. A. & Sprigg, R. C. (1976) In C. R.

Twidale, M. J. Tyler & B. P. Webb (Eds) “Natural History

of the Adelaide Region”, (R. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide).

‘0Silberstein, K. (1985) The effect of epiphytes on

seagrasses in Cockburn Sound. Dept Conservation &

Environment, Perth. Bulletin. 135.

Vv. P. NEVERAUSKAS, State Water Laboratory, Engineering & Water Supply Dept, Private Mail Bag,

Salisbury, S, Aust. 5108.

BRIEF COMMUNICATICIN

USE OF GROWTH RINGS TO DETERMINE AGE IN THE FRESHWATER TORTOISE

CHELODINA LONGICOLLIS; A CAUTIONARY NOTE

Counts of laminar growth rings visible on the shells of

freshwater North American testudines have been used uo

determine the ages of individual animals'*_. Periods of

brumation coincide with the formation of deep grooves

in the epidermis of the shel’, which are initially hidden

in he interlaniinal seams, They become visible aher spring

growth commences forming. a ridge delineating the outer

edge of the groove! and the spreading of the interlaminal

seams brings the groaves to the surface. kor north

temperate species®, a “year” can be added to the kiown

age af individwtals When (he eroove becomes visible, ‘The

grooves are genetally known ss growth rings’,

Coincident with the recammencentent of growth ix the

formation at a new, deeper layer of epidermis*. The

margin of the plale of scute epidermis taid down jh the

previous season's growth is delineated by the grawth ring

formed at the coimihencement of the next season of

growth, Old layers of epidermis may he retained in

terrestrial testudines®, but in aquatic species they are

usually shed, either as single * or, eventitally, multiple

layers”. Repeated seute eedysis causes growth rings to

weaken then. disappear’,

Temporary cessation of erowth during the growing

season may result in the formation in many species of

shallow grooves, termed minor erawth rings*?, Hawever,

minor growth rings ace not associared with the formation

of a new layer of epidermis”.

Measurement of the gaps between major growth rings,

topether with counts of their number, have been used to

determine growth rates in any particular past year™!2,

Determination of age based on counts of growth rings

tequires That the lumber of prowth tings produced by a

sample of the population over along period of time be

koown, and the onty satisfactory means of determtining

the periodicity of growth ring production is (6. conduct

caplive-recapture exercises’ over several years. Usually, it

is assumed that only one major growth ring is formed

annually". and for north temperate species this

TABLE 1,

STATION SPECIES

assumption is; normally valid®. However, the assumption

that only one growth ring is [ormed annually by 4

particular population of 4 species is not always verified,

The technique of aging has been applied to an

‘Australian species (Pseudemydura umbrina) by

Burludge") The technique of determining growth tares

has been applied to Chelodina longicollis by Parmenter"

and, with reservations, (a C. fongicallis and two other

Australian species (Emydura macquarii and Chelodina

expansa) by Chessman'.

Although verification of the annual deposition of

growth rings was undertaken by Burbidge for the

populations of Psewdemydura umobrina’’, were is no

clear indication that the periodicity of deposition of

growth rings has been determined for populations of C.

longicollis. Parmenter developed an argument inferring

that annual deposition of growth rings occurred in C

fongicollis, because the species ceases to grow during

annual brumation; but there Is tq evidence that he verified

the conclusion ?, Chessman initially assumed that growth

rings were deposited annually, but on comparison with

growth rates, a9 determined on recapture, he concluded

that the deposition of growth tings may be affected by

growth rate, and thay major ‘prowih rings may have been

confised with minor rings

Parmenter extrapolated fram conclusions relevant to

North American species to Cl longicollis; but North

Aunetican winters are longer and more severe than winters

in the range of C. /ovgécol/is. Daily mean temperatures

in the mid west of the United States differ by about 25°C

between mid Summer and mid Winter!* (Table 1), but the

difference is only 14°C at Armidale, near where Parmenter

undertook his field study, The activity periad for

Kinosternon flavescens in Oklahonia is 140 days’, but

Parmenter reports an activity period of 250-280 disys for

¢. longicollis, Without marked annual temperarure

cycles the growth of turtle scales is often even and free

of interruptions'?. On the coastal plain of the Gulf af

Daily Mean Temperatures at Meteorological Stations Near Testudine Study Sites

Tulsa, Ok, UVS.A.

Lansing. Mi, U.S.A.

Omaha, Ne, USA,

Sr Louis, Mi, USA,

Kunsas City, Ks, U.S.A,

Phoenix, Az, U.S.A.

New Orleans, La, U.S.A

Colon, Panama

Armidale, N.S.W., Ausi.

Melbourne, Vic., Aust.

Mildura, Vic., Aust.

Adelaide, S.A., Aust.

CArysemys pictat

Chelydra serpentinu®

Psendemys svripia’

Terrapene ornata®

Psendemys scripts?

Chelodina longicollis"

Cheladina langicollis'*

Chelodina longicollis'*

Cheludina longivollis'’

Kinasternon flayescers=

Kimosternon sonoriense

Sterrothaerus curinatus

DAILY MEAN °C =TEMPERATURE*C

MID-SUMMER MIDWINTER

27.9 2.9

IL -4.3

25.8 =§.4

26.4 a4

27.2 -,7

a 32.9 10.4

28.4 13.2

26.4 24.8

20,4 6

19.9 9.6

24.1 19.1

22.6 11,2

Source of climatic data — “World Survey of Climiatology™, cd. H,E. Landsberg, Elsevier, Amsterdam, (0975),

References are (oO sues undertakem in vicinity of stations.

tRIL

Mexico, the Winters are more aivderate, with daily mean

temperature differences of about 13'C!*, On the plain the

growih rings were not as clear in Sternotherus odaratus

as they were in emydid turtles, and the need for caution

in their unverified use for age determinution was

emphasised’”.

Further south the climate ts ever’ more equable (‘Table

1). Colon, Panama, is close to the study sites of Moll &

Leuter®, yer they noted the formation of up to four major

growth rings ina single year in a population of Pseudemys

seripia, Their conclusion was that growth rings are not

necessarily related (Qo temperalure variation, and aliribuled

the formation of growth rings in this population to

cessation of feeding during periads of flooding’.

Cagle stated thal any interruption in the supply of food

or in the ability of the individual to utilise food may result

inthe formation ofa major growrh ring’, and Chessman

reports minimal stomach conteils in ofe population of

€. fangtcollis in both mid-Summer and Winter'*,

perhaps because Duplnio carinuta was the major food

item in that population, and PB carinala can exbibil 4

Uiphasie annual population eycle”7, Hence the potential

exists for multiple annual production of growth rings by

populations of C. longicollis,

Here 1 record the number of growth rings formed in

an individual C. /oagicollis over 4 known period. The

animal was caught twice during a study ono population

of this species which inhabjts a niunaber of ponels on the

campus of Roseworthy Agricultural Colluge, 45 kin Nof

Adelaide.

The animal was firs{ captured on 29.Jan.80) It was

numbered using a pattern of drill holes in its niarginal

scutes, a technique which often leads to retention of old

epidermal layers after seute ccdysis. The drill) holes may

heal with a hollow bridge of epidermal tisste connecting

‘Gibbons, J. W, (1968) Capea 1968, 260-268.

?Mahmonud, [. ¥. (1969) Suvthwest, Nat. 1431-66.

[Sehwartz, K, B., Schwartz. C. W. & Kiester, A, BR, (1984)

Missouri Dept Conserv, Terrestrial Series, (2, 1-29.

‘Sexton, O. 4. (1959) Ecoloey 40, 716-718,

“Graham, ‘T. E, (1979) Life history tochmques, tn

Harless, M. & Morlock, H. (Rds) “lurtles: perspectives

and research”, (Wiley, New York) é

‘Christiansen, J. TL. & Burken, KR. R. ¢1979)

Herpetolopion 38, 201-266.

TCngle, FR. (1946) Amer Middl. Nat. 36, 68S 729

Lepler, lM. (1960) Cini. Kars, Mus. Nat. tfesi. Publ.

ii, 527 669,

YMoll, EO. & Lepler, J. Mi, (1971) Aud. Las Angeles Cu.

Mus. Nat Hist Set. V1, 1-103,

MHutse, Ay CS (1976) 2 Merperol, WW, 341-348.

“Branch. W. (1984), daphibia-Reptitia $, 43-53.

Burbitye, A. A, (1967). “The biology of south-western

Fiz. 1 Anteiror view of nuchal and first right marginal

seutes. A, growth ring on bare seule; B, wrowtl) ring on

relained epidermal layer; €, drill Irate.

the shed epidermal layers of the upper and lower surfaces

of the scutes, like a rivet through (te bole The subsequent

capture was on 25.Nov.83.

Six old epidermal layers were retained on both of the

drilled scutes, bul none on the oily scutes, There was

one visible growth ting on each of the retained epidermal

layers, which corresponded precisely with the margin of

the next mosr supecticial retained epidermal layer (Fig.

1), Four yrowth rings which occurred towards the

periphery of the bare scutes, corresponded in position Lo

the tow! largest growth cings imprinted om the deeper

retained epidermal layers on the drilled scutes. Tr was

concluded that these growth rings were of the major Lype-

Six had been produced in three vears and ten months.

I contend that it is not valid to assume that one growth

Ting is produced in each year by C /onpicollis: yerificatian

of the periodicity of production of growth rings is required

for anv population under study.

Australian tortoises”. Ph.D. Thesis, Univernty of Western

Australia, Unpubl,

OpPurmenter, Cd (1976) “The naniral history of ihe

Australian treshwarer turtle Chelodina longicollis Shay

(Testudinata, Chelidag)”. Ph. Thesis. University of

New England, Unpubt.

“Chessman, B. C. (1978) “Ecological studies of

freshwater turtles in south-eastern Australia", Ph.D.

Thesis, Monash University, Unpubl,

“Burbidge, A. A. (1981) Aust. Wilds, Res: 8, 203-223.

'SLandsberp, H. E. (1971) “World survey of climatology”

(Elsevier, Aunsterdam), ;

!"Tinkle, BD. W. (1958) Tulane Seve, Zool. 6, 1-56.

“Stont, & (1987), Aust Wildl Res. 14, §59-567.

Carr, A, F (1952) “Handbook of turtles: the turtles wf

the United States, Canada and Baja Calilonnia’, (Cornell

tiniv. Press, New York).

“Mitchell, HD. & Williams, W. 1. (1982) dust. 0 Mar

Frowhw, Res. 33, 989-997,

PHILLIP STOTT, Dept. of Zoology, University of Adelaide, GY'O Box 498, Adelaide, S.Aust 3001 and

Koseworthy Agricultural College.

THE EUROPEAN SHORE CARB, CARCINUS MAENAS IN THE CORONG -

A POTENTIAL THREAT TO LOCAL FISHERIES

BY W. ZEIDLER

Summary

BRIEF COMMUNICATION

THE EUROPEAN SHORE CRAB, CARCINUS MAENAS IN THE COORONG — A

POTENTIAL THREAT TO LOCAL FISHERIES

This note is to record the presence of the European

Shore Crab, Carcinus maenas (Linn.) (Fig. 1), in the

Coorong, South Australia, and to alert agencies lo the

Fig. 1, Carvinus maenas ot trom West Lakes, S.A.

damaping effects it may have on the ecology of the

Coorong and hence the local fishing industry, should it

become established.

Ten years ago! | recorded the occurrence of C. muenas

in S. Aust, and gave a brief overview of its introduction

to Australia and current distribution. In 8. Aust. the

species had been restricted to the Outer Harbour, West

Lakes and Port River areas, habitats it typically favours.

It was thought at the time that natural spread was unlikely

due to unsuitable habitats along the coast, but that

introduction via ships’ fouling and ballast was possible.

Such an introduction appears to have occurred at Hallett

Cove, 25 km 8. of Adelaide, by shipping activities at the

nearby oil refinery at Port Stanvac*. The recent capture

of a specimen from the Coorong, however, if it is not an

isolated specimen, suggests that the dispersal abilities of

the crab have been underestimated,

The Coorong specimen, a mature male (carapace 85 mm

« 635 mm), was caught by a local fisherman, Mr W, Ayres,

in December 1986 near “Ti Tree” about 6 km SE, of

Tauwitchere Barrage, (ubout 20 km from the Murray River

mouth). If was mottled light brown-grey in colour but

specimens are usually grey-green. Just how this specimen

gZOt into the Coorong is open to conjecture. Most shipping

activities in the Coorong are recreational and passage

through the mouth is considered hazardous. and is rarely

altempted, Similarly, it is doubtful that a relatively poor

swimmer such as C. #@enas? (or its larvae) could have

entered the Coorong by this route on ils own. The

possibility that is is an isolated case of human transfer

cannot be ruled out but seems unlikely,

While C. maenas may not be of much ecological

significance in the already degraded Port Adelaide-Outer

Harbour area!, its potential effect on the fauna of the

Coorong is unknown. Its aggressive, non-selective

predatory habits have already made it a pest in New

England, U.S.A., where it is the major predator of the

commercially harvested soft-shell clam, Mya arenari

Linn.*. It has also recently been recorded from South

Africa where laboratory experiments have shown that it

is a potential predator of a number of local molluscs and

perhaps other marine life. Should C. maenas become

established in the Coorong it may become a major

predator of a variety of local fauna and could alter (he

ecology of the Coorong Lagoon sufficiently to threaten

the local fishing industry,